Home

Yamaha AW4416 Stereo System User Manual

1. DELAY gt REV Delay and reverb effects in series Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time EB GAIN 99 to 99 eee he Bae normal phase feedback minus values DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY REV 0 100 oS delayed reverb balance 0 delayed reverb 100 MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds DIST gt DELAY Distortion and delay effects in series Parameter Range DST1 DST2 OVD1 Description DST TYPE OVD2 CRUNCH Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume TONE 10 to 10 Tone control N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time EB GAIN 99 to 99 eee normal phase feedback minus values HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DLY BAL 0 100 Distortion and delay balance 0 distortion 1
2. CD RW drive cover This covers the CD RW drive option installation bay Note For details on installing a CD RW drive refer to page 5 50 Awvutns operation Guide The user interface of the AW4416 This chapter explains the various parts of the AW4416 s user interface and basic operation of the AW4416 Display The display in the top panel shows the following information QOZ TRACK _ 2987 See ere cl TR View 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo TR View Screen name This is the name of the currently selected screen 2 Page name channel The information shown here will depend on the screen It will show either the name of the page selected within the screen or the channel that is selected for operation 3 Song name This is the name of the currently selected song 4 Current location This shows the current time location of the song and the remaining available recording time The units of the current location can be selected from the follow ing Refer to Reference Guide SONG screen Setting page e Time display SECOND Hours minutes seconds milliseconds e Time code display TIME CODE Hours minutes seconds frames sub frames e Measure display MEASURE Measures beats ticks 1 960th of a quarter note AI UUIG Oper
3. _ REW FF STOP PLAY REC REW rewind key This key rewinds the current location By repeatedly pressing this key you can switch between 8x and 16x speeds To stop rewind press the STOP key or the PLAY key FF fast forward key This key fast forwards the current location By repeatedly pressing this key you can switch between 8x and 16x speeds To stop fast forward press the STOP key or the PLAY key 44 AWU Operation Guide Chapter2 Parts and their functions STOP key This key interrupts playback recording rewind or fast forward and stops the recorder PLAY key If the recorder is stopped pressing this key will begin playback if the key is pressed by itself or record if the key is pressed with the REC key If this key is pressed during rewind or fast forward the respective operation will be inter rupted and normal speed playback will begin If this key is pressed during recording recording will be interrupted and playback will continue punch out REC key If the recorder is stopped pressing this key holding down the PLAY key will begin recording Pressing this key during playback will begin recording from that point punch in SAMPLING PAD section In this section you can operate the built in sampler a E
4. No Program Name No Program Name 001 A Dr BD CMP 021 BrassSection CMP 002 A Dr BD EXP 022 Syn Pad CMP 003 A Dr BD GAT 023 SamplingPerc CPS 004 A Dr BD CPH 024 Sampling BD CMP 005 A Dr SN CMP 025 Sampling SN CMP 006 A Dr SN EXP 026 Hip Comp CPS 007 A Dr SN GAT 027 Solo Vocal CMP 008 A Dr SN CPS 028 Solo Vocal2 CMP 009 A Dr Tom EXP 029 Chorus CMP 010 A Dr OverTop CPS 030 Compander H CPH 011 E B finger CMP 031 Compander S CPS 012 E B slap CMP 032 Click Erase EXP 013 Syn Bass CMP 033 Announcer CPH 014 Piano1 CMP 034 Easy Gate GAT 015 Piano2 CMP 035 BGM Ducking DUK 016 E Guitar CMP 036 Limiter1 CPS 017 A Guitar CMP 037 Limiter2 CMP 018 Strings1 CMP 038 Total Comp1 CMP 019 Strings2 CMP 039 Total Comp2 CMP 020 Strings3 CMP 040 Total Comp3 CMP Appendix 24 AI ULUNE Reference Guide Appendix Compressor Output Level 10 Compression ratio 2 1 Kned hard t i i ii kee e Ar ae 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 oO 10 20 Input Level A compressor provides a form of automatic level control By attenuating high levels thus effectively reducing the dynamic range the compressor makes it much easier to control signals and set appropriate fader levels Reducing the dynamic range also means that recording levels can be set higher therefore improving the signal t
5. 2 0 202 e ee eee 71 Pre Pst IN Pre Pst MONI pages eessssessessessseesse 73 Make on off and pre post settings for the effect sends 73 HOME screen ccc ccc ccc ccc ccc cccce Z5 T 247 RUD Pate 6 i545 ieena ed ene hes a a 4 wow sn 75 Monitor the input level of the input channels 75 MONITOR pag s i 3256040000 pees tie ee ttasaew gan wera 76 Monitor the input levels of the monitor channels 76 DUS PAGS sirene deett REESE Eee ee eee ede a waa 77 Monitor the output levels of buses 1 8 AUX buses 1 8 77 Omni ST p ge biatoscsodcddensNseeectssadedibegaieaeen 78 Monitor the output levels of the OMNI OUT jacks and Stereo Q PUT fu eed hee ee Ena E R EREA a eee ei 78 Option page sssesssesesssrseseceesoeeresereess 79 Monitor the output level of option I O cards 0 79 AI ULUNE Reference Guide v SONG QUICK REC MASTER ING cD PLAY SET UP FILE UTILI TY VIEW MIDI PAN ROUTE EQ ATT GRP DYN DLY AUX1 AUX6 AUX7 EFF1 AUX8 EFF2 HOME SAMP PAD TRACK EDIT AUTO MIX SCENE Appendix Table of contents SAMP PAD screen 2 ccccccccccceee 80 Fron REN ADABC 505i 4io0 8ise oe RAAM ae won tn ONG wae ee 80 Assign a region to a sampling pad 0008 80 CD Import pate scurda Foe heh ee she Lae eee E ee ees 82 As
6. F1 TITLE EDIT key Use this to edit the name memory title of auto mix data saved in memory This is the same function as the TITLE EDIT button F2 RECALL key Recall the automix that is currently selected by the cursor in the list This is the same function as the RECALL button F3 STORE key Store the current automix data This is the same function as the STORE button 120 awune Reference Guide AUTOMIX screen Fader Edit page View fader events as a bar graph Function View a bar graph representation of the fader operation events recorded in the automix stour 00 00 00 000 Initial Data Key operation ee AUTO MIX key gt F3 Fader AUTOMIK 99S9S NEW SONG scene BG E Edit key 1 I e Repeatedly press the AUTO Oo i i i f MIX key until the screen shown 1 i2i 3 4 15 6 7 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ST OUT at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt AMIX button gt Fader Edit tab AUTOMIX TRANSPORT ABORT ose O Ge RET De Gsec STOP Screen functions Bar graph which the faders will return to their original val This area shows the fader position of each chan ues after fader editing is ended nel as a bar graph Use the keys of the MIXING FADER EDIT MODE LAYER section to select the channels that are displayed For the fader being edited both the AUTOMIX TRANSPORT
7. Rhythm machine Monitor AW4416 system MONITOR OUT Connect mics synthesizers or rhythm machines direct boxes or guitar bass preamps to the INPUT 1 2 XLR jacks or INPUT 1 8 phone jacks according to the type of their output connector When directly connecting instruments with a high output impedance such as passive type electric guitars or electric basses connect them to the INPUT 8 HI Z jack AI ULUNE Operation Guide 73 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 2 Turn on the power in the following order audio sources SCSI devices connected to the AW4416 gt the AW4416 gt monitor system The display of the AW4416 will show the opening screen and will then change to the TRACK screen TR View page TRACK 29989 tEn Sons 1 Jz a5 14 J5 JE qv J a9 BG 411 z 36 4 When the power of the AW4416 is turned on the song you were last operating will be loaded automatically A e Ifthe internal hard disk of the AW4416 has not been formatted a message of Format O K Y Enter N Any will appear instead of the above screen when the power is turned on e Ifa SCSI device is connected to the AW4416 and you turn on the power of the AW 4416 when the SCSI device is turned off it may not start up correctly If the SCSI device is turned on after the AW 4416 is turned on it will not function correctly
8. Xe It is possible for a single track or a single part to include multiple regions 152 Awun operation Guide Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations Naming a virtual track or region When you record something on a track the following default name will be assigned to that virtual track e Default virtual track name V Tr x y x track number y virtual track number e Default region name VTxy x track number y virtual track number A If multiple regions exist in the same track i e if you recorded the track in more than one stage all the default region names will be the same These track names and region names can be modified using the following proce dure g Naming a virtual track 1 In the RECORDER section press the EDIT key gt F1 key The EDIT screen TR Edit page will appear 2 Move the cursor to the TRACK menu and press the ENTER key The TRACK menu will show the available editing commands EDIT GGGGG_ NEW SONG TR EDIT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 Editing commands Y 13C NO RE 14 NO REC ISCU TRIS PieculTriS AVVUUIG Operation Guide 153 Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations 3 Move the cursor to the NAME menu and press the ENTER key Buttons to specify NAME menu options will appear EDIT GGGG_ NEW SONG TR EDIT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 Y 15C Tr15 1 16V Tr16 1 U Tr 1 1 V Tr 2 1 4 Move the cursor to the TRACK bu
9. A Scene number 00 contains a preset recall only scene that returns all mix parame ters to their default state For this reason it is not possible to store a scene into number 00 2 Press the SCENE MEMORY section STORE key The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the scene memory TITLE EDIT Initial Data PRESS 0K TO STORE SHIFT LOCK Lins unaoaoauaanaaa If STORE CONFIRMATION is turned OFF in the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTILITY key gt F2 key the scene will be stored directly to the specified scene number without displaying this confirmation popup window This is more conve nient if you will be repeatedly overwriting a scene onto the same scene number AVVUUIG Operation Guide 105 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 3 As desired assign a scene name of up to 16 characters For details on inputting characters refer to page 60 When you are finished move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The scene will be stored O Saving a song The current song will be saved automatically when you create a new song load an existing song or perform the shut down procedure However as a precaution against the power being accidentally turned off while you are working it is a good idea to save your song frequently and not just after completing the mix down A e When you save a song the scene memory contents and only the scene num
10. FADER MODE E HOME key When this key is on faders 1 16 will adjust the input levels of the channels selected in the MIXING LAYER section The HOME page will appear in the dis play showing meters to indicate the input output levels of each channel 2 AUX 1 AUX 6 keys When these keys are on faders 1 16 will adjust the send levels of the signals sent to AUX 1 6 from the channels selected in the MIXING LAYER section The AUX 1 AUX 6 pages will appear in the display allowing you to switch the pre or post setting for the signals sent from each channel to AUX 1 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 keys When these keys are on faders 1 16 will adjust the send levels of the signals sent to internal effects 1 2 from the channels selected in the MIXING LAYER section The AUX7 EFF1 screen or AUX8 EFF2 screen will appear in the display allowing you to switch the pre or post setting for the signals sent from each channel to internal effects 1 and 2 and to set the effect parameters 34 Awvuns operation Guide Chapter2 Parts and their functions MIXING LAYER section ie N m ULI MIXING LAYER 2 e INPUT INPUT RECORDER ig A 1 16 key 2 17 24 key 3 MONI key In this section you can sel
11. 1 An optional internal external CD RW drive is required O Mixer section O Professional quality audio with 32 bit internal processing The AW4416 carries on the technology made famous on the de facto standard for digital consoles the Yamaha 02R Internal processing is performed with 32 bit precision 54 bit precision for EQ to guarantee the highest possible audio quality O Up to 44 input channels and 20 buses rivaling even large consoles A total of 44 mixing inputs are provided with 8 analog inputs digital stereo input 16 maximum digital analog inputs via the OPTION I O slot in addition to 16 recorder monitor channels and 2 return channels Output buses total 20 with 8 group buses 8 AUX buses stereo bus and SOLO bus stereo With a bus configuration that rivals large consoles the AW4416 can handle a wide variety of applications O Four band EQ and dynamics processing on each channel Every input as well as the stereo output channel provides the same powerful four band full parametric EQ and dynamics processor as on the 02R The two return channels are excepted Each band of the EQ is fully adjustable in the range of 18 dB f 20 Hz 20 kHz Q 41 points The dynamics processor provides compressor gate ducking expander and compander functionality Key in and stereo link are also supported for precise control of the input signals O Two high quality multi effect processors are built in Two multi effect proc
12. 74 Aw operation Guide Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Creating a new song On the AW4416 all data mixer settings recorder settings audio data etc nec essary for reproducing a musical work are stored on the hard disk as a unit called a song In order to record you must begin by creating a new song Yip A new 44 1 kHz 16 bit song is created when the internal hard disk is formatted and will automatically be loaded the next time you turn on the power of the AW4416 If you wish to use this song the following procedure is not necessary 1 Press the SONG key gt F1 key The SONG screen Song List page will appear In this page you can create a new song and save load existing songs SONG gogoa NEW SONG _ _ _ EANA BE sone LISTI 00 00 00 000 J 128 8 47 4 S0NG LIST SELECTED SONG NANE gge00 NEW SONG a 2 Use the CURSOR lt p gt A keys to move the cursor to the NEW SONG button in the lower right of the screen and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you whether you wish to save the song you are now working on referred to as the current song COMF IRMAT LOM Wil Save Current Sona ARE YOO SURE 7 AW UUIG Operation Guide 75 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 3 4 Move the cursor to the YES button to save the current song or to the NO button if you do not wish to save it Then press the ENTER key The
13. AVVULNG Reference Guide 47 VIEW screen E Additional functions in the Library page In the Library page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following functions to the F1 F3 keys F1 TITLE EDIT key Use this to edit the name library title of the set tings saved in the channel library This is the same function as the TITLE EDIT button F2 RECALL key Recall the currently selected channel settings from the list This is the same function as the RECALL button F3 STORE key Store the current channel settings This is the same function as the STORE button To store channel settings in the library Procedure l Select the channel whose settings you wish to store and access the VIEW screen Library page Use the DATA JOG dial to select the library number in which you wish to store the settings Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the ENTER key The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to input a name Kp It is possible to store the settings directly without accessing the TITLE EDIT popup win dow To do so turn STORE CONFIRMATION off in the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTILITY key gt F2 key Input the library title For details on inputting characters refer to Operation Guide page 60 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The settings will be stored A When you
14. 2 185 About the sampling pads 00 c cece eee eee eeee 185 Assigning the pad outputs to channels 0 008 186 Assigning a region to a sampling pad 0 eee eee 187 Trimming a sample eee eet 4 we Wess ow aw awa eee eels 190 Naming a PAG css antics scoleaucetre waa ore Pe ane A 193 Erasing a pad sample and name 0000 eee eeeeee 194 Recording your performance on the sampling pads 196 Copying a pad performance 2 eee e eee ee ee eee 198 Erasing a pad performance 00 e cece eee ee ee eens 201 Chapter 13 Scene memory 2e 20 20 203 About scene memory cece cece ese ec ces eeeoes 203 Parameters included in a scene iia ssa tc kaos ha bene SAS Kew 203 About scene numbers 02st 4 fA ease hed a Yas ante ars hep 203 Storing a SCONE oie deg 254 wy wea win Voorn Ge T a S 204 Recalling a scene ccccs oud ened ad bom cee eee eae aes 206 Editing the name of a scene 2 cece ee eee eee eee 207 Protecting a sce sat Siete fhe atk aeons Seeds 208 Changing the order of scenes 0 eee ee cece reece 209 Using keys to store recall a scene 0 0 cece ee ee ee 211 St ring a SCONE aeaa AR E a Same ee a aR RRS 211 Recalling a Sce E sider erise ii tee eae bed Yd oth OS 212 Chapter 14 Automix 0 cece reer cere eves LID What IS autoniixt 25 04 ccctsuaut stan menena sE enact 213 Creating a new auto
15. Release ms Threshold dB Hard compander reduces the level Ratio 1 during the interval between the Attack ms words making the voice sound even Outgain dB Width dB Release ms Threshold dB A template for the gate program Range dB Attack ms Hold ms Decay ms Threshold dB Ducking background music for Range dB voiceovers typically keyed from the announcer s channel Attack ms Hold ms Decay ms Threshold dB A template for a limiter using the Ratio 1 soft compander program This program has a slow release Attack ms Outgain dB Width dB Release ms 8 4 25 0 0 24 180 ALN ULNE Reference Guide Appendix 33 Appendix No 037 038 039 040 Name Limiter2 Total Comp1 Total Comp2 Total Comp3 CMP CMP CMP CMP Type Compressor Compressor Compressor Compressor Parameter Value Threshold dB 0 Ratio 1 oo Attack ms 0 Outgain dB 0 0 Knee hard Release ms 319 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 60 Outgain dB 0 0 Knee 2 Release ms 1 12S Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 94 Outgain dB 2 5 Knee hard Release ms 447 Threshold dB 16 Ratio 1 6 Attack ms 11 Outgain dB 6 0 Knee
16. below A e This button will be valid only after you have used the TRACK CLIP button to register the import source track e The keys of the transport section will have no effect in the TR Import page Importing a track from an exist ing song Procedure 1 2 Access the EDIT screen TR Import page Move the cursor to the upper part of the display and use the DATA JOG dial to select the song from which a track will be imported Move the cursor to the LOAD button and press the ENTER key A confirmation popup window will appear Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The track information will be read from the selected song and the display will change as follows SOURCE TRACK paS U Tr 4 5 A ocssee Sooo Move the cursor to the SOURCE TRACK field and select the track number 1 16 and virtual track number 1 8 of the track that you wish to import Move the cursor to the TRACK CLIP but ton and press the ENTER key A confirmation popup window will appear Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key 1 1 4 AIA ULUNE Reference Guide 8 The track selected in the SOURCE TRACK field will be selected as the import source and the display will change as follows SOURCE TRACK Pa U Tr 4 5 DEST TRACK PVT W Tr 1 1 Recccted Sosed When you use the TRACK CLIP button to reg ister the import source track
17. 196 awun operation Guide Chapter1 2 Sampling pads 6 Pad tracks These tracks record the timing of the trigger events for each pad The time from while you press the pad until you release it is shown as a bar graph COPY ERASE menu This menu accesses commands for copying erasing previously recorded trigger events Move the cursor to the desired menu and press the ENTER key to access the list of commands Parameter value area In this area you can set the parameters required to execute the command Use the CURSOR keys and the ENTER key to switch the R column of the pad s you wish to record from O to SAMP PAD HETHER A La Ad L d d oo000000 onneeeee eeeeeee oooo0000 ASN ASN ASN ASN ASN ASN ASN ASN ASN ASN ASN A A A A A A A A B B B B B6 B6 B B A Trig List Start the recorder and strike the pads while listening to the playback of the audio tracks Trigger events will be recorded on the corresponding pad track When you are finished performing stop playback on the recorder You can also begin recording from the middle of the song e Immediately after recording you can press the UNDO key to cancel trigger event recording e SAMP PAD JHETHER TRIG List 00 00 16 951 J 120 0 4 4 eeeegeeee oooooooo El ASN ASN ASN ASN ASN ASN Aa A Ld Aad L L d oooocooo oooesaes DDDD Wabi ZZ2
18. 2 0dB 0 0dB 2 0dB Appendix Description Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to a synth bass This is used to make a piano sound brighter Emphasize the attack and low range of the piano sound by using a compressor Use for line recording an electric guitar or semi acoustic guitar to get a slightly hard sound Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound This is a variation on program 016 Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer This is a variation on program 018 Emphasizes the bright tones of an acoustic guitar This is a variation on program 020 You can also use it for the electric gut guitar AULAS Reference Guide Appendix 3 Appendix Parameter sad No Name Description LOW L MID H MID HIGH L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Corrects arpeggio Q 45 45 0 12 technique of an acoustic 022 A G Arpeggio 1 guitar F 223Hz 1 00kHz 4 00kHz 6 72kHz G 0 5dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 2 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF _ This is a variation on Q 7 45 program 022 023 A G Arpeggio 2 F 177Hz 354Hz 4 00kHz 4 23kHz G 0 0dB 5 5dB 0 0dB 4 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use with trumpets Q 28 2 0 7 7 trombones or sax With 024 Brass Section on
19. 6 GBL global If you move the cursor to the PRE button or the POST button and press the ENTER key the pre post setting of all channels in that page will be switched together Pre Pst IN AUX 99909 neu sone femme E WPUTI 00 00 00 000 Initial Data E Pre Pst MONI AUR 1 GGG_ NEW SONG _ Wal scene 2e_ _ wE Meo 00 00 00 0 Gahe Gate AUX PRE POST 3 i l 3j 45 M rioni r r 7 oes i i H 3 AVVULNG Reference Guide 67 AUX1 AUX6 screens E Additional functions in the Pre Pst IN Pre Pst MONI pages In the Pre Pst IN Pre Pst MONI pages you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following func tions to the F1 F2 keys HGROBAL POS e F1 GLOBAL PRE key Switch all channels in that page to pre fader This is the same function as the PRE button in the GBL area e F2 GLOBAL POST key Switch all channels in that page to post fader This is the same function as the POST button in the GBL area 68 Awuue Reference Guide AUX7 EFF1 and AUX8 EFF2 screens Eff Edit page Edit internal effects 1 2 Function Edit the parameters of the effect that is selected for internal effect 1 AUX7 EFF1 screen or external effect 2 AUX8 EFF2 Key operation e AUX 7 key AUX 8 gt Edit key e Repeatedly press the AUX 7 key or AUX 8 key until the desired screen appears F1 Eff Mouse oper
20. A The start point and end point cannot be deleted Yip For details on setting the various locate points or modifying a locate point refer to Opera tion Guide Chapter 6 Transport locate oper ations A Be aware that locate points or markers you delete cannot be recovered E Additional functions in the Mark Adj page In the Mark Adj page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional function to the F1 key e F1 REMAIN key The level meter counter and the counter area of the display will show the remaining time avail able for recording When you press the SHIFT key F1 REMAIN key once again the usual counter display will reappear vip The remaining time available for recording will depend on the number of tracks that are currently in record ready mode 98 Aw uULnG Reference Guide EDIT screen TR Edit page Edit tracks Function Assign a name to each track and edit audio data by tracks parts or regions Key operation e RECORDER EDIT key gt F1 TR Edit O key e Repeatedly press the RECORDER EDIT key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt RECORDER EDIT button gt TR Edit tab Screen functions 1 TRACK menu 2 PART menu 3 REGION menu Select one of the following three units of data that you wish to edit Track Edit the audio data of the entire currently se
21. O Digital I O card slot 1 OUTPUT 1 8 O Digital I O card slot 2 OUTPUT 1 8 BUS 1 BUS 8 Buses 1 8 DIR 1 DIR16 Input channel direct out 1 16 AUX 1 AUX 8 AUX buses 1 8 RDR 1 RDR16 Recorder direct out 1 16 ST L ST R L R channels of the stereo output channel Yip When selecting a signal for assignment to an output jack selections beginning with I such as I 18 or I M16 may be displayed in gray Selections beginning with I indicate insert out points of each channel The gray display indicates that this insert point is invalid For details on insert I O patching refer to page 140 AVVUUIG Operation Guide 137 Chapter8 Patching Patch library Patch settings that you make in the SETUP screen Patch IN page and Patch OUT page can be stored in the patch library as one of twenty patch programs The con tents of the patch library are saved on the internal hard disk as part of the song Here s how to use the patch library O Storing to the patch library Here s how to assign a name to your patch settings and store them in the patch library 1 Press the SETUP key gt F3 Patch Lib key The display will show the PATCH screen Patch Lib page The list in the lower part of the display shows the contents of the patch library e Ifthe Patch Lib tab is not assigned to the F3 key press the SHIFT key F1 key to switch the tabs and then press the F3 key
22. Transmitted with a device number of 7F when the STOP key is pressed Timing Clock Continue Active Sensing lt Reception gt If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE it will stop when this message is received if the device number matches or is 7F STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01111111 7F System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclu sive Destination 00 7E 7F all call Device ID Oddddddd dd Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mec sub id 00000001 01 Stop MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 4 13 2 MMC PLAY lt Reception gt If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE it will begin playback when this message is received if the device num ber matches or is 7F STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01111111 7F System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclu sive Destination 00 7E 7F all call Device ID Oddddddd dd Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mec sub id 00000010 02 Play MCS EOX 11110111 E7 End Of Exclusive 4 13 3 MMC DEFERRED PLAY lt Transmission gt Transmitted with device number 7F when the PLAY key is pressed lt Reception gt If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE it will begin playback when this message is received if the device num ber matches or is 7F STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01111111 7F System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclu sive Destination 00 7E 7F all call Device ID Oddddddd dd Command 00000110 06 Machin
23. operation Guide Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Mixdown In this section we will explain the procedure for creating a stereo mix of the sig nals recorded on tracks 1 16 applying internal effects and recording the stereo track on the hard disk Creating the mix balance of the tracks 1 Make sure that REC TRACK SELECT keys 1 16 are dark record ready mode is defeated Also make sure that the ON key is dark for all input channels 1 24 Xe If necessary the input signals from input channels 1 24 can be mixed down together with the signals of tracks 1 16 In this case turn on the ON keys of the input channels that you wish to use so that they are lit 2 Press the MONI key Monitor channels 1 16 will be selected as the mixing layer 3 Press the PAN key gt F3 key The PAN ROUTE screen Pan MONI page will appear allowing you to make pan settings and bus assignments for monitor channels 1 16 PAN ROUTE ee an oo ooo SCENE OO MOHI 1 l See BBB BHOeBo maa S688 oo a BE afalar ajajaa BGGGE a 7 BEBB BOGE m z m o m m o m z E m o m m azo E w P B0B gHpEHgE O seep 29 BEEBE GAGNE a y eeee 2 R 51 a ie ia ie E CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER 4 For monitor channels 1 16 turn the ST button on and the bus assign 1 8 buttons off With these settings all
24. 202 Awun operation Guide 3 Scene memory This chapter explains the scene memory function and how to use it About scene memory On the AW4416 settings such as the mix parameters of each channel external input output patching and effect 1 2 parameters can be assigned a name and stored in internal memory as a scene The memory area in which these scenes are stored is called scene memory Up to 96 scenes can be stored for a single song and can be recalled by operations of the AW4416 s keys or by the automix function All scenes stored in scene memory are saved on the hard disk as part of the song O Parameters included in a scene The following parameters are included in a scene Fader locations for all channels and buses input channels 1 24 recorder monitor channels 1 16 AUX send levels 1 8 effect returns 1 2 stereo ON key settings of all channels Attenuation settings of all channels Phrase settings of all channels EQ settings of all channels Mix parameters Pan settings of all channels Routing settings of all channels Fader group settings of all channels Pair settings of all channels Dynamics settings of all channels Delay settings of all channels Effect parameters Parameter settings of effects 1 2 Scene name settings Other Fader recall fade time settings Internal input output patching and insert settings g About s
25. Hours minutes seconds milliseconds e Time code display TIME CODE Hours minutes seconds frames sub frames e Measure display MEASURE Measures beats ticks 1 960th of a quarter note 4 Word clock This shows the source INT internal clock or EXT external clock of the clock according to which the AW4416 is operating and the frequency 44 1 k or 48 k This will indicate LOCK if the AW4416 is locked to the clock source and VARI if the vari pitch function Refer to Reference Guide SET UP screen D in Setup page is enabled MTC This shows the status of MTC synchronization If the AW4416 is following MTC messages from an external device this will indicate SLAVE It the AW4416 is transmitting MTC to an external device this will indicate MASTER Scene This is the number of the currently selected scene the current scene When the mix parameters of the last stored or recalled scene are modified an E edited character will be displayed at the lower right 54 Aw Operation Guide Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 Level meters 1 16 These level meters show the input level and output level for each track 1 16 of the recorder section Level meter L R These level meters show the output level the signal after passing through EQ and dynamics processing of the stereo output channel REC READY indicator This indicator will light red for tracks that are in record rea
26. If you will be using the Solo function during multitrack recording it is convenient to select RECORDING SOLO so that specific channels can be monitored without affecting the stereo bus or buses 1 8 O MIXDOWN SOLO In this mode the solo signal is routed through the stereo bus and output from the MONITOR OUT jacks and PHONES jack When the Solo function is turned on only the soloed channels will be sent to the stereo bus and the remaining chan nels will be muted It will not be possible to monitor channels whose ON key is turned off nor channels that are not assigned to the stereo bus A If MIXDOWN SOLO mode is selected the Solo Setup page LISTEN settings and LEVEL settings will be ignored they will be grayed out In this example we will use MIXDOWN SOLO mode Move the cursor to the MIXDOWN SOLO button and press the ENTER key 3 Move the cursor to the SEL MODE area and choose one of the following ways in which the channel s to be monitored in Solo mode will be selected O LAST SOLO When the SOLO key is on only the channel whose ON key was pressed last will be monitored O MIX SOLO When the SOLO key is on all channels selected by their ON key will be mon itored Move the cursor to one of these buttons and press the ENTER key 4 Move the cursor to the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL section and select the channel s that you wish to set to Solo Safe mode Solo Safe is a function that excludes specified chann
27. Immediately after a sample has been SAMP PAD HE 228__ __ cera PAD EDIT 0 00 00 000 J 1 l 0 4 4 Prssssessseseesee PAD NAME LAZILSME LE d ORA ae t Y AzztSmPTEr e A 3iSmeltr r A 4CSmP ite StSme ltr 6E N a SENO 4 A 8C NO B 1C NO B 2ZC NO A Sua ay 2 ERASE This menu allows you to erase the sample and name assigned to a pad and return the pad to its initial state When you move the cursor to this menu and press the ENTER key the fol lowing buttons will appear EXECUTE These buttons have the following functions PAD Select the bank pad number of the pad that you wish to erase EXECUTE Execute the pad erase operation Undo is not possible after a pad has been erased assigned to a pad a default name of Smpltr will be assigned automatically A Undo is not possible after the pad name has been edited 86 Awutes Reference Guide SAMP PAD screen 3 TRIM IN This menu allows you to adjust the playback start location of the sample assigned to a pad When you move the cursor to this menu and press the ENTER key the following buttons will appear EXECUTE These buttons have the following functions PAD Select the bank pad number of the pad whose playback start location you wish to trim TRIM IN Adjust the amount of trimming in sample units EXECUTE Execute the trim operation 4 TRIM OUT This m
28. O T COMP Time Compression Expansion Compress or expand the length of the audio data in the selected part As the length changes the pitch will change correspondingly The RATIO parameter specifies the amount of compression or expansion 50 200 O PITCH Pitch Change Change only the pitch without affecting the length of the audio data of the selected part The PITCH parameter specifies the change in semitones maximum 12 semitones and the FINE parameter specifies the change in one cent steps maximum 50 cents 162 Awun operation Guide Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations REGION menu These commands edit data in units of regions O NAME Assign a name to a region O ERASE Erase the selected region Audio data following that region will not be affected O DELETE Delete the selected region Audio data following that region will move forward by the length of the deleted data O COPY Copy the selected region to the specified location of the specified track You can also specify the number of times the data will be copied and the interval between copies If audio data exists at the copy destination you can specify whether the copied data will be inserted or overwritten O MOVE Move the selected region to the specified location of the specified track At this time the move source region will be erased If audio data exists at the move des tination you can specify whether the moved data will be
29. Scene or library recall operations 2 CH ON button ON key operations for each channel PAN button Pan operations for each channel 4 FADER button Fader operations for each channel AULAS Operation Guide 225 Chapter1 4 Automix 2 Move the cursor to the SCENE LIB button and press the ENTER key The scene library recall events recorded in the automix will be displayed in the list The event enclosed by the dashed line in the center of the list is the event cur rently selected for editing 3 Move the cursor to the at the left of the list and rotate the DATA JOG dial to scroll the list and select the event that you wish to edit 4 Use the CURSOR lt p gt keys to move the cursor to the data item within that event that you wish to edit r oo peeeenen geeeenen geessecenen ETIA OTET EMD eee cence eee E T a A bartecseceastaseetecess meal EEE SCENE al TIME The timing at which the event will be executed is displayed as hours min utes seconds milliseconds EVENT This area shows the type and value of the event The type of events that can be selected in this area will depend on which of the buttons above has been pressed When the SCENE LIB button is on the following events can be selected o SCENE viccen Scene memories The value at the right is the number of the scene that will be recalled e EQ Lib 0 EQ libraries
30. gt P 123 AVVUUIG Operation Guide 117 Chapter6 Transport locate operations A B repeat A B Repeat is a function that repeatedly plays back the region between the point A and point B that you specify The A B points can be set when the song is either stopped or playing O Setting the A B points 1 Locate the song to the location where you wish to set point A the beginning of the repeated playback 2 Hold down the Locate section SET key and press the A key MARK SEARCH 6 SET The A key will light indicating that point A has been set 3 Locate the song to the location where you wish to set point B the end of the repeated playback 4 Hold down the SET key and press the B key MARK SEARCH 6 SET The B key will light indicating that point B has been set Yip You can also use the A B keys to locate directly to points A B O Performing A B repeat playback 5 To perform repeat playback press the Locate section REPEAT key when the transport is stopped The transport will automatically locate to point A 1p If you press the REPEAT key during playback repeated playback between points A B will begin automatically If you press the REPEAT key during repeat playback you will return to normal playback 118 Awuuns operation Guide Chapter6 Transport locate operations 6 Press the PLAY key
31. the SCSI ID of the CD RW drive to 6 before installing it AVVUUIG Operation Guide 5 Before you begin e Inthe various screens of the AW4416 the SCSI ID of the internal CD RW drive has been set to 3 by default For this reason you will find it conve nient to set the ID of the CD RW to 3 For details on setting the SCSI ID refer to the manual for your CD RW drive e If you are installing a CD RW drive manufactured by Yamaha the SCSI ID will be set to 3 at the factory and we recommend that you leave it at this setting Installation procedure Please carefully read the cautions for installing optional equipment given at the beginning of this manual 1 You will need the following items e The AW4416 itself e Internal CD RW drive option e Screws included with the AW4416 for attaching the CD RW drive e Red and white cable for CD RW drive four conductor e Philips screwdriver e Work surface A e In order to install the CD RW drive you will need to turn the AW4416 on its back Make sure that you have a sufficiently broad work surface e The AW4416 is shipped with four screws for attaching the 2 5 inch hard disk and four screws for attaching the CD RW drive making a total of eight screws of the same type 2 Make sure that the power of the AW4416 is turned off For safety s sake disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet 3 Turn the AW4416 upside down on the work surface
32. 4 Channel Select the channel s to which the dynamics processor will apply when the ST LINK ON OFF button is on L left odd numbered chan nel R right even numbered channel or BOTH both channels A If the ST LINK ON OFF button is off this will be displayed as and cannot be selected 6 ON OFF This button turns the dynamics processor on off When the cursor is located at on off or in the PARAMETER area press the ENTER key to turn the dynamics processor on off 6 GR gain reduction This displays the amount of gain reduction pro duced by the dynamics processor in dB units Level meter This shows the output level of the dynamics processor in dB units 8 CURVE This graph shows the approximate response of the current dynamics processor settings TYPE This shows the type of the currently selected dynamics processor The following types of dynamics processor are available COMP compressor EXPAND expander GATE COMPANDER HARD SOFT DUCKING A The type cannot be changed in this page If you wish to use a specific type you must recall a program that uses that type from the library For details on recalling a program refer to P 47 PARAMETER Set the parameters of the dynamics processor The type of parameters and their range will differ depending on the currently selected type For details on parameters and their functions refer to the following append
33. 6 Use the DATA JOG dial to modify the parameter value and press the ENTER key The cursor will return to the button selected in step 4 If you decide to cancel without executing the editing command move the cursor from here to a button at a higher level and press the ENTER key 7 Repeat steps 4 6 to make settings for the remaining parameters 158 Awun operation Guide Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations 8 To execute the editing command move the cursor to the EXECUTE but ton and press the ENTER key The editing command you selected in step 3 will be executed e Ifyou wish to halt the editing operation move the cursor to a button in the top level and press the EN TER key e As exceptions the TRACK menu NAME command and the REGION menu NAME command do not require you to use the EXECUTE button e Even after executing an editing command you can use the UNDO button to cancel the results of the operation The TRACK menu NAME command and the REGION menu NAME command are exceptions to this Virtual track editing procedure Here s the basic procedure for editing entire tracks parts or regions for virtual tracks 1 8 of the desired track 1 In the RECORDER section press the EDIT key gt F2 key The EDIT screen V TR Edit page will appear where you can edit virtual tracks EDIT 19000 NEW jong V TR rl 00 10 0 000 oxn TRACK3 U NE d C ifGuitar 11 2E
34. 999 3_ _NEH solic Scene OO SE Initial Data TwpuT O0 00 00 100 FADE TIME SETTING sec e F5 COPY TO ALL key Copy the fade time setting selected by the cur sor to all other channels CONFIRMATION Copy to All CH This Parameter ARE YOU SURE Copying fade time settings to all channels Procedure 1 In the SCENE screen Fade Time page move the cursor to the fade time setting of the copy source channel 2 Press the SHIFT key F5 key A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear asking you to confirm the copy 3 To execute the copy move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key 4 Press the STORE key to store the scene 126 Awuns Reference Guide SCENE screen RCL Safe page Make fader recall safe settings Function Specify the faders that will be excluded from the recall when a scene is recalled Key operation SCENE 3 NEW SONG scene 0 JE e SCENE key gt F3 RCL Safe key INPUT O l 00 00 000 ima Dala i e Repeatedly press the SCENE key until the screen shown at the right appears RECALL SAFE CHANNELS ENABLE RECALL SAFE Mouse operation M button gt SCEN button gt RCL Safe tab ST OUT STOUT Screen functions RECALL SAFE CHANNEL If a button in this area is turned on the fader of the corresponding channel will maintain its cur rent position even when a scene is recalled The following channels can be
35. A The AW4416 does not support the FAT32 file system used on Windows 95 OSR2 and subsequent operating systems A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the Format operation CONFIRMATION Will Format scsS 1 HD ARE YOU SURE 6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Formatting will be performed 252 Awun operation Guide Chapterl 6 Backing up and restoring songs O Formatting removable media such as an MO drive A FORMAT window will appear allowing you to select the type of file system and the formatting method 3 Move the cursor to the TYPE area and rotate the DATA JOG dial to select one of the following two types of file system that will be created during the formatting operation e ORIGINAL 6 This is the native file system of the AW4416 Select this file system if you have selected TYPE2 as the backup format S FAT 16 6 nce This is the file system used on PC type computers e g Windows 95 or Windows 98 machines Select this file system if you wish to exchange files with a PC 4 Move the cursor to either the QUICK or the NORMAL button and press the ENTER key The formatting method will depend on the button you select O QUICK quick format Use this when you wish to quickly erase data from a previously formatted MO disk O NORMAL normal format Use this when formatting a newly purchased MO disk Depending on the capac ity of t
36. A When using MMC you must match the device ID of the AW4416 and the external MIDI device For details on setting the device ID refer to MMC DEV 4 SYNC AVE sync average When the AW4416 is used as an MTC slave this parameter specifies the precision with which MTC will be received Normally you will use this with the OFF but ton selected However if synchronization is unreliable try the 1 or 2 setting 6 SYNC OFFSET When the AW4416 is used as an MTC slave this parameter specifies how the absolute time of the AW4416 will be shifted relative to the time code MTC received from the external device You can specify a range of 24 00 00 00 00 24 00 00 00 00 Sync offset 00 00 00 00 00 Received time code 49 90 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 Sync offset 00 30 00 00 00 Received time code 99 39 00 00 00 00 35 00 00 00 Sync offset 01 00 00 00 00 Received time code 23 00 00 00 00 23 05 00 00 00 The offset value you specify here does not affect the MTC that is transmitted from the MTC OUT connector of the AW4416 If you want the MTC transmitted from the MTC OUT connector to be shifted relative to the absolute time of the AW4416 you must adjust the Time Code Top SONG screen Set ting page 6 MMC DEV MIDI Machine Control device When using MMC for remote control specify a device ID of 1 127 to distinguish each device 42 AWU
37. If you wish to adjust the position of a fader assigned to a group you can use the ENABLE button to temporarily disable that group A Do not manually operate two or more faders of a group at the same time Doing so will strain the motor and cause malfunctions 58 Aw uLns Reference Guide EQ ATT GRP screen Mute Grp page Set and cancel mute groups Function Assign input channels 1 24 moni tor channels 1 16 to mute groups E H If channels are assigned to a mute group you can operate a sin gle ON key to switch the on off status of all ON keys in that group Key operation e EQ key gt F4 Mute Grp key e Repeatedly press the EQ key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt EQ button gt Mute Grp tab Screen functions Mute groups E H The symbols indicate the mute group E H to which each input channel 1 24 and monitor channel 1 16 belongs When you move the cursor up or down to select mute group E H and use the SEL key to select a channel that channel will be assigned to the corresponding mute group When you press the SEL key once again the channel will be removed from the mute group hy A mute group may contain both channels that are On and channels that are Off If a mute group contains channels that are On and channels that are Off operating the ON key of one of the channels will turn off the channels that are on and tur
38. Operation Guide Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 Selecting channels When editing the channel mix parameters on the AW4416 you must first select the channel that you wish to control Here s how to select channels 1 Use the keys of the MIXING LAYER section to select the mixing layer that you wish to control MIXING LAYER 17 24 H ie MONI INPUT INPUT RECORDER 1 16 According to the selected key of the MIXING LAYER section the channels con trolled by the SEL keys ON keys and faders of the top panel will change as follows STEREO 1 16 put channels 1 16 Input chan Effect return Stereo output 17 24 RTN nels 17 24 1 2 channel MONI Monitor channels 1 16 2 Press the SEL key of the channel you wish to control The SEL key of the corresponding channel will light I A f fali SEL ST SEL T SEL SEL SEL a L N A AS ON ON ON ON ON SOLO 17 18 19 2 1 2 3 16 AVVUUNG Operation Guide 63 Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 3 Use the PAN control EQ Q F G controls and EQ HIGH EQ LOW keys at the right of the display to adjust the pa
39. Procedure 1 Access the SET UP screen Patch Lib page 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the library number 1 20 into which you wish to store the settings 3 Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT display will appear allowing you to input the name If STORE CONFIRMATION is turned OFF in the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTIL ITY key gt F2 key this popup window will not appear 4 Input the library title For details on input ting characters refer to Operation Guide P 60 5 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The Store operation will be executed To recall patching settings from a library Procedure 1 Access the SET UP screen Patch Lib page 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the library number that you wish to recall 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A confirmation message will appear If RECALL CONFIRMATION is turned OFF in the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTIL ITY key gt F2 key this popup window will not appear 4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The Recall operation will be executed AVVULNG Reference Guide 19 SET UP screen D in Setup page Make word clock cascade settings Function Select the word clock source to which the AW4416 will synchronize In this page you can also make settings for stereo bus cascade connec
40. This column shows the virtual track number 1 8 selected for each track SAMP PAD 2 225 NEW oNG Sbit pa FROM AGH 00 10 I 1 241 Ja PAD SEL zt Tr RGN SEL rt u ir EXECUTE Sth Tr RI 1ISCV TrIS 1 16CU Tr16 1 Track view This area shows a bar graph to indicate the regions included in each track Parameter area In this area you can set the parameters for the selected menu Note The total length of the samples that can be assigned to the sampling pads is a maximum of 90 seconds for a 44 1 kHz 16 bit song If you wish to use part of a region that is longer than this you must first divide the region appropriately EDIT screen TR Edit page 80 AWU Reference Guide SAMP PAD screen E Additional functions in the From Rgn page In the From Rgn page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional functions to the F1 F3 keys t ft 1 EJ J Le J e F1 REMAIN key This causes the counter level meter and the counter at the top of the display to show the remaining time available for recording in the trigger list For details on the trigger list refer to the explanation for the SAMP PAD screen Trig List page gt P 88 When you press the SHIFT key F1 REMAIN key once again the usual counter display will reappear F2 X ZOOM IN key Each time you press the SHIFT key F2 X ZOOM IN key the track view
41. WAV following their name Other files will not be displayed in the list DIR directory The symbol and the directory name indicate the directory in which the list shown in is located For example this will indicate if you are in the highest level root directory or WAV if you are in a directory named WAV located one level lower AVVULNG Reference Guide 111 EDIT screen T EXECUTE button This button executes the WAV file import A The keys of the transport section will have no effect when the Wavlmport page is displayed E Additional functions in the Wav Import page In the Wav Import page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional functions to the F1 F2 keys f e F1 CD LOAD key Close the tray of the CD RW drive e F2 CD UNLOAD key Eject the tray of the CD RW drive Importing a WAV file to a track Procedure 1 Insert the media containing the WAV file into an external SCSI device e g MO drive or the internal CD RW drive 2 Access the EDIT screen Wavlmport page 3 Move the cursor to the DRIVE area use the DATA JOG dial to select the SCSI ID of the drive and press the ENTER key The AW4416 will recognize the WAV files on the inserted media CD ROM MO disk etc and will display a list like the following EDIT Gogga NEW SONG 44 1KH2 4 4 MPORT TO REGION Move the cursor to the file list
42. ber i e not the settings of the most recently stored recalled scene will be saved together with the song Be aware that the current mix parameters are not saved When an existing song is loaded the scene number that was most recently stored recalled for that song will be displayed in the upper right of the level meter counter If you wish to reproduce both the song and the mix parameters you must press the SCENE MEMORY section RECALL key and recall that scene immediately after loading the song 1 Press the WORK NAVIGATE section SONG key gt F1 key The SONG screen Song List page will appear ETAM SELECTED FONG NANE j eeeea NEW SONG ee The data for the current song date size quantization bits protect shown here in the song list is the data for when the song was last saved When you perform the following Save procedure and press the ENTER key it will be overwritten by the new data 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE button at the bottom of the screen and press the ENTER key 106 Aw uuns operation Guide Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear asking you to confirm the Save operation COMF IRMATIOM Hill Saye Current Sons ARE YOU SURE 7 Kp When you shut down the AW4416 the current song will be saved automatically H owever we recommend that you save the song manually when you are finished recording gt P 176 If you fail to do
43. e For details on operation of the Quick Rec function refer to Operation Guide Chapter 8 Patching AULAE Reference Guide 9 MASTERING screen Write CD page Using a CD RW drive to create an audio CD Function Create an audio CD by writing the AT stereo track data of songs to CD R MASTERING 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 RW media as CD audio tracks ST TRACK WRITE TO CO Key operation MASTERING key Om my O FF ONCE Ce CE DEL 1 GO G2 COPYR I 4T PROHIBIT Mouse operation M button gt MAST button EH lirite CO Screen functions 1 DRIVE Select the SCSI ID number of the internal or external CD RW drive 2 FINALIZE button When you press this button CD R media that was written using Track At Once will be final ized information on track locations etc will be move the cursor to one of these buttons and written into the data area You must perform the press the ENTER key finalize operation in order for CD R media writ A ten using Track At Once to be playable on a CD player Yip If you used Disc At Once to write the data finalize will be performed automatically For 3 TRACK AT ONCE button 4 DISC AT ONCE button Use these buttons to select the way in which data will be written to the CD R RW media either Track At Once or Disc At Once Before you execute the Write operation you must CD RW media does not sup
44. lowing function O PAD Select the pad track that will be erased O START O END Specify the beginning START and end END of the area that will be erased from the pad track selected by PAD O EXECUTE This button executes the Erase command AVVUUIG Operation Guide 201 Chapter1 2 Sampling pads e If you set the counter to measure units you can set the START and END parameters in measure beat units Instead of using the DATA JO G dial to vary a location continuously you can use the keys of the locate section to move instantly to a desired locate point or marker 3 Move the cursor to the parameter whose setting you wish to change and press the ENTER key The cursor will move to the parameter setting and the value of the selected parameter will be displayed 4 Use the DATA JOG dial to set the parameter and press the ENTER key The setting will change and the cursor will return to the parameter location of step 3 5 Repeat steps 3 4 to set the remaining parameters 6 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the Erase command CONFIRMATION Execute TRIG DATA ERASE EP NAM A S SE 5 00 00 07 426 00 00 23 192 7 To execute the Erase command move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Kp You can undo the result of the erasure by pressing the U N DO key immediately after executing Erase
45. sS e EQ key gt F1 key EQ Att key e Repeatedly press the EQ key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt EQ button gt EQ Att tab Til Corel all esas was 6 a zell eill OC Fall G A aliz GI Gl IG IG i 1 saB CD asel 2 s ll C2 4 008 lf mi D D rt et Screen functions C EQ ON button This switches EQ on off When this page is dis played you can use the ENTER key to switch this button on off regardless of the cursor loca the EQ type to H SHELF shelving and turning it all the way in the counter clockwise direction will switch the EQ type to LPF low pass filter Range 10 0 10 HPF L SHELF LOW band tion only LPF H SHELF HIGH band only ATT attenuation knob F frequency knob Set the amount of attenuation for the signal before it enters the EQ This is used mainly to prevent clipping when the EQ is boosted Range 96 dB 0 dB EQ CURVE This graphically displays the EQ settings 4 Output meter This meter shows the post EQ output level 6 Q knob This sets the steepness at which the boost cut will occur at the center frequency specified by the F knob Higher settings will produce a steeper Curve For the LOW band EQ turning the Q knob all the way in the clockwise direction will switch the EQ type to L SHELF shelving and turning it all the way in the counter clockwise direction
46. x8 slot2 1 0 card Here s how to assign the desired signal to each output jack 1 Press the SETUP key gt F2 Patch OUT key The display will show the SETUP screen Patch OUT page The various fields of the display will show the patched status of each output jack If the Patch OUT tab is not assigned to the F2 key press the SHIFT key F1 key to switch the tabs and then press the F2 key SET UP GGG NENH SONG SCENE B INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data d OHNI OUT ASSIGN 1 Pozo SLOT 2 OMNI OUT jack 1 4 2 DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack 3 STEREO OUT jack OUTPUT 1 8 of an I O card slot 1 OUTPUT 1 8 of an I O card slot 2 136 Awun operation Guide Chapter8 Patching 2 Move the cursor to the output jack whose patching you wish to change and use the DATA JOG dial to select the signal that you wish to assign The following types of signal can be assigned to each output jack O OMNI OUT jacks 1 4 AUX 1 AUX 8 AUX buses 1 8 RDR 1 RDR16 Recorder direct out 1 16 ST L ST R L R channels of the stereo output channel BUS 1 BUS 8 Buses 1 8 DIR 1 DIR16 Input channel direct out 1 16 O DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack O STEREO OUT jacks ST L R Stereo output channel BUS 1 2 BUS 7 8 Buses 1 2 7 8 DIR 1 2 DIR15 16 Input channel direct out 1 2 15 16 AUX 1 2 AUX 7 8 AUX buses 1 2 7 8 RDR 1 2 RDR15 16 Recorder direct out 1 2 15 16
47. 12 and 13 are turned ON just before the chorus comes in on the introduction O 00 00 15 The level of the second introductory lead guitar phrase track 6 was a little lower than the first and it was getting buried in the chorus We used fader automation to boost it a bit O 00 00 25 The lead vocal track 14 is turned ON just before the lead vocal comes in At the same time we ve turned the chorus tracks 11 12 and 13 back off because the chorus won t be coming back in for a while Why bother Well with any source recorded via microphone you re also likely to pick up some extraneous ambient noise and this can reduce the clarity of the mix if allowed to play while the desired source isn t doing anything This is the case with the So Fine chorus tracks In fact if you watch the track 11 12 and 13 level meters while the chorus isn t singing you can see that there s a surprising amount of signal where there really shouldn t be any This type of unwanted noise can also be removed auto matically by gating a type of dynamics processing in which signals below a specified level are cut off the AW4416 dynamics processors can do this But since the noise is effectively masked by the other tracks during denser parts of the song we ll simply use channel ON OFF automation for the So Fine demo You ll also notice that we reduced the level of the organ track 7 at about this point This is because we wanted a sligh
48. 6 to 48 kHz 6 max 26 channels 8 channels 2 channels stereo x 1 max 16 channels max 28 channels 2 channels stereo x 1 4 channels 2 channels stereo x 1 2 channels stereo x 1 2 channels stereo x 1 max 16 channels 44 channels 24 channels 4 channels stereo x 2 16 channels 16 track direct out playback or stereo 2 channels stereo track playback 20 channels 8 channels 8 channels 2 channels stereo x 1 2 channels stereo x 1 8 voices 8 x 2 banks max 90 sec 16 bit 44 1 kHz 2 5 IDE hard disk drive AW4416 original format 16 bit 24 bit AX VVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 43 Appendix Tracks Maximum recording time Power requirements Dimensions W x H x D Weight Operating temperature range Options Mixer section E input output MIC LINE input 48 V DC phantom powering PEAK LED Input impedance Nominal input level Minimum input level Maximum input level Insert I O Input impedance Nominal input level Output impedance Nominal output level MIC LINE input PEAK LED Input impedance Nominal input level Minimum input level Maximum input level MIC LINE input Hi Z Input impedance Nominal input level Minimum input level Maximum input level Appendix 44 AI ULUNE Reference Guide 130 tracks 16 tracks x 8 virtual tracks plus ste reo track Approx 140 min 44 1 kHz 16 bit 16 tracks 12 GB hard disk U S A amp Canada 120 V 8
49. AULAS Operation Guide 41 Chapter2 Parts and their functions CURSOR JOG amp SHUTTLE section E 9 CURSOR j J ENTER LOCATE DATA JOG SHUTTLE JOG ON key This key turns the nudge function on off for the DATAJOG dial and SHUT TLE dial Nudge is a function that repeatedly plays back a fixed region starting at the current location either forward or backward When this is turned on the key will light 2 DATA JOG dial The function of this dial will depend on the on off status of the JOG ON key and on the on off status of the NUM LOCATE key in the locate section O When the JOG ON key is off The dial will adjust the value of the parameter currently selected in the display or select an item from a list O When the JOG ON key is on Depending on the direction in which you turn the dial playback of a fixed region will occur repeatedly in the forward or reverse direction allowing you to search for a desired location O When the NUM LOCATE key is on The dial will advance the time counter in the display 3 SHUTTLE dial The function of this dial will depend on the on off status of the JOG ON key O When the JOG ON key is on The current nudge playback region will be moved either forward or backward depending on the direction in which you turn the dial O When the JOG ON key is off Depen
50. EFF Lib 882 ARE YOU SURE 7 4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The Reverb Room effect program will be loaded into internal effect 1 AVVUUIG Operation Guide 99 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 5 Press PAN key gt F2 key The PAN ROUTE screen Pan 17 24 page will appear allowing you to make pan settings and bus assignments for input channels 17 24 and return channels 1 2 PAH ROUTE 22222 _ _NeEW sone Tt RE INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data J FAN J ROUTING HGA SEES Gee SEE8 O O m m n ll Pa ija 3 m a a m 3 m HEHHEHE en cal Make sure that the RTN1 return channel 1 area ST button is on and that the two PAN knobs are turned to the far left and right With these settings the return signal from effect 1 will be sent to the stereo bus and mixed with the signals of the monitor channels Press the MONO key gt AUX 7 key Monitor channels 1 16 will be selected as the mixing layer In this state faders 1 16 will adjust the send level of the signals sent from monitor channels 1 16 to AUX 7 effect 1 Play back the song from the beginning and use faders 1 16 to adjust the send level of each monitor channel If necessary press the HOME key gt 17 24 RTN key and use fader 15 to readjust the effect return level Kp When the AW4416 is in the initial state the faders of return channels 1 2 are set to nominal l
51. FADER EDIT MODE 3 NEW UNDO RELATIVE ine 4 AUTOMIX TRANSPORT j _ ABORT STOP AUTO REC AVVULNG Operation Guide 219 Chapter1 4 Automix 4 10 11 Make sure that the button in the AUTOMIX field is displayed as ENABLE Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE field Turn the PAN button and EQ button on and the remaining buttons FADER CH ON off Move the cursor to the on screen REC button and press the ENTER key Press SEL key 1 Monitor channel 1 will be selected for recording A You can use the SEL keys to select multiple channels for overwriting H owever operations of the PAN EQ controls will be recorded only for the channel that you selected last by pressing the SEL key Press the top panel PLAY key to begin song playback Simultaneously with the start of song playback the previously recorded automix will also play back While listening to the song operate the PAN control When recording pan or EQ operations in the automix it is convenient to use the PAN EQ controls at the right of the display Note When you operate the PAN control and EQ controls the pan and EQ settings of the corresponding channel will be displayed briefly in the upper part of the screen When you are finished press the top panel STOP key Automix recording will stop and a message will ask whether you wish to update the automix with the newly recorded content To update the au
52. In short the right amount of reverb can give strings especially the synth strings that most of us will be using a more lush rich sound String reverb level at 5 5 O Tracks 11 12 amp 13 Chorus Here we ll use just enough reverb to fill out and unify the sound of the backing vocals More reverb would produce a more lush sound but would at the same time reduce the intelligibility of the vocals as well as the clarity of the overall mix Track 11 12 and 13 reverb to 15 9 O Track 14 Lead Vocal There is a tendency to add lots of reverb to the lead vocal but listen to the results carefully Less is usually better Increase the reverb gradually until you begin to hear a slight thickening or glow and stop there If you re hearing reverb as a separate entity there s too much reverb Lead vocal reverb to 10 9 Xe Everything yes everything you do to the mix can change the perceived balance of the tracks Make adjustments to the fader levels whenever you feel the urge to do so 22 Aw us Tutorial Tutorial Mixdown O Save the Song We can t emphasize enough how important it is to keep saving your work at rela tively short intervals Accidents do happen and if after several hours of hard work your AW4416 is accidentally unplugged or there s a power failure or your pet cat decides to do a mix of his own you ll have to go back and start again Ouch Press the WORK NAVIGATE
53. PAN knobs These knobs pan the signal between L R of the stereo bus and between odd numbered and even numbered buses Use the DATAJOG dial to operate the knobs Pressing the ENTER key will set the knob to the CENTER position The ST OUT knobs in the Pan 17 24 page adjust the output channel balance MODE Use the following three buttons to select how the PAN knob will function for paired channels INDIVIDUAL button The pan of each channel will operate indepen dently Default setting GANG button The pan of paired channels will be linked while preserving the existing spatial relationship 50 Aw Reference Guide alale HEEE B88 Ee yeyafaye f m m EEEN aa SCENE O Initial Data 5 i 6 i o lt BOB Jefojele pamm a c n BBB BHOeBo ui BEER S888 S oo Se E a INVERTED GANG button The pan of paired channels will be linked inversely XG Li Rg On the AW4416 the pan of a channel can be adjusted in the following two ways 1 Use the SEL keys to select the desired channel and rotate the PAN control If AUTO PAN DISPLAY is turned ON in the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTIL ITY key gt F2 key operating the PAN control will automatically switch the dis play to the PAN ROUTE screen even if a screen other than the PAN ROUTE screen had been displayed 2 In the PAN 1 16 PAN 17 24 PAN MONI pages move the
54. PEAKING 0 0dB H SHELF 1 6 8 2 2 125Hz 177Hz 1 12kHz 12 6kHz 2 5dB L SHELF 0 0dB PEAKING 1 5dB PEAKING 0 0dB H SHELF 8 0 9 94Hz 944Hz 3 17KHz 7 55kHz 6 0dB PEAKING 0 0dB PEAKING 2 0dB PEAKING 4 0dB H SHELF 5 6 10 0 7 223Hz 595Hz 3 17KHz 5 33kHz 3 5dB PEAKING 8 5dB PEAKING 1 5dB PEAKING 3 0dB H SHELF 0 18 10 6 3 265Hz 397Hz 1 33kHz 4 49kHz 2 0dB PEAKING 5 5dB PEAKING 0 5dB PEAKING 2 5dB PEAKING 8 4 5 0 63 9 140Hz 1 00kHz 1 88kHz 5 65kHz 4 5dB PEAKING 0 0dB PEAKING 4 0dB PEAKING 2 0dB H SHELF 8 0 4 0 16 125Hz 445Hz 3 36kKHz 19 0kHz 2 5dB L SHELF 1 5dB PEAKING 2 5dB PEAKING 0 0dB H SHELF 9 10 354Hz 944Hz 3 36kKHz 12 6kHz 5 0dB L SHELF 0 0dB PEAKING 3 5dB PEAKING 0 0dB H SHELF 10 4 315Hz 1 05kHz 4 23kHz 12 6kHz 6 0dB PEAKING 8 5dB PEAKING 4 5dB PEAKING 4 0dB H SHELF 0 9 4 5 3 5 105Hz 1 00kHz 1 88kHz 5 33kHz 2 0dB L SHELF 0 0dB PEAKING 1 0dB PEAKING 4 0dB H SHELF 9 4 5 297Hz 749Hz 2 00kKHz 3 56kKHz Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G Q F G 3 5dB
55. Repeated playback between points A B will begin 7 To defeat A B repeat press the REPEAT key The REPEAT key will go dark indicating that A B repeat has been defeated If you pressed the REPEAT key to defeat A B repeat normal playback will resume from that point The A B points that you specify will be displayed as follows in the TRACK screen TR View page that appears when you press the TRACK key gt F1 key 5 Al EI 1 Point A Point B e If you set point B earlier than point A and press the REPEAT key playback will repeat from B gt A The A B points you set can be deleted gt P 126 or moved gt P 123 as desired The A B point settings are saved on the hard disk as part of the currently selected song AVVULNG Operation Guide 119 Chapter6 Transport locate operations In out points The AW4416 remembers the locations at which recording was last begun and ended as the In point and the Out point When the In and Out points are memo rized the IN and OUT keys will light In this state you can press the IN key or the OUT key to locate to the In or Out points You can also set the In or Out points manually O Setting the In point Out point 1 Locate the song to the location where you wish to set the In point 2 Hold down the Locate section SET key and press the IN key MARK SEARCH LAST REC i IN SET 3 Locate the song to the
56. SONG key to go to the SONG display if necessary also press the F1 function key to select the Song List page Move the cursor to SAVE on the display and press ENTER When the confirmation window appears move the cursor to OK and press ENTER again to actually save the song AW UUs Tutorial 23 Tutorial Mixdown Phase 5 Finalize the Mix amp Set Up Automa tion Well the basic mix is pretty much done Now that all the processing and effects are in place you should listen carefully and make any final adjustments But as you listen to the mix we ve set up you ll probably notice that one average mix doesn t quite do justice to the entire song You ll probably notice sections on which you d like make a temporary change to the level of one track or another This is where automation comes in handy Back in the pre automation days recording engineers would have to make such changes manually on the fly And if the changes involved a number of faders and controls simultaneously then several people would have to be recruited to do the job Of course timing is crit ical so the mix would often have to re run many times until all the required changes could be made satisfactorily Thank goodness for the AW4416 It will let you record fader channel ON Off pan and EQ automation changes one at a time so you can put together the perfect automix with relative ease For the So Fine automix we ve
57. Select one of the following two scales for the level meter counter display NORMAL The full range of the level meter will indicate levels of 60 dB 0 dB Default setting FINE The full range of the level meter will indicate levels of 26 dB O dB This setting is convenient This specifies the rollback time 0 5 seconds of the ROLL BACK key For details on rollback refer to Operation Guide Chapter 6 Transport locate operations Default 5 seconds 3 PREROLL POSTROLL TIME Specify the pre roll time 0 5 seconds and post roll time 0 5 seconds used when you per form auto punch in out For details on pre roll time and post roll time refer to Operation Guide Chapter 7 Punch in out Default 5 seconds when you wish to make fine adjustments to the level near the O dB region mS WORO CLOCK TIC 44 1k 48k MASTER INT EXT VARI SLAVE AVVULNG Reference Guide 35 UTILITY screen 6 PLAY MODE DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT Select one of the following two play modes for This setting specifies whether SCMS Serial the Nudge function Default AFTER Copy Management System copy protect data will be enabled ENABLE or not DISABLE for the digital signal o
58. Stereo output channel Gogoz NEW SON 00 00 00 0 30 _ VIEW ST OUT ATT SCENE O Initial Data EA ews INT EFF 2 button When this button is on internal effect 2 will be inserted into the corresponding channel A When inserting the internal effect 1 2 into a channel you must set either EFF1 or EFF2 to INSERT in the SETUP screen Patch IN page If neither of the effects is set to INSERT attempting to turn on the INT EFFI AINT EFF2 button in this screen will produce an error message of ERROR INT EFF NOW SELECTED AUX EXTERNAL button When this button is on you can select the desired input and output jacks for use as the insert send return jacks for the corresponding channel 45 ALIA ULNE Reference Guide VIEW screen SEND When the EXTERNAL button is on move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATAJOG dial to select one of the following jacks for use as the insert send jack OMNI 1 4 OMNI OUT 1 4 jacks e SL1 1 SL1 8 Output channels 1 8 of OPTION IO slot 1 e SL2 1 SL2 8 Output channels 1 8 of OPTION I O slot 2 e D STO L R L R channels of the DIGI TAL STEREO OUT jack e STOUT L R L R channels of the STEREO OUT jack If you select D STO or STOUT only the L channel can be selected for odd numbered channels and only the R channel can be selected for even numbered channels RIN When the
59. The display will show the VIEW screen CH View page In the example shown here monitor channel 1 is selected VIEW GGGG NEW SONG SCENE OO nontt 00 00 00 000 Initial Data cece aaga Hi 0008 EFFECT INSERT field 3 Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button of the EFFECT INSERT field and press the ENTER key The EFF INSERT SETTING popup window will appear The SEND and RTN fields of the popup window will respectively show the types of output jack and input jack that are patched EFF INSERT SETTING MONI 1 INSERTION EFF TYPE 4 Move the cursor to the EXTERNAL button and press the ENTER key 140 Awuuns operation Guide Chapter8 Patching 5 Move the cursor to the SEND field and use the DATA JOG dial to select the insert send jack You can select from the following jacks O When selecting for an input channel 1 24 or a monitor channel 1 16 OMNI 1 OMNI 4 OMNI OUT jacks 1 4 SL1 1 SL1 8 OUTPUT 1 8 of an I O card slot 1 SL2 1 SL2 8 OUTPUT 1 8 of an I O card slot 2 D STOL L channel of the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack D STO R R channel of the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack STOUT L L channel of the STEREO OUT jack STOUT R R channel of the STEREO OUT jack 1 Selectable only for odd numbered channels 2 Selectable only for even numbered channels O When selecting for a return channel 1 2 or the stereo output channel OMNI 1 2 OMNI 3 4 OMNI OUT jacks 1 2 3 4 SL1 1 2
60. The value at the right is the number of the EQ library that will be recalled o DY Lib 0 Dynamics libraries The value at the right is the number of the dynamics library that will be recalled o EF Lib 0 0 0 00000 Effect libraries The value at the right is the number of the effect library that will be recalled CH Lib riei Channel libraries The value at the right is the number of the channel library that will be recalled CHANNEL This shows the channel input channels 1 24 monitor channels 1 16 stereo out put channel return channels 1 2 for which the event will be recalled This will be blank if scene memory has been selected in 5 Rotate the DATA JOG dial to modify the value of the item where the cursor is located E TTI ALLIETATO TETT Sere ee Er tere ere ee ea ee 046 EFF 2 75 SCENE Bz 4868 SCENE l goo T Bih Goto J on m N 5 T 226 Awun operation Guide Chapterl 4 Automix When you change the timing of an event the cursor may jump one or more rows of the list to another location This is because events are sorted in order of time and is not a malfunction The timing of events can be adjusted in fine steps of 25 msec Note If the SELECTED CH ONLY button in the upper right of the screen is turned on the screen will display only events of the channel selected by the SEL key 6 To add anew event move the cursor to the DUPLICATE button in the upper
61. Total EQ 2 F 94Hz 749Hz 1 78kHz 17 9kHz G 4 0dB 1 5dB 2 0dB 6 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF _ This is a variation on Q 0 28 0 7 program 030 Also use 032 Total EQ 3 these programs for stereo F 66Hz 841Hz 1 88kHz 15 1kHz inputs or external effect G 1 5dB 0 5dB 2 0dB 4 0dB returns Appendix 4 AVY UUIB Reference Guide No 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 Nid The EQ programs were programmed for recording acoustic musical instruments If you are using them for a sampler synthesizer or rhythm machine adjust the parameters accordingly Parameter Name LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Q 2 10 0 4 0 4 Bass Drum 3 F 118Hz 315Hz 4 23kHz 20 1kHz G 3 5dB 10 0dB 3 5dB 0 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Q 4 5 2 8 0 1 Snare Drum 3 F 223Hz 561Hz 4 23kHz 4 00kHz G 0 0dB 2 0dB 3 50dB 0 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 4 5 1 2 Tom tom 2 F 88Hz 210Hz 5 33kHz 16 9kHz G 9 0dB 1 5dB 2 0dB 0 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 8 10 9 Piano 3 F 99Hz 472Hz 2 37kKHz 10 0kHz G 4 5dB 13 0dB 4 5dB 2 5dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 10 6 3 2 2 Piano Low F 187Hz 397Hz 6 72kHz 12 6kHz G 5 5dB 1 5dB 6 0dB 0 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Q 10 6 3 2 2 0 1 Piano H
62. a EWG GE st sus lator tab Y ax pgEa0AU0A EA Oscillator Screen functions 1 Level meter 6 BUS ASSIGN This shows the oscillator output level that is Use the following buttons to specify the bus to being sent to buses 1 8 and AUX buses 1 8 which the oscillator signal will be sent OSC ON oscillator on button e BUS 1 8 buttons Buses 1 8 This button switches the oscillator on off e AUX 1 8 buttons AUX buses 1 8 Default OFF e ST BUS button Stereo bus A Kp Sine waves and white noise have a higher You can specify more than one bus as the sound pressure level than they appear to your oscillator output destination ears Use caution since they may damage your speakers if played back at a high vol ume 3 LEVEL knob This knob adjusts the output level 96 dB O dB of the oscillator WAVEFORM Use the following four buttons to select the waveform of the test tone oscillator e SINE 100 Hz button 100 Hz sine wave e SINE 1 kHz button 1 kHz sine wave e SINE 10 kHz button 10 kHz sine wave NOISE cece White noise AULAE Reference Guide 33 UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page Make overall settings for the AW4416 1 Function Enable disable warning messages and specify the point from which direct output will be taken Key operation e UTILITY key gt F2 Prefer 1 key e Repeatedly press the UTILITY k
63. and recording will begin on the track you selected in step 2 At the location where you wish to punch out press the PLAY key or press the foot switch The REC key will go dark and you will return to normal playback mode To stop the song press the STOP key or press the foot switch The song will stop To check the recorded result locate to the location of step 1 and press the PLAY key If you make a mistake during punch in out recording stop the transport and press the UNDO key to cancel the previous recording and return the data to the state before recording The following diagram shows the manual punch in out procedure 1 2 s oy 3 16 Playback Record Playback PLAY REC PLAY PLAY STOP REC TRACK SELECT Punch in Punch out AVVULNG Operation Guide 129 Chapter7 Punch in out Auto punch in out Here s how to use auto punch in out Preparations O Make input monitor settings To perform punch in out recording you will need to select auto input monitor as the input monitor setting For details refer to page 128 O Set the auto punch in out points Specify the location at which punch in out will start Auto Punch In point and end Auto Punch Out Point Auto punch in out uses the in out point settings gt P 120 1 At the location where you wish to punch in hold down the SET key and press the IN key The IN key
64. change Select a different key before you continue with this procedure WORK NAVIGATE section SON G key MASTERING key CD PLAY key UNIT section FILE key e RECORDER section EDIT key SAMPLING PAD section EDIT pad except for when the Trig List page is dis played 3 Start the rhythm machine drum performance 4 When the performance is finished press the STOP W key 5 To listen to the recorded content press the Locate section RTZ key and then press the Transport section PLAY PB key 6 When you are satisfied with the recorded content press the STOP I key to stop the transport Then press REC TRACK SELECT keys 1 2 to defeat record ready mode for tracks 1 2 Kpl e By using the ALL SAFE key instead of step 6 you can cancel record ready mode in one operation e Ifyou wish to re do the recording repeat steps 1 4 We recommend that you save the song whenever you take a break from your work gt P 106 86 AWN Operation Guide Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Overdubbing In this section we will explain how to record an electric bass connected to INPUT 8 HI Z jack while monitoring the rhythm machine or drums recorded on tracks 1 2 Set the input level 1 While producing sound on your instrument adjust GAIN control 8 so that the PEAK indicator of INPUT 8 HI Z lights briefly when you play most loudly A The INPUT 8 HI Z jack is an input jack de
65. drive etc from damage due to static electricity when handling any of this equipment take the most extreme care to avoid touching IC leads or other electronic parts e Be careful not to drop any screws into the main unit If you switch the power on with a dropped screw still in the main unit the main unit may malfunction or break down If a dropped screw can not be retrieved consult your Yamaha dealer e If the hard disk or CD RW drive breaks down contact the store where you purchased that equipment Except for duplication for personal use or when there is no copyright problem the duplication or transfer of commercially sold music sound data without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited When using this equipment please consult with a copyright specialist vi AI ULUNE Operation Guide Important O Warning The Yamaha Professional Audio Workstation is designed to be used professionally and responsibly by recording industry professionals The reproduction distribu tion or in some instances the public performance of all or a portion of a sound recording or musical composition protected by copyright without having obtained a proper license from the relevant copyright holders may constitute copyright infringement and may otherwise violate copyright laws and other laws In addition laws such as the Audio Home Recording Act and the Digital Millen nium Copyright Act in USA contain certain restrictions and
66. e Is the fader of the input channel or monitor chan nel raised e Is the fader of the stereo output channel raised e The EQ gain may be set to an extremely low value e The dynamics processor may be set to an extreme threshold or ratio e If you are connecting an electric guitar is it con nected to the Hi Z jack e Check the level in the HOME screen For details refer to P 75 HOME screen e Is the attenuator of the EQ screen or VIEW screen raised Sound is distorted e Is the GAIN control set correctly e The connection cable from the external device may be broken e The fader of the input channel or monitor chan nel may be raised excessively e The stereo output channel fader may be raised excessively e The stereo output channel attenuator may be raised excessively e The EQ gain may be excessively high e Did you record at an appropriate level e Is the word clock setting correct for both the AW4416 and the external device s e An effect such as Distortion or Amp Simulate may be in use AXVVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 35 Appendix Can t record e Is the internal hard disk connected e Is there sufficient free space on the internal hard disk e The song may be protected e Is the REC TRACK SELECT key lit e The stereo track may be in playback mode e Is the input signal routed appropriately to the recorder If the signal is being input appropriately to the
67. e Patch library numbers in which no data has been stored will be displayed with a title of No Data _ SET UP 29999 NEW SONG ___ scene GG EE INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data l UT SEL CH NP INPUT 1 CURRENT PATCH TRACK oo oo so oos oooooooo as 8880 88 oo s0 os oo000 s o 16 BEBE REE oooo 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the patch library number 01 20 in which you will store the settings Yip Patch library number 00 contains a preset patch program recall only that returns all patch settings to the initial state For this reason your settings cannot be stored in patch number 00 3 Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the ENTER key A TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the patch program 4 Use the CURSOR lt p gt A V keys and the ENTER key to specify the name for the patch program For details on inputting characters refer to page 60 138 Awun operation Guide Chapter8 Patching You can also write the patch program directly without accessing the TITLE EDIT popup window To do so turn off the STORE CONFIRMATION setting in the UTIL ITY screen Prefer 1 page U TILITY key gt F2 key In this case your settings will be saved in a library named New Data when you execute step 3 5 To execute the Store operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Xe If you decide to cancel
68. gt e F1 CD LOAD key Close the tray of the CD RW drive e F2 CD UNLOAD key Eject the tray of the CD RW drive F3 NEW key Add a new audio track to the track list This is the same function as the NEW button F4 INS key Insert a new audio track after the track number currently selected in the track list This is the same function as the INS button e F5 DEL key Delete the audio track currently selected in the track list This is the same function as the DEL button 0 AVVULNG Reference Guide 11 CD PLAY screen CD Play page Use the CD RW drive to play an audio CD Function Use a CD RW drive connected to CD PLAY EHER r car the AW4416 to play back an audio CD CD Play function Key operation CD PLAY key Mouse operation M button gt CD button Screen functions eD PLAY 00 00 44 696 J 120 0 4 4 TRACK TIME 0i 00 00 00 00 02 40 1 DRIVE 3 Counter Select the SCSI ID number of the internal or external CD RW drive 2 CD PLAY MODE button This displays the track number TRACK cur rently selected in the track list and the elapsed time of that track TIME This button switches the CD Play function on Track list off When the CD PLAY function is on you can use the keys of the Transport section to operate the CD RW drive CD RW drive operation PLAY key Play the CD STOP key Stop the CD F
69. move the cur sor to OK and press ENTER to begin the restore operation When the COMPLETE window appears the restore operation has fin ished It take about 10 minutes to restore the demo song Once the restore pro cess has begun it cannot be stopped 8 Awu Tutorial Tutorial Load the Demo Song Load the Demo Song from the Hard Disk 1 Press the SONG key and the F1 function key if necessary to select the Song List page 2 Use the DATA dial to select So Fine 3 Move the cursor to LOAD on the display and press ENTER When the Will Save Current song ARE YOU SURE confirmation prompt appears move the cursor to YES or NO and press ENTER to begin the load operation 4 When the progress window disappears the demo song has been loaded and is ready for playback If you want to hear the pre mixed version of So Fine before mixing it yourself Actually all you have to do is hit the PLAY button The So Fine demo will be loaded with automix enabled and will play through exactly the way we set it up AWURE Tutorial 9 Tutorial Mixdown Mixdown Although the term mixdown seems to imply a single action it is really a pro cess that can involve many interrelated steps As you become more experienced the individual steps will sort of blend into one larger operation This is important because at all times you ll ne
70. ms Outgain dB Knee Release ms Threshold dB Gate for the same purpose as Range dB program 001 Attack ms Hold ms Decay ms Threshold dB Hard compander for the same Ratio 1 purpose as program 001 Attack ms Outgain dB Width dB Release ms Threshold dB Compressor that gives the best Ratio 1 results with an acoustic snare drum 2 5 Attack ms Outgain dB 3 5 Knee 2 Release ms Threshold dB Expander for the same purpose as Ratio 1 program 005 Attack ms Outgain dB Knee Release ms Threshold dB Gate for the same purpose as Range dB program 005 Attack ms Hold ms Decay ms 12 23 2 0 0 5 2 8 23 1 0 63 238 AXVWVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 29 Appendix No 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 Name A Dr SN A Dr Tom A Dr OverTop E B finger E B slap Syn Bass Piano1 CPS EXP CPS CMP CMP CMP CMP Type CompanderS Expander CompanderS Compressor Compressor Compressor Compressor Parameter Value Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 11 Outgain dB 0 0 Width dB 10 Release
71. ms 128 Threshold dB 20 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 2 Outgain dB 5 0 Knee 2 Release ms 749 Threshold dB 24 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 38 Outgain dB 3 5 Width dB 54 Release ms 842 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 15 Outgain dB 4 5 Knee 2 Release ms 470 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 6 Outgain dB 4 0 Knee hard Release ms 133 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 9 Outgain dB 3 0 Knee hard Release ms 250 Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 17 Outgain dB 1 0 Knee hard Release ms 238 Appendix 30 AvwvuLne Reference Guide Description Soft compander for the same purpose as program 005 Expander for acoustic toms automatically reduces the volume when the toms are not played helping to differentiate the bass and snare drums clearly Soft compander to emphasize the attack and ambience of cymbals using overhead microphones It automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals are not played helping differentiate the bass and snare drums clearly Compressor to equalize the attack and volume level of a finger picked electric bass guitar Compressor to equalize the attack and volume level of a slap electric bass guitar Compressor to adjust and or emphasize the level of a synth bass Compressor to brighten the tonal color of a piano No 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 Name Piano2 E Gu
72. or Over Write if you want the data to be overwrit ten onto the track To execute the Import operation move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A message will ask you to confirm Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The CD DA import will be executed A Execution of this operation will require more time than the actual data length Also execu tion of the operation cannot be halted once it has begun 110 aAwutns Reference Guide EDIT screen Wavimport page Import a WAV file to an audio track Function Import a WAV format audio file from a CD ROM or CD ROM MO disk inserted in the internal CD RW drive or an external SCSI device and assign it to a track EDIT G GGGG NEW SONG way IMPORT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 WAY IMPORT TO REGION Key operation e EDIT key gt F4 WavImport key O m hand clars wav 00 00 00 176 16 r Repeatedly press the RECORDER H finser snar wayv BO 0O 0G 132 i Ao sidestick way 66 66 66 335 0 EDIT key until the screen a shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt RECORDER EDIT but ton gt WavImport tab Screen functions 1 DRIVE Move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the internal CD RW drive or external SCSI device PASTE TO Select the track number 1 16 and virtual track number 1 8 of the trac
73. press the ENTER key The scene will be stored and the AW4416 will be in the same state as when the store destination scene number of step 2 is recalled To cancel without storing the scene move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key vip e To prevent a stored scene from accidentally being overwritten you can make memory protect settings for each scene number For details refer to page 208 e You can use the keys of the SCENE MEMORY section to store a scene even when you are in a screen other than the SCENE screen Scene Mem page For details refer to page 211 AVVUUIG Operation Guide 205 Chapter1 3 Scene memory Recalling a scene Here s how to recall the scene data stored in a scene memory 1 Press the SCENE key gt F1 key The Scene Mem page of the SCENE screen will appear eA D000 00 o INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 terate Ho LIBRARY TITLE PRT 05 1 No Data 1 a4 FINAL MIX a3 TEST MIM 2 82 TEST HIH HAT TENLATE BE Initial Data 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the scene that you wish to recall 3 Use the CURSOR lt p gt A keys to move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the recall CONFIRMATION Hill Recall Scene 03 ARE YOU SURE 7 4 To execute the recall move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key To cancel without recalling move
74. refer to the manual for your CD RW drive e Ifyou install a CD RW drive manufactured by Yamaha the SCSI ID will be set to 3 at the factory and we recommend that you leave it at this setting 2 Attach a terminator to the last SCSI device in the chain A terminator is a device that terminates the SCSI signal at the end of the chain and is normally attached to the vacant SCSI connector of the last device in the daisy chain If the SCSI device has an active terminator a circuit that terminates the signal electrically turn it on For details of how to turn on the active termi nator refer to the manual of your SCSI device A Before using an external SCSI device you will need to format it For details on this procedure refer to page 250 AVVUUNG Operation Guide 11 Before you begin g About terminators Termination refers to the process of applying a resistor appropriate for the impedance of the SCSI bus to terminate the end of the circuit The resistor required for this is called the terminator Normally a terminator must be installed at the beginning and end of the SCSI bus in the case of the example shown above this would be the AW4416 itself and the SCSI device connected to the end of the daisy chain However this is only a general principle and is not an absolute Depending on the combination of SCSI devices the order of connection or on the length of the SCSI cables there may be cas
75. the ahy symbol at the left of the on screen counter will be highlighted lm on highlighted Joca NEH 5i ANPUTS _ 000 00 08 AUTOM TRANSPORT ABORT STOP PLAY REC AUTO REC 1 a While listening to the song operate the faders of each channel When you have finished your operations press the STOP key on the top panel to stop the song The on screen REC button will turn off normal display and automix recording will stop A message will ask whether you wish to update the automix with the newly recorded content CONFIRMATION Update Mix AVVULNG Operation Guide 217 Chapter1 4 Automix 11 If you wish to update the automix with the newly recorded content move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The automix will be updated If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key the recorded content will be discarded and the automix will return to its previous state Note e Ifin step 10 you move the cursor to the ABORT button and press the EN TER key the recorded content will be discarded in the same way and the automix will return to its previous state e Automix recording can also be stopped by using the on screen STOP button instead of the STO P key In this case automix recording will stop but the song will continue playing e Even after updating the automix content you still move the cursor to the UNDO button in the right side of the screen
76. the track view will zoom out horizontally three levels e The metronome sound will not be output while the song is stopped 92 Aw uns Reference Guide Viewing a waveform for the audio data of a track Access the TRACK screen TR View page and use the CURSOR A keys to select the track whose waveform you wish to view While stopped locate the song to the place where you wish to view the wave form and press the SHIFT key F2 key The WAVE DISPLAY popup window will appear E 00 00 14 487 1 Pointer Pointer location 3 Level magnification lt 1 x64 adjustment 4 Time axis magnification x1 x4096 adjust ment If you wish to move the pointer location rotate the DATA JOG dial Rotating the DATA OG dial toward the right will move the pointer forward and rotating it toward the left will move the pointer backward A e The keys of the locate transport section can not be used while the waveform is displayed e The audio of the corresponding track cannot be monitored while the DATAJOG dial is being used to move the pointer e This function can be used only while the song is stopped If you wish to locate the song to the pointer position move the cursor to the LOCATE button and press the ENTER key The WAVE DISPLAY popup window will close and the song will locate to the location of the pointer TRACK screen 5 If you wish to close the WAVE DISPL
77. tings to other channels 1 Access the DYN DLY screen Dly 1 16 Dly 1 7 24 Dly oMONI page 2 Move the cursor to the delay time param eter or the button of the copy source channel 3 Press the SHIFT key F5 key The following confirmation screen will appear CONFIRMATION Copy to All CH This Parameter ARE YOU SURE 4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key 66 Awuus Reference Guide AUX1 AUX6 screens Pre Pst IN Pre Pst MONI pages Make on off and pre post settings for the AUX sends Function Make on off and pre post settings for the signal sent from the input chan nels return channels and monitor channels to AUX buses 1 6 Key operation e AUX 1 AUX 6 keys gt F1 Pre Pst IN key F2 Pre Pst MONI key e Repeatedly press an AUX 1 AUX 6 key until the desired page appears Mouse operation M button gt AUX 1 AUX 6 buttons gt Pre Pst IN tab Pre Pst MONI tab Screen functions Channels This area shows the channels whose AUX send pre post settings are being switched 2 ON OFF buttons These buttons are on off switches for the signal that is sent from each channel to the corresponding AUX bus 3 PRE POST buttons These buttons switch the signal sent from each channel to the cor responding AUX bus between pre fader and post fader locations 4 Send levels These indicate the send level val ues of each channel
78. will switch the EQ type to HPF high pass filter For the HIGH band EQ turning the Q knob all the way in the clockwise direction will switch 54 Awvuns Reference Guide Set the center frequency that will be boosted or cut Range 21 Hz 20 1 kHz G gain knob Set the amount of boost or cut If the LOW or HIGH bands are set to HPF or LPF respectively this knob switches them on off Range 18 dB 18 dB ON OFF LOW HIGH bands only The Q F and G parameters of each band can also be controlled by the EQ HIGH HI MIDJ LO MID LOW keys and EQ QI F G keys located at the right of the display If AUTO EQ DISPLAY is turned ON in the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTILITY key gt F2 key operating these keys or controls will automatically cause the EQ ATT page to automatically appear if any other page is cur rently selected EQ ATT GRP screen E Additional functions in the EQ Copying the attenuation setting Att page to all channels In the EQ Att page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional functions to the Procedure F1 F2 and F5 keys 1 Access the EQ Att page for the copy source channel and move the cursor to the ATT knob 2 Press the SHIFT key F5 key A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear asking you to confirm the copy e F1 FLAT key A Reset all bands to a boost cut amount of 0 0 dB If the cursor is at a location other tha
79. 1 Release ms 180 Appendix 34 AULAS Reference Guide Description A template for a limiter using the compressor program This program is a PEAK STOP type Compressor intended to reduce the overall volume level Use for the stereo out during mixdown Itis also interesting on stereo input signals A variation of program 038 It has a harder compression ratio A variation of program 038 It has an extreme compression ratio almost a limiter in effect Appendix Troubleshooting If the AW4416 does not operate as you expect or if you suspect a prob lem please refer to the following points and take the appropriate action EPower does not turn on e Is the power cable connected to an AC outlet of the correct voltage e Is the POWER switch turned ON e If the power still does not turn on please contact your Yamaha dealer MInternal hard disk is not detected e Is the internal hard disk connected correctly e The pins of the internal hard disk may have been deformed e Has the internal hard disk been formatted appro priately If an unformatted hard disk is installed a message will appear when the power is turned on asking you whether you wish to format the hard disk MILCD display is dim or dark e Use the contrast knob located at the lower right of the screen to adjust the contrast E input sound is not output e Are speakers or headphones connected cor rectly e Is your amp and other ext
80. 1 Saving loading a song s2cresee koa eeebraeeatenee sarees 1 Setting page sece ceee e ese eRe oe A sane se 2 Make various settings for the current song 0 2 Song Edit page esssssssnsosserorsesosseseresseses 4 Deleting copying optimizing songs 0 000000 08 4 Tempo Map Page visas e666 ened WHOS OS ORR ee REE TS wee 5 Programming the tempo map 2 e ee eee eee es 5 Shut Down page 2 2 sedeiecesiuiiaudessocuesuecmomees 7 Shut down the AW4416 11 ee eee eee Z QUICK REC screen ccc ee ee eee ee eee ee 8 Quick Rec page s c sae eden Ohne dee eceud heen eee ats 8 Simultaneously recording 16 inputs 16 tracks 8 MASTERING screen cccccccccccvceeve 10 Write CD page 22 35 o gues aneedaseen Dieses awewena ees 10 Using a CD RW drive to create an audio CD 10 CD PLAY screen ccc ccc ccc ccc ccc ccc ee 12 CD Play pagesi ceraus scassi cannes atinddeaeneaawes 12 Use the CD RW drive to play an audio CD 12 SET UP screen ccc ccc cc ccccvccvccceee 14 Pat h IN page ats ce dehianda ce eee eee eth dled sani we as 14 Patching a signal toa channel track 20000005 14 Patch OUT page si cdevadiek es iade tec me Rela as 16 Patch signals to output jacks crc gc dabigsekieaten ve den 16 Patch Lib page ic casi cecess ae eeee sc vaatieeeasaanes 18 Store or recall patching settings 0 00 0 eee eee 18 D in Se
81. 2 The levels of the signals sent from the I O card INPUT to tracks 1 16 i e record ing levels will be displayed in the level meter counter 7 As necessary use the faders of input channels 1 16 to adjust the record ing level of tracks 1 16 The faders of input channels 1 16 will be reset to nominal level 0 dB when Quick Rec is executed Adjust the recording level if necessary A If you wish to use the faders to adjust the recording level the POST FADER but ton must be turned on in the DIRECT OUT EXTRACT POSITION field of the UTILITY screen gt Prefer 1 page 8 When you finish recording on the AW4416 press the ALL SAFE key Record ready and mute status will be canceled for all tracks AULAS Operation Guide 145 Chapter8 Patching 146 Awuuns operation Guide Track and virtual track operations This chapter explains the track structure of the recorder section and how to perform editing and other operations The track structure of the AW4416 The recorder section of the AW4416 handles three types of tracks audio tracks virtual tracks and the stereo track O Audio tracks These are physical tracks that are used for actual recording and playback and are also referred to simply as tracks When the AW4416 is in its initial state the output of buses 1 8 is patched to the inputs of tracks 1 8 9 16 and the output of tracks 1 16 is patched to monitor channels 1 16 This allows a ma
82. 52 V Aw uuns Reference Guide Table of contents EQ ATT GRP screen cccccccccccee D4 EQ AU page sitios idee bk RNR RD ES eek ee heme CE 54 EQ and attenuation settings eee ee eee ee eee 54 Library page v2s4diccceersactoceiesicsen ees eswaeeess 56 Store or recall EQ settings 0 e eee ee eee eee eee 56 FaderGrp page os ic0k ius rate eserarees i bcceeeeeucecs 58 Set and cancel fader groups 2 e e eee eee eee 58 Mute Grp pag 654453664 Nees Kee vots eitidiveris TESS 59 Set and cancel mute groups 20 icy seucee ceeede tees ese es 2 59 DYN DLY screen ccccccccvcccvceee 60 Dyn Edit page lt senansa in eee ohne ta ee ew aaded 60 Dynamics processor parameter settings 0000 60 Library page iaccceidiws oondectarGe sce de eens eaecews 62 Storing and recalling dynamics processor settings 62 Dly 91 16 Dly o17 24 Dly oMONI pages 65 Set delay and phase 24 5245065 si bss eeseeide dees tes ices 65 AUX1 AUX6G screens 2 0cccccccveeee 67 Pre Pst IN Pre Pst MONI pages 0 0c cece ee cece 67 Make on off and pre post settings for the AUX sends 67 AUX7 EFF1 and AUX8 EFF2 screens 69 Eff Edit page 4 vccseae note eur eeGn te wn oneeerraes 69 Edit internal effects 122 c g2xss lt yseueny Sededeevensexeas 69 Library page sc 5 4cc eden Meee eee ected eee Rees as 71 Store or recall an effect program
83. A variation on program 018 intended for string instruments with a very low range such as cellos or contrabass Compressor intended for brass sounds with fast and strong attack Appendix 31 Appendix 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 Name Syn Pad SamplingPerc Sampling BD Sampling SN Hip Comp Solo Vocal1 Solo Vocal2 CMP CPS CMP CMP CPS CMP CMP Type Compressor CompanderS Compressor Compressor CompanderS Compressor Compressor Parameter Value Threshold dB 13 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 58 Outgain dB 2 0 Knee 1 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 8 Outgain dB 2 5 Width dB 18 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 14 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 2 Outgain dB 3 5 Knee 4 Release ms 35 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 4 Attack ms 8 Outgain dB 8 0 Knee hard Release ms 354 Threshold dB 23 Ratio 1 20 Attack ms 15 Outgain dB 0 0 Width dB 15 Release ms 163 Threshold dB 20 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 31 Outgain dB 2 0 Knee 1 Release ms 342 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 26 Outgain dB 1 5 Knee 3 Release ms 331 Appendix 32 AvWvuLne Reference Guide Description Compressor for synth pad intended to prevent diffusion of the so
84. Chapter6 Transport locate operations 3 To move the current location forward turn the DATA JOG dial toward the right To move the current location backward turn the DATA JOG dial toward the left If time display SECOND is selected as the counter display mode the current location will move in millisecond steps If time code display TIME CODE is selected as the counter display mode the current location will move in sub frame steps Use SHUTTLE dial ae to move to approxi O mate location Current gt ae location Use DATA JOG dial to move in a a small steps Nudge time A If you use the Nudge function when the counter display is set to MEASURE turn ing the DATA JO G dial will move only in steps of one beat meaning that you will not be able to set the location precisely Before using the N udge function you should switch the counter display to either the Time display or the Time Code display Refer to Reference Guide SONG screen Setting page Kp Normally turning the Nudge function on will repeatedly play a 100 msec region starting at the current location However you can change the play mode of the Nudge function so that the repeated region ends at the current location or adjust the length nudge time of the repeated region For details on play mode and nudge time settings refer to the section below Nudge function settings 4 To defeat the Nudge function press the JOG ON key or
85. Continue STATUS 11110010 F2 Song Position Pointer DATA Oddddddd ddd data H high 7 bits of 14 bits data Oddddddd ddl data L low 7 bits of 14 bits data 4 7 TIMING CLOCK F8 lt Transmission gt If MIDI Clock is being transmitted Timing Clock messages are transmitted according to the MIDI tempo map whenever the recorder is playing or recording until it stops STATUS 11111000 F8 4 8 START FA lt Transmission gt If MIDI Clock is being transmitted this message is transmit ted when the recorder begins playback or recording from the first measure STATUS 11111010 FA Start 4 9 CONTINUE FB lt Transmission gt If MIDI Clock is being transmitted this message is transmit ted when the recorder begins playback or recording from a location other than the first measure STATUS 11111011 FB 4 10 STOP FC lt Transmission gt If MIDI Clock is being transmitted this message is transmit ted when the recorder stops STATUS 11111100 FC Stop 4 11 ACTIVE SENSING FE lt Reception gt Once this message has been received an interval of 300 ms in which no message has been received will cause MIDI communications to be initialized by clearing the running status etc STATUS 11111110 FE 4 12 RESET lt Reception gt If a Reset message is received MIDI communications will be initialized by clearing the running status etc STATUS 11111111 FF Reset 4 13 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES F0 F7 4 13 1 MMC STOP lt Transmission gt
86. DELAY ER Delay and early reflections effects in parallel Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 ee normal phase feedback minus values HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio TYPE a ee eae Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY ER 0 100 ie early reflections balance 0 early reflections 100 MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Appendix 20 AvwvuLne Reference Guide Appendix DELAY gt ER Delay and early reflections effects in series Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time EB GAIN 99 to 99 pl aaa OE normal phase feedback minus values HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio TYPE A EN
87. Disk 8 Load the Demo Song from the Hard Disk eesseeesececessseceeeessneeecesseeeeeees 9 IAI KEL OWM eens sasiadeaheadbvicsawiaednddesacesondssbekenkanbexeaelouetonad aodeousteneneeete 10 Phase 1 Listen To the Tracks and Make a Plan cccceseeccceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeees 10 Bo h EEE abet he Sc vase bom A I es ole AEE E EEEE E peace 10 Phase 2 Set Up a Rough MiX sessssssesssssssseersssreesssrresssressreeessereesssererssreresreees 12 Start with the Drums cccccesseecccceseecccceeeccceeeeeeccseuesecceseeeceseeenens 12 Add the Claves Electronic Drums Track ccccccceecccsescceecceeesceeeesceees 13 Add the Bass Track xsi sssisissssassesiccassicvoctvardosssaasgosbecccovovecesodedecedouseceseers 13 Add the Guitar Tracks ccccccccccesseccceeesecceeeeccceceeeecceeeeeeceseueeseseees 13 Add the Organ amp Piano Tracks 0 eee eceesseeecesreeecenseeeceesseeeeesseeeees 13 Add the String Tracks scscc cesses atsasedcaesndedsdescdeieesecsesdes idenedassdsseeutadies 13 Add the Lead Vocali 3 ssecisscbeseisesdccsdeside sbeensteatesnsseeedenodececenadecereveecedeoes 14 AGC the aal R IAEE T EE E ARERR A 14 Listen oieee E E A A E a d 14 Save the SONG is csibcs suevelsssssvebsvssavetsiadeledsiedetetadeiecebsiniescheadiceshoasebedsadsn 14 Phase 3 Assemble the Mix Part by Part ee eseeceeseceessnceeeesseeesessseeeeees 15 TACKS tS 2 gt DRUMS 5133 sh a shoe avsesse eae loascesvavas
88. EXTERNAL button is on move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATAJOG dial to select one of the following jacks for use as the insert return jack e AD1 AD8 INPUT 1 8 jacks e SL1 1 SL1 8 Input channels 1 8 of OPTION I O slot 1 e SL2 1 SL2 8 Input channels 1 8 of OPTION I O slot 2 e D STIN L R L R channels of the DIGI TAL STEREO IN jack e When the INT EFF 1 or INT EFF 2 button is on the input and output of internal effect 1 2 will automatically be assigned to the insert send return of that channel This assignment cannot be changed e For the procedure of inserting an external effect into a channel refer to Operation Guide Chapter 8 Patching e For the procedure of inserting an internal effect into a channel refer to Operation Guide Chapter 10 Internal effects 4X Fader This shows the current fader location both graphically and numerically The setting can also be edited in this page You can also move the cursor to the fader and rotate the DATA JOG dial to modify the fader setting AUX This shows the send level and pre post selection for AUX buses 1 8 These settings can also be edited in this page The heart symbol indicates AUX buses that are paired 5 ON OFF This switches the channel on off E Additional functions in the CH View page In the CH View page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional functions to the F1
89. LOW If the LOW indication appears please contact your dealer to have the battery replaced 6 REMOVABLE BACKUP This specifies the backup method when backing up songs to removable media such as MO Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to switch the setting between the following two methods Default TYPE 1 TYPE 1 This backup method makes full use of the capacity of the removable media but does not allow backup data to be added later Even if the data being backed up will not fit on a single vol ume of media the backup can extend across multiple volumes of media If this method is selected the media will be formatted automati cally before the backup begins AVVULNG Reference Guide 37 UTILITY screen TYPE 2 This backup method allows new backup data to be added to media on which data was previ ously backed up It is not possible to backup data that extends across multiple volumes of media Before you can use this method to backup on previously unused media you must format the media manually Xe For details on the procedure for backing up songs refer to Operation Guide Chapter 16 Backing up and restoring songs 6 MASTERING MODE Use the following two buttons to select the writ ing mode that will be used when you execute the Mastering function TEST button If this button is on a test will be performed before writing data to the CD R RW media to see whet
90. LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 8 00 k Hz Parametric equalizer center frequency EQG 12 to 12 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQQ 10 0 10 Parametric equalizer band width HSH F 50 0 16 0 k Hz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds PHASER 16 stage phaser Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth EB GAIN 99 to 99 eae aA ara a normal phase feedback minus values OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset STAGE 2 4 8 10 12 14 16 Number of phase shift stages LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50 0 16 0 k Hz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds AUTOPAN Auto panner Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DIR 1 Panning direction WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 8 00 k Hz Parametric equalizer center frequency EQ G 12 to 12 dB Parametric equalizer g
91. MONITOR OUT jacks If you are satisfied with the recorded result turn off the TRACK CUE key The REC TRACK SELECT ST key will go dark simultaneously To defeat muting for audio tracks 1 16 access the TRACK screen Stereo page and turn the M mute button on once again Xe Only one stereo track can be used for each song If you wish to try the mixdown again perform the Undo operation If Undo is not possible access the TRACK screen Stereo page move the cursor to the ST TRACK ERASE button in the right side of the screen and press the EN TER key to erase the stereo track Then record it once again 104 Awun operation Guide Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Saving a scene song O Saving a scene If you wish to reproduce the mixer settings as well when you recall the current song at a later time you must store the current mix parameters as a Scene 1 Use the YILA keys in the SCENE MEMORY section of the top panel to select the store destination scene number 01 96 The currently selected scene number will appear in the upper right of the level meter counter SCENE MEMORY ro Y A e mS WORD CLOCK m CENE 34 1k 48k MASTER INT EXT stale ESATA 42 2660 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ae ABT
92. NO REC ESSE Be J 120 0 4 4 3C NO REC J 4C NO REC IJ SC NO REC J 6C NO REC 7C NO REC J REC 1 This screen shows the following information Track number This is the track number 1 16 currently selected for editing If this track is paired a heart symbol and the other track of the pair will be dis played Virtual track number This is the virtual track number 1 8 3 Track name This is the name assigned to the virtual track 4 Bar graph Bar graphs indicate the presence or absence of audio data for each virtual track AVVUUIG Operation Guide 159 Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations TRACK PART REGION menus These respectively access editing commands for editing entire tracks parts or regions Move the cursor to the desired menu and press the ENTER key to view the list of editing commands Parameter setting area In this area you can make the necessary parameter settings when executing the editing command 2 Move the cursor to the track number area and use the DATA JOG dial to select the track 1 16 that you wish to edit When you switch tracks the track names and bar graph display of virtual tracks 1 8 will change accordingly 3 According to the smallest unit entire virtual track part region that you wish to edit move the cursor to the TRACK PART or REGION menu and press the ENTER key The selected menu of editing commands wil
93. OMNI OUT jacks 1 4 MONITOR OUT jacks PHONES jack IN connector Channel insert I O Stereo bus insert I O x8 INPUT dans tee Input channels 1 24 OPTION I O OPTION I O Effect returns 1 2 x8 slot 1 1 0 1 0 L_ slot 1 x8 Monitor channels 1 16 a card card 2 OPTION I O OPTION I O Buses 1 8 x8 slot2 1 0 vo STEREO b fa tera card us 1x2 AUX buses 1 8 5 STEREO OUT jacks DIGITAL STEREO SOLO bus S DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack gt Data Backup Restore Sampling pads section Recorder section AW4416 The signal flow within each section is explained in detail in the pages that follow 22 Awvuns operation Guide Chapterl1 Welcome to the world of the AW4416 Input patch The input patch section is where input signals are assigned to input channels 1 24 and return channels 1 2 The following types of input signal can be selected O MIC LINE INPUT Input signals from analog INPUT jacks 1 8 O OPTION IN Input signals from an I O card installed in rear panel OPTION I O slots 1 2 Up to 8 channels of signal can be input simultaneously from a single I O card O SAMPLING PAD Output signals of pads 1 8 in the sampling pad section O EFFECT 1 2 Return signals from internal effects 1 2 O DIGITAL STEREO IN Input signals from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack O METRONOME The playback of the internal metronome The following input signals can be assigned
94. PAD button used to select a pad and the NAME button used to assign a name SANP PAD HETHES ___ PAD EDIT 00 00 00 000 J i20 0 4 4 PAD NAME 3 OME v H itSmeter J NAME button EI Y AT etme ltr 3 meltre e eoargee ne i A 6C NO ASN 3 Y AZ Z3 NO A sC NoO aS 1C NO id ZC NO p 7C NO iad SC NO 3 Move the cursor to the PAD button and press the ENTER key The cursor will move to the PAD No area at the lower right 4 Use the CURSOR keys and the DATA JOG dial to select the bank and number of the pad that you wish to name 5 Press the ENTER key The cursor will return to the PAD button AVVUUIG Operation Guide 193 Chapter12 Sampling pads 6 Move the cursor to the NAME button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to input the name igi amp eeeee eeee eeeaeeeeeaoeaeoeoeaoe eos eaoeaeeeoeeaeoee eo 8 A name ai up to eight harass can be input NAME EDIT PAD A 1 fier PRESS OK TO STORE SHIFT LOCK ins C WAEWAHOAR Se augaonanaa naoonoonanut oaunouanmumedk 7 After assigning the desired name move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key A E EEEE ESEEEEEKESESESEESEESEESESESEESEEEELEEEE E For details on inputting ahadi refer to page 60 Erasing a pad sample and name Here s how to erase the sample and name assigned to a pad returning that pad to the initial state 1 In th
95. REV gt CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series 31 Rev Flange REV FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel 32 Rev gt Flange REV gt FLANGE Reverb and flanger in series 33 Rev Sympho REV SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic in parallel 34 Rev gt Sympho REV gt SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic in series 35 Rev gt Pan REV gt PAN Reverb and auto pan in parallel 36 Delay ER DELAY ER Delay and early reflections in parallel 37 Delay gt ER DELAY gt ER Delay and early reflections in series 38 Delay Rev DELAY REV Delay and reverb in parallel 39 Delay gt Rev DELAY gt REV Delay and reverb in series 40 Dist gt Delay DIST gt DELAY Distortion and delay in series Other Effects Title Type Description 41 Multi Filter MULTI FILTER Three band parallel filter 24 dB octave AULUS Reference Guide Appendix 7 Appendix Effects Parameters REVERB HALL REVERB ROOM REVERB STAGE REVERB PLATE Hall room stage and plate simulations all with gates Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio LO RATIO 0 1 2 4 Low frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density E R DLY 0 0 100 0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb E R BAL 0 100 Balance of early reflections and reverb 0 ER 10
96. S Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY ER 0 100 en Sy reflected delay balance 0 early reflected delay MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds DELAY REV Delay and reverb effects in parallel Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time EB GAIN 99 to 99 ae ey normal phase feedback minus values DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency DLY REV 0 100 Delay and reverb balance 0 reverb 100 delay MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds AXVWVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 21 Appendix
97. SIZE This displays the length of the currently assigned sample in units of one sample AVVULNG Operation Guide 191 Chapter1 2 Sampling pads 7 Use the DATA JOG dial to specify the amount of trimming in sample units 8 Press the ENTER key 9 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the trimming operation CONFIRMATION Execute PAD TRIM IN EP NAM A 1 Smeltr TRIM IN 321 sample 10 To execute the trimming operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The beginning or end of the sample will be deleted as you specified Strike the pad to hear the results A Once you execute the trimming operation it cannot be reversed by pressing the UNDO key If you wish to make fine adjustments again you must re assign the region 192 Aw uuns operation Guide Chapter1 2 Sampling pads Naming a pad You can name each pad to which a sample is assigned 1 In the SAMPLING PAD section press the EDIT pad gt F4 key The PAD Edit page will appear SAMP PAD HETHER_____ PAD EDIT 00 00 00 00D 2 120 0 4 4 3 Chame gt e ATICSme ltr j A ZCSmP itr 4 A SCSmPitr 9 4cSmeitre rein 1H gt YA A TEtSme ite 4 TRIM oT eo A Hs NO vE 1C N0 ZC NO 7C NO oad 8C No 2 Move the cursor to the NAME menu and press the ENTER key The display will show the
98. T COMP time compression expansion Compress or expand the length of the selected part in a range of 50 200 without affecting the pitch e TRACK Select the track that you wish to compress expand e START Specify the starting location of the part that you wish to compress expand e END Specify the ending location of the part that you wish to compress expand e RATIO Specify the compression expansion ratio in units of 0 01 range 50 200 e EXECUTE Execute the command START END Er a T COMP time compression i 50 _ AAW START END i T COMP time expansion 150 S AVATATAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVI EDIT screen PITCH pitch change Modify the pitch of the selected part without changing the length of the audio e TRACK Select the track whose pitch you wish to modify e START Specify the starting location of the part whose pitch you wish to modify e END Specify the ending location of the part whose pitch you wish to modify e PITCH Adjust the amount of pitch change in semitone units range 12 semitones e FINE Adjust the amount of pitch change in one cent units range 50 cents e EXECUTE Execute the command vip Immediately after executing any editing com mand of the PART menu you can press the UNDO key to return the data to its previous condition A Executing the T COMP or PITCH commands will require more processing time than the
99. The PART menu allows you to specify an area part of the selected track and execute an edit ing command A An area that contains no audio data cannot be specified as a part The commands that can be selected in the PART menu and their parameters are listed below ERASE Erase the audio data from the selected part If all audio data in a track is erased the track name will return to the NO REC display e TRACK Select the track from which you wish to erase data For the Erase command you can specify all tracks as the subject of the operation To do so rotate the DATAJOG dial all the way clockwise when setting the TRACK parameter to make the selection read AL C ALL CUR RENT With this setting the START END por tion of the virtual tracks currently selected for tracks 1 16 will be selected for the operation e ALL V TR all virtual tracks Select whether data will be erased from all vir tual tracks included in the selected track s YES or only from the currently selected virtual track NO e START Specify the starting location of the part to be erased e END Specify the ending location of the part to be erased e EXECUTE Execute the command START END ERASE i GE B DELETE Delete the audio data from the selected part Subsequent audio data will be moved forward by the length of the deleted part e TRACK Select the track from which you wish to delete data Fo
100. To execute the recall move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key If desired you can cause the Recall operation to be executed immediately when you press the RECALL key instead of accessing the popup window For details on this setting refer to the Reference Guide UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page 212 Awun operation Guide 73 Automix This chapter explains how to record and play back automix and how to edit a recorded automix What is automix The AW4416 provides an automix function that allows controller operations and parameter changes to be recorded in realtime along with the song Scene recall operations or movements of the channel faders and ON keys can be recorded into the automix to completely automate the mix You will find this par ticularly valuable when performing ping pong recording or during mixdown The following items can be recorded in the automix e Fader operations of each channel e ON key operations of each channel e Pan operations of each channel e EQ operations of each channel e AUX send operations of each channel e Scene memory library recall operations You can record fader operations pan operations EQ operations and scene mem ory recall operations etc in separate passes or use punch in out to re record spe cific items The timing and values of individual pieces of recorded data referred to as events can be edited off line i e with
101. Twin voice pitch shifter Parameter Range Description PITCH 1 24 to 24 semitones Channel 1 pitch shift FINE 1 50 to 50 cents Channel 1 pitch shift fine PAN 1 L16 1 C R1 16 Channel 1 panpot DELAY 1 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 1 delay time FB G 1 99 to 99 Channel 1 feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback LEVEL 1 L100 to 100 Channel 1 level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse phase PITCH 2 24 to 24 semitones Channel 2 pitch shift FINE 2 50 to 50 cents Channel 2 pitch shift fine PAN 2 L16 1 C R1 16 Channel 2 panpot DELAY 2 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 2 delay time FBG 2 99 to 99 Channel 2 feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback LEVEL 2 L100 to 100 Channel 2 level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse phase MODE 1 10 Pitch shift precision MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds AWULHS Reference Guide Appendix 13 Appendix ROTARY Rotary speaker simulator Parameter Range Description ROTATE STOP START Rotation stop start SPEED SLOW FAST Rotation speed see SLOW and FAST parameters DRIVE 0 100 Overdrive level ACCEL 0 10 Accelation at speed changes LOW 0 100 Low frequency filter HIGH 0 100 High frequency filter SLOW 0 05
102. Using AUX send return to apply an effect 166 ALC INNA es eies ceo sar E eat ig ee RS ER RG ik Be Se oe S 166 Recalling an effect program from the library 167 Switching between pre fader and post fader 169 Adjusting the send level return level 0 00000 170 Adjusting the send level os hac46 4 s ates be atetd odes 170 xil AwWutns operation Guide Table of contents Inserting an effect into a desired channel 171 Patching eisie ice ik Ain a nat Shera ea ean haa EE R A Neha Be gears 171 Inserting an effect into monitor channel 1 05 172 Recalling an effect Prostalitas 5 paseo ba ene es sox secede ealee 174 Chapter 11 Song management 2 175 ADOUL SONGS io bids e8s Se ba edie eads 35 Sa S Gaia 175 Saving loading a SONg eee eee eee eee ee ee eee e eee 176 Saving the current SOng ove teehee 8 piel ate ed ode eked 176 Loading a Songp 4 22 Jan nes anteater pales oa Aas Se alee sn 177 Editing the song name comment 0 00 eee ee eee 178 Deleting copying a song ccc eee e ee eee cence 179 Deleting aSOnee itera tHAce eee tee ee aoe eau O ae EAE 179 COpPVINEA SONE cts sels ea aa a 4 ee banged bey tahun aa Sea cps 181 Optimizi g a SONP a stor eos priata closa ecg ah sent ea i 182 Importing mixer data of an existing song 04 183 Chapter 12 Sampling pads
103. allowing these to be used as sources for the sampling pads 3 A CD RW drive is optional J Other features O Simple panel layout and efficient operation The AW4416 features a large backlit LCD and a three color FL display providing a graphic user interface that can be used intuitively and efficiently A serial mouse 9 pin D sub connector can also be connected O Two I O card option slots Two slots support a variety of formats including ADAT TASCAM AES EBU and analog The AW4416 is designed with an open architecture for superb expand ability O Sophisticated connectivity TO HOST connector and SCSI connector SCSI 2 are standard ensuring easy connection to computers external SCSI devices and MIDI devices WORD CLOCK IN OUT connectors are also provided to allow the construction of digital systems for a variety of applications In addition MTC MIDI clock can be used for synchronization and MMC commands can control the AW4416 from an external device 4 External SCSI devices can be used only to back up data They cannot be used to record audio data directly AVVUUNG Operation Guide 21 Chapter 1 Welcome to the world of the AW4416 Signal flow within the AW4416 The following diagram shows the general signal flow of the AW4416 As you can see from this diagram the AW4416 consists of several sections input patch out put patch mixer sampling pads recorder and CD RW drive optional Mixer section
104. almost imme diately With a slow attack time the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected Out Gain sets the expander s output signal level Knee sets the transition of the signal at the threshold With a hard knee the transition between unexpanded and expanded signal is immediate With the softest knee knee5 the transition starts before the signal reaches the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold Release determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold Appendix 26 AULAS Reference Guide Appendix Compander Output Level al ce a Threshold tar aioe 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level A compander is a compressor expander a combination of signal compres sion and expansion The compander attenuates the input signal above the threshold as well as the level below the width For very dynamic material this program allows you to retain the dynamic range without having to be concerned with excessive output signal levels and clipping CompanderH CPH and CompanderS CPS parameters Parameter Value Threshold dB 54 to 0 55 points Ratio 1 0 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 10 20 15 points Attack ms 0 to 120 121 points Outgain dB 18 to 0 36 points Width dB 1 to 90 90 points Release ms 5 ms to 42 3 sec 6 ms to 46 0 sec 2 8 m
105. also be set indi vidually by using the SET key IN key or SET key OUT key GGGG NEW SONG 44 1KH2 4 2o rO 01 11 380 89 31 982 80 87 544 A B A point B point These locate points can be used as the area for A B repeat playback These points can be set individually by using the SET key A key or SET key B key A The units used for the in out points and the A B points will depend on the counter display method time time code measure If measure display is selected beat will be the smallest unit by which a locate point can be adjusted 2 Marker This area displays a list of markers 1 99 Move the cursor to the MARKER column and select the marker number Then move the cursor to the POSITION column and adjust the position of the corresponding marker A e When adjusting the position of a marker it is not possible to move a marker beyond the preceding or following marker e Marker numbers are automatically assigned in sequence from the beginning of the song If you delete a marker the marker numbers will be re assigned appropriately AVVULNG Reference Guide 97 TRACK screen 3 DELETE button valid only when using the mouse This button deletes a previously set locate point or marker In this page you can delete the locate point or marker simply by moving the cursor to it and pressing the ENTER key or using the mouse to click the DELETE button
106. and use the DATA JOG dial to select the WAV file that you wish to import The file enclosed by the dotted lines in the cen ter of the list is selected for the operation Kp indicates the current directory and 1 indicates the directory above To return to the next highest directory move the cursor to O and press the ENTER key Move the cursor to the PASTE TO area and use the DATA JOG dial to select the track number 1 16 and virtual track number 1 8 of the track in which the WAV file will be placed 1p If you select a stereo WAV file in step 4 iden tically numbered virtual tracks for a pair of adjacent odd numbered gt even numbered tracks e g 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 will be selected and the L R channels of the WAV file will be assigned to these tracks Move the cursor to the location point area below PASTE TO and use the DATA JOG dial to specify the location in the track where the WAV file will be placed Set the TYPE parameter to Insert if you wish to insert the WAV file into the track or to OverWrite if you wish to overwrite the WAV file onto the track To execute the WAV file import move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you for confirmation Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The WAV file import will be executed A Execution of this operation requires a longer time than
107. automix stopped Up to sixteen different automixes can be stored in internal memory for a song and you can recall and use any one of these automixes as desired The currently selected automix is called the current automix The sixteen automixes saved in internal memory are saved on the hard disk as part of the currently selected song the current song A eeeeeeeeaeaeaeoaeeoeaeaeneoeeoeanoeeoeoeeeneee2e20202000808008088080 8 The automix of the AW 4416 is always linked to the absolute time of the song When you play back the song automix will start playing or recording at the same absolute time and when you stop the song automix will also stop It is not pos sible to use the automix function by itself with the song stopped or to change the alignment between the starting location of the song and the starting location of automix AVY ULUNE Operation Guide 21 3 Chapter1 4 Automix Creating a new automix In order to record an automix you must first create a new automix A When you create a new automix the contents of the current automix will be erased If you wish to save the contents of the current automix refer to page 228 Storing an automix 1 While playing back the beginning of the song set the channel faders pan EQ and effect send return etc and save the settings in a scene memory The scene you save here will be the starting point for recording the automix Alternatively if you wi
108. be displayed if a digital signal that cannot be synchronized with the word clock source is input from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack or from an optional I O card Default on 34 Aw Reference Guide UTILITY screen Prefer 2 page Make overall settings for the AW4416 2 Function Set the rollback time pre roll post roll time and the nudge playback method etc Key operation e UTILITY key gt F3 Prefer 2 key e Repeatedly press the UTILITY key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt UTIL button gt Pre fer 2 tab Screen functions O GRID This sets the minimum unit when you specify an area in the EDIT screen TR Edit page or V TR Edit page For example if the grid value is set to 00 00 00 010 the specified location will move in 10 millisecond increments for each click of the DATAJOG dial Default 00 00 00 000 A e The value you specify here will not affect how you adjust locate points TRACK screen Mark Adj page or how you specify locate points using the NUM LOCATE key e The value you specify here has no effect if measure display is selected as the counter display method 2 ROLLBACK TIME UTILITY 99999 NEH song Scene OO input 00 00 00 000 Initial Data _ CO DAT DIGITAL REC DISABLE e DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT PRENDE POSTROLL Be ee POSTROLL TIME TIME ory 4 FL METER FINE
109. been recorded are displayed as NO REC EDIT V TR EDITI 00 10 0L 000 J 12 laa coooa A NEW ONG _ _ EAN EENE 1 0 4 4 Y NAME SC NO REC 6C NO REC 7C NO REC SC NO REC J A name of up to 16 characters can be assigned to a virtual track but only the first eight characters will be displayed in this col umn Track view In this area the regions included in each virtual track are displayed as a bar graph With the exception that virtual tracks 1 8 of the same track are displayed simultaneously this display is the same as in the TR Edit page Parameter area In this area you can set the required parameters for executing the edit command vp For the track editing procedure refer to Operation Guide Chapter 9 Track virtual track operations A The keys of the transport section will have no effect while the V TR Edit page is displayed AVV ULNG Reference Guide 107 EDIT screen Additional functions in the V TR Edit page In the V TR Edit page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional functions to the F1 F3 keys Ce J Ce Os F1 REMAIN key F2 X ZOOM IN key F3 X ZOOM OUT key These are the same as the additional functions of the TR Edit page 108 awutns Reference Guide EDIT screen CD Import page Import CD DA to an audio track Function Import CD DA CD audio da
110. can press the SHIFT key to assign the following function to the F1 key FSC PEAK HOLD e F1 PEAK HOLD key This key sets defeats the Peak Hold function This is the same function as the PEAK HOLD key in the level meter counter section AVVULG Reference Guide 77 HOME screen Omni ST page Monitor the output levels of the OMNI OUT jacks and stereo output Function Monitor the output levels of OMNI OUT jacks 1 4 and the stereo output Key operation e HOME key gt F4 Omni ST key e Repeatedly press the HOME key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt HOME button gt Omni St tab Screen functions 1 OMNI OUT level meters These meters show the output level of OMNI OUT jacks 1 4 The type of signal assigned to each OMNI OUT jack is indicated below each level meter This page is for display only assignments cannot be changed in this page The signals assigned to OMNI OUT jacks 1 4 can be selected in the SETUP screen Patch OUT page 2 STEREO OUT level meter This meters shows the output level of stereo out put 3 STEREO OUT LEVEL This shows the position of the STEREO fader in dB units 4 PRE FADER pre EQ button 6 POST FADER post EQ button Select one of these two buttons to select the location in the signal path pre fader post fader whose level will be shown by the STEREO OUT level meters ONE GGGG NEW SONG H inp
111. dark for channels that are off muted When the solo function is on the ON keys will function as solo keys Faders Depending on the settings of the FADER mode section these moving faders adjust the input level or send levels to AUX 1 8 for each channel e The channels that correspond to the SEL keys 1 16 0 N keys 1216 and faders 1 16 will change depending on the setting of the MIXING LAYER sec tion The STEREO SEL key STEREO ON key and STEREO fader always control the stereo output channel They are not affected by the MIXING LAYER sec tion SOLO key This key turns the Solo function on off AVVUUIG Operation Guide 37 Chapter2 Parts and their functions Display section a e3 C Le CJ E E e Display This is a 320x240 pixel liquid crystal display with backlight that displays the val ues of the mix parameters and the current operating status PAN control This controls the pan of the channel currently selected by the SEL key If the ste reo output channel is selected this controls the L R channel balance EQ Q EQ F EQ frequency EQ G EG gain controls These are controls for manually operating the EQ of the channel currently selected by the SEL key From above they adjust the Q steepness F center fre quency and G gain parameters Use the
112. digital MTR to the WORD CLOCK IN jack of the AW4416 For this method turn on the WCLK IN button Word clock y Word Clock In Word Clock Out Sync Out Mee ce War SLOT Digital MTR ao word clock master AW4416 word clock slave lt eee lilha e EEE oO 0000 WORD CLOCK SOURCE WCLK IN STON Digital MTR word clock slave e Set the digital MTR so that it will operate according to its own internal clock e If you are using two digital MTR units connect the Sync Out jack of the first to the Sync In jack of the second as shown here so that the second digital MTR will follow the first 70 Awun operation Guide Chapter4 Connections and setup O Using a DAT recorder as the word clock master If you wish to input a digital signal from a DAT recorder or sampler etc into the AW4416 via the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack turn on the D ST IN button YAMAHA DAT recorder word clock master AW4416 DIGITAL STEREO OUT word clock slave R Amn DIGITAL STEREO IN WORD CLOCK SOURCE D ST IN e Set the DAT recorder so that it will operate according to its own internal clock A Most consumer
113. e Even after executing an editing command you can use the UNDO button to cancel the results of the operation The TRACK menu NAME command and the REGION menu NAME command are exceptions to this Editing command list This section provides brief explanations for the editing commands of the TRACK PART REGION menus for tracks and virtual tracks Details and parameters for each command are given in the Reference Guide TRACK menu These commands edit entire tracks or entire virtual tracks O NAME Track Name Assign a name to an already recorded virtual track O ERASE Erase the audio data of the selected track O COPY Copy the audio data of the selected track to another track The Fr Track From Track parameter specifies the copy source track and the To Track parameter specifies the copy destination track O EXCHG Exchange Exchange the audio data of two selected tracks The Fr Track From Track and To Track parameters specify the tracks to be exchanged O SLIP Move all audio data of the selected track forward or backward The SLIP parame ter specifies the distance of the movement maximum 5 hours O T COMP Time Compression Expansion Compress or expand the length of the audio data in the selected track As the length changes the pitch will change correspondingly The RATIO parameter specifies the amount of compression or expansion 50 200 O PITCH Pitch Change Change only the pitch without a
114. e Repeatedly press the AUTO MIX key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt AMIX button gt Event List tab A This page cannot be operated while automix is being played or recorded Also if automix playback or recording is started when this page is dis played the display will auto matically change to the AUTOMIX screen Main page Screen functions C Event list select buttons Of the events recorded in automix these but tons select the type of automix events that will be displayed in the event list Move the cursor to one of the four buttons and press the ENTER key to select the type of events Each button corresponds to the following events SCENE LIB scene library button Scene memory and library recall events will be displayed The following types of events will be displayed e SCENE Scene memory recall events The numeric value indicates the scene number e EQ Lib EQ library recall events The numeric value indicates the EQ library number e DY Lib Dynamics library recall events The numeric value indicates the dynamics library number Coe 4 _g 3 Coo Com Cee EVENT MEMORY CHANN e EF Lib Effect library recall events The numeric value indicates the effect library number e CH Lib Channel library recall events The numeric value indicates the channel library number
115. each monitor channel As necessary press the HOME key gt 17 24 RTN key and use fader 15 to readjust the return level 170 Awuuns operation Guide Chapter10 Internal effects Inserting an effect into a desired channel If you defeat their assignment to AUX 7 8 the AW4416 s internal effects can be inserted into a desired channel As an example here s how effect 2 can be inserted into monitor channel 1 O Patching Here s how to release effect 2 from its assignment to AUX send 8 and use it as an insertion effect 1 Press the SETUP key gt F1 Patch IN key The SETUP screen Patch IN page will appear in the display SFT UP 29929 nEn sone Scene GA EE RTH 1 00 00 00 151 Initial Data If the Patch IN tab is not assigned to the F1 key press the SHIFT key F1 key to switch the tab and then press the F1 key 2 Move the cursor to the EFF2 parameter of the EFFECT PATCH area and rotate the DATA JOG dial A popup window will appear asking you to confirm that you wish to disconnect effect 2 from AUX bus 8 and use it for insertion CONMF IRMATIOM EFF2 Patch AURS Insert ARE YOU SURE 7 3 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key In the EFFECT PATCH area EFF2 will change to INSERT Now the effect can be inserted into the desired channel AVVUUIG Operation Guide 171 Chapter1 0 Internal effects An effect that has been s
116. eee oman 19 Rec rdef section ue hs oe eviews E As eae e etwas sate oe ees 20 Sampling pad section oso yex ans Poe sees ete cule Megas 21 CD RW drive option so caasa shh Genuine eee Oe pega te 21 Other feature Se eacee Bde ee a ee ergy eld suman tien A aon ce 21 Signal flow within the AW4416 0 cee eee ee eee eee 22 NOU AC hm enretan te ate ee E S A E a 23 Input channels 124 4 5016 S owe elewaduts bee ee elae agree alee 24 Return channels WO Ws thee awake ea Neko Oe Ree eae eS 25 Recorder input patching oi est etewoietveead bheeth ees 26 Monitor channels 1 16 25 6 544 padatumstts eat ad po4eee ed au 26 Digital cascade connections acai aes bee sa KY esse a eee 27 EEE E E E E EE 27 Stereo output ChaDhel akodsapee etd de eeel eee Gae ee ares 27 DUSES Ga Lad eee Re RER RS E ee ae es 28 AUX buses T8 ade tig ties Wi eae negated aby eh ek 28 Output pateh seisa Se aapa re A seta kee Wags aa eae 29 Internal effects 1 2 eh tots Sana aGt ace eee ae ee Ges 29 Monitor output headphone output 0 0 00 eee eee 30 Chapter 2 Parts and their functions 31 ROP HANG oie 5e cra pice Sa Rae RG he Reed ee Res Ea 31 Analog input output secon 32s er ehadiete dass vews eats 31 WORK NAVIGATE section 44 54 6 dace ev ad eedows oadad Heed 32 WIN TSEC OM etar Vit nae BEG alae ae Rah Us 2 Ty Ae ot Pe ds oa li hg 32 MIXER SECUIO Mito g tia tana ott e ae aaa anne Beaute ge cbt ea ee ae 33 FADER MODE section 255 04 a
117. execute the Store operation the channel settings that had previously been stored in that number will be lost To recall channel settings from the library Select the channel into which you wish to recall the settings and access the VIEW screen Library page Use the DATA JOG dial to select the library number that you wish to recall Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key The following message will ask you for confir mation CONFIRMATION Will Recall CH Lib 00 ARE YOU SURE 7 e It is possible to recall the library settings without seeing the CONFIRMATION popup window To do so access the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTILITY key gt F2 key and turn the RECALL CONFIRMATION setting off e When you recall an EQ program into a paired channel or the stereo output channel the same settings will be recalled for both channels Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The Recall operation will be executed Xe When you recall to a paired channel or to the stereo channel the same settings will be recalled to both channels A If you select a number in which nothing has been stored and attempt to recall an error message of ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL will be displayed and the Recall will not be performed 48 Aways reference Guide PAN ROUTE screen Pan 1 16 Pan17 24 Pan MONI pages Set pan and routing Function Se
118. external effect etc to be inserted into the input signal of INPUT jacks 1 2 Nominal input level is O dB Pin connections are as follows Tip OUT 1 4 phone plug To the input jack of Sleeve ground the external processor 1 4 TRS phone plug Sleeve ground To the INSERT I O jack of the AW4416 1 4 phone plug To the output jack of Sleeve ground the external processor INPUT 3 8 phone jacks These are balanced TRS phone type input jacks The specifications are the same as for 8 INPUT 1 2 phone jacks INPUT 8 HI Z jack This is a high impedance unbalanced phone type input jack Instruments with a high output impedance such as passive type electric guitars can be directly con nected here Nominal input level is 46 dB 4 dB A If plugs are inserted into both the normal INPUT 8 BAL jack and the INPUT 8 HI Z jack the INPUT 8 HI Z jack will take priority 2 5 HARD DISK DRIVE slot This slot allows an IDE 2 5 inch hard disk to be installed Note e For the procedure of installing the hard disk refer to page 2 e Fora list of manufacturers and models of hard disk that are known to work when installed in the AW 4416 please refer to the website lt http www aw4416 com gt OMNI OUT 1 4 jacks These are unbalanced phone jacks that output the analog signal assigned to OMNI OUT 1 4 in the SETUP screen gt Patch OUT page gt P 136 Nominal output level is O dB MONITOR
119. for the data that is recorded on adjacent odd numbered gt even numbered tracks 3 WORD LENGTH BIT Select the word length number of bits for the data that is recorded on adjacent odd num bered gt even numbered tracks Set this to match the quantization number of bits that you selected when creating the song INPUT 1 aoaaa Meeg e 00 0C 00 000 Ini feeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeod THER SETUP HOR SET UP EE E ial Data E Additional functions in the Dither TRK page In the Dither TRK page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following function to the F1 key 4 e F1 CHANGE TAB key Switch between the two types of tab display AVVULNG Reference Guide 25 SET UP screen Solo Setup page Make solo settings Function Make various settings related to the Solo function Key operation e SETUP key gt F3 Solo Setup key e Repeatedly press the SETUP key until the screen shown at the right appears 1 In the SET UP screen the tabs dis played at the bottom of the screen are divided into two groups If the Solo Setup tab is not assigned to the F3 key when you press the SETUP key press the SHIFT key F1 CHANGE TAB key to switch the tabs Mouse operation M button gt SETUP button gt Solo Setup tab Screen functions STATUS Turn on one of the following two buttons to select t
120. hand has just about the right combina tion of warmth and intimacy Use the data dial to select Reverb Room from the effect library list then move the cursor to RECALL on the display and press ENTER When the confirmation window appears move the cursor to OK and press ENTER again Press the F1 function key to select the Effect Edit page and make sure that the BYPASS setting is OFF if it is ON move the cursor there and turn it OFF 20 Awu Tutorial Tutorial Mixdown O Add Ambience to the Tracks as Required All you have to do now is use the faders in the AUX 7 mode to add the required degree of the Reverb Room effect to the tracks As with other stages in the mix process you ll probably be turning channels on and off so you can hear how the processed tracks sound alone or in combination with certain other tracks As we mentioned earlier don t use the SOLO function to do this use the channel ON buttons instead Tracks 1 amp 2 Drums Drums usually benefit from a touch of reverb especially if they have been recorded fairly dry like the So Fine drum track But beware of adding too much Fairly heavy reverb is sometimes used on drum tracks for ballads but usually only specific drums particularly the snare In order to do this you ll obviously need to have at least the snare recorded on a separate track It s perfectly OK to leave the drums totally dry too d
121. however a few guidelines are provided below g A Note About the Tutorial This tutorial assumes that you already have a basic knowledge of how the AW4416 controls and main features work If you get lost refer to the AW4416 operation guide for details We ve also included a simple glossary at the end of the tutorial If you encounter any terms you re not familiar with you might find explanations in the glossary AW UUs Tutorial 1 Tutorial AW4416 Professional Audio Workstation O Contents AW4416 Professional Audio Workstation cssssccccesseeceeeeesees 1 A Note About the Tutorial eeeeseesesseesesscesesecessssscrssseesseeeresecerereseeres 1 GOMLOMES E i E EE a a e E RR 2 Laying Down the Basic Tracks oeseeeseesesesesssssssssseseeeeeeceeseessssssssses 5 Rhythm Firstl iccasczcssscidetssst nied seul is estsslssonssaeastesssdccecesecucecusegesbeescuteeent 5 Separations vivesiass sss cccegssepsssVaseaec avectvsovcedsecdes cstieesVosedeystovstvessocestbnete 5 Scratch or Guide Vocals ccccccsesseccceeseccceceeeeccceeescccceueececeeeuees 6 Microphone Selection oe eeesececesssececeessecessseeesesseceseesseeesnsaeeeees 6 OVA 0 o aera EE a S 7 To Process Or Not To Process cccccccessscccceessceccceesecceceeseccseueseseceeeuees 7 Load the Demo Song jo5ssccissdesssssistvssncdesesseanjesiocessescgqecdegencunesiaadanistoes 8 Load the Demo Song From the CD ROM Onto the AW4416 Hard
122. in the tray and press the SHIFT key F1 CD LOAD key The tray of the CD RW drive will close and the CD will be inserted 3 Move the cursor to the DRIVE area use the DATA JOG dial to select the SCSI ID of the CD RW drive and press the ENTER key The AW4416 will recognize the CD that was inserted and a display like the following will appear SAMP PAD 22923 nen sone CD NPORT 00 00 00 000 BEN a a PAD ASSIGN FROM CD DA as 01 15 14 G4 Gi 27 64 3 i 4 Move the cursor to the ASSIGN TO area and use the DATA JOG dial to select the bank and pad number to which the CD DA data will be assigned ASSIGN TO BF NAME ahh jeakee hennad Neel A 8 C NO ASH I In this page a pair of adjacent odd numbered gt even numbered pads of the same bank will be selected e g A 1 A 2 B 1 B 2 and automati cally specified as a pair and the L R channels of the CD DA data will be assigned to these 5 Move the cursor to the TRACK TOTAL area and use the DATA JOG dial to select the track from which you wish to import JRACK TOTAL Move the cursor to the EXTRACT POINT area and use the DATA JOG dial to spec ify START start point and END end point to select the area that will be assigned to the pad EXTRACT POINT To execute the sample import move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A confirmation message like the follow
123. in the PROTECT area and press the ENTER key the button will alternate between ON and OFF When protect is on it will not be possible to edit or record tracks edit the sampling pads or set change locate points T FRAME RATE buttons Use the following four buttons to select the frame rate of the time code The frame rate set ting will affect the counter time code display and the MTC that is transmitted and received e 24 button 24 fps e 25 button 25 fps 30 button 30 fps 30 non drop frame e 30D button 29 97 fps 30 drop frame A If you wish to use MTC to synchronize the AW4416 and an external device you must use the FRAME RATE buttons to match the frame rate of the two devices 2 AIA ULNE Reference Guide SONG screen 8 TOP This adjusts the time code time that corresponds to the beginning of the song time code top in the range of 00 00 00 00 00 24 00 00 00 00 Negative values cannot be set Move the cursor to the TOP area and use the DATAJOG dial to adjust the hours min utes seconds frames subframes value Time code top 00 00 00 00 00 Time code i display 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 Song P Time code top 00 00 05 00 00 Time code display 99 00 05 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 e Changing the time code Top will affect the time code indications in the display and the MITC that the AW4416 tr
124. in the lower right of the screen and press the ENTER key The AUTO REC button will turn on Note When you use the AUTO REC button instead of the REC button you can select the recording channel after placing automix in record ready mode It is not necessary to use the SEL keys to select the channel beforehand AVVUUIG Operation Guide 221 Chapter1 4 Automix 6 10 Press the top panel PLAY key to play back the song When song playback is started with the AUTO REC button on the REC button will be turned on automatically and automix will be in record mode However recording will not actually occur since the recording channel has not yet been selected When the song arrives at the punch in location press SEL key 1 moni tor channel 1 Recording of pan operations on the corresponding channel will begin at the moment you press the SEL key punch in At this time the corresponding SEL key will blink While listening to the song operate the PAN control When you are finished press the SEL key of the same channel once again The SEL key of the corresponding channel will go dark and recording will end punch out Automix will still be in a recordable state but recording will not actually occur since no recording channel is selected Note If you did not operate the PAN control in step 8 the currently recorded pan oper ation events between the punch in and punch out locations will be era
125. internal hard disk Be sure to create a backup of important song data before you proceed 1 Press the FILE key gt F3 key The FILE screen Disk Util page will appear in the display FILE 9 JMY S0NG 1 Pe ec Disk UTIL 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 DISK_UTILITY A Disk Uti 250 Awun operation Guide Chapterl 6 Backing up and restoring songs 2 Rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the drive that you wish to format and press the ENTER key To format the internal hard disk select INT IDE To format an external SCSI device select the SCSI ID of that device The rest of the procedure will differ depending on the type of drive you are for matting O Formatting the internal hard disk FORMAT 3 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button in the FORMAT area and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the Format operation CONFIRMATION Will Format scs 1 HD ARE YOU SURE 4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear once again asking you to confirm that you really want to format the internal hard disk If you decide to cancel the format operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key 5 Once again move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Formatting will begin When formatting of the internal disk is completed an empty song 16 bit 44 1 kHz will be created automaticall
126. its previous state 9 CLR BUF clear buffer button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the undo buffer will be erased vp For example if the current automix is too large to be stored in memory you can try using this button However the data prior to the most recent operation will be lost AUTOMIX TRANSPORT These buttons control automix recording and playback By moving the cursor and pressing the ENTER key you can perform the corre sponding operation These buttons have the fol lowing functions ABORT This button stops automix recording and dis cards the changes If you turn on this button while recording automix a popup window will ask whether you wish to discard the automix AVV ULNG Reference Guide 117 AUTOMIX screen STOP button This button stops automix recording or play back If you turn on this button while recording automix a popup window will ask whether you wish to update the data PLAY button If the recorder is started with the ENABLE button turned on this button will automatically be turned on and automix recording playback will begin While automix is playing you can use this button in conjunction with the REC button to punch in A e Automix will not start even if you move the cursor to the on screen PLAY button and press the ENTER key e When the REC button is blinking you can punch in by moving the cursor to the PLAY button and
127. key The EQ settings will be stored It is possible to store the EQ settings immedi ately without displaying the TITLE EDIT popup window To do so access the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTILITY key gt F2 key and turn STORE CONFIRMATION off A When you store the EQ program that had been previously stored in that number will be erased Recalling EQ settings from the EQ library Procedure 1 Select the channel into which you wish to recall the EQ settings and access the EQ ATT GRP screen Library page 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the library number 1 128 that you wish to recall 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear asking you to confirm the recall operation 4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The recall will be executed Xe e It is possible to recall the EQ settings imme diately without displaying the CONFIRMA TION popup window To do so access the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTILITY key gt F2 key and turn RECALL CONFIRMA TION off e When you recall an EQ program to a paired channel or the stereo output channel the same settings will be recalled into both channels A If you attempt to recall a number in which nothing has been stored an error message of ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL will appear and the recall will not occur AVVULG Reference Guide 57 EQ AT
128. knobs displayed in this area to edit the effect parameter values The type of parameters will differ depending on the currently used effect type 69 AIA ULNE Reference Guide AUX7 EFF1 AUX8 EFF2 AUX7 EFF1 and AUX8 EFF2 screens MIX BAL mix balance knob This knob adjust the mix amount of the effect sound A setting of 0 will output only the orig inal sound 50 will output equal amounts of direct and effect sound and 100 will output only the effect sound If the effect is patched via AUX send return set this to 100 If the effect is inserted in a specific channel adjust this to the desired value This knob will be located in the same place regardless of the effect type E Additional functions in the Eff Edit page In the Eff Edit page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following function to the F1 key e F1 BYPASS ON OFF key Switch effect bypass on off This is the same function as the BYPASS ON OFF button 70 Awuune Reference Guide AUX7 EFF1 and AUX8 EFF2 screens Library page Store or recall an effect program Function Store an effect program in the library or recall a stored effect program Key operation e AUX 7 AUX 8 keys gt F2 Library key e Repeatedly press an AUX 7 AUX 8 key until the desired screen appears Mouse operation M button gt EFF 1 EFF 2 button gt Library tab Screen functions 1 CURRENT EFFECT NAME 2 EFF
129. located at the left of the list and press the ENTER key A screen will appear where you can input the automix name Assign a name of up to sixteen characters For details on inputting characters refer to page 60 TITLE EDIT Lok a PRESS OK TO STORE SHIFT LOCK Lins unaoaoaoaanaaa augaaonanag naopnaamanud BWOUEW MIL 4 After you have input the automix name move the cursor to the OK but ton and press the ENTER key The current automix data will be stored in the selected automix number 228 Avwvuuns operation Guide Chapterl 4 Automix If you turn STORE CONFIRMATION OFF in the Prefer 1 page of the UTILITY screen UTILITY key gt F2 key the automix will be stored in the specified auto mix number without this screen appearing This method is convenient when you wish to repeatedly overwrite an automix into the same automix number A The internal automix memory is shared between the current automix and a max imum of sixteen stored automixes This means that if the current automix occu pies a large amount of automix memory it may be impossible to store the automix even if there are vacant automix numbers in the list If this occurs clear previously saved automix data that you no longer need Refer to the Reference Guide AUTO MIX screen M emory page and then execute the Store operation once again AVVULNG Operation Guide 229 Chapter1 4 Automix Recalling an a
130. location where you wish to set the Out point 4 Hold down the SET key and press the OUT key MARK SEARCH LAST REC 5 6 OUT SET The In point and Out point that you specify will be displayed as follows in the TRACK screen TR View page that appears when you press the TRACK key gt F1 key in al E f f In point Out point The In Out points are also used as the auto punch in out points used by auto punch in out gt P 130 The In Out point settings are saved on the hard disk as part of the currently selected song A You must set the In point ahead of the O ut point 120 Awun operation Guide Chapter6 Transport locate operations Markers The AW4416 allows you to set up to 99 markers at any desired locations in the song You can use the I BI keys to search locate these markers Markers are convenient when you wish to locate repeatedly to specific points in the song O Setting a marker 1 Locate the song to the point where you wish to set a marker 2 Press the Locate section MARK key MARK SEARCH Marker settings can be made when the song is either playing or stopped When you press the MARK key a message of MARK SET will be displayed briefly at the bottom of the display indicating that marker has been inserted at that point Each time you press the MARK key a new marker will be inserted O Locating to a marker 3 To locate
131. monitor channels will be sent to the stereo bus 5 Use the PAN knobs of monitor channels 1 16 to set the stereo position of each track Kp You can also use the SEL keys to select a channel and use the PAN control at the right of the display to set the pan of the corresponding monitor channel AVVUUIG Operation Guide 95 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 6 7 8 9 Raise the STEREO fader to the O dB position Make sure that ON keys 1 16 and the STEREO ON key are lit play back the song from the beginning and use faders 1 16 to set the level of each track At this time watch the L R level meter of the level meter counter and do not allow the red 0 dB segment to light To adjust the EQ of a specific channel use the SEL key to select the channel and operate the EQ HIGH HI MID LO MID LOW keys and the EQ Q F G controls To use the dynamics processor of a specific channel use the SEL key to select the channel and press DYN key gt F2 key to load the desired dynamics program For the procedure of loading a dynamics program refer to page 92 To edit the dynamics processor parameters press the MIXER section DYN key gt F1 key to access the DYN DLY screen Dyn Edit page Using the Solo function The AW4416 provides a flexible Solo function By pressing the top panel SOLO during recording or playback and using one of the ON keys to select a desired channel you can monit
132. not be pos library name of up to 16 characters For details sible on inputting characters refer to page 60 of the STORE button Operation Guide Store the current settings current scene of the AW4416 into scene memory This is the same function as the STORE key of the SCENE It is not possible to change the name of scene MEMORY section number 0 or of a scene in which PROTEC TION is turned on Also numbers in which no scene has been stored will be displayed as No Data and their title cannot be edited 2 RECALL button Recall the currently selected scene from the scene list This is the same function as the RECALL key of the top panel SCENE MEMORY section 124 awurns Reference Guide SCENE screen The following parameters are saved in memory as a scene Fader locations of all channels and buses input channels 1 24 recorder monitor channels 1 16 AUX send levels 1 8 effect returns 1 2 stereo ON key settings of all channels Attenuation settings of all channels Phase settings of all channels Mix param eters EQ settings of all channels Pan settings of all channels Routing settings of all channels Fader group settings of all channels Pairing settings of all channels Dynamics settings of all channels Delay settings of all channels Effect Parameter settings for effects 1 2 parameters Scene name settings Fader recall fa
133. not synchronized to the word clock master The Solo function is ready Use the SEL keys to select the solo channel The Solo status cannot be changed when the AW4416 is function ing as a cascade slave Press the Solo key on the master console The maximum number of songs has been reached You located outside the top end range of the song You are attempting to defeat ST LINK for the dynamics of paired channels Appendix 40 Am un6 Reference Guide Appendix STEREO TRACK MUTE IS OFF THIS SONG IS PROTECTED TO HOST DATA FRAMING ERROR TO HOST DATA OVERRUN TO HOST DATA PARITY ERROR TO HOST RX BUFFER FULL TO HOST TX BUFFER FULL TRIGGER LIST RECORDING UNDO COMPLETE WRONG WORD CLOCK Popup messages CD Access Error CD Size Full CD Track Over Can t Copy This Parameter Can t Create Image File Can t Delete Current Song Can t Delete Protected Song Can t Edit Multiple Songs Can t Optimize Protected Song Can t REDO Can t Select Current Song Can t UNDO Can t Write CD RW by Track At Once Change Media Invalid Order Change Media Not 1st Media Change Media Not TYPE 1 Backup Change Media Not TYPE 2 Backup Change Media Please Device Error Directory Name Too Long Directory Not Found Disk Full File System Error Finalized Media Invalid Parameter Since muting is off for the stereo track track muting cannot be turned off This song is protected and cannot b
134. o o o o a m o Oo J567 CW Tei se 416 6 CU Tri6 4 ACC RUTE Orr HPO OnT le oooococoo000000000 Input monitor setting 2 In the INPUT MONITOR area move the cursor to the AUTO button and press the ENTER key The AUTO button will be turned on and Auto Input Monitor will be selected as the input monitor setting J Connect a foot switch If you will be using a separately sold foot switch Yamaha FC 5 to perform man ual punch in out connect the foot switch to the FOOT SW jack on the rear panel A If a foot switch other than the Yamaha FC 5 is connected it may not operate cor rectly 128 Aw uuns operation Guide Chapter7 Punch in out Manual punch in out recording 1 Locate the song to a location earlier than where you wish to punch in Xe If you set a locate point such as a marker or the A B point at this location it will be convenient when you later check the recorded result or perform punch in out again For details on setting a locate point refer to page 114 Press the REC TRACK SELECT key for the track that you wish to record The REC TRACK SELECT key will blink and the track will be in record ready mode Press the PLAY key If you are using a foot switch press the foot switch The song will begin playing At the location where you wish to punch in hold down the REC key and press the PLAY key or press the foot switch The REC key will light
135. on the AW4416 Recording the first tracks This section explains the procedure for recording a rhythm machine or drum mics connected to INPUT jacks 1 2 onto tracks 1 2 of the recorder A The explanation in this section assumes that the AW4416 s mixer and patching settings are in their initial state If you have already modified the mixer parame ters or the input output patching please recall the default scene scene number 00 from the scene memory gt P 206 Set the input level 1 While producing sound on your instrument adjust GAIN controls 1 2 so that the PEAK indicators of INPUT jacks 1 2 light briefly when the loudest sounds are played 1 PEAK 2 PEAK The GAIN control adjusts the sensitivity of the analog input In order to record the sound cleanly and with the widest possible range you should adjust the GAIN as high as possible without allowing clipping to occur 2 Press the HOME key gt F1 key The HOME screen 1 24 Rtn page will appear This page shows the input levels of input channels 1 24 and return channels 1 2 HOME 2992 TT SONG SCENE GG INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Dat 7 amp 9 16 1112 13 14 15 16 INPUT CHANNEL l Tas 00 00 0 gt O0 00 00 00 17 18 19 Z0 Z1 Z2 23 24 INPUT CHANNEL STEREO OWT LEWEL 3 In the MIXING LAYER section press the 1 16 key to select input chan nels 1 16 as the mixing layer 78 AWU Operation Guide Cha
136. on the disc TRACK column and their track times TIME col umn e CD R media that has not been finalized cannot be played back The counter in the level meters counter section will not function while you are using the CD Play function Use the Locate section k lt gt I keys to select the track that you wish to play To begin playback press the Transport section PLAY key The audio output of the CD RW drive will be sent directly to the stereo bus Use the STEREO fader to adjust the volume To stop playback press the STOP key While playback is stopped you can press and hold the REW FF keys to rewind or fast forward H owever there will be no sound To exit the CD PLAY function move the cursor to the CD PLAY MODE button and press the ENTER key While the CD Play function is being used all keys except for pea Vi 1 PLAY STO P REW FF and ENTER will have no effect e Ifyou wish to perform other operations turn off the CD Play function AVVUUIG Operation Guide 265 YAMAHA YAMAHA CORPORATION V618350 RO 1 IP 284 Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division P O Box 3 Hamamatsu 430 8651 Japan 00 08 7000 AP Printed in Japan YAMAHA AN HOHE PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION Reference Guide Table of contents Table of contents SONG SCrOGN s 6 6 66 6654 46 664 eee ese ewe eweess l Song List page seseo cee eee sew ee eee eke ee ee date
137. out keys These keys move to the point at which recording was last begun the IN point or ended the OUT point SET key This key is used in conjunction with the LAST REC IN OUT keys and the A B keys to set the last record in out points or the A B points It is also used in con junction with the kea key to set the zero point of relative time REL AULAS Operation Guide 43 Chapter2 Parts and their functions REPEAT key When this key is on the area from the A point gt B point will be played repeat edly To cancel repeat playback press the REPEAT key once again or press the STOP key in the transport section A B keys These keys move to the pre specified A or B points ROLL BACK key When this key is pressed you will move backward from the current location by the length of time specified in the UTILITY screen gt Prefer 2 page kea key Pressing this key will move to the start point of the song RTZ return to zero key Pressing this key will move to the zero location of absolute time if the counter indicates ABS or the zero location of relative time if the counter indicates REL gt gt key Pressing this key will move to the end point of the song CANCEL key This key is used to discard a numerical value that you input or to cancel opera tion of a function Transport section In this section you can operate the transport of the recorder
138. page 6 ST TRACK ERASE stereo track erase button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the recorded contents of the stereo track will be erased A The stereo track is an L R pair and has only one region If you re record a previous recording on the stereo track the previously recorded content will be erased However you can use the UNDO key to return to the previous state AVVULNG Reference Guide 95 TRACK screen E Additional functions in the Stereo page In the Stereo page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional functions to the F1 F3 keys Le Le EJ e F1 REMAIN key The level meter counter and the counter area of the display will show the remaining time avail able for recording When you press the SHIFT key F1 REMAIN key once again the usual counter display will reappear Yip The remaining time available for recording will depend on the number of tracks that are currently in record ready mode F2 X ZOOM IN key Each time you press the SHIFT key F2 X ZOOM IN key the track view will zoom in horizontally in three levels F3 X ZOOM OUT key Each time you press the SHIFT key F3 X ZOOM OUT key the track view will zoom out horizontally in three levels 96 AwuULUG Reference Guide TRACK screen Mark Adj page Adjust or erase locate points or markers Functi
139. pan and bus assignment settings for monitor channels 1 16 PAN ROUTE 29995 _NEH SONG _ scene 06 SE MONIT 00 00 00 000 Initial Data JLROUTING i i H ly POOE Ee feyafaye OC BEBE PODE ajaja BEEBE ajajaja fefafalE afc BER ajajaja fm m z fm m z 3 m fm m z 3 m Ead fm m 3 m EO 20 GEL J a a pe OEO 1 ET a E BEOOG 888 2 a G BEEBE Ga Es OS O BEEE 2 For monitor channel 3 turn the ST button on and the bus assign 1 8 buttons off At this time verify that the ST button is on and the bus assign 1 8 button is off for monitor channels 1 2 as well 3 Move the cursor to the PAN knob of monitor channel 3 and pan the bass where you can monitor it most comfortably 4 Make sure that ON key 3 is turned on Then produce sound on your bass and raise fader 3 to a volume that is comfortable for monitoring 90 Aw uns operation Guide Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Using EQ and the dynamics processor By using the four band EQ and dynamics processor that are provided for each input channel you can process the bass sound as you record it on a track O Using the four band EQ 1 In the MIXING LAYER section press the 1 16 key gt SEL key 8 SEL key 8 will light and input channel 8 will be selected for control 2 Press one of the EQ HIGH HI MID LO MID LOW keys in the row at the right o
140. parameter setting and the value of the selected parameter will be displayed 4 Use the DATA JOG dial to set the parameter and press the ENTER key The setting will change and the cursor will return to the parameter location of step 3 5 Repeat steps 3 4 to set the remaining parameters 6 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the Copy command CONFIRMATION Execute TRIG DATA COPY E P NAME FROM A 2 SE 2 00 00 09 000 00 00 14 000 E F NAME TO A 5 SE 5 00 00 12 000 COPY TIMES 2 INTERVAL 00 00 05 000 INSERT TYPE Insert 7 To execute the Copy move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Kp You can undo the result of the copy by pressing the UN DO key immediately after executing Copy 200 Awun operation Guide Chapter1 2 Sampling pads Erasing a pad performance Here s how to erase a pad performance that you recorded 1 In the SAMPLING PAD section press the EDIT pad gt F5 key The Trig List page will appear SAMP PAD HETHER____ TRIG List 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 ERASE button A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B SAMP PAD LETHEE TRIG List 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 oo00 CECT SEEE ETNO EXECUTE A A A B B B B B B B B EF z F A Tria List The parameters for the Erase command will appear Each parameter has the fol
141. parameters on the display You might also have to press the F1 function key to select the CH View page 4 Hit the PLAY button and listen The chart below lists the contents of the So Fine tracks V Trk at the left side of the chart refers to the recorder s virtual tracks there are actually 8 virtual tracks for each recorder track Note that although we ll be using only the main tracks virtual track 1 for most of this tutorial an alternate string take is provided on the second virtual tracks for recorder tracks 9 and 10 and a male lead vocal track is provided on the second virtual track of recorder track 14 Later on you ll use these alternate takes to build a mix based around a male rather than female lead vocal part Claves amp E Drm Rthm Lead Guitar Guitar Awuuis Tutorial 11 Tutorial Mixdown Phase 2 Set Up a Rough Mix The rough mix is only the starting point for the final mix and it doesn t have to be perfect The purpose of setting up a rough mix using only levels and panning is to give you a reference point on which to base decisions about more detailed pro cessing effects automation etc You shouldn t spend a lot of time on this phase of the mixdown process But if a fader or pan setting really bugs you you should readjust it to within an acceptable range so that it doesn t stick out like a sore thumb and affect your ability to make appropri
142. pin like object 2 mm or less in diameter such as a straightened paper clip or less in diameter Insert a pin like object 2 mm Eject Hall NO This diagram shows a CD RW drive manufactured by Yamaha Corporation Attaching an external SCSI device About external SCSI devices The external SCSI devices referred to here are storage devices used to backup restore the internal data of the AW4416 and can be connected to the SCSI con nector on the rear panel of the AW4416 The following types of storage device can be used e Type of drive MO drives 128 MB 230 MB 540MB 640 MB 1 3 GB hard disk drives CD RW drives e Interface SCSI 2 e Models known to work consult your local Yamaha distributor or refer to the website at the following URL lt http www aw44 16 com gt A By models known to work we mean commercially available models that Yamaha has obtained connected to the AW4416 and successfully tested by means of various operational tests However we cannot take into account slight differences in performance that may occur due to the manufacturing tol erances of each manufacturer Please be aware that Yamaha Corporation will accept no responsibility for any damages neither direct nor indirect resulting from the use of any of the above storage devices A It is not possible to directly record or play back audio signals in realtime on an external storage
143. point 1 2 C 3 16 Locate Playback Rehearsal Playback mo La REC TRACK SELECT lt PLAY Rehearsal Playback Recording Playback n Ei SS p XXX REC PLAY e gt Actual recording 132 Awun operation Guide This chapter explains how to patch the inputs and outputs and how to use the Quick Rec function to simultaneously record sixteen channels of input sources Patching to the input channels When the AW4416 is in the default state input signals are patched to input chan nels 1 24 as shown in the following diagram However you can change the input signals assigned to each input channel as necessary Mixer section INPUT jacks 1 8 Input channels 1 8 OPTION I O slot 1 x8 OPTION I O Input channels 9 16 Input channels 17 14 Return channel 1 Return channel 2 Here s how to patch input signals to input channels 1 24 and return channels 1 2 1 Press the SETUP key gt F1 Patch IN key The display will show the SETUP screen Patch IN page where you can patch sig nals to the input channels and recorder inputs In this page the MIXER CHAN NEL INPUT ASSIGN column shows the patched status of input channels 1 24 and return channels 1 2 A eeeeeeeeoeoeoeoeeeoeeaeoeeeoeeeaeeoeoeeoesee2ee eee eee ee If the Patch IN tab is not assigned to the F1 key press the SHIFT key F1 key to switch the tabs and then press
144. pressing the ENTER key REC record button When automix is stopped turning this button on will cause the button to blink and record ready mode to be selected In this state starting playback on the recorder will cause automix recording to begin and when recording ends the REC button will also turn off automatically When automix is playing this button can be used in conjunction with the PLAY button to punch in AUTO REC button If you turn this button on lit and play back the recorder automix recording will begin How ever this differs from the REC button in that this button will not turn off automatically when recording ends If you wish to turn it back off move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key Tip For the procedure of recording and playing automix refer to Operation Guide Chapter 14 Automix E Additional functions in the Main page In the Main page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following functions to the F1 F5 keys C a eo EJ CJ J J J F1 ABORT key Stop automix recording and discard the changes This is the same function as the ABORT button F2 STOP key Stop recording or playing automix This is the same function as the STOP button F3 PLAY key Execute punch in when the REC record button is blinking This is the same function as the PLAY button F4 REC key Record or punch in automix This is the same functio
145. requirements that may apply to your use of works protected by copyright and related information and data that may accompany such works Violation of such laws may result in civil remedies and in some cases criminal liability Because violations of copyright laws may be serious offenses you should consult a lawyer familiar with the law of copyright including all laws that may be appli cable to your use of the Workstation such as the Audio Home Recording Act and the Digital Millennium Copyright Act in USA if you have any questions regard ing your intended use of all or parts of sound recordings or musical compositions protected by copyright AVVUUNG Operation Guide VI Table of contents Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha AW4416 audio workstation In order to take full advantage of the AW4416 s functionality and enjoy trouble free operation please carefully read the Operation Guide this manual and the separate Reference Manual and Tutorial Table of contents Before you begin 2c ce cceccrcccccccee I Checking the included items 0 ce eee eee ee eee 1 Installing an internal hard disk 0 ce cece cece eee 2 About the internal hard disk s 30 a5o5sG 4 bens eee tea Sees 2 Installation se il Steeda a Se gata ale bse e a went ee Se 3 Installing a CD RW drive 0 cece cece ee ee eee eee 5 About the CD RW drivese u 2 055 ss dees Bas Bhd eee eS wees 5
146. return e If the message LOW BATTERY appears when you turn on this unit contact your dealer as soon as possible about replacing the internal data backup bat tery The unit will still operate correctly but data other than the presets will be lost We recommend that you save the data on CD RW drive or external SCSI device before replacing the battery e The performance of components with moving contacts such switches rotary controls faders and connectors deteriorates over time The rate of deteriora tion depends on the operating environment and is unavoidable Consult your dealer about replacing defective components Handling the CD R RW media Please observe the following points when handling the disk Failure to do so may cause problems such as the recorded data being lost the drive to malfunction or the printed label to become blurred e Do not place the disk in locations of direct sunlight high temperature or high humidity e Do not touch either surface of the disk e Hold the disk at the edges Gently wipe dust or dirt off of the recording sur face of the disk e Do not wipe the disk with chemicals or detergents Do not bend or drop the disk e Use an air duster or cleaner to remove dust Vigorously rubbing the surface of the disk with a dry cloth may scratch the disk e Do not write on the disk or affix labels to it AVY ULNE Operation Guide V Important Storing produced data Produced dat
147. right of the screen and press the ENTER key The event currently selected for editing will be duplicated Modify its timing event type and value as desired 7 To delete an unwanted event move the cursor to the DELETE button in the upper right of the screen and press the ENTER key The event currently selected for editing will be deleted Nore AUX 1 8 send level or EQ operations cannot be performed off line You must use punch in out to overwrite or delete these operations in the specified range AVVULNG Operation Guide 227 Chapter1 4 Automix Storing an automix When you have completed the current automix you should assign a name and store it in automix memory Sixteen automixes can be stored in internal memory Automix data that you store is saved on the hard disk as part of the current song This means that you can create up to sixteen different automix versions for one song and compare them at any time 1 Press the AUTOMIX key gt F2 key AUTOMIX cm SS MOHI I6 i O0 00 59 546 TEST mix2 No Data No Data No Data EDIT OUT RET RUTONTX TRANSPORT AUTOMIX TRANSPORT ABORT STOP PLAY 2 Move the cursor to the list in the center of the screen and rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the store destination automix number You can select automix numbers 01 16 Vacant automix numbers will be dis played in the list as No Data 3 Move the cursor to the STORE button
148. room than REVERB HALL 03 Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed with vocals in mind 04 Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Simulation of a metal plate reverb unit producing a feeling of hard edged reverberation 05 Early Ref EARLY REF An effect which isolates only the early reflection ER component from reverberation A flashier effect than reverb is produced 06 Gate Reverb GATE REVERB A type of ER designed for use as gated reverb 07 Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE A reverse playback type ER Delays Title Type Description 08 Mono Delay MONO DELAY Mono delay with simple operation Use when you don t need to use complex parameter settings 09 Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Stereo delay with independent left and right 10 Mod delay MOD DELAY Mono delay with modulation 11 Delay LCR DELAY LCR Three tap delay L C R 12 Echo ECHO Stereo delay with additional parameters for more detailed control The signal can be fed back from left to right and right to left Modulation type Effects Title Type Description 13 Chorus CHORUS Three phase stereo chorus 14 Flange FLANGE The well known flanging effect 15 symphonic SYMPHONIC ee that produces a richer and more complex 16 Phaser PHASER Stereo phaser with 2 16 stages of phase shift 17 Auto Pan AUTO PAN An effect which cyclically moves
149. rx Transport Record Punch in 07 RECORD EXIT rx Transport Punch out OF RESET rx tx MMC Reset 40 WRITE rx Write Information Field 44 LOCATE rx tx Transport Locate 4 MIDI format details 4 1 NOTE OFF 8n lt Reception gt Received if Rx CH matches Used to control effects See below for details STATUS 1000nnnn 8n DATA Onnnnnnn nn Ovvvvvvv vv 4 2 NOTE ON 9n lt Reception gt Received if Rx CH matches Used to control effects See below for details If velocity is 0x00 same as note off Note Off Message Note No Velocity ignored STATUS 1001nnnn 9n Note On Message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note No Ovvvvvvv vv Velocity 1 127 0n O off Notes used to control effects 1 Dynamic Flange Dynamic Phase Dynamic Filter If the SOURCE parameter is set to MIDI velocity will con trol the width of frequency modulation for both note on and note off 4 3 CONTROL CHANGE Bn lt Reception gt Echoed if Control Change ECHO is on lt Transmission gt If Control Change ECHO is on this is merged with the AW4416 s own output while taking advantage of running status 4 4 PROGRAM CHANGE Cn lt Reception gt Received if Program Change RX is on and Rx CH matches However if OMNI is on this is received regard less of the channel This is echoed if Program Change ECHO is on A scene memory will be recalled according to the Program change table lt Transmission gt If Program
150. screen shown below is an example of when the TRACK menu COPY command is selected EDIT gogog NEW SONG ss ESA EAIN TR EDIT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 4 a o stbas h ma 6LSynth 3 4 ALL V TR J EXECUTE i 11C N0 REC 4 i2C N0 REC e E NO REC 14 N0 REC cOrums L fecOrums R TRACK No Piano L Piano A Kp Page 161 provides brief explanations of the editing commands of each menu For details of each command refer to the Reference Guide AVVUUIG Operation Guide 157 Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations 4 To change the parameter settings move the cursor to the correspond ing button The lower part of the display will show the settings of the parameter at which the cursor is currently located EDIT GGGG_ NEW SONG TR EDIT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 EP ep ZIEGE 1 4 ALL VT Gt q ep 2CSynth 2 4 EXECUTE 16C5E 9 11E NO REC 120 NO REC 9 13C N0O REC 14 NO REC isCOrums L 16COrums R 5 Press the ENTER key The cursor will move to the setting area in the lower part of the display The screen shown below is an example of when the COPY command is selected EDIT 96066 NEW SONG Ss EES EOIN TR EDIT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 CA e SiSynth 2 J EE 1cSe 11E NO REC 4 i2C N0 REC e E NO REC 14 N0 REC wy SiDrums L fecDrums R FROM U NAE TRACK no E 1 Piano L 1 f e 2 1 Piano R amp CD Import amp Wavimrort amp TR Import 2
151. set to Recall Safe sta tus Input channels 1 24 Monitor channels 1 16 Effect return channels 1 2 Stereo output channel vip When a scene is recalled Fader Recall Safe is valid only if that scene was saved with the ENABLE parameter set to ENABLE A Recall Safe settings are not linked for paired channels This means that if one channel of a pair is set to Recall Safe the faders of the pair may be in different positions immediately after a scene is recalled However even in this case moving one of the faders will cause the other fader to follow immediately 2 ENABLE Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to specify whether the Fader Recall Safe function will be enabled ENABLE or not DISABLE AVVULNG Reference Guide 127 SCENE screen Sort page Sort scenes Function Sort the scenes stored in scene memory Key operation e SCENE key gt F4 Sort key e Repeatedly press the SCENE key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt SCEN button gt Sort tab Screen functions 1 SOURCE This list shows the current state of the scene memories Move the cursor to this list and rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the scene whose sorting order you wish to change The currently selected scene will be highlighted 2 DESTINATION Specify the scene number to which the scene selected in the SOURCE list will be moved M
152. symbol once again and press the ENTER key AVVUUIG Operation Guide 151 Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations Editing tracks and virtual tracks A variety of editing operations can be performed on the audio data recorded on tracks 1 16 of the AW4416 such as copying data between tracks moving data to an earlier or later location within the same track or changing the pitch In the same way you can also copy or move data between the virtual tracks 1 8 that are included in each track The following pages explain how to edit tracks and virtual tracks Tracks parts and regions Track and virtual track editing can be performed in three editing units O Track The entire currently selected track 1 16 or virtual track 1 8 will be affected by the editing operation When editing in units of a track tracks that contain no audio data cannot be selected O Part Within the currently selected track 1 16 or virtual track 1 8 the currently selected range is called the part Unlike the case when editing tracks portions that contain no audio data can be selected as a part O Region A continuous piece of audio that was recorded on a track in a single operation is called a region When editing in units of a region portions that contain no audio data cannot be selected Region Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Part Continuous audio data
153. sys tems and in different rooms the more you ll get a feel for how the sound of your studio relates to the real world average Listening to your own work in a variety of environ ments is a very good idea in any case Listen on big expensive hi fi systems as well as cheap portables Don t forget car stereos either The more you listen the better your mixes will become Step 1 Set Up the Master EQ and Dynamics It won t always be necessary to use EQ and dynamics during mastering in fact we ll use only compression for this example The dynamics are set using the STE REO channel processor Press the STEREO channel SEL key then use the MIXER DYN key to access the dynamics parameters The nice thing about this system is that you can hear how your master EQ and or dynamics settings affect the overall mix immediately In some cases you might even decide to go back and make changes to the mix because of the way everything sounds mastered as opposed to straight before committing to a specific set of mastering parameters Generally though the better the mix the less master processing is required To enable the pre programmed mastered automix 1 Press the AUTOMATION AUTOMIX key and if necessary press the F4 key to select the Event List page 2 Move the cursor to the SCENE LIB button on the display and press ENTER to highlight it 28 Awuus Tutorial Tutorial Mastering 3 Mov
154. the F1 key AVY ULUNE Operation Guide 1 33 Chapter8 Patching SFT JP 99899 En sone Scene BO F 1HPOoT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data 1 EFFECT PATCHT Input channels 1 24 Return channels 1 2 2 Move the cursor to the channel that you wish to patch and use the DATA JOG dial to select the signal that you wish to assign The following signals can be assigned to each channel O Input channels 1 24 AD 1 AD8 INPUT jacks 1 8 SL1 1 SL1 8 INPUT 1 8 of an I O card slot 1 SL2 1 SL2 8 INPUT 1 8 of an I O card slot 2 DIN L DIN R L R channels of the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack SMP 1 SMP 8 Sampling pads 1 8 MET Internal metronome O Return channels 1 2 EFF 1 L R Return from internal effect 1 EFF 2 L R Return from internal effect 2 2 AD 1 2 AD 7 8 INPUT jacks 1 2 7 8 SL1 1 2 SL1 7 8 INPUT 1 2 7 8 of an I O card slot 1 SL2 1 2 SL2 7 8 INPUT 1 2 7 8 of an I O card slot 2 DIN L R DIGITAL STEREO IN jack stereo 1 Selectable only for return 1 2 Selectable only for return 2 Kp You can use the patch library to save the state of the patch settings you make For details refer to page 138 134 Awun operation Guide Chapter8 Patching Patching to the recorder inputs When the AW4416 is in the default state buses 1 8 are assigned respectively to recorder inputs 1 8 and 9 16 but you can assign the direct signals from the input c
155. the AW4416 all the data necessary to reproduce a musical composition you create i e mixer settings recorder settings audio data etc is saved in the inter nal hard disk as a song By loading a song into internal memory you can return to the saved state at any time A song includes the following data e Audio data for all virtual tracks e TRACK screen settings including locate point settings e Tempo map settings e Scene memories e Automix memory e Patch library e EQ library e Dynamics library e Channel library e Data and settings for the Sampling Pad function e Song name and comment e Counter display method SECOND TIME CODE MEASURE e Song Protect setting e Time Code Top setting e Region Fade Time setting e Undo data A eeeeoeeeeaeaoeeoeaoeeeaeeoeaeeoeeeeeaeeee2ee0e02020202000000808068080 e Multiple songs can be saved on the internal hard disk H owever only the sin gle song currently being controlled on the AW 4416 the current song can be handled at any given time When the power of the AW4416 is turned on the most recently saved song will be loaded automatically A eeeeeeeeaoeeoeoeeeoeeoeaeeeoeeoeeoeoeeeoeoeeoea2eeee eee eo 8 Be aware that if you turn off the power of the AW4416 without saving the current song any changes in the current song will be lost When you wish to turn off the power of the AW 4416 you must perform the shut down procedure gt P 17 AVY ULUNE Operation Gu
156. the TRACK CUE key are both on only the TRACK CU E key will be valid RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1 PHONES PHONES RECORDER DIRECT OUT 16 RECORDER STEREO L TRACK CUE STEREO R i MONITOR i UT gt 0 SOLO L 5 4dB SOLO R pall i METRONOME 30 Awyuns operation Guide 2 Parts and their func tions This chapter explains the names and functions of the various objects on the top panel rear panel and front panel NGN e eeeeeeaeseaeaeseeaoeeeaoeaeeaees eos eeaoeseoeaeneeaoeneea2e eee ee ee Names of the controllers on the top panel are enclosed in square brackets in order to distinguish them from the software knobs or buttons displayed in the display Example SEL key EQ Q control Top panel Analog input output section mma l 1 PEAK 2 PEAK 3 PEAK 4 PEAK 5 PEAK 6 PEAK 7 PEAK 8 PEAK PHONES MONITOR OUT ANA A A A A A A A A A O O O O O O O O O On GAIN controls These controls adjust the input sensitivity of INPUT jacks 1 8 The supported input level range is 46 dB 4 dB 2 PEAK indicators These LEDs will light red when the input signal of INPUT jacks 1 8 reaches a level 3 dB below the clipping point 3 PHONES control This control adjusts the output level of the signal that is sent from the rear panel PHONES jack AI ULUNE Operation Guide 3 1 Chapter2 Parts and their functions MONI
157. the actual time length of the data Also processing cannot be cancelled once the operation has been executed 1 1 2 ALIAN ULUNE Reference Guide EDIT screen TR Import page Import a track from an existing song Function Import a track from a song on the hard disk into the desired track of the current song Key operation e EDIT key gt F5 TR Import key e Repeatedly press the RECORDER EDIT key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt RECORDER EDIT but ton gt TR Import tab Screen functions Song list This lists the songs that are saved on the internal hard disk The current song will be highlighted in the list Move the cursor to this list and use the DATAJOG dial to select the import source song The list shows the following information e DEST SONG NAME Song name e SAVED AT Date and time at which the song was last saved SIZE Song data size includ ing audio data BITES nns Song quantization and sampling rate e PRP acisini Song protect on off Only a song with the same quantization and sampling rate as the current song can be selected as the import source The current song cannot be selected A The current song will be displayed with the most recently saved content 2 SOURCE TRACK From the song selected in the song list select the track number 1 16 and virtual track num ber 1 8 of the tr
158. the cursor to the right and use the DATA JOG dial to select the scene number 00 96 that will be assigned to the program change number you selected in step 6 236 Awun operation Guide Chapter1 5 MIDI If you select NO ASSIGN no scene number will be assigned to that program change number If you select a scene number which has not been stored in the AW4416 s internal memory the title area will indicate No Data PGM CHG SCENE MEM No TITLE 14 14 No Data 13 13 f No Data 1 12 12 f No Data 1 B 11 11 No Data No 0 18 Gi tnitial Mix 9 69 1 No Data 1 8 8 No Data 1 7 07 0 No Data o 6 66 No Data If the same scene number is assigned to multiple program change numbers recalling the corresponding scene will cause only the lowest of the assigned pro gram change numbers to be transmitted When you recall a scene number to which no program change is assigned no program change will be transmitted 8 Transmit a program change message from the external device The AW4416 will recall the scene corresponding to the program change that was received Kp When you use the AW4416 s keys to recall a scene you can cause a program change corresponding to that scene to be transmitted To do so turn on the Tx but ton in the PROGRAM CHANGE area in the screen for step 2 AVVUUIG Operation Guide 237 Chapter1 5 MIDI Using MTC to synchronize the AW441
159. the pad in units of min utes seconds frames 1 75 seconds Move the cursor to this area and use the DATA JOG dial to specify the START start point and END end point Xe Later you can trim the sample assigned to the pad to make even finer adjustments Samples can be trimmed in the SAMP PAD screen PAD Edit page gt P 86 CD IMPORT SAMP PAD GGGS_ NEW SON 00 00 36 c i8 J 120 0 4 4 PAD_ASSIGN FROM CO DA H ASSIGN TO 05 05 44 34 64 05 08 52 63 05 42 11 a gt ton EXECUTE button This button executes the sample import opera tion A CD DA data can be imported only for songs whose sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz A Execution of this operation requires a longer time than the actual time length of the data Also processing cannot be cancelled once the operation has been executed E Additional functions in the CD Import page In the CD Import page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional functions to the F1 F2 keys FEC co LOAD co UNLOAD e F1 CD LOAD key Close the tray of the CD RW drive e F2 CD UNLOAD key Eject the tray of the CD RW drive 82 Awute Reference Guide SAMP PAD screen Assigning CD DA data to a sam pling pad Procedure 1 Access the SAMP PAD screen CD Import page and press SHIFT key F2 CD UNLOAD key The tray of the CD RW drive will be ejected 2 Place an audio CD or mixed mode CD
160. the pairing will press the ENTER key occur CHANNEL PAIRING Choose a Pairing Mode CANCEL INPUTS 6 INPUT6 gt 5 RESET BOTH vip Another way to pair channels is to simulta neously press adjacent odd numbered gt even numbered SEL keys In this case the above window will appear when you press the two SEL keys simultaneously 2 Move the cursor to either the INPUT 1 gt 2 INPUT 2 gt 1 or RESET BOTH but ton and press the ENTER key You can select one of the following three pair ing methods INPUT x gt y x odd number y even num ber The parameters of the odd numbered channel bus except for attenuator and pan will be cop ied to the even numbered channel INPUT y gt x x odd number y even num ber The parameters of the even numbered channel bus except for attenuator and pan will be cop ied to the odd numbered channel RESET BOTH The parameters of both odd and even num bered channels buses will be reset to their default values When you execute pairing the button display will change to STEREO When you use the SEL keys to select a paired channel the other SEL key will blink AVVULNG Reference Guide 53 EQ ATT GRP screen EQ Att page EQ and attenuation settings Function Make four band EQ and attenuation set tings for the selected channel mooz a lE Lad GRP 00 00 00 000 pasa Data EJ Key operation m
161. the sound between left and right 18 Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo 19 HQ Pitch ee Only one note is pitch shifted but a stable effect is produced 20 Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shift with left and right pitches set independently 21 Rotary ROTARY Simulation of a rotary speaker An effect that modifies the pitch by applying amplitude modulation to 22 Ring Mod RING MOD the frequency of the input On the AW4416 even the modulation fre quency can be controlled by modulation 23 Mod Filter MOD FILTER An effect which uses an LFO to modulate the frequency of the filter Appendix 6 A ULNE Reference Guide Appendix Distortion type Effects Title Type Description 24 Distortion DISTORTION Distortion 25 Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar Amp Simulator Dynamic Effects Title 26 Dyna Filter Type DYNA FILTER Description Dynamically controlled filter Responds to MIDI Note On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI 27 Dyna Flange DYNA FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger Responds to MIDI Note On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI 28 Dyna Phaser DYNA PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter Responds to MIDI Note On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI Combined Effects Title Type Description 29 Rev Chorus REV CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel 30 Rev gt Chorus
162. the world of the AW4416 By defeating these assignments you can insert internal effects 1 2 into any desired channel or use AUX bus 7 8 or return channels 1 2 for other purposes EFFECT i EFFECT X2 AUX7 EFF1 AUX8 EFF2 RETURN 1 2 SELECT INSERT SEND Monitor output headphone output As monitoring jacks the AW4416 provides MONITOR OUT jacks and a PHONES jack The types of signal that are output from these jacks will change as follows depending on the state of the AW4416 Initial state The signal of the stereo output channel will be output without change from the MONITOR OUT jacks PHONES jack 2 When the SOLO key is on The signal of the channel selected by the ON key will be sent to the SOLO bus and output from the MONITOR OUT jacks PHONES jack At this time all other signals will be muted 3 When the TRACK CUE key is on The direct output signal of the track selected by the REC TRACK SELECT key will be output from the MONITOR OUT jacks PHONES jack When the internal metronome function is on The metronome signal will be mixed with the output signals of Kp The same signal is always sent from the MONITOR OUT jacks and the PHONES jack H owever the level adjustment is independent the output level of the MONITOR OUT jacks is adjusted by the MONITOR OUT control and the output level of the PHONES jack is adjusted by the PHONES control Whenever the SOLO key and
163. their initial settings 80 Awutns operation Guide Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Assign the signals to buses When the AW4416 is in the initial state bus outputs 1 8 of the mixer section are patched as follows to tracks 1 16 of the recorder In our example here we will assign the signal from the rhythm machine or drum mics input via input chan nels 1 2 to buses 1 2 and send to them to tracks 1 2 of the recorder _ Recorder Mixer section input patch Recorder section Buses 1 8 Tracks 1 8 Tracks 9 16 1 Press the PAN key gt F1 key The PAN ROUTE screen Pan 1 16 page will appear In this page you can assign input channels 1 16 to buses stereo bus buses 1 8 and make pan settings GGGG _ NEW SONG TE SE PAN ROUTE A no 00 000 lists E 4 LS i 7i Bus assign O8 080808 08 BOB OH oH oo ao 1 8 buttons Hou 0000 80 Fo 8O08 0080808008 E ST button PAN knob PEBE Caoa BEREZ yefo are BODOG vE m m pz m fm m m fm m m m m z m Ead fa m z m fm m z m GBGee5 aami Eia See8 7 S868 3 GbGeee FEES B EES 5 8G888 3 B 11 na aa Oe 2a E CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER f BR Pan 1 16 Pan 17 24 amp Pan MONI 2 Use the CURSOR lt p gt A keys to move the cursor to the input channel 1 area Turn the ST button off and turn the bus assign 1 2 bu
164. times 1 99 that the data will be copied e INTERVAL When copying multiple times specify the spac ing of the copy destination starting locations e INSERT Specify whether the copied audio data will be inserted Insert or overwritten OverWrite in the copy destination track e EXECUTE Execute the command FR START FR END Copy ata H source track FR TRACK a a i COPY Copy Ce n D ack TO TRACK TO START Jb COPY Copy destination E M 6 a track after BC A execution INSERT Insert Copy destination a track after B A execution INSERT OverWrite Copy destination track after B A A execution TIMES 2 lt INTERVAL MOVE Move the audio data of the selected part to the specified location of the specified track At this time the move source audio data will be erased e FR TRACK from track Select the move source track e FR START from start Specify the starting location of the move source part e FR END from end Specify the ending location of the move source part e ALLV TR all virtual tracks Select whether all virtual tracks included in the corresponding track s will be moved YES or whether only the currently selected virtual track will be moved NO e TO TRACK Select the move destination track e TO START Specify the starting location of the move desti nation e INSERT Specify whether the moved audio data will be inserted Insert or overwritten OverWr
165. to each channel Input channel 1 24 Return channel Return channel mono 1 stereo 2 stereo MIC LINE INPUT OPTION IN SAMPLING PAD EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 DIGITAL STEREO IN METRONOME AVVUUNG Operation Guide 23 Chapter1 Welcome to the world of the AW4416 INPUT PATCH MIC LINE INPUT SAMPLING PAD EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 DIGITAL STEREO IN METRONOME Input channels 1 24 There are monaural input channels used mainly for inputting mics or line level instruments The signals input to input channels 1 24 are routed through an attenuator phase switch four band EQ dynamics processor and delay and are sent to buses 1 8 the stereo bus or AUX buses 1 8 Input channels 1 16 have a direct output DIRECT OUT function that allows their signal to be output directly to an output jack or to the recorder section gt SELECTED INSERT RETURNS INPUT 1 24 INSERT 00 ATT o 4 BAND EQr nannicst INPUT DELAY METER EQ Mono in X 24 Gain Reduction n LEVEL INPUT PATCH PREFADER LISTEN AFTER PAN METER SOLO O O REPOST oON AUX DIRECT OUT o gt 1 16 only INPUT 1 24 RETURN 1 2 STEREO R STEREO L SOLO L SOLO R AUX 1 AUX 6 AUX 7 EFF1 AUX SEEEN 24 Awvuns operation Guide Chapterl1 Welcome to the world of the AW4416 Return channels 1 2 These are stereo input channels used mainly to input
166. to rehearse once again press the PLAY key once again while the transport is stopped If you press the REH EARSAL key before or during rehearsal operations of step 3 will continue repeating In this case the A B Repeat function will be defeated To stop repeating the rehearsal press the REPEAT key once again or press the STO P key O Recording with auto punch in out 5 To actually record using auto punch in out stop the transport and hold down the REC key and press the PLAY key The PLAY key will light and the REC key will blink then playback will begin from the pre roll point 2 When you reach the auto punch in point the REC key will light and recording will begin on the track you selected in step 1 punch in 3 When you reach the auto punch out point the REC key will blink recording will end and playback will resume punch out 4 When you reach the post roll point the transport will locate to the pre roll point and stop 6 If you wish to listen to the recorded result press the AUTO PUNCH key to make it go dark and then press the PLAY key Xe If you make a mistake during auto punch in out recording stop the transport and press the UNDO key to cancel the previous recording and return the data to the state before recording The following diagram shows the operating procedure for auto punch in out Pre roll Auto punch in Auto punch out Post roll point point point
167. to specify the trans mitting device 2 1 1 2 Receive channel Specify the MIDI channel used for reception In general MIDI messages are received only if the MIDI channel matches but this is not the case if OMNI is turned on 2 1 2 ON OFF 2 1 2 1 Program change Reception and transmission can be enabled or disabled If OMNI is turned on program changes will be received regardless of their MIDI channel If ECHO is on they will be echoed regardless of the channel 2 1 2 2 Control change If ECHO is on these messages will be echoed regardless of the channel 2 1 3 MMC Device ID Specify the ID number used when transmitting and receiv ing MMC commands 2 1 4 PORT Select whether serial communication will use the MIDI IN OUT connectors or the TO HOST connector MTC is always transmitted from the MTC OUT connector If the TO HOST connector is selected you must also select one of three settings as appropriate for the other device 2 1 5 THRU You can select whether the MIDI OUT THRU connector will function as OUT or THRU If THRU is selected messages received at the MIDI IN con nector will be retransmitted without change from the MIDI OUT THRU connector If MIDI THRU is selected the connector will function as THRU regardless of the PORT setting In order to function as MIDI OUT the PORT setting must be set to MIDI IN OUT 2 2 MIDI program change assign table The correspondence between program change numbers and sc
168. track of the recorder 1 Press the SETUP key gt F1 key The SETUP screen Patch In page will appear allowing you to select the input sig nal for each input channel SFT JP 99899 nEn sone Scene BA E 1HPuT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data MIXER CHANNEL INPUT ASSIGN area 2 In the MIXER CHANNEL INPUT ASSIGN area move the cursor to the input channel to which you will assign the pad output 3 Rotate the DATA JOG dial to make a selection in the range of SMP 1 SMP 8 The output of the selected pad will be assigned to the input channel Kpl Pad assignments are common to banks A and B If SMP 1 is selected for a channel the output of pad 1 for both banks A and B will be assigned to it All sounds assigned to pads will be monaural output 4 Turn on the ON key of the input channel to which the pad is assigned and raise the fader Now the signal of the pad you selected in step 3 will be sent to the corresponding input channel and can be recorded or monitored 186 Awun operation Guide Chapterl 2 Sampling pads Assigning a region to a sampling pad In order to use the pads to play samples you must first assign the desired samples to those pads There are three ways to assign samples to pads Assign a desired region from tracks 1 16 of the recorder section 2 Import an audio CD track from an internal external CD RW drive 3 Import a WAV file from a SCSI devi
169. use If this occurs try using single speed normal speed recording rather than dou ble speed or faster recording MiThe screen changes on its own when you oper ate the PAN or EQ encoders e In the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page turn the AUTO PAN DISPLAY and AUTO EQ DISPLAY settings OFF For details refer to page 33 UTILITY screen E Can t use the DATA JOG dial to control on screen parameters e The NUM LOCATE key may be on e The JOG ON key may be on Appendix 38 AULAS Reference Guide Appendix Display message list Messages AUTOMIX DISABLED AUTOMIX MEMORY FULL AUTOMIX NOT RUNNING AUTOMIX REC ABORTED AUTOMIX RECORDING AUTOMIX RUNNING BANK A SELECTED BANK B SELECTED CANNOT ASSIGN DIGITAL ST IN CANNOT CHANGE THE MUTE CANNOT PLAY THIS PAGE CANNOT RECALL AUTOMIX CANNOT REDO CANNOT SELECT MTC SLAVE CANNOT SELECT WC EXTERNAL CANNOT SET MARK CANNOT UNDO CANNOT USE BOTH SLOTS CD PLAY MODE NOW DIFFERENT TC FRAME TYPE DIGITAL ST IN REC PROHIBIT DIGITAL ST IN SYNC ERROR DIN TO STEREO BUS REFUSE EFF1 INSERT RELEASED EFF2 INSERT RELEASED FOR EFFECT2 ONLY IN OUT POINTS TOO CLOSE Automix is not enabled and cannot be recorded Automix memory has no free area Automix has been stopped so recording is not possible Pause the recorder and then playback Automix recording was stopped and the data was discarded The operation cannot be executed since a
170. zero 00 00 00 000 AVVULNG Operation Guide 115 Chapter6 Transport locate operations MARK SEARCH 6 SET 0 RTZ 3 If you wish to return the counter to the absolute time display press the ABS REL key The specified relative zero location will be displayed as follows in the TRACK screen gt TR View page that appears when you press the TRACK key gt F1 key F E Zero relative time location The zero relative time location is saved on the hard disk as part of the currently selected song 116 Awun operation Guide Chapter6 Transport locate operations Locating to the start end points The start point and end point normally correspond to the beginning and end of the song When you create a new song absolute time 00 00 00 000 will be set as the default start point When you record a song the last point in the song will automatically be set as the end point If you extend the length of the song the end point will move accordingly You can locate to the start point by pressing the kea key of the Locate section or to the end point by pressing the gt gt I key MARK SEARCH je a The start point and end point will be displayed as follows in the TRACK screen TR View page that appears when you press the TRACK key gt F1 key Start point End point vip The locations of the start point and end point can be adjusted as desired
171. 0 reverb HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency GATE LVL OFF 60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0 120 ms Gate opening speed HOLD Gate open time DECAY 2 Gate closing speed MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds 1 0 02 ms 2 13 s fs 44 1 kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 s fs 48 kHz 2 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz EARLY REF Early reflections Parameter Range S Hall L Hall Random Description TYPE Reverse Plate Spring Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Appendix 8 AUE Reference Guide Appendix GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE Early reflections with gate and early reflections with reverse gate Parame
172. 0 W AC 60 Hz Europe 230 V 80 W AC 50 Hz 558 0 x 147 7 x 459 7 mm 22 x 5 8 x 18 1 inches 11 8 kg 26 lbs 5 to 35 C Removable 2 5 hard disk adapter ADP25H mini YGDAI cards MY8 AT MY8 TD MY8 AE MY8 AT MY4 AD MY4 DA Footswitch FC5 Channel 1 2 balanced XLR type TRS phone jack 3 dB clipping level 3 kQ 46 dB to 4 dB 52 dB 22 dB Channel 1 2 unbalanced TRS phone jack 10 kQ 0 dB 6002 0 dB channel 3 8 balanced TRS phone jack 3 dB clipping level 3 kQ 46 dB to 4 dB 52 dB 22 dB channel 8 unbalanced phone jack 500 kQ 46 dB to 4 dB 52 dB 20 dB STEREO OUT Output impedance Nominal load impedance Nominal output level Maximum output level MONITOR OUT Output impedance Nominal load impedance Nominal output level Maximum output level OMNI OUT Output impedance Nominal load impedance Nominal output level Maximum output level PHONES Nominal load impedance Maximum output level DIGITAL STEREO I O Option card slot Digital I O Analog input Analog output E Digital mixer Appendix L R unbalanced phono 1 kQ 10 kQ 10 dBV 8 dBV L R balanced TRS phone jack 150Q 10 kQ 4 dB 22 dB 1 4 unbalanced phone jack 1 kQ 10 kQ 0 dB 18 dBV unbalanced TRS phone jack 8 40Q 100 mW 100 mW 40 Q load Coaxial phono Slot x 2 MY 8 AT Adat MY 8 TD Tascam MY 8 AE AES EBU MY 8 AD TRS phone j
173. 00 delayed dis tortion Appendix 22 AI ULUNE Reference Guide Appendix MULTI FILTER Three band parallel filter 24 dB octave Parameter Range Description TYPE 1 HPF LPF BPF Filter 1 type low pass high pass band pass TYPE 2 HPF LPF BPF Filter 2 type low pass high pass band pass TYPE 3 HPF LPF BPF Filter 3 type low pass high pass band pass FREQ 1 28 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 1 frequency FREQ 2 28 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 2 frequency FREQ 3 28 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 3 frequency LEVEL 1 0 100 Filter 1 level LEVEL 2 0 100 Filter 2 level LEVEL 3 0 100 Filter 3 level RESO 1 0 20 Filter 1 resonance RESO 2 0 20 Filter 2 resonance RESO 3 0 20 Filter 3 resonance MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds AIN ULNE Reference Guide Appendix 23 Appendix Dynamics Processors Dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels However you can also use them creatively to shape the volume envelope of a sound The AW4416 features comprehensive dynamics proces sors for all the input channels tape returns and the bus and stereo outputs These processors allow you to compress expand compress expand compand gate or duck the signals passing through the mixer giving you unparalleled sonic quality and flexibility Preset Dynamics Programs These are the preset dynamics programs
174. 02 44 0404 svane da Ve ei ieeseaws orene canes 8 Dynamics Processors 00 cece ee eee eee eee eens 24 Preset Dynamics Programs osu b eww e eww yh ee Be eee oe 24 Preset Dynamics Program Parameters 00000 29 Troubleshooting csc 0c6scswi avers ewe cena es econ enw 35 Display message list 2 02 cee cece wee e ence nee 39 Messages rena tua i e Cubed ee ee Chee Ree ea Ss Ses 39 Popup Messages s kv pa mra ega eee eee eee ees Rim bee ha 41 Specifications sesesesusssssesesosesessseese 43 General Specifications c sasccseeses dee eeant deena ees 43 MIXCRSCCUON 4c Oevs bee a eae a Nee Oo ees BAG 44 Recorder section si0seceus ews ehe Cee sew kee eee See kae Se 46 CONUGIS lt 0 5 05 Se ia peewee wes wee ee eee eo oee wes 47 Conta WO 24 shcekeeheeeseeteesGee hey eee ness oe esis 48 Dimensions sees araoa te besa eeddeseeanseetpames 49 MIDI data format 225 cccnetanineeteiecdtdeongunnavas 50 MIDI Implementation Chart 0 02 ee eee eee eee 54 Block diagram AULAE Reference Guide V SONG QUICK REC MASTER ING cD PLAY SET UP FILE UTILI TY VIEW MIDI PAN ROUTE EQ ATT GRP DYN DLY AUX1 AUX6 AUX7 EFF1 AUX8 EFF2 HOME SAMP PAD TRACK EDIT AUTO MIX SCENE Appendix Reference guide Reference guide The reference guide explains all screens and all pages t
175. 09 Table of transport key operations 0e eee eeee 109 Shuttle function cue review operation 68 110 Nudge function 4 aais 0e ses en Oh ene tee se eens 110 Using the Nudge functions o 344ii0e fev avee taser rie riaass 110 Nudge function settings 14 is 46 tae ohgenete ayers Bd aes 112 Rollback function 525 si i has GAS Aa ROR EN aS 113 Locating to a specific point 0 cece eee eee eee 114 Locating to the zero location of the counter 115 Setting the zero relative time location 04 115 Locating to the start end points 0c eee ee eens 117 AB repeat tic Oia ieee on Code Eee ees oa eh ek SE ee 118 Setting The A BPOUnts sru oo a0 5 4a dy 414 turira ahd ed dee yA 118 Performing A B repeat playback 1 2 2 2 0 cece eee ences 118 In GUE DOINS 605 ShcA Aras Ua ae nee R PR T a ay 120 Setting the In point Out point lt ss0 9 Goaee roosts seek eee be 120 Markers i444 ia GAO Oh eae atin tee eeeeh wh id ee 121 Setting a Markety lag He oe oe eS Be aun ee ar ad See woe 121 Locating to a marker opentus Sabesebaeees eh ee ears eciseue 121 Adjusting the location of a locate point 6 123 Deleting a locate point 0 cee eee eee eee eee 125 Deleting a locate point using the panel keys 126 Deleting an In Out point or A B point se 2 2 0 000002 eee 126 Deleting a marker nu s4226444 404544444444se4e4eo4 Piles 126 C
176. 1 2 0 21 319 1 18 Awu Tutorial Tutorial Mixdown O Female Chorus 2 Compression THRESH RATIO OUT GAIN ATTACK RELEASE KNEE 16 2 5 1 2 0 22 226 Track 13 Male Chorus The quality of this singer s voice makes EQ unnecessary in this situation but some compression will be helpful to help the blend with the female chorus O Male Chorus Compression THRESH RATIO OUT GAIN ATTACK RELEASE KNEE 20 2 5 1 2 0 31 315 O Track 14 Lead Vocal The lead vocalist on this track has a beautiful wide range voice one of the attrac tions of which is the rich sensuous low end We want all of this to come through so we ll only use a high pass filter set at 79 Hz to cut out the extreme low fre quencies mostly ambient rumble and a bit of high boost to provide a little extra presence The lead voice is well controlled so not much compression is required but we ll use a little anyway for a subtle boost in punch and power O Lead Vocal EQ LOW L MID H MID HIGH Q HPF H SHELF F 79 10 0 kHz G ON 1 5 O Lead Vocal Compression THRESH RATIO OUT GAIN ATTACK RELEASE KNEE 13 2 5 1 1 5 26 6 3 As you make adjustments to EQ dynamics etc don t be afraid to adjust the fader levels as you go along EQ and dynamic
177. 1 1 2 SL1 7 8 SL1 1 SL1 8 SL2 1 2 SL2 7 8 SL2 1 SL2 8 DIN L R DIN L DIN R MET Internal metronome 14 awuns Reference Guide SET UP screen 3 RECORDER TRACK INPUT ASSIGN E Additional functions in the Patch Here you can select the signals to be assigned IN page to the inputs of tracks 1 16 The following sig nals can be assigned In the Patch IN page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following function to the F1 key Recorder inputs 1 16 BUS 1 BUS 8 Bus 1 8 LE CHANGE TAE DIR 1 DIR16 i channel direct out 1 Yip e F1 CHANGE TAB key Switch between the following two tab displays For detai Is on operations in the Patch IN page refer to Operation Guide Chapter 8 Patching AVVULNG Reference Guide 15 SET UP screen Patch OUT page Patch signals to output jacks Function Assign output signals to the OMNI OUT jacks STEREO OUT jacks SET UP 20890 NEn sons a FE DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack and nput 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data the output channels of I O cards l Key operations e SETUP key gt F2 Patch OUT key e Repeatedly press the SETUP key until the display shown at right appears 1 In the SET UP screen the tabs displayed at the bottom of the screen are divided into two groups If the Patch OUT tab is not assigned to the F2 key when you press the SETUP key press S
178. 1 Z 3 4 5 6 7 amp A Ortion E E Additional functions in the Option page In the Option page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following function to the F1 key PSC PEAK HOLD a e F1 PEAK HOLD key This key sets defeats the Peak Hold function This is the same function as the PEAK HOLD key in the level meter counter section AVVULNG Reference Guide 79 SAMP PAD screen From Rgn page Assign a region to a sampling pad Function Assign a region continuous audio data recorded in one operation to a sampling pad Key operation e Sampling pad section EDIT pad gt F1 D From Rgn key e Repeatedly press the EDIT pad until the 2 screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt SAMP PAD EDIT button gt From Rgn tab Screen functions 4 PAD SEL pad select button This button selects the pad to which a region will be assigned 2 RGN SEL region select button This button selects the region that will be assigned to the pad 3 EXECUTE button This button executes the assignment When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the region you selected in will be assigned to the pad you selected in 4 T track This column shows the track number 1 16 N name This column shows the virtual track name Tracks in which nothing has been recorded are displayed as NO REC V virtual track
179. 10 00 Hz SLOW rotation speed FAST 0 05 10 00 Hz FAST rotation speed MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds RING MOD Ring modulator Parameter Range Description SOURCE OSC SELF Modulation source oscillator or input signal OSC FREQ 0 0 3000 0 Hz Oscillator frequency FM FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed FM DEPTH 0 100 Oscillator frequency modulation depth MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds MOD FILTER LFO modulation type filter Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth TYPE LPF HPF BPF Filter type low pass high pass band pass OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset RESO 0 20 Filter resonance PHASE 0 00 354 38 Sees modulation and right channel modulation phase differ LEVEL 0 100 Output level MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds DISTORTION Distortion effect Parameter Range DST1 DST2 OVD1 Description DST TYPE OVD2 CRUNCH Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume TONE 10 to 10 Tone N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Appendix 1 4 AWE Reference Guide Appendix AMP SIMULATE Guitar Amp Simulator Parameter Range Description AMP TYPE I Guitar amp
180. 17 before turning the power off ABS REL switch This switches the counter display between absolute time ABS or relative time REL AVVUUIG Operation Guide 39 Chapter2 Parts and their functions PEAK HOLD switch This switch sets defeats the peak hold function of the level meters Level meters counter This area displays various information necessary when operating the recorder section of the AW4416 such as level meters for each track of the recorder sec tion a time counter and the number of the currently selected scene memory TRACK CUE key This key is used to output the signal of the desired track directly to the MONITOR OUT jacks for monitoring Use the REC TRACK SELECT keys to select the track REC TRACK SELECT keys Use these keys to select the track s to be recorded When the TRACK CUE key is on these keys select the track to be monitored ALL SAFE key This key cancels all record ready settings of the REC TRACK SELECT keys RECORDER section a N RECORDER TRACK EDIT I I j 1 Ne X imens TRACK key This key accesses the TRACK screen where you can view the recorded status of each track and make virtual track assignments EDIT key This key accesses the EDIT page where you can edit tracks and virtual tracks UNDO key This key cancels the
181. 2 Local ON OFF X X Aux All Notes OFF X X Messages Active Sense X O Reset X O MTC quarter frame message is transmitted When MTC Sync mode MTC quarter frame message is recognized When MTC Sync mode Notes 1 MMC 2 When MCLK Sync mode Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No AW4416 Block diagram MIC LINE INPUT SAMPLING PAD EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 DIGITAL STEREO IN METRONOME RECORDER RECORDER REPRO1 16 RECORDER ST Trk L R INPUT SELECT 46 L gt SELECTED INSERT RETURNS INPUT 1 24 METER INSERT 00 Gain Reduction EQ Mono in X 24 RETURN 1 2 Stereo in X 2 RECORDER MONI 1 16 RECORDER INPUT 1 16 FL Display i O is WS No HN an G r zZ AUX7 EFF1 AUX8 EFF2 INSERT SEND INSERT 090 o DY INPUT o 4 BAND EQF9 Namics DELAY aS gt RECORDER METER METER w DIRECT OUT EQ Gain Reduction Mono in X 16 EFFECT EFFECT X2 EFFECT1 2 SELECT AUX 7 EFF1 AUX BlEFES ac OO WU co EE nn AUX 1 AUX 6 INPUT DELAY PREFADER LISTEN AFTER PAN ON LEVEL DIRECT OUT gt 1 16 only PREFADER LISTEN AFTER PAN O O O O RETURN1 can not be assigned to AUX7 EFF1 RETURN2 can not be assigned to AUX8 EFF2 PREFADER LISTEN AFTER PAN METER METER ON LEVEL ENA
182. 2 wu rAMtHONDA CE OO Trono VJNANN ww a a X XXX 393533233 FE OO 3 DDD mmmmmmmmn NN NN L LILL BUS1 8 5 4 gt 5 LEVEL x 2 AUX1 8 gt LEVEL 28 Awvuns operation Guide Chapter1 Welcome to the world of the AW4416 Output patch This section assigns the output signals to the STEREO OUT jacks DIGITAL STE REO OUT jack I O cards installed in OPTION I O slots 1 2 and OMNI OUT jacks 1 4 The following types of signals can be selected O STEREO The stereo bus output signal that has passed through the stereo output channel O BUS 1 8 The output signals of buses 1 8 O AUX 1 8 The output signals of buses 1 8 O CH DIRECT OUT 1 16 The direct output of input channels 1 16 O INSERT SEND An insertion output for inserting an external effect into each channel O RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1 16 The direct output of tracks 1 16 of the recorder section STEREO OUT DIGITAL STEREO OUT STEREO BUS1 8 AUX1 8 CH DIRECT OUT1 16 4 INSERT SEND Sy _ RECORDER DIRECT 16 OUT 1 16 tt OUTPUT PATCH OPTION OUT X2 OMNI OUT O x4 Internal effects 1 2 When the AW4416 is in its default state the output of AUX bus 7 8 is sent to the output patch section and simultaneously assigned to the inputs of internal effects 1 2 as well The outputs of effects 1 2 are respectively assigned to return channels 1 2 AVVUUIG Operation Guide 29 Chapter1 Welcome to
183. 22 mmama NN Nn IIT 16 RECORDER INPUT 1 16 PAESADEALISTEN AFTER PAN FL Display METER METER sol METER INPUT MONITOR INSERT PRESOTA 16 5 i attH H 4BanD EQ DY NEUT RECORDER O namics DELAY REPRO1 16 ed h a PRE POST ON AUX METER METER E RECORDER gt DIRECT OUT EQ Gain Reduction RECORDER 2 ST Trk L R Mono in X 16 26 Amwuns Operation Guide Chapter1 Welcome to the world of the AW4416 Digital cascade connections The input signal from the rear panel DIGITAL STEREO IN jack can be cascaded directly into the stereo bus instead of being sent via the input patch section and patched to a pair of input channels This is convenient when you wish to use an external digital mixer without linking it to the mixer section of the AW4416 Set tings for cascade connection are made in the SET UP screen D InSetup page For the signal flow diagram refer to Oscillator below Oscillator The AW4416 has a built in oscillator section that allows you to select a sine wave 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz or white noise The signal of the oscillator can be output from one of the following buses buses 1 8 AUX buses 1 8 or the stereo bus Oscillator settings are made in the UTILITY screen Oscillator page ENABLE ATT DIGITAL STEREO L 90 DIGITAL STEREO R o BUS CASCADE OSC Stereo output channel This is t
184. 2z 4 Trig List AVVUUIG Operation Guide 197 Chapter1 2 Sampling pads 5 Use the CURSOR keys and the ENTER key to change the R column from back to O and play back the recorder to hear the playback of the trigger events Be aware that if you play back the recorder when the R column stil displays and strike the pads your new performance will be recorded Yip If you switch the M column of a pad from O to that pad track will be muted even if you play back the recorder Copying a pad performance Here s how to copy a recorded pad performance to another location 1 In the SAMPLING PAD section press the EDIT pad gt F5 key The Trig List page will appear SAMP PAD tes ____ TRIG List 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 COPY button ASN 10 ASN 10 ASN 10 ASN 10 ASN 10 ASN 10 ASN 10 ASN 10 ASN 10 A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B S e8ee8e808 0000000 A Trig List 2 Move the cursor to the COPY menu and press the ENTER key The parameters for the copy command will appear These parameters have the following functions SAMP PAD JHETHER ___ TRIG List 00 00 16 957 J 120 0 4 4 oyyy DDDDDD DMA PPL CETE Lt A Trig List 198 Awun operation Guide Chapterl 2 Sampling pads O FR PAD from pad Specify the copy source pad track O FR START from start O FR END from end Specify the beginning FR START and end FR
185. 4 EQ HIGH EQ LOW keys to select the band that will be controlled EQ HIGH EQ HI MID EQ LO MID EQ LOW keys These keys select the band that will be controlled by the controls F1 F5 function 1 5 keys These keys are used to access pages or to execute specific functions according to the tabs or buttons shown at the bottom of the display 38 Avwyuns operation Guide Chapter2 Parts and their functions SHIFT key This key is used to switch the tabs or buttons shown at the bottom of the display You can use a variety of additional functions by holding down the SHIFT key and pressing the F1 F5 keys Note FJ symbol is displayed in the lower left of the screen to indicate a page that sup ports the SHIFT key Contrast This adjusts the contrast of the display Level meter counter section a b o o e O O PEAK HOLD REC TRACK SELECT TJ W___ _ LORE 4 Access indicator This indicator shows that the internal hard disk is being accessed This indicator will light red while the hard disk is being read or written Noid Turning off the power while the access indicator is lit may not only result in loss of the data on disk but may also destroy the disk itself You must perform the shut down process gt P
186. 4416 Professional Audio Workstation Showing a Yamaha AW4416 to a recording engineer say 20 years ago would have a similar effect to showing an interplanetary probe to Galileo After the ini tial shock both parties would probably nod their heads and mumble something about inevitability It had to happen The AW4416 can do what once required a couple of rooms full of very very expensive equipment that required consider able expertise to operate And it does it very well indeed In short the AW4416 can take your sound recording projects from conception to completion with pro fessional level control and quality If you ve worked with a Yamaha O2R Digital Mixing Console a de facto standard through the recording and production industries today or one of Yamaha s other top quality digital consoles operating the AW4416 will not be a challenge But if you ve never had the pleasure the power and depth of the AW4416 translation lots of features and flexibility might be a little daunting at first This tutorial is designed to help you make friends with the AW4416 as quickly and as painlessly as possible Since the actual recording process is pretty much the same no matter what equipment you use we ve provided a complete set of pre recorded tracks for the demo song So Fine and will walk you through the process of mixing and mastering the tracks to create the final product We haven t completely ignored the initial recording process
187. 6 and a MIDI sequencer MTC can be transmitted from the MTC OUT connector of the AW4416 to an external device such as a MIDI sequencer or computer causing the MIDI sequencer or computer based sequencer program to synchronize to the AW4416 song 1 Use a MIDI cable to connect the AW4416 s MTC OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector of your MIDI sequencer MIDI IN connector MTC OUT connector L AW4416 CO MIDI sequencer MTC master MTC slave 2 Press the MIDI key and then press the F2 key The following screen will appear in the display o _00 00 00 o00 INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Mix MIDI SYNC SETTING MASTER MIDI CLOCK MTC MIDI CLK 3 Move the cursor to the MASTER button in the MTC SYNC area and press the ENTER key With this setting the AW4416 will function as the MTC master the device that transmits MTC 4 Move the cursor to the MTC button in the SYNC OUT area and press the ENTER key With this setting MTC will be transmitted from the MTC OUT connector when the AW4416 is running 5 If you need to set the MTC frame rate press the SONG key and then press the F2 key 238 Avwvuuns operation Guide Chapter1 5 MIDI The following screen will appear in the display SONG GGGl NEW SONG 3 SETTING 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 CURRENT SONG SETTING SONG NAME NAME 00001 NEW SONG EDIT COMMENT COMME
188. 9Hz 397Hz 2 82kHz 16 9kHz 4 5dB 0 0dB 2 0dB 0 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 5 4 5 35Hz 111Hz 2 00kHz 4 00kHz 7 5dB 4 5dB 2 5dB 0 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 0 1 5 6 3 111Hz 111Hz 2 24kHz 4 00kHz 3 0dB 0 0dB 2 5dB 0 5dB Description Emphasizes the low range of the bass drum and the attack created by the beater Creates a peak around 80Hz producing a tight stiff sound Emphasizes snapping and rimshot sounds Emphasizes the ranges of that classic rock snare drum sound Emphasizes the attack of tom toms and creates a long leathery decay Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals extending the sparkling decay Use on a tight high hat emphasizing the mid to high range Emphasizes the attack and clarifies the high range of instruments such as shakers cabasas and congas Makes a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies Unlike program 009 this emphasizes the low range of the electric bass No 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 Name Syn Bass 1 Syn Bass 2 Piano 1 Piano 2 E G Clean E G Crunch 1 E G Crunch 2 E G Distortion 1 E G Distortion 2 A G Stroke 1 A G Stroke 2 Parameter LOW PEAKING L MID PEAKING H MID PEAKING HIGH H SHELF 0 1 8 4 5 83Hz 944Hz 4 00kHz 12 6kHz 3 5dB PEAKING 8 5dB PEAKING 0 0dB
189. AS OD Oscillator Paeess i wcnioutaiusetece sees esse sweats 33 Using the test tone oscillator e 0 eee eee eee 33 Prefer pase sores ware cnet ieee ewes eee 34 Make overall settings for the AW4416 1 05 34 Prefer 2 page ein Gercne kien Cael de ata site ae eee gee 35 Make overall settings for the AW4416 2 0 35 Prefer 3 page aly y teu En E ie Gna a a oat en 37 Make overall settings for the AW4416 3 05 37 MIDI screen 6 0s s 66 8 S545 SSS OESRE RAS ORS 29 MIDE Setup pase saws setae nemisa sas ews tye wes 39 Make basic MIDI settings 0 2 ee eee eee ees 39 MIDI Syne page resser a ar Ges Rise She Sater eae Oana RS 41 Make settings related to MIDI synchronization 41 PGM Asn pafen iis 0 win 55d eia ile Nok we Wwe ew Ee ak ole 43 Assign a scene number to each program change number 43 VIEW screen 2 ccc ce ec tt et we ee ee ee ce ee 44 Ch View pagede cect ree sores ee be ea eee ees 8s 44 View all parameters of a channel 5 44 Library page susie coset in asoson eae ne eee tee es 47 Store or recall channel settings 0 00008 47 PAN ROUTE screen ccccccccvcveee 49 Pan 1 16 Pan17 24 Pan MONI pages 0eee eee 49 Set pan and routing 2s cane ecb eee eee eet ee hes 49 Pair CH Pair BUS pages 3244 s5S8 Std ecko thsen soe hess 52 Set channel bus pairing sx 0 2sncncetiees cad ce ecdaat in
190. AUTO REC 4 Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE field Turn the FADER button on and the other buttons CH ON PAN EQ off 5 Press the F3 key A page will appear in which the current locations for the faders of each channel monitor channels 1 16 are shown as a bar graph When you wish to make detailed edits to the fader movements recorded in the automix it is convenient to do so while viewing this screen AUTOMIX WETHER __ lt cewe gi Monii6 100 00 40 974 TEMPLATE FADER EDIT LAYER P B 1 16 RET 0 asec 7 AUTOMIx TRANSPORT i ABORT STOP AVVULNG Operation Guide 223 Chapter1 4 Automix 6 Make sure that the ABSOLUTE button in the FADER EDIT MODE field is turned on The two buttons of the FADER EDIT MODE field in the screen are used to select the fader editing method When the ABSOLUTE button is on previously recorded events will be erased and new events will be recorded Note Use the RELATIVE button when you wish to make relative changes to the previ ously recorded fader events For details refer to the Reference Guide AUTO MIX screen M ain page 7 Move the cursor to the on screen AUTO REC button and press the ENTER key 8 Press the top panel PLAY key to play back the song When song playback is started with the AUTO REC button on the REC button will be turned on automatically and automix will be in record mode However recording will not actually occur since a recording ch
191. AY popup window without locating move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the ENTER key AVVULNG Reference Guide 93 TRACK screen V Track page Switching virtual tracks Function Switch the virtual track number assigned to each track 1 16 and set cancel pairing between tracks Key operation e TRACK key gt F2 V Track key e Repeatedly press the TRACK key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt TRAC button gt V Track tab Screen functions Pairing By moving the cursor to this area and pressing the ENTER key you can pair or cancel pairing for two adjacent odd numbered gt even num bered tracks Paired tracks are indicated by a symbol and tracks for which pairing is defeated are indicated by a symbol Yip e Paired tracks will be linked when you switch virtual tracks or when you select them for track editing e Track pairing does not affect pairing of mon itor channels T track These are the track numbers 1 16 3 NAME This column shows the name of the virtual track that is currently selected for each track 1 16 4 VIRTUAL TRACK Move the cursor to this column and press the ENTER key to select the virtual track number used by each track 1 16 The currently selected virtual track number will be highlighted Of the virtual track numbers that are not currently selected tracks that have been reco
192. Avwvutne Reference Guide Appendix REV CHORUS Reverb and chorus effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed PM DEP 0 100 Pitch modulation depth AM DEP 0 100 Amp modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV CHO 0 100 Reverb and chorus balance 0 chorus 100 reverb MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds REV gt CHORUS Reverb and chorus effects in series Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed PM DEP 0 100 Pitch modulation depth AM DEP 0 100 Amp modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation d
193. BLE ATT DIGITAL STEREO L 7 DIGITAL STEREO R b A BUS CASCADE i ON ATT osc oo 7 4BAND EQ 4BAND EQ STEREO METER METER INSERT ON LEVEL BAL o p DY Oo i A io MeeR i of METER EQ 79 ig 7 5 DY O 0 O 0 Z eS d CD RW CD PLAY mode EQ Gain Reduction DRIVE CD PlayBack R METER METER BUS1 8 gt LEVEL METER METER AUX1 8 gt LEVEL SOLO gt D gt BUS 1 8 CH DIRECT OUT1 16 STEREO STEREO BUS1 8 AUX1 8 CH DIRECT OUT1 16 INSERT SEND RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1 16 STEREO BUS1 8 AUX1 8 CH DIRECT OUT1 16 INSERT SEND RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1 16 STEREO BUS1 8 AUX1 8 CH DIRECT OUT1 16 INSERT SEND RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1 16 STEREO BUS1 8 AUX1 8 CH DIRECT OUT1 16 INSERT SEND RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1 16 RECORDER DIRECT OUT 1 RECORDER DIRECT OUT 16 STEREO L STEREO R SOLO L SOLO R METRONOME RECORDER INPUT 1 16 RECORDER TRACK CUE PHONES MONITOR RECORDER INPUT 1 16 STEREO OUT DIGITAL STEREO OUT OPTION OUT X2 PHONES MONITOR OUT YAMAHA YAMAHA CORPORATION V566460 RO 1 IP 194 Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division P O Box 3 Hamamatsu 430 8651 Japan 00 08 7000 AP Printed in Japan YAMAHA AN HOE PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION Tutorial Tutorial AW4416 Professional Audio Workstation AW
194. C and D have been saved in scene numbers 01 04 eel O000 00 ooo lt lt INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 A MEMORY SORT 2 Press the CURSOR lt a key to move the cursor to the list at left SOURCE and use the DATA JOG dial to select the move source scene In this example we will select scene D which is stored in scene number 04 SOURCE DESTINATION Ho Data Ho Data Ho Data Ho Dota lnitial Data AVVUUIG Operation Guide 209 Chapter1 3 Scene memory 3 Press the CURSOR p gt key to move the cursor to the list at right DESTI NATION and use the DATA JOG dial to select the move destination In this example we will select a location between scene numbers 01 and 02 SOURCE DESTINATION He Ho Data Ho Data H7 Ho Data O HE 0 Ho Data BSL Ho Data Ba a2 B lmitial Data al A 4 To move the scene press the CURSOR key to move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key Scene D will move to scene number 02 and the scene numbers of scenes B and C will be incremented In this example scene numbers 01 04 will be rear ranged in the order of scenes A D B and C SOURCE DESTINATION Ho Data Initial Data 210 Awun operation Guide Chapterl 3 Scene memory Using keys to store recall a scene You can also store recall a scene by using the keys of the SCENE MEMOR
195. CE ORANGE If song protect is on the PRT column will show tit 2 SELECTED SONG NAME This shows the name of the song selected by the cursor This field is for display only and cannot be edited SONG LIST AVED AT 00707724 24 00707723 14 02 189MB 16 44 1 007 07 20 13 57 274MB 16 44 1 SELECTED SONG NAME D ee SONG CR 4 OMMENT cwr OEO re Other Sons Comment O 3 COMMENT This shows the comment of the song selected by the cursor This field is for display only and can not be edited 4 LOAD button This button loads the song enclosed by the dot ted line in the list SAVE button This button saves the current song A The location of the dotted frame in the list does not affect the save location of the cur rent song It is not possible to change the save location of the current song vp For details on loading or saving songs refer to Operation Guide Chapter 11 Song man agement 6 NEW SONG button This button creates a new song For details on creating a new song refer to Operation Guide Chapter 5 Recording on the AW4416 AVVULNG Reference Guide 1 SONG screen Setting page Make various settings for the current song Function Make various settings for the cur rent song such as editing the song name selecting the counter dis play method and selecting the G 6GGG NEW SONG __SONG __ SETTING 00 00 00 000
196. CH ON channel on button On off events of each channel will be displayed PAN button Pan operation events of each channel will be displayed FADER button Fader operation events of each channel will be displayed 2 Event selection cursor Move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATAJOG dial to select the data that you wish to edit 1 22 AVY ULUNE Reference Guide AUTOMIX screen 3 Selected event Editing will apply to the event that is enclosed by a dotted line in the list Move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to edit and rotate the DATAJOG dial to edit the value 4 TIME This area shows the time at which the event is recorded as hours minutes seconds millisec onds The minimum unit is 25 milliseconds You can move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATAJOG dial to move the location of the event vip Regardless of the display method selected in the SONG screen Setting page the timing in the event list is always displayed as time A If you edit the TIME the events in the list will be re ordered automatically This means that the displayed order of the events may change 6 EVENT This area shows the type of each event Move the cursor here and rotate the DATA JOG dial to edit the event CHANNEL This area shows the channel of the event Move the cursor here and rotate the DATA JOG dial to change the channel T SELECTED CH ONLY selected channel onl
197. CK menu tracks containing no audio data cannot be selected for editing The commands that can be selected in the TRACK menu and their parameters are listed below NAME track name Edit the name of an already recorded track e TRACK Select the track whose name you wish to edit e NAME Access the NAME EDIT popup window and input the new name Move the cursor to the OK button of the NAME EDIT popup window and press the ENTER key to finalize the new name ERASE Erase the audio data of a track When you exe cute the Erase command the track name will return to the NO REC display e TRACK Select the track that you wish to erase For the Erase command you can specify all tracks as the subject of the operation To do so rotate the DATAJOG dial all the way clockwise when setting the TRACK parameter to make the selec tion read AL C ALL CURRENT With this set ting all virtual tracks currently selected for tracks 1 16 will be selected for the operation e ALLV TR all virtual tracks Select whether all virtual tracks included in the corresponding track s will be erased YES or whether only the currently selected virtual track will be erased NO e EXECUTE Execute the command COPY Copy the audio data of a track to another track e FR TRACK from track Select the copy source track e TO TRACK Select the copy destination track e ALLV TR all virtual tracks Select whether all virtual tracks i
198. CONFIRMATION popup window will appear asking you to confirm the Recall opera tion 4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The Recall operation will be executed vip It is possible to execute the recall immedi ately without seeing the CONFIRMATION popup window To do so access the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTILITY key gt F2 key and turn RECALL CONFIRMATION off A If you attempt to recall a number in which no data has been stored an error message of ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL will appear and the recall will not take place 72 AWuUG Reference Guide AUX7 EFF1 and AUX8 EFF2 screens Pre Pst IN Pre Pst MONI pages Make on off and pre post settings for the effect sends Function Make on off and pre post settings for the signal sent from the input channels return channels and monitor channels to AUX buses 7 8 effects 1 2 Key operation e AUX 7 key AUX 8 key gt F3 Pre Pst IN key F4 Pre Pst MONI key e Repeatedly press the AUX 7 key or AUX 8 key until the desired page appears Mouse operation M button gt EFF 1 button EFF 2 button gt Pre Pst IN tab Pre Pst MONI tab Screen functions Channels This area shows the channels whose effect send pre post set tings are being switched 2 ON OFF buttons These buttons are on off switches for the signal that is sent from each channel to effect 1 2 3 PRE POST buttons The
199. Change TX is on a recall operation will cause a program change to be transmitted on the Tx CH according to the settings of the Program change table If more than one program number is assigned to the mem ory number that was recalled the lowest numbered pro gram will be transmitted If Program Change ECHO is on program changes will be echoed If a memory number is recalled for which there is no setting in the MIDI Program Change Assign Table no program change will be transmitted STATUS 1100nnnn Cn DATA Onnnnnnn nn Program Change Program No 0 127 4 5 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER FRAME F1 lt Transmission gt When MTC transmission is selected and the recorder is in PLAY or REC status Quarter Frame messages will be trans mitted according to the time code operation of the recorder lt Reception gt These messages are received if the AW4416 is operating as a MTC slave Quarter Frame messages received in realtime are assembled internally to create time code values that control the recorder AX VV ULNG Reference Guide Appendix 5 1 Appendix STATUS 11110001 F1 Quarter Frame Message DATA Onnndddd dd nnn message type 0 7 dddd data 4 6 SONG POSITION POINTER F2 lt Transmission gt If MIDI Clock is being transmitted Song Position Pointer messages will be transmitted when the recorder stops or locates in order to indicate the song position at which play back should begin for the next Start
200. D TRACK SONG NAME SIZE COPY DEMO SONG 27 36 E Deg Ls Lot ere COPYR GHT PROHIBIT A Stereo tracks from 48 kHz songs cannot be selected in this list Also in some cases it may not be possible to select stereo tracks from songs for which O pti mize has not been executed To optimize a song refer to page 182 8 If you wish to allow digital copying of the track you selected in step 7 move the cursor to the COPYRIGHT button at the bottom of the screen and press the ENTER key The COPYRIGHT button specifies whether copy prohibit data will be written into the subcode channel of the CD When the button is displayed as PROHIBIT a Ei symbol will be displayed in the COPY column of the corresponding track and digital copying will be prohibited for that track If you switch the COPYRIGHT button to PERMIT digital copying will be allowed for that track 9 Repeat steps 5 7 to select the stereo tracks that will be written into track numbers 2 and following of the CD TRACK SONG NAME SIZE copy BLUES 16 NAN JAZZ 194MB DEMO SONG 273MB TOTAL 77 8MB COPYR GHT PROHIBIT vp By using the DEL button at the bottom of the display you can remove the currently selected stereo track from the list By using the INS button you can insert data for a new audio track into the track number that follows the currently selected track AVVUUIG Operation Guide 261 Chapter1 7 Mastering 10 As necessary us
201. DAT recorders are designed to forcibly follow the word clock of the input signal when recording This type of DAT recorder can be used as the word clock master only when it is playing back 4 After selecting the desired button press the ENTER key The AW4416 will switch to the specified clock source A e A slight interval of time is required for the AW 4416 to select clock sources and the sound may be muted during this time e After switching the clock source verify that the button you selected in step 3 is not marked with an X symbol or symbol If an X symbol or symbol appears on the button or if an error message is displayed check the connections or the clock setting of the external device AVVUUNG Operation Guide 71 Chapter4 Connections and setup 72 AWG Operation Guide Recording on the AW4416 This chapter explains basic operation for performing multitrack recording and mixdown on the AW4416 using the example of recording instruments such as rhythm machine drums bass guitar and keyboard on their own tracks Preparations for recording Connections and start up Here s how to connect your instruments and monitor system and start up the AW4416 1 Connect your instruments mics and monitor system to the AW4416 as shown in the following diagram Synthesizer 22585 a UMU O Sees Electric guitar Electric bass INPUT 8 HI Z
202. E key cannot be used even if the cursor is displayed at the counter in the upper part of the display The cursor will move to the counter in the upper part of the display Cursor TRACK gga M Th VIEN O0 0 136 i O00 J 120 0 4 4 46 Hame ojm 91681 CV Tr 1 111 OO J 262CU Tr 2 111 00O 3 SECY Te 3 111 00 a 46 CU 7Tr 4 7111 O00 To specify the locate point using the DATA JOG dial use the CURSOR lt a gt keys to move the cursor to the digit that you wish to change and rotate the DATA JOG dial to specify the value To specify the locate point using the numeric keys keys 0 9 of the locate section move the cursor to the lowest digit of the value you wish to input and use the numeric keys to directly input the value If the time display SECOND is selected as the counter display type you can specify the value as hours minutes seconds milliseconds if time code display TIME CODE is selected you can specify hours minutes seconds frames sub frames if measure display MEASURE is selected you can specify measures beats To execute the Locate operation press the ENTER key 114 awuuns operation Guide Chapter6 Transport locate operations Locating to the zero location of the counter When the song is stopped or playing you can press the RTZ key of the Locate section to locate to the zero location of the currently displayed counter If the counter is displaying measures you wi
203. ECT Monitored signal Input source or Stopped irrelevant silence CD Input source or play Playing irrelevant back CD Input source or play back Recording _ irrelevant 1 Depends on the input monitor setting You can manually change the input monitor for each track This is unaffected by the on off status of the REC TRACK SELECT key A Even for tracks whose input monitor is set to the input source turning on a REC TRACK SELECT key that had been off will automatically cause the input source to switch to playback O AVVULNG Reference Guide 91 TRACK screen When the ALL button is on All Input Moni E Additional functions in the Track fon View page i REC TRACK Monitored signal In the Track View page you can press the SHIFT SELECT d A ae key to assign the following additional functions to irrelevant Input source the F1 F4 keys irrelevant Input source irrelevant Input source Regardless of the on off status of the REC i TRACK SELECT key the input source will be Fi F2 Fs Fa monitored for all tracks The input monitor cannot be switched manually Current position e F1 REMAIN key The vertical line in the frame shows the approx The remaining recordable time will be dis imate current position The small markers below played in the level meter counter and in the dis the frame show th
204. ECT TYPE 3 Output meter These are the same as in the Eff Edit page Refer to P 69 TITLE EDIT button Use this when you wish to edit the name library title of an effect program saved in the effect library Move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button and press the ENTER key to access the TITLE EDIT popup window where you can input the name For details on inputting characters refer to Operation Guide P 60 A Library numbers 1 41 are recall only presets their name cannot be edited Numbers in which no effect program has been stored will be displayed as No Data and their name cannot be edited either RECALL button Recall the currently selected effect program from the list A If you select and attempt to recall a number in which nothing has been stored a message of ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL will appear and the recall will not take place AUR7 EFF 1 9 new sone ___ oe NAME Reverb Hall m Hall input 00 00 00 000 Initial Data EFFECT LIBRARY CURRENT Q PEE TYPE G e HALL 6 STORE button Store the current effect settings A e Library numbers 1 41 are recall only pre sets and cannot be stored Settings can be stored only in library numbers 42 128 e When you execute the Store operation the effect program that had been stored in that number will be erased vp For the programs that are preset in the effect library refer to the a
205. END of the area that will be cop ied from the pad track specified by FR PAD The specified area will be selected as a pattern O TO PAD Select the copy destination pad track O TO START Specify the location in the pad track selected by TO PAD at which the data will be copied O TIMES copy times Specify the number of times that the data will be copied The pattern selected as the copy source will be copied repeatedly FR START FR END Copy source i FR PAD e COPY TIMES 3 Copy destination TO PAD TO START O INTERVAL When copying multiple times this parameter specifies the interval between copy destination patterns FR START FR END Copy source FR PAD i COPY TIMES 3 Copy destination pad track TO PAD ae E TO START INTERVAL O INSERT Specify whether the pattern will be inserted Insert or overwritten OverWrite at the copy destination O EXECUTE This button executes the Copy operation AVVUUIG Operation Guide 199 Chapter1 2 Sampling pads e Ifyou set the counter to measure units you can set the FR START FR END and TO START parameters in measure beat units Instead of using the DATA JO G dial to vary a location continuously you can use the keys of the locate section to move instantly to a desired locate point or marker 3 Move the cursor to the parameter whose setting you wish to change and press the ENTER key The cursor will move to the
206. ENTER key The selected locate point will be deleted When you delete the In Out point or the A B point the corresponding key IN OUT key or A B key will go dark If using the mouse you can delete a locate point by clicking it in the locate point display and then clicking the DELETE button in the lower right of the dis play e The DELETE button is used only when operating the mouse When using the top panel keys you can delete simply by moving the cursor to the desired locate point or marker and pressing the EN TER key AVVULNG Operation Guide 125 Chapter6 Transport locate operations Deleting a locate point using the panel keys A locate point except for the Start End points can be deleted as follows using only the panel keys O Deleting an In Out point or A B point Hold down the CANCEL key and press the key for the locate point that you wish to delete A B key or IN OUT key The locate point will be deleted and the corresponding key will go dark O Deleting a marker Use the I gt I keys to locate to the marker that you wish to delete Then hold down the CANCEL key and press the MARK key A message of MARK ERASE will briefly appear at the bottom of the display indicating that the selected marker has been erased 126 Awun operation Guide F4 Punch in out This chapter explains how to use punch in out About punch in out Punch in out is a m
207. F REW keys Rewind fast forward the CD lt lt gt P1 keys Select tracks e While the CD PLAY MODE button is on all keys except the CURSOR keys DATA JOG dial ENTER key and Transport sec tion keys will be disabled e The CD audio signal is routed through the stereo output channel and output from the STEREO OUT jacks Use the STEREO fader to adjust the volume During this time the signals of other channels will not be sent to the stereo output channel e For details on the CD Play function refer to Operation Guide Chapter 17 Mastering 12 Awuns Reference Guide This list shows the audio track numbers on the CD TRACK area and the times for each track TIME area The currently selected audio track will be highlighted vip You can move the cursor to the track list and switch the playback track by using the DATAJOG dial and the ENTER key CD PLAY screen Additional functions in the CD Play page In the CD Play page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following functions to the F1 F2 keys SC co LOAD co UNLOAD e F1 CD LOAD key Close the tray of the CD RW drive e F2 CD UNLOAD key Eject the tray of the CD RW drive AVVULNG Reference Guide 13 SET UP screen Patch IN page Patching a signal to a channel track Function Assign signals to the inputs of input channels 1 24 return channels 1 2 and record
208. F5 keys F1 EQ ON OFF keys Switch EQ on off This is the same function as the ON OFF button of EQ F2 DYN ON OFF key Switch the dynamics processor on off This is the same function as the ON OFF button of DYNAMICS F3 ROUT OFF key Turn off all signals sent from that channel to AUX buses 1 8 F4 PAN CENTER key Set the pan to center F5 EFF INS ASGN key This button is used to insert an external effect or internal effect into a channel This is the same function as the 4 ASSIGN button 46 Awuu8s Reference Guide VIEW screen Library page Store or recall channel settings Function Store the settings of the currently selected channel into the channel library or recall stored settings Key operation e VIEW key gt F2 Library key e Repeatedly press the VIEW key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt VIEW button gt Library tab Screen functions Channel This indicates the currently selected channel 2 EQ DYN DELAY settings This area shows the EQ dynamics processor delay settings for the channel 3 Input meter This meter shows the input level of the channel TITLE EDIT button Use this to edit the name library title of the set tings stored in the channel library Move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button and press the ENTER key to access the TITLE EDIT popup window where you can input the
209. FER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The above warning is located on the rear of the unit The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magni tude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons NEDERLAND Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back up Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing Kanaalweg 18 G 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel 030 2828425 Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever hem in als KCA THE NETHERLANDS This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back up For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center Address Kanaalweg 18 G 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel 030 2828425 Do not throw away the battery Instead hand it in as small chemical waste Important Important Read the following before operating the AW4416 O Warnings Do not allow water to enter this unit or allow the unit to become wet Fire or electrical shock may result Connect this unit s power cord o
210. HIFT key F1 CHANGE TAB key to switch the tabs Mouse operation M button gt SETU button gt Patch OUT tab Screen functions OMNI OUT ASSIGN 2 D ST OUT ASSIGN digital stereo out Select the signals that will be output from the assign OMNI OUT 1 4 jacks The following signals ST OUT ASSIGN stereo out assign can be assigned These respectively select the pair of signals that will be output from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT pay 3 2E jack and the STEREO OUT jack The following AUX 1 AUX 8 AUX buses 1 8 signals can be assigned Recorder direct outputs 1 RDR 1 RDR16 16 Display Signal type ST L R Stereo output channel L R channels of the stereo output channel ST L ST R BUS 1 2 BUS 7 8 Bus 1 2 7 8 Input channel direct out 1 2 15 16 AUX 1 2 AUX 7 8 AUX buses 1 2 7 8 RDR 1 2 RDR15 Recorder direct outs 1 2 16 15 16 DIR 1 2 DIR15 16 16 Aw unEs reference Guide SET UP screen 4 OPTION I O SLOT OUT ASSIGN This selects the signals that will be output from I O cards installed in OPTION I O slots 1 2 The following signals can be assigned Display Signal type BUS 1 BUS 8 Buses 1 8 DIR 1 DIR16 Input channel direct out 1 16 AUX 1 AUX 8 AUX buses 1 8 RDR 1 RDR16 vip Recorder direct outputs 1 16 For details on operation in the Patch OUT page refer to Operation Guide Chapter 8 Patching E Additi
211. IDI Using MIDI Clock to synchronize the AW4416 and a MIDI sequencer Here we will explain how MIDI Clock and Song Position Pointer messages can be transmitted from the AW4416 instead of MTC and used to synchronize an external MIDI sequencer Use this method if the MIDI sequencer or rhythm machine you wish to synchronize with the AW4416 does not support MTC or if you wish to specify the locate positions in terms of measures beats 1 Use a MIDI cable to connect the AW4416 s MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector of your MIDI sequencer MIDI OUT THRU connector aia MIDI IN connector _ AW4416 CS MIDI sequencer MIDI clock master MIDI clock slave 2 Press the MIDI key and then press the F1 key The MIDI Setup screen will appear in the display MIDI GGGGi NEW SONG SCENE OO TwpuT1_ 00 00 00 000 Initial Data RX OMNI TX m m oF 1 MIDI OUT SEL f PORT SELECT i 3 Move the cursor to the OUT button of the MIDI OUT SEL area and press the ENTER key The MIDI OUT SEL buttons select whether the MIDI OUT THRU connector will function as a MIDI OUT connector when the OUT button is on or as a MIDI THRU connector when the THRU button is on In this example we will turn on the OUT button in order to output the MIDI clock that is generated inside the AW4416 240 awun operation Guide Chapter1 5 MIDI 4 Press the F2 k
212. INATOR MASTERING MODE Pon T CD BACKUP MODE CE MEE gt eae Oscillator amp Prefer 1 amp 2 To perform the writing test turn the TEST button on and the WRITE but ton on in the MASTERING MODE area MASTERING MODE EER EHA 3 To execute only the writing test turn the TEST button on and the WRITE button off in the MASTERING MODE area MASTERING MODE EER Care A e Itis not possible to turn off both the TEST and WRITE buttons When writing for the first time we recommend that you leave the TEST button on 258 Awun operation Guide Chapter1 7 Mastering Writing the master Here s how to use the mastering function to write the stereo track data to CD R RW media 1 Press the MASTERING key The MASTERING screen will appear in the display MASTERING ELYES __ WRITE co 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 47 4 ST TRACK WRITE TO CO 2 Hold down the SHIFT key and press the F2 key CD UNLOAD The tray of the CD RW drive will open 3 Place a CD R RW disc on the tray Then hold down SHIFT and press the F1 key CD LOAD The tray will close 4 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the SCSI ID number of the AW4416 s internal CD RW drive and press the ENTER key CORH TRACE AT OHCE DISC AT ONCE A Inthe MASTERING screen you can access all stereo tracks 44 1 kHz sam pling frequency saved on the internal hard disk Thus it is not necessary that the stereo track be part
213. IX button on or variable VARI button on If FIX is selected the control change fre quency of the internal clock will be displayed at the right If VARI is selected you can move the cursor to the knob at the right and rotate the DATA JOG dial to make fine adjustments to the sam pling frequency over a range of 5 97 6 00 6 STEREO BUS CASCADE This selects whether the digital device con nected to the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack will be cascaded with the stereo bus of the AW4416 When you move the cursor to the DISABLE button and press the ENTER key the button display will change to ENABLE and the input signal from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack will be sent directly to the stereo bus of the AW4416 At this time you can use the ATT knob to adjust the level attenuation of the input signal A In order for the device connected to the DIG ITAL STEREO IN jack to be cascade con nected to the stereo bus the clock source must be set to D ST IN If another clock source is selected a message of CANNOT ASSIGN DIGITAL ST IN will be displayed and it will not be possible to set the button to ENABLE AVVULNG Reference Guide 21 SET UP screen Monitor page Monitor the digital input signals Function Monitor the state of the digital audio sig nals being input from the DIGITAL STE REO IN jack or from digital I O cards installed in the OPTION I O slots SET U
214. J 120 0 4 4 CURRENT SONG SETTING SONG NAME time code frame rate RE 02e NEW SONG oi o COMMENT Key operation of O Far eee a e SONG key gt F2 Setting key e Repeatedly press the SONG key until the display shown at aes the right appears Mouse operation or ea M button gt SONG button gt Set ting tab Screen functions NAME EDIT button This button edits the song name of the current song 2 SONG NAME This displays the song name of the current song 3 COMMENT EDIT button This button edits the comment of the current song 4 COMMENT This displays the comment of the current song 6 DISPLAY You can select one of the following three dis play methods for the current location that is shown in the counter level meter and in the counter in the upper part of the display SECOND button The counter will be displayed as time hours minutes seconds milliseconds TIME CODE button The counter will be displayed as time code hours minutes seconds frames sub frames MEASURE button The counter will be displayed as measures measures beats ticks The display method you select here will also affect how the track editing range is specified EDIT screen TR Edit page and how locate points are displayed TRACK screen Mark Adj page etc 6 PROTECT This specifies the protect setting of the song When you move the cursor to the button
215. L 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds AXVV ULNG Reference Guide Appendix 9 Appendix MOD DELAY Basic repeat delay with modulation Parameter Range Description DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds DELAY LCR Three tap delay left center right Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 2730 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY C 0 0 2730 0 ms Center channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 2730 0 ms Right channel delay time LEVEL L 100 to 100 Left channel delay level LEVEL C 100 to 100 Center channel delay level LEVEL R 100 to 100 Right channel delay level FB DLY 0 0 2730 0 ms Feedback delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 TA e normal phase feedback minus values HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds ECHO Stereo delay wit
216. L ROUT OFF key Turn off bus assign 1 8 buttons for all channels in the page F5 COPY PAN TO ALL key Copy the pan setting of the currently selected channel to all channels including the channels of other pages 3 To execute the copy move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key AVVULNG Reference Guide 51 PAN ROUTE screen Pair CH Pair BUS pages Set channel bus pairing Function Set or defeat pairing of buses 1 2 7 8 and AUX 1 2 5 6 for adjacent odd numbered gt even numbered channels Key operation e EQ key gt F4 key Pair CH F5 Pair BUS e Repeatedly press the PAN key until one of the screens shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt EQ button gt Pair CH tab Pair BUS tab Screen functions Channel bus These are the channels bus for which pairing will be set or defeated 2 Pairing These buttons set or defeat pairing The heart symbol will be connected for chan nels buses that are paired and the button will be displayed as STEREO The heart symbol will be divided for channels buses that are not paired and the button will be displayed as MONO x2 Pair CH PAN ROUTE 22223 NEH SONG _ scene 00 PE INPUTS 00 00 00 000 Initial Data er 1 ne Z i 3 BA 4 a A a vo i QP iz 15 W194 INPUT MONOx2 HONOx2 17 Wis 19 P20 21 Uz monoa Eaa HONOx2 1 2 3 Y 4 556 3
217. Mixdown O Track 8 Piano We ll use some EQ to thin out the piano sound a bit and give it a touch more presence so that it will come through in the mix a bit more O Piano EQ LOW L MID H MID HIGH Q L SHELF 8 0 H SHELF F 74 21 7 55 kHz G 3 5 4 0 2 0 O Tracks 9 amp 10 Strings If we d recorded real strings we might have needed a bit of processing here but since this is pretty much a pre processed synth string patch we can leave it alone Tracks 11 amp 12 Female Chorus 1 amp 2 Processing to make a chorus blend well can be tricky but in general you ll just have to rely on you ears In this case we ve used high pass filtering to remove rumble from the studio and other low frequency noise that can lead to unclear overall sound Some midrange has been removed to prevent the chorus from get ting in the way of the lead vocal and a touch of high end presence has been added to help the voices cut through Compression also helps to achieve a tighter chorus blend by smoothing out dynamic variations O Female Chorus 1 EQ LOW L MID H MID HIGH Q HPF 10 0 9 H SHELF F 94 841 1 49 13 4 kHz G ON 1 5 2 5 4 0 O Female Chorus 2 EQ LOW L MID H MID HIGH Q HPF 1 0 H SHELF F 50 1 00 kHz 13 4 kHz G ON 2 5 3 5 O Female Chorus 1 Compression THRESH RATIO OUT GAIN ATTACK RELEASE KNEE 16 2 5
218. N key operations changes in mix parameters such as EQ and pan and events such as scene memory or library selection can be recorded and played back in realtime in synchronization with the song You can also record operations in multiple stages or edit recorded events later To record or play back scene memories you can use the AUTOMIX screen Main page AUTOMIX key gt F1 key etc AUTOM 62629 NEH SONG fscene pA E twPuT 00 00 00 000 Initial Data AUTOM TRANSPORT d ABORT STOP PLAY Recording the stereo track The recorder section of the AW4416 provides a stereo track that is independent of audio tracks 1 16 and which is used mainly as a master track for creating a two track mix Here we will explain the procedure of mixing the signals of tracks 1 16 and the return signals from the internal effects into a stereo track to create a finished song 1 Press the REC TRACK SELECT ST key The stereo track will be in record ready mode REC TRACK SELECT vip The input of the stereo track is internally connected to the stereo output channel of the mixer This means that the L R level meter in the level meters counter section can be used as the input level meter for the stereo track 102 Awun operation Guide 2 3 4 a Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Play back the song from the beginning and watch the L R level meter in the level meters counter section If the red O dB segme
219. NEW SONG SETTING popup window will appear In this popup window you can specify the basic settings for the new song HEH SONG SETTING Select the setting of Hew Song Fs i Recbit Es a co O Fs This is the sampling frequency at which the input signals are converted into digi tal form Move the cursor to either the 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz button and press the ENTER key to make your selection O Recbit This is the number of quantization bits for the audio data recorded on the hard disk Move the cursor to either 16 BIT or 24 BIT and press the ENTER key to make your selection A e Itis not possible to change the sampling frequency or quantization after creat ing a song The number of tracks that can be simultaneously played or recorded will depend on the specified quantization e Ifyou intend to use a CD RW drive to create an audio CD of your song when it is completed you must select 44 1 kHz as the sampling frequency A song with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz cannot be recorded on an audio CD After you have selected the sampling frequency and the quantization move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key If you selected 48 kHz as the sampling frequency the display will indicate Not for Audio CD 48 kHz ARE YOU SURE warning you that an audio CD cannot be produced from this song Move the cursor to either the OK button or the CAN CEL button and press the ENTER key The MIXER DATA IMPORT popup w
220. NT f EDIT TIME CODE Move the cursor to the TIME CODE area and turn on one of the 24 25 30 30D drop buttons to select the frame rate By default a frame rate of 30 is selected The frame rate you select here will also affect the time code that is displayed in the counter If you wish to display time code in the counter move the cursor to the TIME CODE button in the DISPLAY area and press the ENTER key Set your MIDI sequencer so that it will follow MTC messages that it receives and put it in playback mode At this time make sure that the frame rate setting of the sequencer matches the setting that you selected in step 6 With these settings the MIDI sequencer will be the MTC slave the device that receives MTC Record or play back the AW4416 song When the AW4416 begins running MTC will be transmitted from the MTC OUT connector to the external MIDI sequencer causing it to begin synchronized oper ation from the same location A e Itis possible to use the AW 4416 as the MTC slave H owever in order to ensure that the recorder section operates with maximum stability we recommend that you use the AW4416 as the MTC master whenever possible e For the MTC time that is transmitted by the AW4416 you can specify an offset value that will be applied to the internal absolute time ABS time For details refer to the Song screen Setting page in the Reference Guide AVVUUIG Operation Guide 239 Chapter1 5 M
221. OCK Here you can set the internal clock of the AW4416 Use the DATA JOG dial to adjust the year Y month M date D hour h minute m and second s fields and use the SET but ton to finalize the date and time If you use the RESET button the date and time you input will be cancelled Xe e When you save a song date and time infor mation will be stored in the song according to this internal clock e When shipped from the factory the internal clock of the AW44 16 is set to Japan time e For details on setting the internal clock refer to the opening section of the Operation Guide Important points you must observe MOUSE SPEED Use buttons 1 4 to specify the movement speed of the mouse pointer Higher value will produce faster movement 3 INT SCSI TERMINATOR internal SCSI terminator This switches the internal SCSI bus terminator on off For details on the terminator setting refer to Operation Guide Before you begin Default on OF cn x gogga NEW SONG SE SCENE O 00 00 00 000 Initial Data PREFERENCESS BATTERY mo p MASTERING MODE E Oi ESAN ue CO BACKUP MODE D EST Tey gt conpare 4 BATTERY This displays the state of the battery that oper ates the AW4416 s internal clock If the battery capacity is sufficient this will indicate OK If the battery has run low and needs to be replaced this will indicate
222. OFF parameter and turn dynamics for the selected track ON 4 Use the cursor keys and data dial to make the following dynamics settings for the claves electronic drums track THRESH 24 RATIO OUT GAIN ATTACK RELEASE 10 1 0 0 29 6 KNEE hard g Track 4 Bass T oy N The bass track is a bit flabby and lacks punch We ll use EQ to tighten the sound up a little and compression to give the track a little more uniformity and power Press the track 4 SEL key to select the bass track Press the MIXER EQ key Make sure that the EQ for the selected track is ON Use the cursor keys and data dial or the virtual EQ controls to make the fol lowing EQ settings for the bass track LOW L MID H MID HIGH Q 6 3 7 8 F 66 0 223 4 75 kHz G 2 5 4 5 6 0 5 Press the MIXER DYN key to access the dynamics parameters 6 The COMP dynamics type should already be selected Move the cursor to the ON OFF parameter and turn dynamics for the selected track ON 7 Use the cursor keys and data dial to make the following dynamics settings for the bass track THRESH RATIO 15 8 1 OUT GAIN 2 0 ATTACK 51 RELEASE 192 KNEE 2 16 Awu Tutorial Tutorial Mixdown O Track 5 Rhythm Guitar The rhythm guitar track needs to be a little chunkier to achieve the classic R amp B type of soun
223. OUT jack This is a coaxial jack that digitally outputs the stereo signal assigned to D ST OUT in the SETUP screen gt Patch OUT page gt P 136 It is compatible with the IEC958 consumer format WORD CLOCK IN jack WORD CLOCK OUT jack These are BNC type jacks for input output of a word clock signal They are used to synchronize the digital audio signal processing with an external device SCSI connector This is a D sub half pitch 50 pin SCSI connector that is compatible with the SCSI 2 standard SCSI 2 compatible storage devices can be connected for data backup 48 AMUS operation Guide eG Chapter2 Parts and their functions e To connect the AW 4416 to an external device use only high impedance SCSI cables shorter than 1 meter and with an impedance of 100 ohms 10 ohms e Storage devices connected to the SCSI connector are used for data backup They cannot be used directly for recording or playback The only types of SCSI 2 storage devices that can be connected are MO HD and CD R W drives For a list of manufacturers and models of storage device that are known to work with the AW4416 please refer to the website lt http www aw4416 com gt TO HOST connector This is an 8 pin mini DIN connector that can be connected directly to the serial port of a PC or Macintosh allowing MIDI applications programs to be used POWER switch This switch turns the power on off AC INLET connector Connect
224. OUT jacks These are balanced TRS phone jacks that output analog monitor signals such as the stereo bus internal metronome solo signal or direct output from recorder tracks 1 16 Nominal output level is 4 dB STEREO OUT jacks These are unbalanced RCA phono jacks that output the analog signal assigned to ST OUT in the SETUP screen gt Patch OUT page gt P 136 Nominal output level is 10 dBV AUS Operation Guide 47 Chapter2 Parts and their functions a OPTION I O slots 1 2 These slots allow optional I O cards to be installed Assignments for the signals input or output via the I O cards are made in the SETUP screen gt Patch IN page gt P 133 and in the SETUP screen gt Patch OUT page gt P 136 Note For details on installing an I O card refer to page 14 8 TO HOST SCSI YAMAHA OOC MTC OUT OUT THRU I C9 Sree DIGITAL STEREO OO IN PHONES CED CED POWER ON B OFF 4 PHONES jack w A lt This is a stereo headphone jack that allows a set of stereo headphones to be con nected This jack will always output the same signal as the MONITOR OUT jacks 3 DIGITAL STEREO IN jack This is a coaxial jack that digitally inputs a stereo signal It is compatible with the IEC958 consumer format The channel to which this signal will be input is assigned in the SETUP screen gt Patch IN page gt P 133 DIGITAL STEREO
225. P 9eee9 NEW son Scene OT npuTi 00 0 1 00 0 10 TEMPLATE Key operation e SETUP key gt F5 Monitor key INPUTS e Repeatedly press the SETUP key until the screen shown at the right appears 1 In the SET UP screen the tabs dis played at the bottom of the screen are divided into two groups If the Monitor carecony tab is not assigned to the F5 key when you press the SETUP key press the SHIFT key F1 CHANGE TAB key to switch the tabs CH1 2 CH3 4 CHS 6 CH7 8 zal cunLocK i emphasis cabal Mouse operation EE Paton In a Patch OUT a Patch Lib Din Setur a M button gt SETU button gt Monitor tab Screen functions CHANNEL STATUS MONITOR EMPHASIS This area monitors the state of the digital input This shows whether the input signal has been signals from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack DIG processed by emphasis ITAL ST IN or from a digital I O card installed in an OPTION I O slot OPTION INPUTS The following items are displayed Emphasis on Fs Emphasis off This shows the sampling frequency of the input Unknow signal Display Meaning 44 1k 44 1 kHz sampling fre quency 48k 48 kHz sampling frequency Unknown sampling fre quency None No signal being input or UNLOCK invalid signal being input 22 Aw uns Reference Guide CATEGORY This shows the category of the digital input sig nal Displa
226. Parts and their functions FILE key This key accesses the FILE screen where you can backup restore songs and for mat external storage devices connected to the SCSI connector 3 UTILITY key This key accesses the UTILITY screen where you can operate the built in oscilla tor and make various system settings MIDI key This key accesses the MIDI screen where you can make MIDI related settings MIXER section a 4 MIXER VIEW PAN EQ DYN CH VIEW PAN ROUTING EQ ATT GRP DYN DLY Ka VIEW key This key accesses the VIEW screen where you can view all the mix parameters of the currently selected channel 2 PAN key This key accesses the PAN screen where you can set the pan and routing of each channel 3 EQ equalizer key This key accesses the EQ ATT GRP screen where you can make equalizer attenu ator settings for the currently selected channel and make fader group and mute group settings 4 DYN key This key accesses the DYN DLY screen where you can make dynamics processor and delay settings for the currently selected channel AVVUUIG Operation Guide 33 Chapter2 Parts and their functions FADER MODE section In this section you can select the items that will be controlled by faders 1 16 of the top panel
227. RE Reference Guide MIDI screen PGM Asgn page Assign a scene number to each program change number Function Assign a scene number to each program change number 1 128 te oo 000 000 a MONIZ 00 0 1 00 000 Endins Mix Key operation e MIDI key gt F3 PGM Asgn key e Repeatedly press the MIDI key until the screen shown at the right appears PGM CHG SCENE MEM NO TITLE 08 No Data 68 No Data 09 No Data Mouse operation M button gt MIDI button gt PGM Asgn tab Screen functions PGM CHG No program change num A ber These are the program change numbers 1 128 Move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATAJOG dial to select the program number 2 SCENE MEM No scene memory num ber This is the scene number assigned to each pro gram number Move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the scene number 3 SCENE MEM TITLE scene memory title The scene name of each scene is displayed INITIALIZE If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the scene number assignments will be reset to the following default settings Scene numbers in which nothing has been stored will be displayed as No Data Program change numbers 1 96 Scenes 1 96 Program change numbers 97 99 101 128 No assignment Program change number 100 Initial data default scen
228. REC 3 J Cem ey SEV Tr15 1 BCU Tri6 1 REGION NAME 3 Move the cursor to the NAME menu and press the ENTER key Buttons to specify NAME menu options will appear 4 Move the cursor to the REGION button and press the ENTER key The cursor will move to the area at the bottom of the screen AVVUUIG Operation Guide 155 Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations 5 Use the CURSOR lt p gt A keys to select the region that you wish to name and press the ENTER key 6 Move the cursor to the NAME button and press the ENTER key A NAME EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the region 7 When you have finished inputting the name move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key For details on inputting characters refer to page 60 You will return to the screen of step 1 Kp You can assign a region name of up to 16 characters Track editing procedure Here s the basic procedure for editing tracks parts or regions for audio tracks 1 16 1 In the RECORDER section press the EDIT key gt F1 key The EDIT screen TR Edit page will appear Bical emcee _ ESS EEIE 00 0 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 a A eA e O O d R ZCPiano R PART gt Y SCGuitar 1 4iS5Yyn 1 e S Bass SER ce S v iscCOrums L 16COrums R This screen shows the following information Track number This is the track number 1 16 Pair This shows t
229. RHO es T EJ e JEJCJEJCEJEJ HE T C J A B bank indicators These will light to indicate the currently selected bank A or B of sampling pads BANK pad This pad selects the pad bank A or B EDIT pad This pad accesses the SAMP PAD screen where you can assign sampled sounds or tracks to each pad Pads 1 8 These pads play back the sampled sounds that have been assigned to each pad AULUS Operation Guide 45 Chapter2 Parts and their functions Rear panel 7 7 6 5 _ 4 o 2 raa PHANTOM 48V INSERT I O BAL p BAL ON OFF OMNI OUT MONITOR OUT STEREO OUT 6 5 gt 6 Z rog aor gamm onm po ae aa sath neat cry BALPHONE INSERT PHANTOM 48V ON OFF switch This switch supplies 48 V phantom power to the INPUT XLR 1 2 jacks INPUT 1 2 XLR jacks These are balanced XLR 3 31 type input jacks Nominal input level is 46 dB 4 dB Pin connections are as follows Male XLR connector 1 ground 3 cold Lllh es 2 hot 3 INPUT 1 2 phone jacks These are balanced TRS phone type input jacks Nominal input level is 46 dB 4 dB Pin connections are as follows Tip hot 1 4 TRS phone plug Ring cold Sleeve ground 46 AWU Operation Guide Chapter2 Parts and their functions INSERT I O 1 2 jacks These are TRS phone jacks that allow an
230. ROWN LIVE samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion VAROITUS Paristo voi r j ht jos se on virheellisesti not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol L or coloured GREEN and YELLOW asennettu valda paristo ainoastaan PAE The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin H vit z 3 wid ea which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK kaytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA KEMBLE MUSIC U K LTD Explanation of Graphical Symbols The exclamation point within an equilat eral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE RE
231. RW drives and CD players Recording Playback CD RW drives CD players Disc At Once bd i O ae i No silence between No silence between finalized automatically tracks tracks e O Finalized Two seconds of silence Two seconds of silence Track At between tracks between tracks Once x data can be added e A No silence between No silence between tracks tracks Not finalized x Disc At Once finalized automatically Track At Once CD RW media does not support Track At Once playable playable on most devices playable on some devices x gt O not playable 256 Awun operation Guide Chapter1 7 Mastering Track At Once and Disc At Once Data can be written to CD R RW media in one of the following two ways O Track At Once In this method data is written in units of tracks individual regions of audio data This method can be used only for CD R media When the Track At Once method is used to write data to a CD R approximately two seconds of silence will be created between tracks each time a track is writ ten Additional audio data can be recorded later on CD R media that was written using this method A In order for CD R media written using Track At Once to be played on a CD RW drive or on a conventional CD player you must perform the Finalize operation to write track location data etc on the disc after all tracks have been written No further recording is po
232. SCSI device Songs selected for restore are indicated by a symbol in the RESTORE column The following information is also shown in the list e SONG NAME Song name e SAVED AT Date and time at which the song was last saved on the AW4416 s internal hard disk SIZE Data size of the song BIT FS Quantization word length sampling frequency of the song PRT Song protect on off setting 2 RESTORE SONG button This button selects whether the song currently selected in the song list will be included in the restore ENABLE or excluded from the restore DISABLE Move the cursor to this but ton and press the ENTER key to switch between ENABLE and DISABLE 3 ALL ENABLE button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key all songs will be selected for restore 4 ALL DISABLE button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key all songs will be excluded from the restore L DEMO SONG _____ EES RESTORE 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 RSTORE SONG NAME SAVED AT SIZE Bil FS WETHER 2a RUMINATION ABZ B22 29 ACE OF SPACE 00 07 25 FILE RESTORE 00 08 02 19 39 336MB 16 ALL ENABLE ALL DISABLE C DESTINATION CURRENT 6 DRIDE LInT 10E E EXECUTE C 7 5 SOURCE This selects the ID number of the SCSI device on which the data was backed up 6 DESTINATION This shows the restore des
233. SEARCH 0 RTZ The level meter counter and the display counter will rewind to zero 00 00 00 000 With the default settings of the song hours hours minutes seconds milliseconds are selected as the counter unit of the level meter counter and display counter H owever you may switch this to time code display hours minutes seconds frames sub frames or measure display measure beat tick if desired 2 To begin recording hold down the Transport section REC key and press the PLAY key The REC key and PLAY key will light and the red REC READY indicators of the REC TRACK SELECT keys 1 2 and the level meter counter will change from blinking to lit A When you attempt to record the signal being input from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack the display may sometimes indicate D IG ITA L ST IN PRO HIBIT and you will be unable to perform step 2 In this case go to UTILITY screen Prefer 2 page UTILITY key gt F3 key and set CD DAT DIGITAL REC to ENABLE For details refer to Reference Guide UTILITY screen STOP i REC L I J NA N AVVUUIG Operation Guide 85 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 If the following keys are on the keys of the Locate section and the Transport sec tion will have no effect Alternatively the functions assigned to the keys will
234. SL1 7 8 OUTPUT 1 2 7 8 of an I O card slot 1 SL2 1 2 SL2 7 8 OUTPUT 1 2 7 8 of an I O card slot 2 D STOUT DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack L R STOUT STEREO OUT jack L R 6 Move the cursor to the RTN field and use the DATA JOG dial to select the inert return jack You can select from the following jacks O When selecting for an input channel 1 24 or monitor channel 1 16 AD1 AD8 INPUT jacks 1 8 SL1 1 SL1 8 INPUT 1 8 of an I O card slot 1 SL2 1 SL2 8 INPUT 1 8 of an I O card slot 2 D STIN L D STINR L R channels of the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack O When selecting for a return channel 1 2 or the stereo output channel AD 1 2 AD 7 8 INPUT jacks 1 2 7 8 SL1 1 2 SL1 7 8 INPUT 1 2 7 8 of an I O card slot 1 SL2 1 2 SL2 7 8 INPUT 1 2 7 8 of an I O card slot 2 D ST L R DIGITAL STEREO IN jack L R AVVULNG Operation Guide 141 Chapter8 Patching 7 When you have finished making patching settings move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The EFFECT INSERT field will indicate ON EXTERNAL indicating that the selected input output jacks have been patched to the insert I O point To defeat the patching of an insert I O point use the ASSIGN button of the EFFECT INSERT field to access the EFF INSERT SETTING popup window turn on the O FF button and select the OK button The procedure described above can be made for multiple channels H owever it
235. T GRP screen FaderGrp page Set and cancel fader groups Function Assign input channels 1 24 moni tor channels 1 16 to fader groups i EQZATIZGRP ETE N5 fsm E A D If channels are assigned to a wont 00 00 00 000 initial Data fader group you can move a single fader to control all the faders in that group while preserving the current balance Key operation EQ key gt F3 FaderGrp key e Repeatedly press the EQ key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt EQ button gt FaderGrp tab Screen functions E Additional functions in the Fader Fader groups A D Grp page The symbols indicate the fader group A D to In the FaderGrp page you can press the SHIFT key which each input channel 1 24 and monitor to assign the following additional function to the channel 1 16 belongs F1 key When you move the cursor up or down to select group A D and use the SEL key to select a channel that channel will be assigned to the corresponding fader group When you press the SEL key once again the channel will be removed from the fader group A e F1 ALL CLEAR key A channel cannot belong to more than one Clear all fader group settings fader group If a channel that is already assigned to a fader group is assigned to another group only the newly assigned group will be valid 2 ENABLE button Turn fader groups A D on off vip
236. TAL OUT O00 INSERT 1 0 INPUT 1 8 INPUT 8 Hi Z Electric guitar 99 955888 Electric bass O0000000 00000 Sa0008 000000 Synthesizer AI UUN Operation Guide 67 Chapter4 Connections and setup Word clock settings If a device such as a digital MTR or DAT recorder is digitally connected to the AW4416 the clock that controls the timing at which digital audio is processed referred to as the word clock must be synchronized To do so you must select one of the devices as the word clock master and set the remaining devices so that they will follow the word clock supplied from the master device Here we will explain how to select the clock source to which the AW4416 will synchro nize A Be aware that if the system includes an unsynchronized device drop outs and click noise will occur 1 Turn on the power of the external digital device and of the AW4416 A If an external device is connected to the SCSI connector of the AW 4416 you must turn on the power in the order of external SCSI device gt AW4416 If the power of the external SCSI device is off when you turn on the AW 4416 it may not start up correctly If the D in Setup tab is not assigned to the F4 key when you press the SETUP key press the SHIFT key F1 key to switch the tab and then press the F4 key 2 2 Press the SETUP key gt F4 key The SETUP UP screen D in Setup page will appe
237. TOR OUT control This control adjusts the output level of the signal that is sent from the rear panel MONITOR OUT jacks WORK NAVIGATE section WORK NAVIGATE QUICK MASTER cD sonc REC ING PLAY aia k D4 SONG key This key is used for song settings and editing and to access the SONG screen where you can perform the shut down operation 2 QUICK REC quick record key At one touch this key assigns the physical input jacks to the channels of the mixer section and the tracks of the recorder section and accesses the QUICK REC screen in which you can record 16 tracks simultaneously MASTERING key This key accesses the MASTERING screen where the audio data of the stereo tracks can be recorded as CD DA CD audio on a CD R RW disc inserted in the CD R CD RW drive optional CD PLAY key This key accesses the CD PLAY screen where you can play a music CD or the audio tracks of a CD ROM CD R inserted in the CD R CD RW drive optional UNIT section i N e UNIT e FITI SETUP key This key accesses the SETUP screen where you can make settings such as exter nal input output patching word clock dither and the solo function 32 Avwvuns operation Guide Chapter2
238. The SCSI ID of the CD RW drive acwig mune Peg el madara eka toe 5 Installation procedure nnn uo annaua 6 Removing the transport protection pad 00000 9 How to remove the transport protection pad 9 Manual eject emergency disc removal 00 10 Attaching an external SCSI device 0 cece cece eee 10 About external SCSI devices o9 5s 45e51e eatinedseeseoe bes 10 CORNECHORDLOCEGUIE Ss gars nee Japon Ro lidhlarma ee Raha 11 Abou tterminatorsi essees Landa et Bate oe Oe RE e Oa ata 12 ADOUESCSI CUOSte aw Be nda de epee she omedd eeu ates 12 Installing 1 O Cards scueosse cee cheers oti tee wt 13 About VO Cards 62 eunen eaae au denis bid a Lol wedoe dd R 13 Installation procedure S o ch ee nssigay keh eee w a eee eels sas 14 Important points you must observe 15 Turning the power on or Off 0 cece cece cece ee eens 15 Turning the power ON a cd 8 cede On terete ed wot ete ald ae ety 15 Setting the internal clock 00 e eee eee ee ee eee eee 16 Turning the power off vag ied eka a ihe eRe Ee wae AS wo 17 Transporting the AW4416 0 ccc cee ee ee cere eens 18 Vibration during Use 0 6 0 0 cee eee ce eee ne cece es 18 viii Aus operation Guide Table of contents Chapter 1 Welcome to the world of the AW4416 19 Features of the AW4416 cc ccc ccc eee eee eee eeee 19 Mixer SCCNON es Meier ee ae i TARER eee
239. URSOR b gt key to move the cursor to the square frame of the Y year field in the CLOCK area and use the DATAJOG dial to input the year In the same way input M month D date h hour m minute and s second W is the day of the week and will be set automatically The time you specified will blink Move the cursor to the SET button to confirm the setting or to the RESET button to cancel and then press the ENTER key The internal clock of the AW4416 will be set to the specified time If you select the RESET button and press the ENTER key the clock will return to the previous state 16 Awutns operation Guide Important points you must observe O Turning the power off To turn off the power of a system that includes the AW4416 you must turn off the power switches in the following order The monitor system connected to the output jacks of the AW4416 The AW4416 itself 3 Storage devices connected to the AW4416 s SCSI connector and external sound sources connected to the input output jacks Before turning off the power of the AW4416 itself you must perform the follow ing shut down procedure O Shut down operation 1 In the WORK NAVIGATE section located in the upper left of the AW4416 s top panel press the SONG key 2 Below the display press the F5 Shut Down key 3 The CURRENT SONG STATUS screen will appear allowing you to check the content of the last saved song The data for the
240. UT menu if you wish to edit the playback end location and press the ENTER key 190 Aw uuns operation Guide Chapter1 2 Sampling pads Buttons for setting the TRIM IN TRIM OUT command parameters will appear SAMP PAD HETHER_____ PAD EDIT 00 00 00 ON mta aE nt PAD NAME 1 UME OEE ato f A SCSmeltr l 3 bid A AEST ER 3 3 TRIN IN ne r SE catl 4 Execur EXECUTE ep BIZEZNO 7C NO 8C No Move the cursor to the PAD button and press the ENTER key The cursor will move to the PAD No area in the lower right Use the CURSOR keys and the DATA JOG dial to select the pad bank and pad number that you wish to trim Press the ENTER key The cursor will return to the PAD button Move the cursor to the TRIM IN button if editing the playback start location or the TRIM OUT button if editing the playback end location and press the ENTER key The cursor will move to the trim value field SAMP PAD HETHER __ _ PAD EDIT 00 00 00 000 2 120 0 4 4 Pan NAME 1 WIN y nee a A SCSmeitr Ne gt mP r 3 Va faja ala No ASN J 4 EXECUT Ev B Z HS e 1C NO ZC NO B 7C NO p 8L N0 P PAD SIZE 1 1271886 sample PAD Edit Ss sasnasanbenannsnnanenalia TRIM IN TRIM OUT Here you can specify the amount of trimming in units of a sample 2 Bank pad number This displays the bank and pad number of the currently selected pad 3 PAD
241. Vie 11 12 13 amp 9 14 15 11 SP z i Tay HONOx2 HONOx2 Hono HonOx2 Pair BUS PAN ROUTE 222 2 NEW SONG ___Fcene oo SE INPUTS 00 00 00 000 Initial Data Honora 12 58 4 5 85 7 Ys HOnOx2 HONOx2 HOHOx2 HONOx2 e All parameters other than attenuation and pan will be linked for channels that are paired However pan will be linked if the pan mode is set to GANG or INVERTED GANG It will not be linked if the pan mode is set to INDI VIDUAL the default setting e For buses that are paired the master level HOME screen Bus page will be linked e For AUX buses that are paired the master level HOME screen Bus page and the send level of the signals sent from each channel to the corresponding AUX bus will be linked 52 AwuULns Reference Guide PAN ROUTE screen Setting or defeating pairing for 3 To defeat pairing move the cursor to a channels buses button displayed as STEREO and press the ENTER key Procedure A popup window will appear asking you to confirm that you wish to defeat pairing 1 To pair channels or buses move the cur sor in the Pair CH page Pair Bus page to a Kp button that is displayed as MONO x 2 You can also defeat channel pairing by press and press the ENTER key ing the two SEL keys simultaneously The PAIRING popup window will appear 4 Move the cursor to the OK button and allowing you to specify how
242. W4416 requires that your song be recorded to the stereo track before it can be written to a CD So once you re satisfied with the master EQ and or compres sion settings record the song to the AW4416 stereo track as follows 1 Press the ST key to engage the STEREO track record mode the key will flash 2 Locate to the top of the song and start recording press the REC and PLAY keys simultaneously 3 Press the STOP key when the song has finished Simple isn t it AWUUIG Tutorial 29 Tutorial Practice Practice Step 3 Write the Song to a CD R Disk This procedure is described in detail in the AW4416 operation guide page 255 so we won t go into it here But now you know how the entire process works from the basic tracks to CD Practice Practice Really Mixing and mastering are skills which like playing an instrument can only be acquired through practice You have the tools the AW4416 is about the coolest little mixing and mastering toolkit you can lay your hands on now it s up to you to learn how to use them like a pro Don t be afraid to go back and change things Even if you ve gone right through the process and mastered a CD if it doesn t sound right when you play it back on CD player by all means go back and make the necessary changes That s how we learn As you gain experience and skill the need to backtrack and redo things will decrease and you ll make better mixes m
243. When turning the AW4416 upside down we recommend that you use the pack ing foam from the AW4416 s shipping carton as shown in the diagram at above so that the controls of the top panel are not damaged If the packing foam is not available please spread out a soft cloth and support each of the four corners of the AW4416 with a stack of magazines etc 6 AUS Operation Guide Before you begin 4 Remove the CD RW drive cover from the front panel and remove the bottom panel Bottom panel CD R RW drive cover panel 5 Turn the CD RW drive over and insert it little by little stopping when the connector end of the CD RW drive enters the opening in the bottom of the AW4416 6 Connect the red and white four conductor cable included with the AW4416 to the internal connector of the AW4416 as shown in the dia gram Then connect the cable to the connector of the CD RW drive AVVUUIG Operation Guide 7 Before you begin 7 Plug the connector of the flat cable extending from inside the AW4416 into the connector of the CD RW drive e gt ae UCT TW HIO mi 8 Align the screw holes in the bottom of the CD RW drive with the screw holes of the AW4416 and use a screwdriver to fasten the drive with the four included screws 9 Re attach the CD RW drive cover and the bottom panel that you removed in step 3 At this time remov
244. XVVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 49 Appendix MIDI data format 1 Functions 1 1 MIDI SETUP There are two types of serial connector the MIDI connec tors and the TO HOST They have the same functionality and you can select which type to use as appropriate for the connection destination Both types use the MIDI format for communication In the case of the TO HOST connector the transmission method must be selected appropriate for the other device The available methods are listed below Regardless of which method is selected MTC is transmitted from the dedicated MTC OUT connector You can select either THRU or OUT as the function of the MIDI THRU OUT connector If THRU is selected messages received at the MIDI IN connector will be retransmitted without change from the MIDI OUT THRU connector Name Connector Transmission speed Destination a MIDI MIDI 31 25k for MIDI PC1 ToHost 31 25k for NEC PC9800series PC2 ToHost 38 4k for DOS V Mac ToHost 31 25k for Macintosh contain CLOCK 1 2 SCENE CHANGE When a program change message is received a scene will be recalled as specified by the MIDI Program Change Assign Table Program change messages are transmitted with the program number specified by the MIDI Program Change Assign Table If multiple program numbers are assigned to that memory number the lowest numbered program change will be transmitted 1 3 MMC CONTROL Basic recorder operations such a
245. Y sec tion By using this method you can perform these operations even when you are in a screen other than the Scene Mem page of the SCENE screen For example this method is convenient when you are editing mix parameters and wish to overwrite the same scene repeatedly Storing a scene 1 Use the YILA keys to select the store destination scene number The scene number is displayed in the upper right of the level meter counter 2 Press the STORE key The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear in the display allowing you to specify the scene name 3 As desired use the CURSOR lt p gt A keys and the ENTER key to specify the scene name 4 To execute the Store operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key If desired you can cause the Store operation to be executed immediately when you press the STO RE key instead of accessing the popup window For details on this setting refer to the Reference Guide UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page AVVUUIG Operation Guide 211 Chapter1 3 Scene memory Recalling a scene 1 Use the W A keys to select the scene number that you wish to recall The scene number is displayed in the upper right of the level meter counter 2 Press the RECALL key A popup window will appear in the display asking you to confirm the recall 3
246. YAMAHA AAV LtUtLIES FPEOFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTAT Choose from the following Owner s Manuals e AlWV4416 Operation Guide e AlW4416 Reference Guide a AW4416 Tutorial YAMAHA AN HOE PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION Operation Guide FCC INFORMATION U S A 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product IMPORTANT When connecting this product to accessories and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class B digital devices Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment generates uses radio frequencies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices Compliance with FCC regulations does no
247. a can be lost due to breakdown or mistaken operation We recom mend that you store all important data on CD R or CD RW disks or other external storage medium Responsibility for loss of data etc e Yamaha will accept no responsibility for any damages including consequen tial or incidental incurred by the customer or any third party as a result of loss or impairment of the data stored on the CD R media regardless of whether such loss could have been or actually was foreseen by Yamaha e Nor does Yamaha guarantee the media against any defect that may render it unusable Cautions for handling optional equipment e For inquiries concerning I O card hard disk or CD RW drive handling please consult your Yamaha dealer e Always switch off the power for the main unit and all peripherals unplug the power cord for the main unit from the outlet then disconnect the cables con necting the main unit with the peripherals before starting installation work e Wear thick gloves when working on this equipment to avoid cutting your hands on metal fittings or the like on the main unit I O card hard disk or CD RW drive e Always touch a well grounded metal surface or the like to fully discharge any static electric charge on your body and clothing before starting to work on this equipment e Take extreme care to avoid touching any terminals or board surface parts e In order to protect the electronic circuits of the I O card hard disk CD RW
248. a parameter value the value will increase by one each time you click the right button and decrease by one each time you click the left button 52 Awvutns operation Guide Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 The action of moving the pointer to the desired item then pressing and holding the left button or right button of the mouse and moving the mouse is called drag ging AY Dragging Kp When dragging the mouse to continuously adjust a parameter value the value will change more rapidly if you hold down the right button while dragging The value will change at the usual rate if you hold down the left button while dragging O Buttons Buttons in the display are used to turn parameters on off or to select one of mul tiple possibilities Buttons that are currently on are displayed as white text on a black background and buttons that are currently off are displayed as black text on a white background Off PRE E FRE FADER On a lt Buttons gt O Knobs faders numerical boxes Knobs faders numerical boxes in the display are used to modify the value of the corresponding parameter The value of a knob or fader is displayed below or at the right G lt Knob gt lt Fader gt lt Numerical box gt O Tab If a screen includes multiple pages the name of each page will be shown at the bottom of the display The areas where these names appear are called tabs Tabs are u
249. aa aa Obbbbbbb bb Occcecce cc lt Reception gt If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE and the device number of the message matches the AW4416 will locate to the time code location specified by the command data of the message STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01111111 7F System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclu sive Destination 00 7E 7F all call Machine Control Command mcc sub id 01000100 44 Locate 00000110 06 byte count 00000001 01 target sub command Ohhhhhhh hh hour Standard Time Code Device ID Oddddddd dd Command 00000110 06 Ommmmmmm mm minute Osssssss ss second Offfffff ff frame Osssssss ss sub frame EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive AXVVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 53 YAMAHA PROFESSIONAL AUDIO WORKSTATION Date 18 Feb 2000 Model AW4416 MIDI Implementation Chart Version 1 0 Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks Basic Default 1 16 P16 Memorized Channel Changed 1 16 1 16 Memorized Default X OMNI off OMNI on Memorized Mode Messages X X Altered KKKKKKKKKKKKKK X Note X 0 127 Number True Voice KAKAR APRETAR AERE X F Note On X X Velocity Wote off X x After Key s X X Touch Ch s X X Pitch Bend X X Control z Change Prog 0 127 0 127 Change True KKKKKKKKKKKKKK 0 96 System Exclusive X O xI Syete Song Pos O X x2 PA Song Sel X X Tune X X System Clock O X 2 Real Time Commands O X E
250. ack that you wish to import The name of the selected track is displayed at the right TR IMPORT ORANGE 00 00 00 000 TRACK IMPORT SAVED AT J 120 0 4 4 aaras as ao as a3 00 08 03 00 08 03 90 08 03 66 83 83 1 RACK CLF G e This parameter will be valid only after you have used the LOAD button 4 to load the track information for the selected song e The track name is not included in the data that is imported 3 DEST TRACK destination track Specify the track number 1 16 and virtual track number 1 8 for the import destination track The name of the selected track is dis played at the right A This display will appear only after you have used the TRACK CLIP button to register the desired track from the import source song 4 LOAD button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key track information for the song selected in the track list will be loaded 6 TRACK CLIP button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the track selected in SOURCE TRACK will be registered as the import source A This button will be valid only after you have used the LOAD button to load the track information for the song AVV ULNG Reference Guide 113 EDIT screen 6 EXECUTE button This button executes the track import operation For the procedure of importing a track refer to Importing a track from an existing song
251. ack x 8 MY 4 AD XLR type x 4 MY 4 DA XLR type x 4 Input channel channel 1 24 playback 1 16 Internal effects return Bus Stereo L R Bus 1 8 Aux 1 8 Solo L R Attenuator Phase normal reverse EQ 4 band PEQ Dynamics Delay On Off Fader 60 mm motorized Pan Bus assign stereo bus aux solo direct out Attenuator Phase normal reverse EQ 4 band PEQ Delay On Off Fader 60 mm motorized Pan Bus assign stereo bus aux solo Attenuator EQ 4 band PEQ Dynamics On Off Fader 60 mm motorized Balance Attenuator Attenuator AUNE Reference Guide Appendix 45 Appendix Fader Frequency response Dynamic range 20 kHz LPF IHF A Total harmonic distortion 20 kHz LPF Recorder section E General Recording resolution Sampling frequency 60 mm motorized x 17 1 3 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz MIC LINE IN to STE REO OUT 109 dB typical DA converter STEREO OUT 104 dB typical AD DA LINE IN to STE REO OUT Less than 0 02 1 kHz LINE IN to STEREO OUT 16 bit 24 bit set per song 44 1 kHz 48 kHz set per song Maximum simultaneous recording tracks e 16 bit song e 24 bit song Simultaneous Simultaneous Simultaneous Simultaneous recording tracks playback tracks recording tracks playback tracks 0 8 16 0 16 9 16 0 1 2 14 3 4 12 5 8 8 16 0 Tracks E Format File system Internal hard disk drive Max hard disk capaci
252. acks 15 16 can be set as a stereo pair Paired tracks will always operate in tandem such as when tracks are selected for editing or when you switch virtual tracks For example if you pair two tracks on which a stereo source was recorded both tracks can be processed by a single operation for greater convenience A Even if tracks are paired this will not affect the pairing settings of the monitor channels If necessary you can make separate settings to pair the monitor chan nels of these tracks as well 1 Press the TRACK key gt F2 key The TRACK screen V Track page will appear The heart symbols in the left of the display indicate the current pairing status Paired tracks are connected by a heart symbol TRACK G GGGG_ NEW SONG y tRAcK 00 00 10 453 J 120 0 4 4 Y TRACK SETTING D 3 5 E D fm 44445554 J3I3I33333 Tr Tri p 11C NO RE 120 NO REC 9 13C NO REC E NO REC FCV Tr15 1 16V Tr16 1 Qoovgunpuny 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l l l l 1 l 1 l 1 l J J l 1 l 1 C AMAMAMAAMHMHHAHAHHHM DAD NN VN N VN VN 2 z z 2 2 2 2 2 z 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ODODAADAAAADAAAAADA ee E E E ee ee ee W W O OD w w W OH w w w w w w w 2 To create a pair move the cursor to the corresponding heart symbol 4 and press the ENTER key The heart symbol will be connected and the two tracks will be paired To cancel pairing move the cursor to the heart
253. actual length of the audio Also it is not pos sible to cancel the command after it has been executed E REGION menu commands and parameters In the REGION menu you can specify a region a continuous piece of audio data that was recorded in a single operation in the selected track and exe cute an editing command Xe For the commands of the REGION menu it is not possible to select only part of the region for editing If you wish to do this you must either use the PART menu or use the DIVIDE command to divide the region The commands that can be selected in the REGION menu and their parameters are listed below NAME Modify the name of a region e REGION Select the region whose name you wish to mod ify e NAME Access the NAME EDIT popup window and input the new name Move the cursor to the OK button of the NAME EDIT popup window and press the ENTER key to finalize the new name ERASE Erase the selected region If all regions are erased from a track the track name will return to the NO REC display e REGION Select the region that will be erased e EXECUTE Execute the command DELETE Delete the selected region Subsequent audio data will be moved forward by the length of the deleted region e REGION Select the region that will be deleted e EXECUTE Execute the command COPY Copy the selected region to the specified loca tion of the specified track e REGION Select th
254. ady to record sixteen tracks simultaneously This is convenient when you wish to transfer multiple tracks from an external MTR to the AW4416 Here we will explain the procedure by which the input signals from I O cards installed in slots 1 and 2 can be recorded simultaneously on tracks 1 16 Yip When you execute Quick Rec patching settings and mix parameters will be reset If you will need to reproduce the current patching or mix settings we recommend that you store the current scene into a scene memory before you execute Quick Rec gt P 211 1 Press the QUICK REC key The display will show the QUICK REC screen ALICK REC opaga HEH SONG z 3 CENE H IHPUTi 00 00 00 000 Initial Data A BUICK REC SETTING we Input jacks sent to track 1 8 inputs 2 Input jacks sent to track 9 16 inputs 2 Move the cursor to fields in the above screen and use the DATA JOG dial to select the input jacks that will be sent to the inputs of tracks 1 8 9 16 You can select from the following choices For this example we will select SLOT1 1 8 for tracks 1 8 and SLOT2 1 8 for tracks 9 16 e ANALOG 1 8 INPUT jacks 1 8 e SLOT1 1 8 INPUT 1 8 of an I O card slot 1 e SLOT2 1 8 INPUT 1 8 of an I O card slot 2 AVVULNG Operation Guide 143 Chapter8 Patching 3 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button in the lower right of the display and press the ENTER key A popup wind
255. ain EQQ 10 0 10 Parametric equalizer band width HSH F 50 0 16 0 k Hz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds 1 L lt gt R L gt R L lt R Turn L Turn R Appendix 1 2 Aw uns Reference Guide Appendix TREMOLO Tremolo effect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 8 00 k Hz Parametric equalizer center frequency EQ G 12 to 12 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQQ 10 0 10 Parametric equalizer band width HSH F 50 0 16 0 k Hz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds HQ PITCH Effect 2 only High quality pitch shifter Parameter Range Description PITCH 12 to 12 semitones Pitch shift FINE 50 to 50 cents Pitch shift fine DELAY 0 0 1000 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN L99 to 99 Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback MODE 1 10 Pitch shift precision MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds DUAL PITCH
256. al Data No Data No Data a K calls i T FREE 512k E o piem E3 OVERMAITE 1 UNDO EDIT OUT J IND ret ekeur AUTOMIX TRANSPORT E T ABORT STOP AUTO REC Memory 4 Selected memory Store recall operations will apply to the automix data enclosed by the dotted line in the memory list In this page you can use the DATAJOG dial to select automix data regardless of where the cursor is located No number This column shows the memory number 1 16 6 MEMORY TITLE This column shows the names of the automixes stored in memory A Automix numbers in which nothing has been stored will be displayed as No Data NEW MIX button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the current automix will be erased and a new automix will be created CLEAR button Erase the automix data that is currently selected in the memory list 9 SIZE This shows the free area of automix memory in kilobytes AVV ULNG Reference Guide 119 AUTOMIX screen AUTOMIX AD OVERWRITE EDIT OUT 43 UNDO button CLR BUF clear buffer button 45 AUTOMIX TRANSPORT These are the same functions as described in the Main page Refer to the explanation on page 115 E Additional functions in the Mem ory page In the Memory page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following functions to the F1 F3 keys re Lei Lee J Ces J
257. alling the current scene the last recalled or stored scene will be written into this location This scene number or time can be modified later if desired If an event recalling the scene memory is not displayed when you press the F4 but ton make sure that the SCEN E LIB button in the upper left of the screen is on high lighted AVVULNG Operation Guide 215 Chapter1 4 Automix Recording the first section Here we will explain the procedure for recording fader operations of the monitor channels 1 Press the HOME key of the FADER MODE section and the MONI key of the MIXING LAYER section Faders 1 16 will function as the channel faders for monitor channels 1 16 2 Locate the song to a point slightly earlier than where you wish to begin recording the automix 3 Press the AUTOMIX key gt F1 key AUTOMIX WETHER _____ scene MOHI1 00 00 00 000 TEMPLATE AUTOMIX MAIN AUTOMIX field DISABLE Co CURRENT Bk seee 512k lt 19a UNDO k 4 FADER EDIT MODE AUTOMIX TRANSPORT ABORT STOP AUTO REC 4 Move the cursor to the DISABLE button of the AUTOMIX field and press the ENTER key The button will be turned on highlighted and its title will change to ENABLE Now automix is on i e can be recorded or played Whenever automix is on the shs icon will always be displayed at the left of the on screen counter AUTOM On Ei 5 Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE fi
258. ame function as the PEAK HOLD key in the level meter counter section When Peak Hold is on a ra symbol will be main tained in the level meter to indicate the peak level AULE Reference Guide 75 HOME screen MONITOR page Monitor the input levels of the monitor channels Function Monitor the input levels of monitor chan nels 1 16 Key operation e HOME key gt F2 Monitor key e Repeatedly press the HOME key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt HOME button gt Monitor tab Screen functions 1 Level meters These meters show the input levels of monitor channels 1 16 The fader position of each chan nel is shown in dB units below each level meter 2 STEREO OUT LEVEL This shows the position of the STEREO fader in dB units 3 PRE EQ button 4 POST EQ button POST FADER button Select one of these three buttons to select the location in the signal path pre EQ post EQ post fader whose level will be shown by the level meters HOME 9 ee_ NEW sorz SCENE OO CE INPUT 1 00 00 00 100 Initial Data 6 7 amp 9 16 1112 13 14 15 16 MONITOR CHANNEL STERED OUT ao OUT af Monitor E Additional functions in the Moni tor page In the Monitor page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following function to the F1 key e F1 PEAK HOLD key This key sets defeats the Pea
259. and phase Function Set the delay and phase of each channel Key operation e DYN key gt F3 Dly o1 16 key F4 Dly o17 24 key F5 Dly aMONI key e Repeatedly press the DYN key until the desired page appears Mouse operation M button gt DYN button gt Dly o1 16 tab Dly o17 24 tab Dly oMONI tab Screen functions 1 Channel This displays the channels for which you can make delay and phase set tings 2 DELAY Set the delay time for the signal of each channel The upper row shows the delay in ms millisecond units and the lower row shows the delay in sample units Adjusting either one will cause the other value to change in tandem 3 ON OFF Switch the delay on off phase Switch the phase of each channel Yip Phase will operate indepen dently even for paired channels GG3_ NEW SONG Scene OO SE GG3_ NEW SONG Scene OO SE Dly o1 16 GGG5 NEW SONG SCENE O E Initial Data CENE Initial Data AVVULNG Reference Guide 65 DYN DLY screen Additional functions in the Dly g pages In the Dly o1 16 Dly o17 24 Dly oMONI pages you can press the SHIFT key to assign the follow ing additional function to the F5 key COPY TO ALL Fe e F5 COPY TO ALL key Copy the delay time or phase setting selected by the cursor to all other channels Copying delay time or phase set
260. and press the ENTER key to return the automix to its state before recording Undo The front panel UNDO key cannot be used to undo automix Playing back automix Here s how to play back the recorded automix 1 Press the AUTOMIX key gt F1 key AUTOMIX WETHER ____ rene MONIT ke amp 00 00 00 000 Trenecate AUTOMIX MAIN j AUTOMI x _ Sizes 3 EEE g on lt ERES EEE g 8k gm m m EDIT OUT an em a o UNDO CLR eur i AUTOMIX TRANSPORT 3 STOP AUTO REC Off 2 Make sure that the button in the AUTOMIX field is displayed as ENABLE If the button is displayed as DISABLE move the cursor to the button and press the ENTER key 3 Make sure that the on screen REC button and AUTO REC button are turned off If they are on move the cursor to the corresponding button and press the ENTER key 4 Locate the song to a point slightly earlier than where you began record ing automix and press the top panel PLAY key 218 Awun operation Guide Chapterl 4 Automix The on screen PLAY button will turn on the STOP button will turn off and auto mix will begin playing automatically Note If you begin playback from the middle of the song automix will also begin playing from the same location At this time if any automix events exist before the playback start location automix will begin playback from a state of having executed all of these earlier e
261. annel has not yet been selected 9 While listening to the song press SEL key 1 monitor channel 1 at the point where you wish to punch in and begin operating the fader Punch in will begin at the instant you press the SEL key When you operate the fader the previously recorded position of the fader and the position currently being recorded will both be displayed in the bar graph The upward or downward arrow shown beside the bar graph indicates the direction in which you can move the fader to return to the previously recorded position Previously recorded Fader encoder position fader encoder position now being recorded Fader encoder position Previously recorded now being recorded fader encoder position 1 If the fader encoder is lowered 2 If the fader encoder is raised below the previous value above the previous value 10 When you are finished operating the fader press the SEL key of the same channel to punch out Note If you turn on the RET button in the FADER EDIT OUT field before you begin punch in the faders will automatically return to the previously recorded positions as soon as you punch out This is convenient when you wish to change the level only for the punch in out area You can use the knob located at the right of the RET button to adjust the time over which faders will return to the previously recorded positions For details refer to the Reference Guide AUTO MIX screen M ain page 224 awune
262. ansmits and receives e When you modify the time code Top the start point and end point will be adjusted automatically For details on the start point and end point refer to the explanation in TRACK screen Mark Adj page 9 RGN FADE TIME region fade time This parameter automatically fades in fades out the starting and ending point of regions You can select from 3 5 10 20 or 45 msec as the time over which the fade in out will take place region fade time The default setting is 5 msec hy If the level changes abruptly at the start end point of a region noise or a click may be heard during playback For this reason it is not possible to set the region fade time to O msec If you notice noise or clicks set the region fade time to a longer value AULAE Reference Guide 3 SONG screen Song Edit page Deleting copying optimizing songs Function Edit songs saved on the internal hard disk such as by deleting copying or optimiz ing them Key operation e SONG key gt F3 Song Edit key e Repeatedly press the SONG key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt SONG button gt Song Edit C tab O E Screen functions Song list This lists the songs saved on the internal hard disk The current song is highlighted in the list An E symbol displayed at the left edge of the list indicates a song selected for editing The fol l
263. ar allowing you to make word clock settings SET UP jeze NEW SONG Scene OO INPUTS ce me r a vari 00 008 44 18k In the WORD CLOCK SOURCE area of this screen you can select one of the fol lowing as the clock source to which the AW4416 will synchronize O SLOT 1 1 2 7 8 O SLOT 2 1 2 7 8 An input signal from a digital I O card installed in OPTION I O slot 1 2 will be the clock source You can select one pair from input channels 1 2 7 8 of the digi tal I O card and the AW4416 will synchronize to the word clock data included in the input signal of the corresponding channel 68 Aw uns operation Guide Chapter4d Connections and setup O D ST IN The word clock data included in the input signal from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack will be the clock source O WCLK IN The word clock data included in the input signal from the WORD CLOCK IN jack will be the clock source O INT The internal clock of the AW4416 will be the clock source The currently highlighted button is selected as the word clock source Paar Buttons marked with an x symbol indicate that no digital audio signal is ati being input from the corresponding slot jack E Buttons marked with a symbol indicate that either no digital audio sig nal is being input from the corresponding slot jack or that it is not syn chronized with the AW4416 s internal clock Buttons without an x or symbol indicate that a digital audio signa
264. are that Yamaha Corporation will accept no responsibility for any damages neither direct nor indirect resulting from the use of any of the above hard disks 2 AI ULUNE Operation Guide Before you begin Installation Please read and observe the cautions on installing optional equipment listed at the beginning of this manual Here s how to attach a 2 5 inch IDE hard disk to the ADP25H hard disk adapter included with the AW4416 and install it into the appropriate slot of the AW4416 e Hard disks are precision devices Do not subject them to physical shock or static electricity etc Do not place a hard disk nearby devices that produce a strong magnetic field or in locations of extreme cold heat or moisture Before you handle a hard disk touch your hand to a grounded metallic object to release any static charge that may be present in your body or clothing If you fail to do so static electricity may damage the hard disk Never attempt to disassemble a hard disk or apply excessive force to it e The AW4416 is shipped with four screws for attaching a 2 5 inch hard disk and four screws for attaching a CD RW drive making a total of eight included screws of the same type 1 You will need the following items e The AW4416 itself e A 2 5 inch IDE hard disk sold separately for installation e Four screws included with the AW4416 for attaching the 2 5 inch hard disk e A philips screwdriver 2 Make sure that the p
265. area and rotate the DATAJOG dial to select the number step number of the time signature data The step number is assigned consecutively starting at the time signature data of the lowest numbered measure MEASURE Move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATAJOG dial to modify the measure number of the time signature If you move the time sig nature beyond the previous or next time signa ture data their step numbers will be exchanged automatically METER Move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATAJOG dial to specify the time signature 2 1 8 8 for that measure The numerator and denominator of the time signature can be set independently When the AW4416 is in the default state time signature data of 4 4 is already input at measure 1 e It is not possible to move the time signature data of measure 1 e It is not possible to place two time signatures at the same measure If you move the cursor to the MEASURE area and specify the same measure number as an existing time signa ture the previous time signature data will be deleted TEMPO In this area you can specify tempo data The area enclosed by the dotted line is the currently selected tempo data In the TEMPO area you can make the following settings for the STEP MEASURE BEAT TEMPO items STEP Move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATAJOG dial to select the number step number of the tempo data The step number is assigned cons
266. atae O E Pa weenie es es 48 DIMENSIONS 2424 oe iv eeu ewe bee ee eek eaves 49 MiDidate format ss vious oes vow Rea ees 50 MIDI Implementation Chart 05 54 Block diagram rent ee AXVV UUNG Reference Guide Appendix 1 Appendix No 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 Appendix 2 AVY ULH Reference Guide Preset EQ Program Parameters Name Bass Drum 1 Bass Drum 2 Snare Drum 1 Snare Drum 2 Tom tom 1 Cymbal High Hat Percussion E Bass 1 E Bass 2 Parameter LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 1 2 10 0 9 99Hz 265Hz 1 05kHz 5 33kHz 3 5dB 3 5dB 0 0dB 4 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF 1 4 4 5 2 2 79Hz 397Hz 2 52kHz 12 6kHz 8 0dB 7 0dB 6 0dB ON PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 1 2 4 5 0 11 132Hz 1 00kHz 3 17kHz 5 04kHz 0 5dB 0 0dB 3 0dB 4 5dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 10 0 7 0 1 177Hz 334Hz 2 37kHz 4 00kHz 1 5dB 8 5dB 2 5dB 4 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 1 4 10 1 2 0 28 210Hz 667Hz 4 49kHz 6 35kHz 2 0dB 7 5dB 2 0dB 1 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 8 0 9 105Hz 420Hz 1 05kHz 13 4kHz 2 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 3 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 0 5 1 94Hz 420Hz 2 82kHz 7 55kHz 4 0dB 2 5dB 1 0dB 0 5dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 5 0 56 9
267. ate decisions about the rest of the mix Also keep in mind that mixing is really a trial and error process and you re likely to adjust and readjust parameters many times before you re totally satisfied with the results INSTANT GRATIFICATION If you don t want to set up the rough mix yourself or simply want to see how we ve done it recall the scene number 02 ROUGH MIX we have provided Press the SCENE key and the F1 function key if necessary to select the Scene Mem page use the data dial to select the scene number 02 ROUGH MIX move the cursor to RECALL press ENTER select OK in the confirmation window and press ENTER again After doing this you ll need to press the MIXER VIEW key to go back to the VIEW display An alternate method of doing this without leaving the VIEW display is to use the panel SCENE MEMORY keys Use the and keys to select the scene to be recalled scene numbers and names appear in the upper right corner of the display then press RECALL select OK in the confirmation window press ENTER again and you re done Ye While setting up the rough mix it can be useful to set up a repeat loop that covers the entire song or at least a representative section of the song that will allow you to easily set up the levels and pan positions Use the A and B markers to specify the beginning and end points of your repeat loop then press the REPEAT key t
268. ation M button gt EFF 1 button EFF 2 button gt Eff Edit tab AUR EFF 1 22229 NEW Sone SS mr pa as aux EFFECT EDIT BYPASS peee Thane Z NEW SONG scene 00 3 E 00 00 00 000 Initial Data Reverb Hall m Hall EFFECT TYPE owe HALL ee Pie lattes lattes ow mr FN ANN ANANA ele AANA AANNAM mE SSE ORL ON ON Ors OW OMe OFF hy One O S ron OF GE OPP as HOS 25s 7 O Ras o MIX Bi EA Screen functions Q USED AS effect usage method If the effect is patched to AUX send return this will indicate AUX 7 AUX 8 If the effect is patched to a specific channel this will indicate INSERT vp The choice of AUX send return or insertion is made in the SET UP screen Patch IN page 2 BYPASS ON OFF button This button switches effect bypass on off This ON OFF button can be switched by pressing the ENTER key regardless of where the cursor is located 3 CURRENT EFFECT NAME This shows the name of the currently used effect program 4 EFFECT TYPE This shows the name of the currently used effect type A graphic indicating the effect type is also displayed as the right A It is not possible to change the effect type in this page If you wish to use a specific effect type load a program using that effect type from the effect library gt P 71 6 Output meter This level meter shows the effect output level Effect parameters Use the
269. ation Guide 5 1 Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 The remaining recording time will be displayed in the TRACK screen TR View page when you press the SHIFT F1 key 6 Song scene information The information shown in this location will depend on the screen the sampling frequency quantization and tempo meter of the currently selected song or the number and name of the currently selected scene M menu button This button selects the display access menu The display access menu lets you switch screens using the mouse instead of the keys of the top panel gt P 56 Main screen The information shown here will depend on the key that was pressed last The fol lowing user interface components are used in the main screen O Cursor d HEUT MONITOR The blinking rectangular frame in the display is called the cursor When the cursor surrounds an on screen item that item is selected for opera tion O Pointer MPOT Monitor If a serial mouse is connected to the MOUSE con nector on the rear panel a black arrow will i LAL appear in the display This arrow is called the fim BTR isu pointer The pointer is used to select the item that will be manipulated by the mouse Pointer pmen revere Fe Ue rac The action of moving the pointer to the desired item pressing the left button or right button of the mouse is called clicking Clicking Yip When clicking the mouse to adjust
270. ation waveform LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 8 00 k Hz Parametric equalizer center frequency EQ G 12 to 12 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQQ 10 0 10 Parametric equalizer band width HSH F 50 0 16 0 k Hz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds FLANGE Flange effect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time EB GAIN 99 to 99 iain se arate a normal phase feedback minus values WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 8 00 k Hz Parametric equalizer center frequency EQG 12 to 12 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQQ 10 0 10 Parametric equalizer band width HSH F 50 0 16 0 k Hz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds AXVWVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 11 Appendix SYMPHONIC Symphonic efect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform
271. ative way to make EQ settings you can also use the EQ ATT GRP screen EQ Att page EQ key gt F1 key The EQ Att page displays all EQ parameters of the currently selected channel A If the sound does not change when you operate the EQ check whether the EQ ON button is turned on in the EQ ATT GRP screen EQ ATT page O Using the dynamics processor 1 In the MIXING LAYER section press the 1 16 key gt SEL key 8 SEL key 8 will light and input channel 8 will be selected for control 2 Press the DYN key gt F2 The DYN DLY screen Library page will appear DYHADLY 2288 NEW sone pew FE trHPUTs 00 00 00 000 Initial Data OYHAMICS LIBRARY j cos CH i a NAHICS CORUE TYPE o05 A Dr SN Library list B03 A iie ED Be BD In this page you can load or save dynamics programs from or to the dynamics library From the library list in the center of the screen you can select the dynam ics program that you wish to load or save 3 Move the cursor to the library list and rotate the DATA JOG dial to move the cursor location to 011 E B Finger Dynamics library numbers 000 040 are read only programs and contains stan dard dynamics settings for frequently used instruments For this example we will select a program named E B Finger 4 Move the cursor to the RECALL button at the left of the library list and press the ENTER key 92 Amwun6 operation Guide Chapter5 Recordi
272. audio track 5 111 TR Import page aa 5 si ince io eK Sie ena ieee ee wee ete Oe Re ag 113 Import a track from an existing song 6 ee ee eee 113 AUTOMIX screen 2 cc cc ccccvccccee 115 Main page 5 sisicsie Phntnae eb a E sed oe ee SNe eee eS 115 Make basic automix settings 0 2 ee ee eee eee 115 Memory Page siisss cose we wader nema Sen eee eee we 119 Store or recall automix y 34y02 oe he OH Ry Bie RE ls eS 119 Fader Edit page ich scsvstewaw ie edie he ae bie va om ad wees 121 View fader events asa bar graph 2 2 00ers 121 Event List Page nenion ee Sued oie eae een ee one eee 122 Edit events OI lING cie 8s cide coe herent eevee 122 Vi AUS Reference Guide Table of contents SCENE screen cccccccvccccvccccee 124 Scene Mem page nici tose eee ae od aoe eee 124 Store or recall a scene y cte aes eee tee EE Pee E REESE SSS 124 Fade Time page s 2 csswow Hee ceseyeb bcd ds cee wawaw nes 126 Specify the fade time 2 45 680is sa den evide ede nee seeds 126 RCL Safe page iu cdcswee cobras ewas ees iccu ere sendws 127 Make fader recall safe settings 2 20 e ee 127 Sort page a ee ee rr 128 SOM SCENES erd tortion teens eh ee ROS Reo ee SaESTeRA eS 128 Appendix 6464404554 604 44080646004 00 0146650 8 I Preset EQ Program Parameters 0 eee eee eeecees 2 Preset Effects Programs 000ecccceueseccneeneeee 6 Effects Parameters
273. bands are generally used to playing with vocals and the performance can suffer if there is a void where the vocals are supposed to be The scratch vocal track can also be a useful guide while laying down other overdubs such as guitar or keyboard solos DON T rely on the scratch vocal track to record chorus parts though because the teeniest changes in the pitch or phrasing of the lead vocal part can throw the entire cho rus out of whack O Microphone Selection Oowee Here s a subject that can make even the most seasoned recording engi neer cringe But reality check firmly established we realize that for most of us this is not a problem simply because we don t have a dazzling selection of micro phones at our disposal And that s that But there is one thing we would like to stress if you don t already own the micro phone s you intend to use for recording CHOOSE THEM WITH CARE Really Here are a few guidelines for the minimum microphone selection for most home recording applications O If you will be recording vocals and or acoustic instruments in the home stu dio Quite a number of high quality large diaphragm condenser microphones have become available at very reasonable prices in the last few years Get one But if at all possible try out a few before making a final commitment Although most microphones in this category have uniformly excellent frequency response and high sensitivity they do have distinctive sounds C
274. ber 00 Use the CURSOR lt p gt A keys to move the cursor to the PRO TECTION field and press the ENTER key The button display will change from OFF to ON indicating that the selected scene is protected Scenes that are protected will be indicated by a lock icon i displayed in the PRT column of the list Mo LIBRARY TITLE PRT Ho Data H7 Ho Data 66 Hoa Data PROTECTION Ho Data rr re O PEE E e p ai E T TETTA n AE A O eA EA A EAE E E T TEST MIX 2 B2 TEST MIX 1 61 TENLATE B lnitial Data Gi To turn protect off use the DATA JOG dial to select a protected scene in the same page move the cursor to the PROTECTION button and press the ENTER key The button display will change from ON to OFF indicating that protect has been turned off 208 Awun operation Guide Chapter1 3 Scene memory By using the PROTECTION ON OFF GLOBAL buttons in the Scene Mem page you can turn protect on off for entire groups of scene memories PROTECTION ON OFF GLOBAL SCENE 01 50 O SCENE 01 50 ON OFF buttons Turn protect on off for scene numbers 01 50 O SCENE 51 96 ON OFF buttons Turn protect on off for scene numbers 51 96 Changing the order of scenes Any scene saved in scene numbers 01 96 can be moved to a different scene number 1 Press the SCENE key gt F4 key In this example scene names A B
275. bus or buses 1 8 When the AW4416 is in the default state AUX send 7 8 are patched to the inputs of effects 1 2 and the outputs of effects 1 2 are patched to return channels 1 2 The signals sent from input channels 1 24 and monitor channels 1 16 to AUX buses 7 8 are input to effects 1 2 respectively For each channel you can adjust the AUX 7 8 send levels and switch between pre or post fader The output signals from effects 1 2 are sent to return channels 1 2 By routing the return channels to buses 1 8 or the stereo bus they can be mixed with the origi nal sound of each channel O Inserting an effect into a channel If you defeat the assignment of effect 1 2 to AUX send 7 8 you can insert an effect into the desired channel immediately before the attenuator In this case the mixed effect and direct signals will be input to the corresponding channel An effect that is used for insertion cannot be inserted into another channel or used via send return Effects can be inserted into the following channels e Input channels 1 24 e Monitor channels 1 16 e Return channels 1 2 e Stereo output channel AVY UUN Operation Guide 1 65 Chapter1 0 Internal effects Using AUX send return to apply an effect As an example of using an effect with AUX send return here s how to apply effect 1 via AUX bus 7 O Patching Make sure that the AUX send return patching for effect 1 is appropriate 1 Press the SETUP k
276. ce As an example here s how to assign a region that was previously recorded on a track 1 In the SAMPLING PAD section press the EDIT pad gt F1 key The SAMP PAD screen From Rgn page will appear allowing you to assign a desired region to a pad This page shows three buttons and the regions recorded on each track SAMP PAD ETHER FROM AGH 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 TT NAME VY ER From Ron The three buttons have the following functions PAD SEL button Selects the pad to which the region will be assigned RGN SEL button Selects the region 3 EXECUTE button Executes the assignment of the region to the pad AVVUUIG Operation Guide 187 Chapter1 2 Sampling pads 2 Move the cursor to the PAD SEL button in the upper left of the display and press the ENTER key The cursor will move to the PAD No area in the lower right of the display Pads to which nothing is assigned will be displayed as NO ASN SAMP PAD 22922 NEW Sone FROM RGH 00 000 p j HAE Y DEAS H REC TT 3 10 REC 1 Pon SEL EXECUTE PAD No area Use the CURSOR keys and the DATA JOG dial to select the pad bank A B and pad number 1 8 to which a region will be assigned Press the ENTER key The cursor will return to the PAD SEL button Move the cursor to the RGN SEL button and press the ENTER key The currently selected region will blink A If you perform t
277. cene numbers There are 97 scene numbers numbered 00 96 Of these scenes can be stored in scene numbers 01 96 Scene number 00 contains a scene that returns the param eters to the initial state of the AW4416 and is for recall only AI ULUNE Operation Guide 203 Chapter1 3 Scene memory The currently recalled scene number is displayed at the upper right of the level meter counter When a key of the MIXER section FADER MODE section AUTO MATION section or UNIT section except for the FILE key is pressed the upper right of the display will show the number and name of the currently recalled scene Scene number SCENE HA t Scene name mS WORO CLOCK m h i 74 1k 48k MASTER INT EXT VART sta e 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 iE e Level meter counter e Display If an E character is displayed at the right of the scene number this means that the currently operated scene the current scene is different than the previously recalled or saved contents A When the read only scene number 00 is recalled a symbol will appear indi cating that the scene is read only Storing a scene Here s how to assign a name to the current scene and store it in a scene memory 1 Press the SCENE key gt F1 key The Scene Mem page of the SCENE screen will appear A list of the scenes scene
278. cks while recording acoustic overdubs or vocals not open types or the in ear types often used with portable stereos to prevent leakage of the head phone mix back into the microphone To Process or Not To Process Now things get a little tricky because you will be making decisions that will directly affect your freedom to make changes later in the production process Some engineers almost never use processing of any kind compression EQ etc when recording the initial tracks the reasoning being that it not only reduces their freedom to shape the sound as required at subsequent stages but that it also compromises the openness of the sound There is a good deal of truth in this but there are also a few good reasons for some judiciously applied processing right from the outset O Compression amp Limiting Of the several processing options available during initial recording compression is probably the most often used But at this early stage in the production process it must be applied with care Compression or limiting is most often used at this point to reduce high level transients that although not a critical part of the instru ment s sound would otherwise take up a large portion of the recording system s available dynamic range By reducing transient peaks you can effectively record the main body of the signal at a higher level and thus in the case of digital media increase the resolution of the reproduced sound while red
279. clock source e The highlighted button indicates the cur rently selected word clock source e Buttons marked with an X indicate that no digital audio signal is being input from the corresponding slot jack e Buttons marked by a indicate that a digital audio signal is being input from the corre sponding slot jack but is not synchronized with the internal clock of the AW4416 e Buttons without an X or symbol indicate that a digital audio signal is being input from the corresponding slot jack and is synchro nized with the internal clock of the AW44 16 20 Awus Reference Guide SET UP screen 3 FS sampling frequency E Additional functions in the D in This shows the sampling frequency of the signal Setup page that is currently selected as the clock source In the D in Setup page you can press the SHIFT A key to assign the following function to the F1 key If you select an external clock as the clock source you must check that the sampling fre quency of the song matches the frequency of the external clock For example if you are synchronized to a 48 kHz external clock and record on a 44 1 kHz song be aware that the pitch will change when you return the clock source setting to INT and play back e F1 CHANGE TAB key VARI vari pitch Switch between the two types of tab display If INT is selected as the clock source you can select whether the sampling frequency will be fixed F
280. compression on these tracks we d probably lose the natural dynamics that make this track work and dilute the contrast between the acoustic drums and the electronic drums at the end of the song A subtle touch of high end EQ is all that is needed here 1 Press the track 1 SEL key tracks 1 and 2 are paired so EQ settings you make to track 1 will also be applied to track 2 convenient eh 2 Press the MIXER EQ key this is so you can see the detailed EQ parameters as we make the adjustment 3 Make sure that the EQ for the selected tracks is ON if not move the cursor to the EQ ON parameter and press ENTER to turn it ON 4 Press the HIGH key in the virtual EQ control section to the right of the display to select the HIGH EQ band 5 Use the G control to increase the gain of the 10 kHz shelving EQ to 4 0 dB No need to change the EQ type of frequency AWwuuis Tutorial 15 Tutorial Mixdown O Track 3 Claves Electronic Drums This track needs a bit of compression to make the electronic drums jump out of the mix when they appear at the outro Later when we work on the automation we ll boost this track a bit at the outro for extra impact Press the track 3 SEL key to select the claves electronic drums track 2 Press the MIXER DYN key to access the dynamics parameters 3 The COMP dynamics type should already be selected it s the default Move the cursor to the ON
281. ct such as HQ Pitch or Dual Pitch selected for a monitor channel Counter display is not 0 when you return to the beginning of the song e The display mode may be set to REMAIN remaining recording time e If the display mode is set to REL relative time the start point may be specified e The SONG screen Setting page may be set to MEASURE For details on this setting refer to page 1 SONG screen E No sound from the sampling pads e In the SETUP screen Patch IN page are the sig nals from the sampling pads assigned to a chan nel e The bank A B setting may be incorrect Can t save a file e Is there sufficient space on the internal hard disk e Did you perform the correct shut down proce dure when you last turned off the power If you turn off the power without performing the shut down data may be lost or the hard disk may be damaged Song file size is unnaturally large e Even after you use recorder editing to erase a track etc that sound file will be saved on the disk as an unused file Execute the optimize oper ation in the SONG screen Song Edit page MFile date is not recorded correctly e Is the internal clock set to the correct date and time If the date and time of the internal clock has drifted the internal battery may have run down Please contact your Yamaha dealer EA device connected to the SCSI connector is not recognized e The power of the SCSI device may have been turne
282. cters on black background 4 TRACK 1 8 9 16 This area displays W symbols to indicate the track inputs to which buses 1 8 QE and the direct output fi of the input channel currently selected by the SEL key are patched 6 Input meter This shows the input level of the odd numbered gt even numbered channels adjacent to the channel selected in or the output level of the stereo output channel lal G GGGG NEW SONG SCENE OO 00 00 000 Initial Delta PATCH LIBRARY SEL CH INPUT CURRENT No LIBRARY TITLE Ron 6 TITLE EDIT button Use this button when you wish to edit the name library title of the patching settings saved in the library Move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT but ton and press the ENTER key to access the TITLE EDIT screen where you can input the name A Library number 0 is a recall only preset and therefore its name cannot be changed Patch library numbers in which no data has been stored will be displayed as No Data and their title cannot be edited Q RECALL button This button recalls the currently selected patch ing settings from the list A If you select a number in which nothing has been stored and attempt to recall it an error message of ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL will be displayed and the recall will not take place STORE button Store the current patching settings 18 Aways reference Guide SET UP screen A e Library numb
283. current song date size quantization bits protect shown here in the song list is the data for when the song was last saved When you perform the following Save procedure and press the ENTER key it will be overwritten by the new data Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A message will ask you whether you wish to save the current song CONFIRMATION Will Save Current Sons ARE YOU SURE 7 4 Use the CURSOR lt p gt A keys in the center right of the top panel to move the cursor the blinking rectangle to the OK button and press the ENTER key located immediately below 5 When the Now safe to turn off message appears turn off the POWER switch located on the rear panel A e If you turn off the power of the AW 4416 without performing the shut down procedure described at the above the audio data on the hard disk may be lost e Never turn off the power while the access indicator in the level meter counter is lit since this may damage the hard disk itself e If lightning is occurring nearby disconnect the power cable from the AC out let The AW 4416 can be damaged by lightning AVVULNG Operation Guide 17 Important points you must observe Transporting the AW4416 When transporting the AW4416 you must disconnect all cables and pack it in the packing foam in which the unit was shipped or the equivalent If a CD RW drive option is installed i
284. currently selected effect program from the list This is the same function as the RECALL button F3 STORE key Store the current effect settings This is the same function as the STORE button Storing an effect program in the library Procedure 1 Access the Library page of the AUX7 EFF1 screen or the AUX8 EFF2 screen 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the store destination library number 42 128 3 Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the ENTER key The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the effect pro gram 4 Input the library title as desired For details on inputting characters refer to Opera tion Guide P 60 A maximum of 16 characters can be input 5 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The Store operation will be executed It is possible to store the settings directly in the library without seeing the TITLE EDIT popup window To do so access the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTILITY key gt F2 key and turn STORE CONFIRMATION off A When you store the effect program that had been stored in that number will be erased Recalling an effect program from the library Procedure 1 Access the Library page of the AUX7 EFF1 screen or the AUX8 EFF2 screen 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the library number that you wish to recall 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key The
285. cursor to the PAN knob of the desired channel and rotate the DATAJOG dial In the PAN 1 16 PAN 17 24 PAN MONI pages the channel can be specified freely regardless of the state of the SEL keys For this reason there may be cases in which the channel whose pan is adjusted by the PAN control is different than the channel whose pan is adjusted by the DATAJOG dial PAN ROUTE screen Additional functions in the Pan Copying pan settings to all chan page nels In the Pan 1 16 Pan 17 24 Pan MONI pages you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional functions to the F1 F5 keys Procedure 1 In the PAN screen move the cursor to the PAN knob of the copy source channel g 2 Press the SHIFT key F5 key f t The CONFIRMATION popup window will appear asking you to confirm the copy A tt t Le J EJ E Ce be F1 INDIVIDUAL key Independently control the pan of paired chan nels This is the same function as the INDIVID If the cursor is at a parameter other than the PAN knob a message of Can t Copy This Parameter will appear and the copy will not UAL button occur F2 GANG key Link the pan of paired channels while maintain ing their existing spatial relationship This is the same function as the GANG button F3 INVERTED GANG key Inversely link the pan of paired channels This is the same function as the INVERTED GANG but ton F4 AL
286. d on after the AW4416 e Is the SCSI cable connected correctly e The pins of the SCSI cable may have been bent e Is the ID of the SCSI device set correctly e Is termination specified correctly for the SCSI device Can t save files on a SCSI device e Is there sufficient free space on the save destina tion media e Has the save destination media been formatted appropriately E Can t load files from a SCSI device e Is there sufficient free space on the internal hard disk MCD RW drive is not recognized e Is the CD RW drive connected correctly Can t create an audio CD e Is CD R media inserted e The inserted CD R may have already been final ized e Is a signal recorded on the stereo track e The stereo track must be at least four seconds long e It is not possible to create an audio CD from a song whose Fs sampling frequency setting is 48 kHz An audio CD you created does not play back on a conventional player e An audio CD you created you not play back on a conventional player unless the disc has been finalized E Audio recorded on CD RW media does not play back on some players e In order for audio data recorded on CD RW media to be played back the player must support CD RW Contact the manufacturer of the player regarding CD RW support The sound skips while playing an audio CD that you created e There may be differences in the quality of the completed CD depending on the type of CD R media you
287. d this might require a bit of automation at the final mix stage adjust the chorus levels while listening to a section of the song during which the chorus parts appear with the lead vocal Turn channels 11 12 and 13 ON then set their fader levels to about 10 0 Pan the same tracks to L14 R14 and CENTER respectively g Listen Although you ve been listening to the song during the entire rough mix process now it s time to listen to the entire song in context rather than concentrating on individual parts Hear something you don t like Change it O Save the Song Now would be a good time to save your work Press the WORK NAVIGATE SONG key to go to the SONG display if necessary also press the F1 function key to select the Song List page Move the cursor to SAVE on the display and press ENTER When the confirmation window appears move the cursor to OK and press ENTER again to actually save the song 14 aways Tutorial Tutorial Mixdown Phase 3 Assemble the Mix Part by Part Now we re ready to do some serious work on the sound of the individual tracks in an attempt to make them mesh to create a well balanced overall mix INSTANT GRATIFICATION Once again we ve provided a scene you can simply recall to automatically make all the settings included in Phase 3 below Press the SCENE key and the F1 function key if necessary to select the Scene Mem page use the data dial to
288. d we re after A little EQ and compression will accomplish that feat and the compression will also help to even out dynamic variations that cause the guitar part to be buried in the mix from time to time You should know how to make the EQ and dynamics adjustments by now so we ll just give you the figures and you can make the settings yourself O Rhythm Guitar EQ LOW L MID H MID HIGH Q L SHELF 9 F 125 420 G 2 5 3 5 O Rhythm Guitar Compression THRESH RATIO OUT GAIN ATTACK RELEASE KNEE 9 4 1 0 0 9 110 4 g Track 6 Lead Guitar In terms of tone the lead guitar part sounds fine the way it is But perhaps we should apply a little compression to even it out a bit Here are the figures do the dialing yourself O Lead Guitar Compression THRESH RATIO OUT GAIN ATTACK RELEASE KNEE 5 3 5 1 0 0 35 238 O Track 7 Organ The ultra lows of the organ sound are muddying the sound a little We can take care of that by using a high pass filter to remove some of the offending frequen cies The LOW band of the AW4416 parametric equalizer functions as a high pass filter all you have to do is make the appropriate settings No compression is required O Organ EQ LOW L MID H MID HIGH Q HPF F 66 G ON 17 AIA ULUNE Tutorial Tutorial
289. de time settings Patching and insert settings for external input output A e Scene number 0 is recall only and settings cannot be stored in it e When you execute the Store operation the scene that had been stored in that number will be erased LIBRARY No library number This column displays the scene number 0 96 LIBRARY TITLE This column displays the name assigned to each scene PRT protect A write prohibit symbol is displayed in this col umn for recall only scene number 0 In addi tion a fm symbol is displayed for scenes for which the PROTECTION button is on indicat ing that they cannot be stored Selected scene Scene store recall operations will apply to the scene enclosed by a dotted line in the library list In this page you can use the DATAJOG dial to select scenes regardless of where the cur sor is located PROTECTION Turn memory protect on off for the scene cur rently selected by the cursor PROTECTION ON OFF GLOBAL Turn memory protect on off for all scene num bers 1 50 51 96 Additional functions in the Scene Mem page In the Scene Mem page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following functions to the F1 F3 keys TITLE EDIT RECALL STORE tf ft f Ler Lee Les J e F1 TITLE EDIT key Use this to edit the name of a scene saved in the library This is the same function as the TITLE EDIT button e F2 RECALL key Us
290. ders will not be operable Attempting to move them by force will cause malfunctions Monitor channels 1 16 Stereo output channel A eeeeeeeeceaeeoenseeaoeaoeeeoeeeoeeoeaoeeoeaoeeoeaeeoeoeeeeeeee 8 The parameters controlled by faders 1 16 will also change depending on the set tings of the FADER MODE section 36 Awvuns operation Guide Chapter2 Parts and their functions SEL keys ON keys faders ie 1 SEL select keys These keys select the channel to be operated The SEL key of the currently selected channel will light When using automix the SEL keys are used to select the channels that will be recorded ON key These keys turn each channel on off The ON key will be lit for channels that are currently on the ON key will be
291. device connected to the SCSI connector 10 Awutns operation Guide Before you begin Connection procedure 1 Make sure that the power is turned off for the AW4416 and for the external SCSI device s and use a SCSI cable to connect the SCSI con nectors of each device When connecting an external SCSI device use only high impedance SCSI cables of 100 ohms 10 ohms impedance that are 1 meter or shorter in length A Use only good quality SCSI cables SCSI connector SCSI connector SCSI connector AW4416 ID 6 fixed Terminator SCSI connector SCSI connector External SCSI device 2 Internal CD RW ID 3 default setting Note A maximum of seven SCSI devices SCSI ID 0 5 7 can be connected in a daisy chain including the internal CD RW drive When connecting multiple SCSI devices you must make sure that the SCSI ID of each device including the internal CD RW drive does not conflict with any other device For details on how to set the SCSI ID refer to the manuals for your SCSI devices The SCSI ID of the AW4416 itself is fixed at 6 In the various screens of the AW4416 the SCSI ID of the internal CD RW drive has been set to 3 by default For this reason if you install a CD RW drive you will find it convenient to set its ID to 3 For details on setting the SCSI ID
292. dia This media was not backed up as TYPE 2 The media is an incorrect type Please exchange it A problem has occurred with the SCSI device The directory name is too long and cannot be displayed The specified directory cannot be found The disk has no free capacity An error has occurred in the file system of the internal hard disk The media has already been finalized The parameter setting exceeds the allowable range AXVVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 41 Appendix Media Error Media Full Media Protected Memory Full No Song to Backup No Song to Edit No Song to Load No Song to Restore No Song to Save No Song to Write No Song No Stereo Track No Track to Open Wave Display Not WAV Drive Not WAV File Partition Not Found Recall Channel Data Conflict SCSI Error Selected Drive is not CD Drive Selected Drive is not Connected Selected Preset is Effect2 Only Selected Song Status Conflict Selected Track is not Recorded Too Many Regions Too Small Region A problem has occurred on the media The media has no free space The media is write protected There is no free space in the sampling pad memory There is no song to backup There is no song to edit There is no song to load There is no song to restore There is no song to save No songs to write to the CD have been selected No songs can be found There is no stereo track There is no track data for wavefor
293. ding on the direction and angle to which you turn the dial reverse review or fast forward cue playback will occur at a variety of speeds CURSOR lt 4 gt A keys These keys move the cursor the blinking box in the display 42 AMUS operation Guide Chapter2 Parts and their functions ENTER key This key is used to finalize a value execute a function or move to the specified locate point Locate section In this section you can perform locate operations for the recorder C ARK SEARC NUM LOCATE Ha gt l MARK i 7 PONSA fN Dur Ser _ r 1 2 3 D ROLL REPEAT A B Pou 0 jaa RTZ CANCEL TIIT Mel NUM LOCATE number locate key This key is used to specify a locate point as a numerical value When this key is lit you can use the numeric keys or the DATAJOG dial to input a locate posi tion and press the ENTER key to execute the Locate operation MARK SEARCH I lt p gt 1 keys These keys are used to move to the nearest pre specified mark point MARK key When you press this key the current location will be memorized as a mark point AUTO PUNCH key This key turns the auto punch in out function on off 6 LAST REC IN OUT last record in
294. ding song will be selected as the import source for mixer data AVVUUIG Operation Guide 183 Chapter1 1 Song management The current song cannot be selected as the import source If you execute Import when the current song is marked with an E symbol an error message will be displayed e Itis not possible to select two or more songs as the import source 5 Move the cursor to the MIXER IMP button and press the ENTER key The MIXER DATA IMPORT popup window will appear MIXER DATA IMPORT Select items of MIXER data to import SCENE HEN AUTONIS TEMPO HAP LIBRARY 6 Turn on the button s for the type s of mixer data that you wish to import You may select more than one e SCENE MEM button Scene memories e AUTOMIX button Automix e TEMPO MAP button Tempo map e LIBRARY button Libraries channel EQ dynamics effect 7 To execute the Import move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Kpl If you decide to cancel the Import command without executing move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the EN TER key 184 aw uuns operation Guide This chapter explains the sampling pads of the AW4416 About the sampling pads The AW4416 has a sampling pad function that allows you to play samples by striking pads By striking the eight pads in the SAMPLING PAD section you can play up to sixteen samples held in RAM and record your p
295. doened sel ebeseteletentssegeds 15 Track 3 Claves Electronic Drums ccccccceccceeccccceecccesscesesceussceesssceees 16 TPACKAS T E EEE ESEESE EEEE B RE ss eeeledvbeeed onaveeedencdeercesavegieeers 16 Track 5 Rhythm Guitar seriinin a E E e ERR 17 Track 63 Lead Guitars etisi a e e deede 17 Track Z OJAN ER EE EE E EAE A RERE 17 Track 8y PIANO nasas aaeei ie iei eie iei teoria 18 Tracks 9 amp VO2StringS ere a a aE EE ERR 18 Tracks 11 amp 12 Female Chorus 1 amp 2 eeeeesesssessssssessceresrceresrcrerrseees 18 Track 13 Male CHOrus sinnani rana e i 19 Track 14 Lead Vocal ccccceccccccecessecccceeseccecueecceceeesecceeeesecessueeseeseees 19 Save the Song Sen E E E E dade Att E dette 19 Phase 4 Add AMDbIeNCE ccessccccesssesccceesescceceseccceeueuescceeeeeccsseuesceseeeeees 20 Engage the Effect 1 Sends and Select an Effect esee 20 Add Ambience to the Tracks as Required 00 00 eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeesseeeeenseeeees 21 Tracks 1 amp 2 Drums EE EE E 21 Track 3 Claves Electronic Drums cccccceccceeecccceeccesescesecceussceussssenes 21 TRACK AS BASS E E E E eee w hs ead EE EER beaut E E 21 Tracks 5 amp 6 Rhythm amp Lead Guitar eee ceesereeeeesseeeeneeeees 21 Track 7 OLGAN cvicscest netted sl Grieve aan aa ae 22 TRACK 8 Piah nesenie cede Rese eeosae Gens oean E g eae SNe i 22 2 Awuus Tutorial Tutorial AW4416 Professional Audio Workstation Tracks 9 amp TO St
296. dy mode INPUT MONITOR indicator This indicator will light white for tracks whose input is being monitored Level display The range of the display can be switched between two ranges 0 to 60 dB nor mal and 0 to 26 dB fine AVVULNG Operation Guide 55 Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 Basic operation of the AW4416 This section explains basic operation of the AW4416 Accessing a screen page To operate the mix parameters of the AW4416 or to edit the internal settings you must first access the desired screen in the display If a screen contains two or more pages you must then select the desired page O Using the controls of the top panel 1 Press the key for the desired screen The keys of the WORK NAVIGATE UNIT MIXER FADER MODE RECORDER and AUTOMATION sections of the top panel and the EDIT key of the sample pad section each correspond to their own screens which you can access by pressing the appropriate key 1p If a screen contains multiple pages the most recently operated page will appear 2 To switch pages within a screen press the function key F1 F5 keys that corresponds to the tab for the desired page Each tab corresponds to the following function key F1 key F2 key F3 key F4 key F5 key By repeatedly pressing the same key you pressed in step 1 you can cycle through the pages of the screen O Using the mouse 1 Click the M menu button in the u
297. e AVVULNG Reference Guide 43 VIEW screen CH View page View all parameters of a channel Function This page displays all mix parame ters of the selected channel Parameters other than EQ and dynamics can also be edited in this page Key operation e VIEW key gt F1 CH View key e Repeatedly press the VIEW key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt VIEW button gt CH View tab Screen functions ATT attenuation Set the attenuation value PHASE Switch between normal N and reverse R phase 3 EQ equalizer Turn the EQ on off This area also displays a graph showing the approximate response of the current EQ settings DYNAMICS Turn the dynamics processor on off This area also displays a graph showing the approximate response of the current dynam ics processor settings DELAY Turn the delay on off The delay time can also be edited here 6 ROUT routing Assign the channel to buses 1 8 and the stereo bus Input channel monitor channel SCENE GE E Initial Dcjta io sor BOO fou BAA 23 A 00 VIEW a 2 NEN 20N scene A 8 MONIZ 01 00 00 010 initia ais ta_ EE GE EE SE E E e LATT PHASE Pan spout GROUP PAIR 2 ne gal sf aana 20an me GROUP 0n0ga 000a _ Par YEE EFFECT OFF t OFF C 44 Awan Refere
298. e F1 CD LOAD key Close the tray of the CD RW drive e F2 CD UNLOAD key Eject the tray of the CD RW drive Importing CD DA data into a track Procedure 1 Access the EDIT screen CD Import page and press the SHIFT key F2 CD UNLOAD key The CD RW drive tray will be ejected 2 Place the audio CD or mixed mode CD ROM on the tray and press the SHIFT key F1 CD LOAD key The CD RW drive tray will close and the disc will be inserted 3 Move the cursor to the DRIVE area use the DATA JOG dial to select the SCSI ID of the CD RW drive and press the ENTER key The AW4416 will detect the inserted CD and a screen like the following will appear EDIT GGG_ NEW SONG REGION IMPORT FROM CO DA 5 02 31 65 04 02 55 13 03 02 31 45 Move the cursor to PASTE TO and use the DATA JOG dial to specify the track num ber and virtual track number of the track in which the CD DA data will be placed In this page identically numbered virtual tracks of adjacent odd numbered even numbered tracks will be selected e g 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 and the L R channels of the CD DA data will be assigned to these tracks Move the cursor to the destination point area and use the DATA JOG dial to spec ify the location in the track where the CD DA audio data will be placed Move the cursor to the TYPE area Select Insert if you want the CD DA audio data to be inserted into the track
299. e Control Command mcc sub id 00000011 03 Deferred play MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 4 13 4 MMC FAST FORWARD lt Transmission gt Transmitted with device number 7F when the FF key is pressed or when the shuttle is rotated toward the right to enter Cue mode lt Reception gt If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE it will begin fast forward when this message is received if the device number matches or is 7F STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01111111 7F System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclu sive Destination 00 7E 7F all call Machine Control Command mec sub id Fast Forward MCS End Of Exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Command 00000110 06 00000110 04 EOX 11110111 F7 4 13 5 MMC REWIND lt Transmission gt Transmitted with device number 7F when the REWIND key is pressed or when the shuttle is rotated toward the left to enter Review mode lt Reception gt If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE it will begin rewind when this message is received if the device number matches or is 7F STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01111111 7F System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclu sive Destination 00 7E 7F all call Device ID Oddddddd dd Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00000101 05 Rewind MCS EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Appendix 52 AUH Reference Guide Appendix 4 13 6 MMC RECORD STROBE lt Reception gt If the AW4416 is
300. e SAMPLING PAD section press the EDIT pad gt F4 key The SAMP PAD screen PAD Edit page will appear SAMP PAD PAD HETHER EA BEC PAD EDIT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 CRED oeng A 2 5E 2 ERASE button ERASE gt yf EE 3 GR y 8 5 em J ee ae 4 BEZIE NO ASN 2 NO ASN 9 B SE NO ASN B 4C NO ASN A 4 E ZE NO ASN 8 NO ASN 2 Move the cursor to the ERASE button and press the ENTER key The display will show the PAD button used to select the pad and the EXECUTE button used to execute the Erase command 194 awun operation Guide Chapterl 2 Sampling pads 3 Move the cursor to the PAD button and press the ENTER key The cursor will move to the PAD No area at the lower right 4 Use the CURSOR keys and the DATA JOG dial to select the bank and pad number of the pad that you wish to erase 5 Press the ENTER key Press the ENTER key The pad will be selected and the cursor will return to the PAD button 6 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm that you wish to erase the pad settings CONFIRMATION Execute PAD ERASE 7 To execute the Erase command move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key AVVUUIG Operation Guide 195 Chapter1 2 Sampling pads Recording your performance on the sampling pads The AW4416 provides a simple sequencer dedica
301. e approximate locations of play counter area When you press the SHIFT each locate point key F1 REMAIN key once again the nor mal counter display will reappear AD METRO metronome play pp Here you can turn the internal metronome on ie off ON OFF button and adjust its volume The remaining recordable time will differ knob The tempo and time signature of the depending on the number of tracks that are metronome are set in the SONG screen Tempo currently in record ready mode For example Map page if you increase the number of tracks in record ready mode from one track to two tracks the remaining recordable time will be e When the AW4416 is in its initial state the halved internal metronome will be output from the MONITOR OUT jacks mixed with other sig F2 WAVE key Display the waveform for the audio of a desired nals However it is possible to patch the HIS metronome output signal MET to any of the track This is convenient when you wish to view the waveform while searching precisely for a input channels 1 24 For details refer to SETUP screen Patch IN page locate point For the procedure refer to View ing a waveform for the audio data of a track in the section that follows F3 X ZOOM IN key Each time you press the SHIFT key F3 X ZOOM IN key the track view will zoom in horizontally three levels F4 X ZOOM OUT key Each time you press the SHIFT key F4 X ZOOM OUT key
302. e as follows Edit source track Edit source area m NAME 9 2CV Tr 27 1411 ep SENG RECT N BEC 714 Edit destination area Edit destination track 9 Parameter settings In this area you can set the necessary parame ters for executing the edit command For the track editing procedure refer to Operation Guide Chapter 9 Track virtual track operations A The keys of the transport section will have no effect while the TR Edit page is displayed Additional functions in the TR Edit page In the TR Edit page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional functions to the F1 F3 keys K i K E Lei Lee Ces J e F1 REMAIN key The level meter counter and the counter area of the display will show the remaining time avail able for recording When you press the SHIFT key F1 REMAIN key once again the usual counter display will reappear e F2 X ZOOM IN key Each time you press the SHIFT key F2 X ZOOM IN key the track view will zoom in on the time axis in three levels F3 X ZOOM OUT key Each time you press the SHIFT key F3 X ZOOM OUT key the track view will zoom out on the time axis in three levels 100 awn Reference Guide EDIT screen E TRACK menu commands and parameters The TRACK menu allows you to select a track or virtual track and edit all of the audio data of the track together A In the TRA
303. e being input If the level meters reach the CLIP position you should lower GAIN controls 1 2 vip The patching of the input jacks and input channels can be changed freely For details refer to page 133 AVVUUIG Operation Guide 79 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 6 If you wish to set the input signals of INPUT jacks 1 2 as a stereo pair hold down SEL key 1 and press SEL key 2 Adjacent odd numbered gt even numbered input channels can be specified as a stereo pair You will find it convenient to pair two channels that are inputting a stereo source so that all mix parameters except for attenuation and pan will be linked When you simultaneously press the two SEL keys a CHANNEL PAIRING popup window will appear allowing you to specify how pairing will occur CHAHMEL PAIRING Choose a Fairing Mode i _IMPUT2 1 i RESET BOTH Move the cursor to either the INPUT 12 INPUT 2 1 or RESET BOTH button and press the ENTER key One of the following can be selected as the pairing method O INPUT x gt y x odd number y even number The parameters except for attenuation and pan of the odd numbered channel will be copied to the even numbered channel O INPUT y gt x x odd number y even number The parameters except for attenuation and pan of the even numbered channel will be copied to the odd numbered channel O RESET BOTH The parameters of both channels will be reset to
304. e button in the BACKUP SONG area and press the ENTER key The button display will change from DISABLE to ENABLE and the song will be selected for backup The O symbol at the left edge of the list will change to for songs that are selected for backup 86 67 83 19 06 163NB 16 48 parar 18 37 75 4NB 16 44 1 007 07 03 19 03 85 9NB 16 44 1 ENABLE ALL ENABLE ALL DISABLE e You can repeat steps 3 and 4 to select multiple songs for backup e If you wish to backup all songs move the cursor to the ALL ENABLE button located in the center of the display and press the EN TER key Conversely if you wish to exclude all songs from backup move the cursor to the ALL DISABLE button and press the EN TER key 5 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button in the lower right of the display and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the backup operation CONFIRMATION Will Backur Selected Songs ARE YOU SURE AVVULNG Operation Guide 247 Chapter16 Backing up and restoring songs 6 To execute the backup move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key If TYPE2 was selected as the backup format the backup will begin immedi ately If TYPE1 was selected as the backup format the media will be formatted auto matically in the case of CD RW media all data will be erased Then the backup will begin If the selected song s will not fit on a sing
305. e edited or recorded Invalid data may have been received at the TO HOST connector Invalid data may have been received at the TO HOST connector Invalid data may have been received at the TO HOST connector Excessive amounts of data may have been received at the TO HOST connector The AW4416 may be attempting to transmit excessive amounts of data from the TO HOST connector A sampling pad trigger list is being recorded Undo cancellation of the previous operation has been executed The word clock from a connected device selected by the AW4416 for synchronization is not appropriate A error occurred when accessing the CD Data exceeding the recordable length of the CD cannot be added The maximum number of tracks has been reached and further addition is not possible This parameter cannot be copied Since the disk is full a CD image file cannot be created The currently loaded song cannot be deleted A protected song cannot be deleted This editing operation cannot be executed on multiple songs simultaneously Optimize cannot be executed on a protected song Redo is not possible The currently loaded song cannot be edited Undo is not possible A CD RW cannot be written using Track At Once Please exchange the media The order of media volumes is incor rect Please exchange the media This is not the first media volume Please exchange the media This media was not backed up as TYPE 1 Please exchange the me
306. e external MIDI sequencer will also move to the same location When the AW4416 begins running the MIDI sequencer will begin running in synchronization according to the MIDI clock that is being transmitted The internal metronome of the AW 4416 will sound according to the tempo data and time signature data you specify here 242 awun operation Guide Chapter1 5 MIDI Using MMC to control the AW4416 MMC MIDI Machine Control is a group of MIDI messages used to control the transport of an audio recorder etc from an external MIDI device The AW4416 supports MMC transmission and reception This means that an external MIDI device can control AW4416 transport operations locate operations selection and disabling of recording tracks or conversely that the AW4416 can control transport and other operations on another MMC compatible device In this section we will explain how MMC can be used to control various opera tions of the AW4416 from an external MIDI sequencer while MTC is being used to synchronize the AW4416 and MIDI sequencer 1 Connect the AW4416 s MIDI IN connector to the MIDI OUT connector of the MIDI sequencer and connect the AW4416 s MTC OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector of the MIDI sequencer In this case the MIDI sequencer will be the MMC master the device transmitting MTC and MTC slave and the AW4416 will be the MMC slave the device receiv ing MMC and MTC master MTC OUT connec
307. e instrument adjust the F 88Hz 841Hz 2 11kHz 4 49kHz HIGH or H MID G 2 0dB 1 0dB 1 5dB 3 0dB frequency PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use as a template for Q 011 45 0 56 0 11 male vocal Adjust the 025 Male Vocal 1 HIGH or H MID setting F 187Hz 1 00kHz 2 00kHz 6 72kHz according to the voice G 0 5dB 0 0dB 2 0dB 3 5dB quality PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF This is a variation on Q 0 11 10 5 6 program 025 026 Male Vocal 2 F 167Hz 236Hz 2 67kHz 6 72kHz G 2 0dB 5 0dB 2 5dB 4 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use as a template for Q T018 0 45 0 56 0 14 female vocal Adjust the 027 Female Vocal 1 HIGH or H MID setting F 118Hz 397Hz 2 67kHz 5 99kHz according to the voice G 1 0dB 1 0dB 1 5dB 2 0dB quality L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF _ This is a variation on Q 0 16 0 2 program 027 028 Female Vocal 2 F 111Hz 334Hz 2 00kHz 6 72kHz G 7 0dB 1 5dB 1 5dB 2 5dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use as a template for a Q 28 2 0 7 7 chorus It makes the entire 029 Chorus amp Harmony chorus much brighter F 88Hz 841Hz 2 11kHz 4 49kHz G 2 0dB 1 0dB 1 5dB 3 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Use on the STEREO bus Q 7 22 5 6 during mixdown For more 030 Total EQ 1 effect try it with a F 94Hz 944Hz 2 11kHz 16 0kHz compressor G 0 5dB 0 0dB 3 0dB 6 5dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF This is a variation on Qa 7 28 56 program 030 031
308. e methods and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the erasure 4 To execute the Erase operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key A When you execute the Erase operation all data that was saved on the CD RW media will be lost forever Please use caution 254 Awun operation Guide This chapter explains the mastering function which allows you to use the internal CD RW drive option of the AW4416 to create an audio CD About mastering tereo that can be mastere By installing a CD RW drive in the AW4416 or connecting an external CD RW drive to the SCSI connector you can write the audio data of the stereo track included in each song onto CD R RW media in CD DA format This function is called mastering The CD R RW media to which the data is written can be played back on the internal CD RW drive or on conventional CD players in the same way as an audio CD A eeeeaeeoeeoaoeeoe eos enone eonoe eon eoonue enue eoonue eee eee eee Some CD players and CD ROM drives which do not support CD R RW may be unable to play back audio data that was written on CD R RW media To master a song you will select the desired stereo track from the stereo track included in each song on the internal hard disk and write it to a track on the CD R RW media However only stereo tracks more than four seconds from songs recorded as 16 bit 24 bit and a 44 1 kHz samp
309. e number 00 Can t reproduce a scene e One or more channels may be set to Recall Safe E Can t recall a scene during recording e The AW4416 may be set to record the digital input signal e Make sure that CD DAT DIGITAL REC is set to ENABLE Can t change input patches during recording e The AW4416 may be set to record the digital input signal e Make sure that CD DAT DIGITAL REC in the UTILITY screen Prefer 2 page is set to ENABLE E Can t save to a library e It is not possible to save to the factory preset libraries Can t recall a channel library to the stereo out put channel e Channel libraries saved from other channels can not be recalled to the stereo output channel E Can t exchange MIDI data e Are the MIDI cables connected correctly e A MIDI cable may be broken e Is the power turned on for the transmitting and receiving devices e Do the channel settings match for the transmitted and receiving devices e In the MIDI screen MIDI Setup page is PORT SELECT effect to MIDI e In the MIDI screen MIDI Setup page are PRO GRAM CHANGE TX and RX set to ON e Is a scene assigned to the program change num ber being transmitted E MIDI messages are looped e In the MIDI screen MIDI Setup page ECHO may be turned ON e Also check the settings of the connected external MIDI devices MMIC messages are not transmitted e Is the MIDI cable correctly connected to the MTC OUT connector MTC is not transmi
310. e pro gram enclosed by a dotted line in the library list In this page you can always use the DATA JOG dial to select the program regardless of where the cursor is located 2 CURVE TYPE Of the dynamics programs stored in the library the response and type of the currently selected dynamics program are shown in this area E Additional functions in the Library page In the Library page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following functions to the F1 F3 keys t ft 4 Le e Ces J e F1 TITLE EDIT key Use this to edit the name library title assigned to settings in the library This is the same func tion as the TITLE EDIT button e F2 RECALL key Recall the currently selected dynamics settings from the list This is the same function as the RECALL button e F3 STORE key Store the current dynamics settings This is the same function as the STORE button AVVULNG Reference Guide 63 DYN DLY screen Storing dynamics settings in the library Procedure 1 Select the channel whose settings you wish to store and access the DYN DLY screen Library page Use the DATA JOG dial to select the library number 41 128 in which you will store the settings Library numbers in which nothing has been stored are displayed as No Data Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the ENTER key The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear a
311. e region that you wish to copy e TOTRACK Select the copy destination track e TO START Specify the starting location of the copy destina tion e TIMES Specify the number of times 1 99 that the data will be copied e INTERVAL When copying multiple times specify the spac ing of the copy destination starting locations e INSERT Specify whether the copied data will be inserted Insert or overwritten OverWrite in the copy destination track e EXECUTE Execute the command MOVE Move the selected region to the specified loca tion of the specified track At this time the move source region will be erased e REGION Select the region that you wish to move e TO TRACK Select the move destination track e TO START Specify the starting location of the move desti nation AW ULNE Reference Guide 105 EDIT screen e INSERT Specify whether the moved audio data will be inserted Insert or overwritten OverWrite in the move destination track e EXECUTE Execute the command DIVIDE Divide the selected region into two regions at the specified point e REGION Select the region that you wish to divide e DIVIDE Specify the location at which the region will be divided e EXECUTE Execute the command TRIM IN Trim the starting location of the selected region toward the end of the song in units of a sample e REGION Select the region that you wish to trim e TRIMIN Specify the amoun
312. e rhythm section or ensemble with one stereo microphone pair for example separation is a non issue but instrument layout and microphone placement are critical But assuming you want all instruments cleanly recorded on separate tracks so you can do all your spatial arranging and processing later on you ll need to ensure that leakage between instruments and microphones is minimized How Physical separation is the best way Record different instru ments in different rooms if possible this corresponds to using isolation booths in a recording studio or use baffles to reduce leakage when recording more than one source in the same room Directional microphones are a good idea and close miking can be a big help The only way to achieve total separation though is to overdub acoustic sources one at a time Even then you ll probably end up with a little leakage from the vocalist s headphones for example Line sources naturally do not present a problem A little leakage is not a big problem though so don t let it bog you down Listen carefully to the individual So Fine tracks and you ll hear what we mean AWURE Tutorial 5 Tutorial Laying Down the Basic Tracks g Scratch or Guide Vocals If you re working alone this won t be necessary but when recording a band it s sometimes a good idea to have the singer lay down a scratch vocal track while recording the rhythm section This is simply because
313. e roll PREROLL or post roll POSTROLL fields and use the DATA JOG dial to set the pre roll time and post roll time Rehearsing and recording with auto punch in out O Rehearsing with auto punch in out 1 Press the REC TRACK SELECT key for the track that you wish to record using auto punch in out The REC TRACK SELECT key will blink and the track will be in record ready mode 2 Make sure that the Locate section IN OUT keys are lit and press the AUTO PUNCH key The AUTO PUNCH key will light and you will locate to the pre roll point While the AUTO PUNCH key is lit transport locate operations other than the STO P PLAY REC keys cannot be used 3 To begin rehearsing the auto punch in out press the PLAY key The PLAY key will light and playback will begin from the pre roll point 2 When you reach the auto punch in point the REC key will begin blinking and the monitor signal of the track you selected in step 1 will change from the track playback to the input signal recording source However recording will not actually occur 3 When you reach the auto punch out point the REC key will go dark and the monitor signal will return to the track playback During rehearsal record ing will not actually occur 4 When you reach the post roll point the transport will locate to the pre roll point and stop AVVUUIG Operation Guide 131 Chapter7 Punch in out 4 If you wish
314. e the WRITE SPEED buttons located in the lower left of 11 12 13 the display to select the writing speed The x1 x2 x4 x6 buttons correspond to single speed double speed quad speed 6x speed writing Normally you should select the fastest speed that your CD RW drive supports When you have finished selecting all of the stereo tracks that will be written to the CD move the cursor to the EXECUTE button in the lower right of the display and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the operation CONFIRMATION Will Write Master to CD ARE YOU SURE 7 To execute the writing operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key If you decide to cancel the disc writing operation move the cursor to CANCEL and press the ENTER key After all data has been written the media will be ejected automatically If Writing Test is turned on the writing test will be executed before the actual writing begins If a problem occurs during the test a message will appear e If you write using Disc At Once the media can be played in a CD player as soon as it is ejected e Ifyou write to CD R media using Track At Once a popup window will ask you whether you wish to finalize the disc If you wish to execute the Finalize operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The CD RW tray will close automati cally and the disc will be finalized If you do not w
315. e the cursor down to the scene number in the event list it should be 05 if you changed it as we suggested on page 24 and use the data dial to change the scene number to 06 4 Now go back to the VIEW display or any other display you want to watch while listening to the mastered automix O Equalization As mentioned above you won t always need to do this but overall master EQ can be useful when you want to add a little brilliance or low end or both to a finished mix You might also find that some mixes are too boomy or middly and that applying a slight dip in the appropriate frequency range can clean things up considerably The So Fine demo doesn t need any EQ at least we think so so we ll leave it alone O Compression You ll probably end up using master compression a lot more than master EQ The trend these days in popular music is to squeeze as much level onto the final mas ter as possible without making the music sound unnatural sometimes on the other hand unnatural is a desirable goal Some compression can also give the mix more punch and presence The master compression settings for So Fine are not particularly extreme but if you feel the urge to experiment with other settings we encourage you to do so O So Fine Master Compression THRESH RATIO OUT GAIN ATTACK RELEASE KNEE 10 1 7 1 3 5 55 192 1 Step 2 Record the Song to the Stereo Track The A
316. e the inner cover from the CD RW drive cover Bottom panel 8 Aw operation Guide Before you begin Removing the transport protection pad When CD RW drives are shipped the disc tray contains a transport protection pad that protects the internal mechanism from physical shock suffered during shipment Please remove this protective pad before use This diagram shows a CD RW drive manufactured by Yamaha Corporation Be sure to save the transport protection pad for the next time you need to trans port the unit How to remove the transport protection pad 1 Install the CD RW drive in the AW4416 2 Turn on the power of the AW4416 Set the SCSI ID number as necessary gt P 259 3 Press the CD PLAY key and then press the SHIFT F2 keys to open the disc tray 4 Remove the transport protection pad Before transporting the unit reverse this procedure to insert the pad AULAS Operation Guide 9 Before you begin Manual eject emergency disc removal Manual eject allows you to remove the disc manually in the case of an emer gency such as a malfunction of the disc tray mechanism usually temporary or a power failure Please be aware that using this method frequently can cause the CD RW drive to malfunction For the location of the eject hole and the proce dure refer to the manual of your CD RW drive In order to perform this operation you will need a
317. e this to recall the scene currently selected by the cursor from the list This is the same function as the RECALL button e F3 STORE key Store the current scene This is the same func tion as the 3 STORE button AVV ULNG Reference Guide 125 SCENE screen Fade Time page Specify the fade time Function Specify the time over which the faders will reach their new locations when a scene is recalled Key operation e SCENE key gt F2 Fade Time key e Repeatedly press the SCENE key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt SCEN button gt Fade Time tab Screen functions 1 Fade time Specify the time fade time over which the fad ers of each channel will move their new loca tions when a scene is recalled in steps of 0 1 second Range 0 1 second 10 seconds Fade time can be set for the following channels Input channels 1 24 Monitor channels 1 16 Effect return channels 1 2 Stereo output channel A Fade time will have no effect unless it is spec ified for the scene being recalled even if it is specified for the current scene A The fade time is specified independently for each scene Be sure to save the scene after editing the fade time Additional functions in the Fade Time page In the Fade Time page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional function to the F5 key OPY TO ALL Fe SCENE
318. e you begin Installing a CD RW drive About the CD RW drives A CD RW drive is an option that allows you to create music CD s to backup restore internal hard disk data to play a music CD or to read a CD ROM An internal type CD RW drive can be installed by removing the CD RW drive cover from the front panel CD RW drives with the following specifications can be used Interface SCSI 2 Models known to work consult your local Yamaha distributor or refer to the website at the following URL lt http www aw44 16 com gt A e By models known to work we mean commercially available models that Yamaha has obtained installed in the AW4416 and successfully tested by means of various operational tests However we cannot take into account slight differences in performance that may occur due to the manufacturing tol erances of each manufacturer Please be aware that Yamaha Corporation will accept no responsibility for any damages neither direct nor indirect resulting from the use of any of the above CD RW drives Note that the cover panel of the AW4416 cannot be attached to a CD RW drive with a lid type tray The AW4416 s cover panel can be attached to a CD RW drive with a tray of the following dimensions i 0 S 6 Maximum 138 mm The SCSI ID of the CD RW drive e The SCSI ID of the AW4416 itself is fixed at 6 For this reason you must set
319. eady mute status for all tracks at once It is convenient to use this method as a shortcut when you wish to quickly cancel the mute settings and re do the settings O Virtual tracks These are virtual tracks from which you can select On the AW4416 recording and playback will occur on the virtual track 1 8 that you select for each audio track 1 16 The following diagram shows the concept of virtual tracks The horizontal rows represent audio tracks 1 16 and the vertical columns represent virtual tracks 1 8 The shaded areas indicate the virtual tracks that are currently selected for recording and playback Audio tracks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 Virtual tracks 2 e 6 7 Z oy 3 Z For example if you are recording a solo part on a certain track you can switch virtual tracks to record multiple takes and select the best take later Kp In the initial state of the AW 4416 virtual track 1 is selected for all tracks O Stereo track This is a stereo track that is independent of the audio tracks and is used mainly as a master track to create a two track mix The AW4416 provides one stereo track for each song The input of the stereo track is internally connected to the stereo bus so that you can record the signal of the stereo bus at any time simply by putting the stereo track in record mode At this time recording on the normal audio tracks 1 16 will not be possible T
320. ears NAME ORANGE COMMENT Mouse operation M button gt SONG button gt Shut Down tab BIT 16 gt 44 1 SIZE 163MB OFF SAVE AT 00 07 26 19 11 04 Screen functions Current song status This area displays various information on the last saved song A The data for the current song date size quantization bits protect shown here in the song list is the data for when the song was last saved When you perform the Save pro cedure and press the ENTER key it will be overwritten by the new data 2 EXECUTE button In this page the cursor is fixed at the EXECUTE button so you can shut down simply by press ing the ENTER key For details on the order in which the AW4416 and peripheral devices should be shut down refer to Operation Guide Important points you must observe A If you turn off the power of the AW4416 without performing the shut down operation audio data on the internal hard disk may be damaged Be sure to perform this shut down operation before turning off the power of the AW4416 AVVUULNG Reference Guide 7 QUICK REC screen Quick Rec page Simultaneously recording 16 inputs 16 tracks Function Instantly make settings Quick Rec BUICK REC ESENE A IHPUT 1 Initial Data function for simultaneously eal recording 16 input sources on audio tracks 1 16 Key operation QUICK REC key Mouse operation M button gt Quick REC button Scree
321. ecord ready mode and adjust the input level of each track 1 In the level meters counter section press REC TRACK SELECT keys 1 and 2 _ Ca E EC LONN REC TRACK SELECT REC TRACK SELECT keys 1 and 2 will begin blinking In the level meters counter section REC READY indicators 1 and 2 will blink red This indicates that tracks 1 2 are in record ready mode 0868 8888 2 2 While producing sound on your instrument watch level meters 1 2 in the level meters counter section The level of the signals being input to tracks 1 2 which are in record ready mode will be shown in level meters 1 2 If the red segment at the 0 dB position lights for level meters 1 2 lower faders 1 2 input channel 1 2 input levels In this example tracks 1 2 are paired so be sure to operate only one of the fad ers When the AW 4416 is in its initial state the input monitor mode of each track is set to AUTO For tracks that are currently in record ready mode the level meters will show the level of the input signal while the recorder is stopped and the level of the track playback signal when the recorder is playing back 82 Aw uLns operation Guide Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 When tracks are paired you must operate only one of the faders Attempting to move both faders simultaneously will
322. ect the mixing layer that will be controlled by the top panel SEL keys 1 16 ON keys 1 16 and faders 1 16 These keys correspond to mixing layers as follows Input channels 1 16 Stereo output channel AVVUUIG Operation Guide 35 Chapter2 Parts and their functions Stereo output channel Effect return channels 1 2 Input channels 17 24 No function A e eeseeeaeeensne00e2e20e0208080 The fa
323. ecutively starting at the tempo data of the lowest numbered measure MEASURE BEAT Move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATAJOG dial to modify the location mea sure beat of the tempo data If you move the tempo data beyond the previous or next tempo data their step numbers will be exchanged automatically AVVULNG Reference Guide 5 SONG screen TEMPO Move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATAJOG dial to set the tempo BPM of that location The BPM value can be set in a range of 20 0 300 0 in 0 1 steps When the AW4416 is in the default state tempo data of BPM 120 is already input at measure 1 beat 7 A e The tempo data at step number 1 cannot be moved e It is not possible to place two tempo data at the same location If you move the cursor to the MEASURE BEAT area and specify the same location as an existing tempo data the previous tempo data will be deleted 3 EDIT SELECT button Use this button to specify whether you will edit time signature data METER or tempo data TEMPO Move the cursor to the button and press the ENTER key to switch between METER and TEMPO 4 NEW button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key new time signature tempo data will be added following the last step number that is currently input Xp e For details on inputting the tempo map refer to Operation Guide Chapter 15 MIDI e A maximum of 26 time signat
324. ed above AVVULNG Operation Guide 241 Chapter1 5 MIDI 8 10 11 12 T3 Move the cursor to the METER area of the beat map and use the DATA JOG dial to specify the time signature for measure 1 The time signature can be specified in a range of 1 2 8 8 If you wish to change time signatures in the middle of the song switch the EDIT SELECT buttons at the bottom of the screen to METER Then move the cursor to the NEW button and press the ENTER key New time signature data will be added allowing you to specify the new location measure and time signature For details refer to the Song screen Tempo Map page in the Reference Guide Move the cursor to the TEMPO column of the tempo map and use the DATA JOG dial to specify the tempo for the first measure The tempo BPM can be set in 0 1 units over a range of 20 0 300 0 If you wish to change tempo in the middle of the song switch the EDIT SELECT buttons at the bottom of the screen to TEMPO Then move the cursor to the NEW button and press the ENTER key New tempo data will be added allowing you to specify the new location mea sure beat and tempo For details refer to the Song screen Tempo Map page in the Reference Guide Make settings on your MIDI sequencer so that it will synchronize to an external MIDI clock and put it in playback ready mode Record play back the AW4416 song When you specify a location on the AW4416 in measure beat units th
325. ed to consider how each small action will affect the overall sound A small change in equalization on one instrument for example can affect the way the others sound The ability to anticipate cause and effect relationships like this can only come through experience The more you mix the better you ll get Phase 1 Listen To the Tracks and Make a Plan One of the most important steps in any mix is to make at least a mental plan before even starting the actual mix Here are a few points to consider e First and foremost think about the music What is the song saying What kind of mood is the piece attempting to convey How can you approach the mix in a way that will enhance the music itself e Does the piece depend mostly on the lyrics The singer s voice The rhythm A particular instrument or sound You ll probably want to emphasize whichever element s of the piece you determine to be the most important If the lyrics are critical for example you won t want the vocal track buried in the back ground or rendered unintelligible by an excessive wash of reverb e How do you want to place the instruments in the stereo soundstage Are you trying to create a realistic live performance image or just shooting for an overall effect e What kind of space do you want to place the music in Open and dry Large and reverberant Small and tight Distant Intimate e What instruments are in similar frequency ranges and are likely to ge
326. eee 57 Using the MOUSES ee 2h as panee Suds Ses See he eee kee ees 57 Editing the value of a fader knob numerical box 58 Using the controls of the top panel 2 002 ee eee 58 Using th MOUSE 2 2 dente ou gute os dere ater aa Rare wae 58 Using the additional function buttons 04 59 Using the controls of the top panel 2 2 ee ee eee 59 Usine the MOUSE fans cake oe Hate as See ee ad eaten he a een eh 59 INDULINE IOXt e325 S yur eae Op Be cea E ere a Peg eR ES 60 Using the controls of the tab page 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee eee 60 ISLE ANG MOUSER faces ts essi as Ga E A aya Maneatis aR aan h dy 62 Sel c ng Chane Ss dete serae aai let aed hee ele ea Sats 63 Chapter 4 Connections and setup 67 Chapter 5 Connections iy einen ees s wher enLe UE N e Bere denne es 67 Word clock Sete eis 408 Gene Aa acocsnreaut Swe ate ote eeomat 68 Recording on the AW4416 73 Preparations for recording 0 eee e eee eee eee e ees 73 Connections and start Up 92 eye a ore dow cea RE Sea s be gle oa 73 Creatine a New SOng vite Uitte a hak sl Gotteg MU hie Ew Sha 75 Recording the first tracks 10 0 eee eee ee eee ee ee eee 78 Set the input level seca GA ons 39 Sek Raat a bee 78 Assign the signals to buses nso Fo AG tae eee eee aS 81 Set the tracks to record ready mode 02005 82 Make monitor settings oeu Asad sa pe telnet gam de
327. elay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV CHO 0 100 ao chorused reverb balance 0 chorused reverb 100 MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds AXVWVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 17 Appendix REV FLANGE Reverb and flanger effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 E N e normal phase feedback minus values WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV FLG 0 100 Reverb and flange balance 0 flange 100 reverb MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds REV gt FLANGE Reverb and flanger effects in series Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass fi
328. eld Turn the FADER button on and turn off the remaining buttons CH ON PAN EQ The FADER CH ON PAN EQ buttons in the OVERWRITE field are used to select the events that will be recorded in the automix If a button is on highlighted the corresponding type of event can be recorded in the automix The following events correspond to each button e FADER Operations of the faders and AUX send 1 8 faders of each channel o CH ON Operations of the ON switches of each channel PAN sicisdveesuratiwatets Pan operations of each channel EQ EQ operations of each channel 216 Awun operation Guide 6 10 Chapterl 4 Automix Scene and library recall operations can be recorded at any time regardless of these settings Move the cursor to the REC button in the screen and press the ENTER key The REC button will blink indicating that the AW4416 is ready to record auto mix AUTOHI TRANSPORT ABORT STOP PLAY bec AUTO REC gt a t 4 ka a Use the SEL keys to select the channels whose fader operations you wish to record When automix is in record ready mode you can use the SEL keys to select the channel that will be recorded At this time the SEL keys will blink Press the PLAY key on the top panel to begin song playback When you press the PLAY key the REC button in the screen will turn on high lighted and automix recording will begin While automix is being recorded
329. els 1 16 to AUX 6 Send level from input channels 1 16 to effect 1 O If the mixing layer is 17 24 RTN Fader mode Send level from input channels 1 16 to effect 2 STEREO Output level of the stereo output channel Input level of input channels 17 24 Send level from input channels 17 24 to AUX 1 Input level of effect return 1 Input level of effect return 2 Send level from input channels 17 24 to AUX 2 Send level from effect return 1 to AUX 1 Send level from effect return 2 to AUX 1 Send level from input channels 17 24 to AUX 3 Send level from effect return 1 to AUX 2 Send level from effect return 2 to AUX 2 Send level from input channels 17 24 to AUX 4 Send level from effect return 1 to AUX 3 Send level from effect return 2 to AUX 3 Send level from input channels 17 24 to AUX 5 Send level from effect return 1 to AUX 4 Send level from effect return 2 to AUX 4 Send level from input channels 17 24 to AUX 6 Send level from effect return 1 to AUX 5 Send level from effect return 2 to AUX 5 Send level from input channels 17 24 to effect 1 Send level from effect return 1 to AUX 6 Send level from effect return 2 to AUX 6 Send level from input channels 17 24 to effect 2 Send level from effect return 2 to effect 1 Send level from effect return 1 to effect 2 STEREO Ou
330. els from the Solo function when MIXDOWN SOLO mode is selected Move the cursor to the button s for the channel s that you wish to set to Solo Safe and press the ENTER key You may select more than one channel AVVUUIG Operation Guide 97 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 For example if the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL section RTN 1 RTN2 buttons are on the Solo function will not affect return channels 1 2 This allows you to monitor the soloed channel with an effect such as reverb still applied 5 To use the Solo function play back the recorder and press the SOLO key The SOLO key and ON keys 1 16 will blink 6 Press the MIXING LAYER section MONI key and press the ON key for the monitor channel corresponding to the track you wish to monitor If you selected LAST SOLO in step 3 only the channel whose ON key was last pressed will be monitored If you selected MIX SOLO all channels selected by their ON key will be monitored At this time all ON keys 1 16 other than the selected key s will go dark 7 To defeat the Solo function press the SOLO key once again Kp Solo operations using the O N keys are also linked for paired channels 98 Aw un6 operation Guide Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Using the internal effects The AW4416 provides two internal effec
331. em on different tracks but the straightforward earthy feel of the song demands a more simple approach A There s nothing worse than too much reverb all over everything Use ambience effects sparingly And remember reverb is cumulative That is the seemingly small amounts of reverb you add to individual tracks can add up to a great big mess when the entire mix is played back In the beginning you ll probably have to go back and readjust individual reverb sends many times until you get it right but as you gain experience you ll develop a feel for how much to add right from the outset INSTANT GRATIFICATION You can instantly recall all the reverb settings described below as well as all other settings made up until this point by recalling the scene number 04 AMBIENCE we ve provided for you You should know how to do this by now but if you don t go back and check the previous sections O Engage the Effect 1 Sends and Select an Effect Le Press the FADER MODE AUX7 key The faders will now function as auxiliary sends for the corresponding tracks In the AW4416 AUX 7 is pre assigned to internal effect processor 1 and AUX 8 is pre assigned to effect processor 2 We ll only use the AUX 7 sends for this example Press the F2 function key to select the Effect Library page The default Reverb Hall effect is a little too big and spacious for our needs The Reverb Room effect on the other
332. em that to erase CD RW media To format the internal will be used for formatting and the format hard disk select INT IDE ting method However if REMOVABLE BACKUP is set to TYPE 1 in the UTILITY screen Prefer 3 page the media will be formatted automati The display will change as follows depending on the type of drive that you select here E If the internal hard disk or an cally and therefore the FORMAT item for g selecting the format method will not be dis external SCSI device MO or played external hard disk is selected e For details on this procedure refer to Opera tion Guide Chapter 16 Backing up and restoring songs FORMAT A When you execute the Format operation all the saved data will be lost forever Please use I caution 2 EXECUTE button Execute formatting of the selected drive media AVVULNG Reference Guide 31 FILE screen E If an internal or external CD RW drive is selected _ O RW MEDIA ERASE go m simpcy Peerectuy CDRH A 4 3 AUDIO READ SPEED Use the x1 x2 x4 or x8 buttons to select the reading speed normal speed double speed quad speed or 8x speed A This setting is valid only for CD IMPORT If errors occur during CD IMPORT lower the read speed and try again 4 WRITE SPEED Use the x1 x2 x4 or x6 buttons to select the writing speed normal speed double speed quad speed or 6x speed Xe Normall
333. emo song you ll first need to load it onto the AW4416 hard disk from the supplied CD ROM This tutorial assumes that you already have a CD RW drive configured for use with your AW4416 See the Operation Guide for information on installing and connecting an external CD RW drive Load the Demo Song From the CD ROM Onto the AW4416 Hard Disk 1 2 Press the AW4416 FILE key Press the F2 function key to go to the Restore page Make sure that the SCSI ID number of your CD RW drive is selected in the SOURCE DRIVE window if it isn t move the cursor to the SOURCE DRIVE window and use the DATA dial to select the appropriate SCSI ID number then press the ENTER key The default SCSI drive number is SCSI 3 If you install a CD RW drive manufactured by Yamaha the SCSI ID will be set to 3 at the factory and we recommend that you leave it at this setting Open the CD tray by pressing the F2 function key CD UNLOAD while holding the SHIFT key Place the demo CD ROM on the tray label side up and press the F1 function key CD LOAD while holding the SHIFT key to close the tray and load the CD The demo song So Fine should appear in the list on the display Move the cursor to the RESTORE SONG window and then use the ENTER key to switch the DISABLE button to ENABLE Move the cursor to EXECUTE on the display then press the ENTER key When the ARE YOU SURE confirmation prompt appears
334. emovable media 2 Hard disks are sold separately O Efficient data management All of the audio data multi track and stereo track scene memories libraries and automix data used in a song are managed on the internal hard disk as a Song A desired song can be recalled from disk at any time Songs can also be backed up on an external hard disk MO disk or CD R RW disc O 16x8 virtual tracks stereo track A single song consists of 16 tracks x 8 virtual tracks stereo track total of 130 tracks The quantization 16 bit 24 bit and sampling frequency 44 1 kHz 48 kHz can be selected for each song 16 tracks can be recorded simultaneously or 16 tracks played back while recording 8 tracks simultaneously making the AW4416 an ideal choice for live recording or for re recording or ping ponging from an exter nal recorder The 16 tracks can also be mixed down directly to the stereo track This has the advantage not only of making a master recorder unnecessary but also of allowing multi track and two track mix data to be managed together O Versatile editing functionality Data can be edited freely at every level song track part and region Editing functions include time compression that allows you to compress or expand time over a range of 50 200 and pitch change that can modify the pitch as far as an octave upward or downward Editing is non destructive allow ing up to fifteen levels of undo redo O L
335. enclosed by a dotted frame in the EQ library list In this page you can use the DATAJOG dial to select the EQ program regardless of the cursor location D EQ CURVE Of the EQ programs stored in the library the curve of the currently selected EQ program is shown as a graph E Additional functions in the Library page In the Library page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following functions to the F1 F3 keys TITLE EDIT RECALL STORE t ft f Le e Ces J e F1 TITLE EDIT key Use this to edit the name library title of an EQ program stored in the EQ library This is the same function as the TITLE EDIT button F2 RECALL key Recall the currently selected EQ program from the list This is the same function as the RECALL button F3 STORE Store the current EQ settings This is the same function as the STORE button Storing EQ settings in the EQ library Procedure 1 Select the EQ settings that you wish to store and access the EQ ATT GRP screen Library page 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the store destination library number 41 128 3 Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the ENTER key The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the EQ pro gram 4 Input the library title as desired For details on inputting characters refer to Opera tion Guide P 60 5 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER
336. ene numbers can be set freely This conversion is applied to both transmission and recep tion Appendix 50 AULAS Reference Guide Appendix 3 MIDI message formats 3 1 CHANNEL MESSAGE command rx tx function S Forh e a a 8n NOTE OFF rx Control internal effects 9n NOTEON rx Control internal effects Bn CONTROL CHANGE Only echoed Cn PROGRAM CHANGE rx tx Select scene memories using the Program Change Table 3 2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE command rx tx function Sc F1 MIDI TIME CODE rx tx MTC transmission when MTC master MTC reception when MTC slave F2 SONG POSITION POINTER tx SPP transmission when using MIDI Clock 3 3 SYSTEM REAL TIME MESSAGE command rx tx function Se F8 TIMING CLOCK tx MIDI Clock reception when using MIDI Clock FA START tx Start command transmis sion when using MIDI Clock FB CONTINUE tx Continue command transmission when using MIDI Clock FC STOP tx Stop command transmis sion when using MIDI Clock FE ACTIVE SENSING rx MIDI cable connection checking FF RESET rx Clear running status 3 4 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 3 4 1 Real Time System Exclusive 3 4 1 1 MMC command rx tx function H H 01 STOP rx tx Transport Stop 02 PLAY rx Transport Play 03 DEFERRED PLAY rx tx Transport Play 04 FAST FOWARD rx tx Transport Fast forward 05 REWIND rx tx Transport Rewind 06 RECORD STROBE
337. enu allows you to adjust the playback end location of the sample assigned to a pad When you move the cursor to this menu and press the ENTER key the following buttons will appear EXECUTE These buttons have the following functions PAD Select the bank pad number of the pad whose playback end location you wish to trim TRIM OUT Adjust the amount of trimming in sample units EXECUTE Execute the trim operation A e TRIM IN TRIM OUT cannot be undone e Trimming a sample will not increase the available memory area Pairing Here you can set or cancel pairing of adjacent odd numbered even numbered pads Move the cursor to the heart symbol and press the ENTER key to connect the heart symbol pair ing the two channels In this state pressing either of the pads will sound both pads simulta neously 6 PAD This column shows the bank and pad number A1 A8 B1 B8 NAME pad name This column shows the pad name When a sam ple is assigned to a pad a name of Smpltr will automatically be assigned Pads to which noth ing is assigned will be displayed as NO ASN SIZE This area shows a bar graph that indicates the length of the sample assigned to each pad MAX at the right edge is the maximum RAM that can be assigned to the sampling pad vp The maximum total length of sound that can be assigned to the sampling pads is 90 sec onds for a 44 1 kHz 16 bit song 9 Parameter area In th
338. eoim D Ratio 1 0 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 10 20 16 points Attack ms O to 120 121 points Outgain dB 0 to 18 36 points nen Knee hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 points a y E Release ms 5 ms to 42 3 sec 6 ms to 46 0 sec 2 10 5f 20 Output Level Goel ee NAN cae es ao 50 ory 60 70 Threshold 20dB 8 ms to 63 4 sec 3 160 points 1 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48kHz 2 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz 3 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected Signals at and below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter Ratio controls the amount of expansion the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 1 2 ratio for example a 5 dB change in input level below the threshold results in a 10 dB change in out put level For a 1 5 ratio a 2 dB change in input level below the threshold results in a 10 dB change in output level Attack controls how soon the signal is expanded once the expander has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is expanded
339. epending on the overall effect you re after For So Fine we ll add a barely noticeable amount of reverb to help define the record ing s space Move the AUX 7 faders for tracks 1 amp 2 they re paired remember so you only have to move one up to about 25dB You can check and edit precise fader settings for the selected channel in the MIXER VIEW display press the MIXER VIEW key The AUX 7 fader near the lower right corner of the display shows the current level and if you move the cursor there you can use the data dial to make precise adjustments Remember to press the FADER MODE AUX7 key if you want to go back and make further reverb adjustments via the channel faders Track 3 Claves Electronic Drums Leave this track dry The claves sound has enough natural room ambience which was undoubtedly picked up during the initial recording The electronic drum sequence for the outro needs to remain dry to emphasize its techno quality as well as maximize the contrast with the acoustic drums Track 4 Bass It s usually a good idea to avoid adding reverb to bass because the resultant boomy wash of sound can severely compromise the clarity of the mix And that s precisely what we ll do with the So Fine bass track no reverb O Tracks 5 amp 6 Rhythm amp Lead Guitar Electric guitar is one of those instruments that almost demands added reverb unless the guitarist applied reverb himsel
340. er e AW4416 mixer recorder unit 1 e Operation guide this document 1 e Reference guide 1 e Tutorial 1 e Power supply cable 1 e CD ROM 1 e Red and white cable for CD RW drive four conductor 1 e Screws for installing 2 5 inch hard disk CD RW drive 8 e ADP25H 2 5 inch hard disk adapter 1 pre installed in the 2 5 HARD DISK DRIVE slot on the rear panel of the AW4416 O Trademarks ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a trademark and ADAT and Alesis are registered trademarks of Alesis Corporation Apple and Macintosh are regis tered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Tascam Digital Interface is a trademark and Tascam and Teac are registered trademarks of Teac Corporation MS DOS is a registered trademark and Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation Yamaha is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation All other trademarks are the prop erty of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged O Copyright No part of the AW4416 software or the manuals may be reproduced or distrib uted in any form or by any means without the prior written authorization of Yamaha Corporation 2000 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved O Yamaha website lt http www yamaha co jp product proaudio homeenglish gt AUS Operation Guide 1 Before you begin Installing an internal hard disk You must install a hard disk in the AW4416 before using it If you attempt to use the AW4416 without installi
341. er S gt Compander lt H a Library numbers 1 40 are recall only preset programs and their name cannot be changed Numbers in which no dynamics program has been stored are displayed as No Data and their title cannot be changed vp For details on the library preset dynamics programs refer to appendix Preset Dynam ics Program Parameters 6 RECALL button Recall the currently selected program from the list A If you attempt to recall a number in which nothing has been stored an error message of ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL will be dis played and the recall will not take place 62 Awutue reference Guide DYN DLY screen STORE button Store the current dynamics settings A e Library numbers 1 40 are recall only data cannot be stored in them You can store only to library numbers 41 128 e When you execute the Store operation the dynamics program that had been stored in that number will be erased LIBRARY No library number This displays the library number 1 128 Q LIBRARY TITLE This displays the name assigned to the library and the type of dynamics processor Yip Library numbers in which nothing has been stored are displayed as No Data ROM This write prohibit symbol is displayed for recall only library numbers 1 40 Total Comr2 MP Total Comel Limi ter2 2 Limi tert Selected program Store recall operations will apply to th
342. er 0 is a recall only preset data cannot be stored in it Data can be stored only in library numbers 1 20 e When you execute the Store operation the patching settings that had been stored in that number will be erased 9 LIBRARY No library number This area displays library numbers 00 20 LIBRARY TITLE This area displays the names assigned to the library settings dj ROM Recall only library number 0 is indicated by a write prohibit symbol in this column 2 Selected patching The patching settings enclosed by the dotted line in the library list will be the subject of the Store or Recall operation In this page you can use the DATAJOG dial to select patching set tings regardless of where the cursor is located Additional functions in the Patch Lib page In the Patch Lib page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following functions to the F1 F4 keys C amp J tej te Lea F1 CHANGE TAB key Switch between the two tab displays F2 TITLE EDIT key Use this to edit the name library title of patch ing settings saved in the library This is the same function as the TITLE EDIT button F3 RECALL key Recall the currently selected patching settings from the list This is the same function as the RECALL button F4 STORE key Store the current patching settings This is the same function as the STORE button To store the patching settings into a library
343. er import button This button imports the mixer settings scene mem ory automix tempo map libraries from the song marked by the E symbol into the current song A Only one song can be selected as the import source for mixer data The current song can not be selected as the import source 6 Parameter area When you move the cursor to one of the but tons 2 the operation DELETE COPY OPTI MIZE MIXER IMPORT that can be executed by that button will appear in this area Kp For details on using each operation refer to Operation Guide Chapter 11 Song Manage ment 4 ANAUE Reference Guide SONG screen Tempo Map page Programming the tempo map Function Program tempo data and time sig nature data into the tempo map SONG G6GG NEW SONG 96066 NEW SONG ___ MAMAH Cia TEMPO MAPI 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 TEMPO MAP METER TEMPO STEP MEASURE HETER STEP MEASURE BEAT TENPO Key operation e SONG key gt F4 Tempo Map key e Repeatedly press the SONG key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt SONG button gt Tempo Map tab Shut Dow Screen functions METER A In this area you can specify the time signature The area enclosed by the dotted frame is the currently selected time signature data In the METER area you can make the following set tings for the STEP MEASURE METER items STEP Move the cursor to this
344. er tracks 1 16 SET UP 2 NEW SONG __sceneag E AO 1 002 00 00 O00 tial z q Key operation ag EE e SETUP key gt F1 Patch IN key e Repeatedly press the SETUP key until the display shown at right appears 1 In the SET UP screen the tabs dis played at the bottom are divided into two groups If the Patch IN tab is not assigned to the F1 key when you press the SETUP key press the SETUP key F1 CHANGE TAB key to switch the tab Mouse operation M button gt SETU button gt Patch IN tab Screen functions MIXER CHANNEL INPUT ASSIGN Return channels 1 2 Select the signal that will be assigned to input channels 1 24 and return channels 1 2 The fol Display Signal type lowing signals can be assigned to each channel EFF1L R Return of internal effect 1 Input channels 1 24 EFF2 L R Return of internal effect 2 Display Signal type AD 1 2 AD 7 8 INPUT jacks 1 2 7 8 AD 1 AD 8 INPUT jacks 1 8 eer card slot 1 INPUT 1 8 of an I O card slot 1 INPUT 1 2 7 8 of an I O card slot 2 INPUT te oftan dO Card DIGITAL STEREO IN jack slot 2 stereo L R channels of the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack EFFECT PATCH SMP 1 SMP 8 Sampling pads 1 8 Select whether effects 1 2 will be used via AUX send return AUX7 AUX8 or inserted into a specified channel INSERT For details on oper ation refer to Operation Guide Chapter 10 Internal effects SL
345. ering sec tion that follows Tracks 9 and 10 of the So Fine demo contain alternative string parts and track 14 contains an alternative male lead vocal part Switch to virtual tracks 2 on these tracks i e 9 2 10 2 and 14 2 as follows 1 Press the RECORDER TRACK key 2 Press the F2 function key to go to the V Track page 3 Move the cursor to virtual track buttons 9 2 10 2 and 14 2 and press ENTER each time so that the alternate tracks are highlighted 4 Now that you have selected the alternative tracks you can go back to the VIEW display or any other display you want to work on Play the mix as is with the alternative string and lead vocal parts Now go ahead and make any adjustments you feel are necessary to make the mix work better with the new parts Note that if you play back the song with AUTOMIX enabled the automix values will automatically be recalled so you will probably initially want to disable AUTOMIX to experiment with the virtual tracks AW UUIG Tutorial 27 Tutorial Mastering Mastering When you think mastering think subtle But just because it s subtle doesn t mean that it can t have a huge impact on the overall sound of a song Mastering is the process of making final adjustments to the overall sound usually involving the application of EQ and or compression In some instances an engineer might even decide to add a touch of overall reverb In the context of a
346. ernal devices turned on e Is the signal from the external device being input e The connection cable from the external device may be broken e Is the GAIN control set to an appropriate level e Is the fader of the input channel or monitor chan nel raised e Is the ON key of the input channel or monitor channel lit e Is the fader of the stereo output channel raised e Is the ON key of the stereo output channel lit e Is the option card installed correctly e Is the input output patching set correctly e Is the word clock set correctly e The jack being used for input may have been assigned as an EFFECT INSERT return e Is the attenuator raised in the EQ screen or VIEW screen E Recorded sound is not output e Has audio data been recorded on the recorder e Muting may be enabled in the TRACK screen TR View page e The input monitor mode may be set to INPUT e Is the virtual track set to the track that was recorded e A region shorter than the specified region fade time cannot be played E Can t hear the signal from the INPUT 1 2 jacks e An external effect unit may be connected to the INSERT jack and turned off Signal from the INPUT 8 jack is too loud e A conventional line level signal may be con nected to the Hi Z jack Sound is too soft e Are the speakers or headphones connected cor rectly e Is the volume of your amp or external equipment raised e Is the GAIN control set correctly
347. es in which better results are obtained by terminat ing only one end of the chain If problems occur such as the AW4416 failing to start up when an external SCSI device is connected try defeating one of the ter minators For details on how to defeat the internal terminator of the AW4416 refer to UTILITY screen gt Prefer 3 page in the Reference Guide g About SCSI errors The SCSI bus is able to transfer data in a stable manner only if all connected SCSI devices are operating correctly If the SCSI bus of the AW4416 is connected to a device whose operation is unstable or which produces noise errors may occur in other devices or the AW4416 may fail to start up correctly If such problems occur check the following points O Check the SCSI ID Make sure that the SCSI ID of each SCSI device including the AW4416 and the internal CD RW drive does not conflict with the SCSI ID of any other device The SCSI ID of the AW4416 is fixed at 6 O Check the terminator Check the location of the terminator Under certain conditions better results may be obtained by terminating only one end of the SCSI chain O Check the SCSI cables Since errors are often caused by low quality SCSI cables or unnecessarily long SCSI cables you should avoid using such cables Please use double shielded cables that are as short as possible It is also important that the shield within the cable is grounded to the connector O External SCSI devices wit
348. essors provide spatial effects such as reverb and delay mod ulation effects such as chorus and flanger and guitar effects such as distortion and amp simulator In addition to using these via the AUX bus send return they can be inserted into a channel or the stereo bus A high impedance jack for direct connection of an electric guitar is also provided AI ULUNE Operation Guide 1 9 Chapter1 Welcome to the world of the AW4416 O Scenes and libraries Faders locations and mix parameters for each channel together with effect set tings can be stored as a scene Up to 96 scenes can be used for each song Scenes that you save can be recalled instantly using the top panel keys or by transmitting program change messages from an external MIDI device Libraries for storing EQ dynamics processor and channel settings are also provided O Full mixing automation The AW4416 features seventeen 60 mm motorized faders In addition to the ability to recall scene memories and libraries the AW4416 pro vides fully automated mixing that records fader pan EQ movements in realtime Recorder section O High capacity hard disk up to 64 GB An internal hard disk 2 5 inch IDE type of up to 64 GB maximum 6 4 GB per song is supported A hard disk attached to the ADP25H cartridge sold separately can be inserted into the hard disk slot of the AW4416 allowing you to exchange hard disks as easily and conveniently as if you were using r
349. et been recorded will be displayed as NO REC Virtual track The highlighted number is the virtual track number currently selected for track 1 16 In the screen shown above virtual track 1 is assigned to all tracks 1 16 default setting Of the currently selected virtual tracks the numbers of tracks that have already been recorded will be enclosed by a square e g GJ AVVULNG Operation Guide 149 Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations 2 Move the cursor to the virtual track number that you wish to assign to track 1 and press the ENTER key The virtual track number you select will be highlighted Now you can record and play back the newly selected virtual track without affecting the previous virtual track TRACK GGG NEW SONG v tRAcK 00 00 10 453 J 120 0 4 4 Y TRACK SETTING ALNA VIRTUAL TRACK 9 1C NO REC 10 2 A 4 2C0U Tr 2 1 Y SCV Tr 3 1 4CV Tr 4 1 9 SCV Tr 5 1 SCV Tr 6 11 Y 7EY Tr 7 11 SCV Tr 6 11 Y 9CV Tr 9 1 1CYV Tr1IG 1 p E NO REC 120 NO REC Y 13C NO REC 14E NO REC I FCV Tr15 1 16CY Tr16 11 GLLLGLGLLLLGLOL LLL NHNHNHP HHH NHN NHN HH ND HODAAANHHHHDAABDADA Lae aE E E E E E EEE Venn HHMAMAAMAAHAAHAHHAMHAAHAHHAHHMH NNNNNVNNN NNN DODD w w o w w HDHD HDHD OD 150 Awun operation Guide Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations Pairing tracks Adjacent odd numbered gt even numbered tracks tracks 1 2 tracks 3 4 tr
350. ethod for re recording a portion of a previously recorded track There are two types of punch in out O Manual punch in out gt P 128 In this method you can punch in or out manually using the transport keys of the AW4416 or a separately sold foot switch Yamaha FC 5 If a foot switch is used the entire procedure of playback gt punch in gt punch out gt stop can be per formed using your foot which is convenient when you are playing an instrument while operating the AW4416 O Auto punch in out gt P 130 In this method punch in out will occur automatically at the points that you spec ify ahead of time the auto punch in out points This method allows the location to be specified with sub frame or millisecond accuracy and lets you punch in out repeatedly You can also practice rehearse the auto punch in out AI UUN Operation Guide 1 27 Chapter7 Punch in out Manual punch in out Here s how to perform manual punch in out Preparations O Make input monitor settings For the track on which you wish to punch in out you will need to monitor the track playback up to the punch in point and then monitor the input signal of the track the recording source after you punch in To do this set the input monitor setting to auto input monitor as explained below 1 Press the TRACK key gt F1 key TRACK agar NEW SONG TR VIEH 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 44 o oa o o oO m o o
351. evel 0 dB 100 Aw uuns operation Guide Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Other convenient functions The mixer section of the AW4416 provides other convenient functions as described below You can use them as needed O Fader groups This function groups fader operations for multiple channels By moving a single fader you can adjust all faders in that group while preserving the current bal ance To set or cancel fader groups use the EQ ATT GRP screen FaderGrp page EQ key gt F3 key Refer to Reference Guide EQ ATT GRP screen FaderGrp page EQ ATIPGRP eci a SONG 7 Scene GG 1234 5678 310112 13141516 ENABLE Faders in the same group must not be moved manually at the same time Doing so will strain the motors and cause malfunctions O Mute groups This function groups ON key operations for multiple channels On and off sta tuses can be mixed By operating a single ON key you can switch the on off status of each channel in the group To set or cancel mute groups use the EQ ATT GRP screen MuteGrp page EQ key gt F4 key Refer to Reference Guide EQ ATT GRP screen MuteGrp page EQ ATIVGRP 29922 NEW sons een ao FE INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data _ 1234 S678 M10012 141516 isis arsa f 1234 5678 BHI 13141516 ENABLE amp PaderGre A AVVUUIG Operation Guide 101 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 g Automix By using this function fader and O
352. everb 885 Early Ref G4 Reverb Plate 5 ch AVVUUIG Operation Guide 167 Chapter1 0 Internal effects 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the recall operation COMF IRMATIONM Hill Recall EFF Lib 882 ARE YOU SURE 7 It is also possible to recall the effect program directly without displaying the popup window that asks you to confirm the recall operation To do so access the UTILITY screen Pref 1 page UTILITY key gt F2 key and turn RECALL CONFIRMATION off 4 To recall the program move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The effect program will be recalled The name of the recalled program will appear in the CURRENT EFFECT NAME area in the upper left of the display 5 Press the F1 key The Eff Edit page will appear in the display Gegee HEH SONG SCENE Aae n o Gee USED as AUF EFFECT EDIT d CURRENT q BYPASS EFFECT MAME 3 Reverb Room ir 1 OFE EFFECT TYPE REVERB ROOM i REN TIME INIL DOLY HI RATIO LO RATIO TE as iSo OUR Ooo fen j DIFF DENSITY E R OLY E R BAL por Goes O eens OO Sa 3 HPF LFF GATE LUL ATTACK as 0 nz O g aokiz Gore GD dns HOLDO DECAY MIX BAL 174ms GI mz W 106g 6 Make sure that the MIX BAL knob located in the lower right of the dis play is set to 100 The Eff Edit page allows you to edit the effect parameters Regardless of the effec
353. evice such as CD RW or MO gt P 246 O Loading a song 1 Press the SONG key gt F1 key The SONG screen Song List page will appear 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the song that you wish to load Then move the cursor to the LOAD button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you whether you wish to save the current song first CONFIRMATION Will Save Current Sons ARE YOU SURE 3 If you wish to save the current song before loading another song move the cursor to the YES button If you wish to load the song without saving the current song move the cursor to the NO button Then press the ENTER key If you selected the YES button the current song will be saved and then the selected song will be loaded immediately If you selected the NO button any changes to the current song will be discarded and the selected song will be loaded Xe If you decide to cancel the Load operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key AVVUUIG Operation Guide 177 Chapter1 1 Song management Editing the song name comment When you create a new song a default song name xxxx NEW SONG xxxxx will be a serial number will be assigned unless you specify otherwise and the comment will be blank You can edit the song name and comment afterward 1 Press the SONG key gt F2 key The SONG screen Setting page will appear SONG SeGG0 HEH SONG
354. ew audio track to the track list INS button Insert a new audio track after the track number currently selected in the track list DEL Delete the currently selected audio track from the track list D COPYRIGHT button Set the copy protect setting of the audio track currently selected in the track list Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to switch between the following two button dis plays PROHIBIT Digital copying of the corresponding track will be prohibited PERMIT Digital copying of the corresponding track will be permitted If the button is displayed as PROHIBIT an ES symbol will be displayed in the COPY column of the track list 2 EXECUTE button Use this button to execute writing mastering to CD R RW media e The AW4416 has a writing test function that can check before mastering is per formed to see whether data transmission errors will occur By default this test will not be performed However you can make set tings so that the test will be performed before writing or execute the test by itself gt P37 e For details on the procedure of the Mastering function refer to Operation Guide Chapter 17 Mastering Additional functions in the Write CD page In the Write CD page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following functions to the F1 F5 keys q co Cond co UNL oAD nen ins et E at 7 4 J Lee J Ces J Cee Ces
355. ew opera tion While the transport is stopped or playing you can operate the SHUTTLE dial to play forward cue or play backward review at various speeds The cue or review speed will change according to the angle of the SHUTTLE dial as shown in the following diagram When the SHUTTLE dial is returned to the center the shuttle function is defeated and the transport will return to the state in which it was before you operated the dial i e stopped or playing Review backward _ a 4 Stop ae Cue forward A L pene speed C a 16 a 16 Nudge function Nudge is a function that repeatedly plays back a short region before and after the current location and lets you move the current location forward or backward in small steps so that you can search for a desired point This lets you accurately specify a point in the song such as when setting the auto punch in out points or setting the range for a track editing operation O Using the Nudge function 1 Use normal transport operations or the shuttle function to locate to the general area of the desired point in the song 2 Press JOG ON The JOG ON key will light and playback will repeat over a fixed region the default setting is 100 milliseconds starting at the current location A The result may sound different depending on the number of tracks that are being played back simultaneously 110 Awuuns operation Guide
356. ey The MIDI Sync page will appear in the display MIDI 99 1 NEW SONG faceb FE THPUT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data MIDI SYNC SETTING MIDI CLOCK MTC MIDI CLK 5 Move the cursor to the MIDI CLOCK button in the SYNC OUT area and press the ENTER key Also make sure that the MASTER button in the MTC SYNC area is on With these settings MIDI Clock messages will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT THRU connector when the AW4416 is running 6 Press the SONG key gt F2 key and turn on the MEASURE button in the DISPLAY area The counter display will be in measure beat tick 1 960th of a quarter note units With this setting you will be able to specify locate positions in measure beat units 7 Press the SONG key and then press the F4 key The left side of the screen will show the beat map in which you can input time signature data for the song and the right side of the screen will show the tempo map in which you can input tempo data With the default settings for a song a time signature of 4 4 and a tempo of BPM 120 0 will be input at measure 1 ONG BGG NEW SONG Ezra Tempo MAP 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 TEMPO MAP STEP MEASURE METER STEP HEASURE BEAT TEMPO In order for a MIDI sequencer to synchronize to the MIDI Clock messages send from the AW4416 tempo settings and time signature settings must be made on the AW 4416 You can input this tempo data and time signature data in the Tempo Map page describ
357. ey gt F1 Patch IN key The SETUP screen Patch IN page will appear SFT UP 99889 tEn sone SCENE BO Initi iHPuT1 00 00 00 000 al Data If the Patch IN tab is not assigned to the F1 key press the SH IFT key F1 key to switch the tab and then press the F1 key 2 Make sure that the EFFECT PATCH parameter EFF1 is set to AUX 7 The EFFECT PATCH parameters select whether effects 1 2 will be used via AUX or inserted into a specific channel By default EFF1 effect 1 is assigned to AUX 7 and EFF2 effect 2 is assigned to AUX 8 as shown above If EFF1 is set to IN SERT move the cursor to the IN SERT field and use the DATA JOG dial to change it to AU X 7 Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key 3 Make sure that the MIXER CHANNEL INPUT ASSIGN parameter RTN1 is set to EFF1 L R The MIXER CHANNEL INPUT ASSIGN area switches the signal that is assigned to the input channel return channel of the mixer By default EFF1 L R L R output of effect 1 is assigned to RTN1 return channel 1 Xe If RTN1 has been changed to another setting move the cursor to the setting area and rotate the DATA JO G dial to change the setting to EFF 1 UR 166 Awun operation Guide Chapter1 0 Internal effects O Recalling an effect program from the library The AW4416 provides 41 effect types such as Reverb Hall Gate Reverb and Ste reo Delay T
358. ey until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt UTIL button gt Pre fer 1 tab Screen functions AUTO EQ DISPLAY 2 AUTO PAN DISPLAY If the or buttons are ON operating the EQ controls or PAN control located at the right of the display will cause the corresponding page to automatically appear in the display Default off If buttons OY are off the current EQ pan settings will appear in the upper right of the display when you operate the EQ PAN controls 3 STORE CONFIRMATION 4 RECALL CONFIRMATION If the or buttons are ON a popup window will ask you to confirm the operation when stor ing or recalling a scene or library Default on 6 DIRECT OUT EXTRACT POSITION Use the following three buttons to select the position from which the signal will be taken for direct output from input channels 1 24 e PRE EQ button Immediately before the EQ e PRE FADER button Pre fader position e POST FADER button Post fader position default UTILITY GGGGG NEW SONG INPOTI 00 00 00 000 q EQ DISPLAY Initial Data PREFERENCES1 DIRECT OUT EXTRACT POSITION Caen Germ I o or car AUTO PAN DISPLAY BOST FADER eae sae ST IN o a CONFIRMATION SYNC CAUTION _ CONFIRMATION OPTION L SYNC CAUTION DIGITAL ST IN SYNC CAUTION T OPTION IN SYNC CAUTION If the or buttons are ON an error message will
359. f Can t Copy This Parameter will appear and the copy will not occur w To execute the copy move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Only the attenuation setting will be copied If you wish to copy EQ settings you must store the settings in the library and recall them into the copy destination channel For the proce dure refer to page 47 viii ALIA ULNE Reference Guide Song List page Saving loading a song Function Load a song from hard disk or save the current song to hard disk Key operation e SONG key gt F1 Song List key e Repeatedly press the SONG key until the display shown at right appears Mouse operation M button gt SONG button gt Song List tab Screen functions Song list This lists the songs that are saved on the internal hard disk The highlighted line is the current song and the line enclosed by a dotted line is the song selected for loading Use the DATA JOG dial to select the song for loading This list shows the following data for each song e SONG NAME First 16 characters of the song name e SAVED AT Date and time at which the song was last saved SIZE ecesna Size of the song o BIT FS 00 0 0 Quantization bit number sampling frequency of the song PRT oe Song protect on off gt P 2 SONG JLETHER SONG LIST 94 1KH2 00 00 00 100 s 120 0 4 4 HTG ACE OF SPA
360. f the display to select the band that you wish to control When you press a key the settings of that band will appear for a time in the upper right of the display Low ee The keys controls at the right of the display can be used as dedicated controls for the channel that is currently selected by the SEL key As with EQ you can also use the PAN control located at the right of the display to adjust the panning of the cur rently selected channel 3 Use the EQ Q F G controls to adjust the band that you selected in step 2 The function of each control is described below o Q crane Adjust the steepness of each band The range is 10 0 0 10 and higher settings will produce a steeper EQ curve The Q control of the HIGH band can also be used as a switch to change the EQ type between shelving and LPF The Q con trol of the LOW band can also be used as a switch to change the EQ type between shelving and HPF AW ULUS Operation Guide 91 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 TF ww Set the center frequency of each band For each band the range is 21 Hz 20 1 kHz SIG siinse Set the amount of boost cut for each band For each band the range is 18 dB When you operate the EQ Q F G controls the parameter values of that band will briefly appear in the upper right of the display Asan altern
361. f while recording the tracks In the stu dio electric guitar is often recorded close miked or directly injected into the con sole so the sound tends to be extremely dry and brittle Unless you re specifically looking for a very dry sound you can safely add a fair amount of reverb Track 5 rhythm guitar reverb at 12 7 track 6 lead guitar reverb at 11 8 AW UUs Tutorial 21 Tutorial Mixdown O Track 7 Organ Instruments like organ always present a challenge when trying to decide on the right amount of reverb to add The sustained nature of the sound means you can add a LOT of reverb before you really notice it but it s there and probably playing havoc with the overall mix You ll probably need to add a touch of reverb to integrate the instrument into the overall space of the recording but only a touch Organ reverb at 20 Track 8 Piano The amount of reverb you add to piano track will depend both on the type of sound you are trying to create and on how the piano is played Reverb is much more noticeable when the instrument is played in a sparse staccato style than when played with lots of sustain and or big chords Particularly in the latter case the caution given for organ applies to piano as well don t overdo it Piano reverb at 15 O Tracks 9 amp 10 Strings Since the strings themselves are sort of used as a wash or pad type of sound some reverb is essential to fill out the image
362. ffecting the length of the audio data The PITCH parameter specifies the change in semitones maximum 12 semitones and the FINE parameter specifies the change in one cent steps maximum 50 cents AVVUUIG Operation Guide 161 Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations PART menu These commands edit data in units of parts When using these commands you will need to specify not only the track for editing but also the editing start loca tion START and end location END O ERASE Erase the audio data of the selected part Audio data following that part will not be affected O DELETE Delete the audio data of the selected part Audio data following that part will move forward by the length of the deleted data O COPY Copy the audio data of the selected part to the specified location of the specified track You can also specify the number of times the data will be copied and the interval between copies If audio data exists at the destination you can specify whether the copied data will be inserted or overwritten O MOVE Move the audio data of the selected part to the specified location of the specified track At this time the audio data of the move source will be erased If audio data exists at the destination you can specify whether the moved data will be inserted or overwritten O INSERT Insert silence into the selected part Audio data following that part will move backward by the length of the inserted data
363. field try panning the left and right channels between about a third and half way to the maximum values In the case of the So Fine demo however the drums were recorded live in the studio with proper stereo imaging i e this is not a sampler or drum module and sound fine panned full left and right Go ahead and set the left and right drum track pan values to L16 and R16 respectively To pan the drum tracks 1 Use the SEL keys to select the track you re going to pan since the chan nels are paired the other SEL key will flash when one is selected 2 Use the PAN control near the upper right corner of the display while watch ing the graphic pan controls in the display Add the Claves Electronic Drums Track For now just turn channel 3 ON and set the fader at about 4 5 dB Add the Bass Track Turn on channel 4 and listen Bass is usually panned to center so you won t need to adjust the pan control but you might find that the bass is a little hot loud in relation to the drum tracks with their faders at nominal so move fader 4 down to reduce the bass track level by about 5 dB 5 0 on the fader display O Add the Guitar Tracks Turn ON channel 5 and 6 The guitar tracks are REALLY hot in relation to the drums and bass so use faders 5 and 6 to reduce them to reasonable levels track 5 rhythm guitar to about 10 5 dB and track 6 lead guitar also to about 10 5 dB Also pan the track 5 guitar
364. format the media will not be formatted auto matically If necessary you must format the media manually e If you are backing up on removable media such as CD RW or MO insert the CD RW media or MO media into the drive before you begin this procedure 1 Press the FILE key gt F1 key The FILE screen Backup page will appear in the display The list in the upper part of the display shows the songs that are currently saved on the internal hard disk The current song is highlighted in the list FILE M S0NG 1 O EAN f BACK UP 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 FILE BACKUP SAVED AT SIZE 66 67 83 19 06 1G3MB 16 48 8o B B3 007 07 03 19 63 85 9NB 16 44 1 SOURCE CURRENT E 246 Awun operation Guide Chapterl 6 Backing up and restoring songs 2 Move the cursor to the DESTINATION area in the lower right of the dis play and use the DATA JOG dial to select the ID number of the backup destination SCSI device e g internal CD RW drive or external hard disk or MO drive gposeeeseceeecsecssosessen DRIVE SCSI 3 Qovsccssccsseccssscssss CDRH Itis also possible to backup on CD R media using an internal or external CD RW drive However you should be aware that CD R media on which a backup has been created cannot be erased or added to 3 Move the cursor to the list in the upper part of the display and use the DATA JOG dial to select the sound that you wish to backup 4 Move the cursor to th
365. gh threshold OdB the compander is an expander compressor limiter Release determines how soon the compander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold AXVVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 27 Appendix Gate and Ducking dB A 20 10 of ao 20 30 Output Level 4o so 6o 70 Threshold 10dB Range 30dB Range 70dB TT Fra 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Output Level ooa E 8 Threshold 20dB Input Level Range 30dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 rrr rre e 10 20 Input Level A gate or noise gate is an audio switch used to mute signals below a set threshold level It can be used to suppress background noise and hiss from valve tube amps effects pedals and microphones Ducking is used to automatically reduce the levels of one signal when the level of a source signal exceeds a specified threshold It is used for voice over applications where for example level of background music is auto matically reduced allowing an announcer to be heard clearly Gate GAT and Ducking DUK parameters Parameter Value Threshold dB 54 to 0 55 points Range dB 70 to 0 71 points Attack ms 0 to 120 121 points Hold ms 0 02 msto1 96s 0 02 msto2 13 sec 0 03 msto2 94 sec 2 216 points Decay ms 5ms to 42 3s 1 6 ms to 46 0 sec 2 8 ms
366. gt A keys to move the cursor to the desired fader knob numerical box ak i Ca lt Move the cursor gt 2 Rotate the DATA JOG dial to edit the value nn I co cm lt Edit the value gt O Using the mouse 1 Move the pointer to the desired fader knob numerical box and click the left or right mouse button The cursor will change to a dtshape a ja lt Click the fader knob numerical box gt Kpl The amount by which the value changes will differ depending on whether you clicked the left or right mouse button If you wish to change the value in large steps click the right button If you wish to change the value in fine steps click the left mouse button 2 Continue to hold down the mouse button and drag the mouse up or down The value will increase or decrease depending on the direction in which you drag the mouse Jas lt Drag the fader knob numerical box up or down gt 58 AwvuLns operation Guide Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 Using the additional function buttons In screens where the kJsymbol is displayed in the lower left you can access additional buttons or tabs in the bottom of the display to use various additional functions O Using the controls of the top panel 1 Ina screen where the fkysymbol is displayed in the lower left press the SHIFT key While you continue holding the SHIFT key buttons for the additional functions will appear in the tab a
367. h 25 pin connectors Most SCSI cables with 25 pin connectors at both ends do not meet SCSI specifi cations For this reason if the system includes a SCSI device that uses a 25 pin connector the problems may be due to this type of cable 12 AwuUtns operation Guide Before you begin Installing I O cards About I O cards I O cards compatible with the Yamaha mini YGDAI format can be installed in the OPTION I O slots 1 2 located on the rear panel of the AW4416 in order to add input output ports For example by installing an ADAT format compatible I O card into an OPTION IO slot you can transmit receive eight channels of digital audio to from an ADAT format digital recorder At present the following types of I O cards can be used O MY8 AT This card transmits and receives eight channels of Alesis ADAT format digital sig nals O MY8 TD This card transmits and receives eight channels of TASCAM format digital signals O MY8 AE This card transmits and receives eight channels of AES EBU format digital signals O MY8 AD This is an A D card with eight channels of analog input jacks balanced TRS phone jacks O MY4 AD This is an A D card with four channels of analog input jacks balanced XLR jacks O MY4 DA This is a D A card with four channels of analog output jacks balanced XLR jacks For up to date information on available MY cards contact your local Yamaha dis tributor or check the following website
368. h crossed feedback loop Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time FB DLY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel feedback delay time FB G L 99 to 99 Left channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel feedback delay time FB G R 99 to 99 Right channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback L R FBG 99 to 99 Left to right channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback R gt L FBG 99 to 99 Right to left channel feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Appendix 10 Avwvutne Reference Guide Appendix CHORUS Chorus effect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed PM DEP 0 100 Pitch modulation depth AM DEP 0 100 Amp modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modul
369. hannels 1 2 gt stereo bus AVVUUIG Operation Guide 103 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 10 However with this monitoring method the signal will pass through the monitor channel and the output channel meaning that you will not necessarily be moni toring in a flat state Here s how you can output the stereo track directly from the MONITOR OUT jacks In the level meters counter section turn the TRACK CUE key on TRACK REC TRACK SELECT E _ a mae The TRACK CUE key is used to output the signal of the desired track directly to the MONITOR OUT jacks If you press the TRACK CUE key when the stereo track is not muted the TRACK CUE key will blink and the REC TRACK SELECT ST key will blink red This indicates that only the stereo track can be selected as the signal for monitoring Press the REC TRACK SELECT ST key The TRACK CUE key and REC TRACK SELECT ST key will change from blink ing to lit This indicates that the stereo track is selected as the signal for monitor ing A When you use the TRACK CU E key the signal will be output directly to the MONITOR OUT jacks and therefore the fader cannot be used to adjust the level To avoid sudden loud sounds lower the MONITOR OUT control beforehand Press the Locate section RTZ key and then press the Transport section PLAY gt key The signal of the stereo track will be sent directly to the
370. hannels as desired _ Recorder Mixer section input patch Recorder section Buses 1 8 Tracks 1 8 Tracks 9 16 Here s how to assign the desired signals to recorder inputs 1 16 1 Press the SETUP key gt F1 Patch IN key to access the SETUP screen Patch IN page The RECORDER TRACK INPUT ASSIGN column will indicate the patched status of recorder inputs 1 16 If the Patch IN tab is not assigned to the F1 key press the SHIFT key F1 key to switch the tabs and then press the F1 key SFT JP 99899 nEn Sone Scene DA F 1HPuT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data RECORDER TRACK INPUT ASSIGN column 2 Move the cursor to the recorder input whose patching you wish to change and use the DATA JOG dial to select the signal that you wish to assign The following types of signal can be assigned to each input O Recorder inputs 1 16 BUS 1 BUS 8 Buses 1 8 DIR 1 DIR16 Input channel direct out 1 16 AVVUUIG Operation Guide 135 Chapter8 Patching Patching to the outputs When the AW4416 is in the default state the following signals are assigned to the OMNI OUT jacks STEREO OUT jacks and digital I O card outputs If necessary you can change the output signals that are assigned to these output jacks Output patch Mixer section AUX buses 1 4 OMNI OUT jacks 1 4 Stereo output channel DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack OPTION I O Buses 1 8 28 slot yo OPTION 1 0 can
371. hapter 7 Punch in out 020eee e005 127 About punch in out 4 00 ass vs eo oa ele Aw ae Nas oe a 127 Manual punch in out gt P 128 2 2 2 ee ee eee 127 Auto ptineh hvout P V30 ess ne eee ees eee o 2 127 Manual punch in 0ut s 6 6 s cc6 tae inie aca eee oe eee ee ececes 128 PIE DAT AUONS aa aust eas sl4 so Gat a ee We one eS sleet 128 Make input monitor settings 2 0 0 eee ee ee eee 128 Connect a foot switch on an ha Raed eam Arena a aoa ee Ane 128 Manual punch in out recording lt c2 wae o ese e ee wv ees 129 AULAS Operation Guide X Table of contents Auto PUNnch in OUl ss vt 446 Powis eee Oe ee eae 130 PRCDARAONS na e ava skins areca meats Heme canis ie ys ah amir ens ae 130 Make input monitor settings oa00 24604 ooo la ee Gees de 130 Set the auto punch in out points 22 i 04 seas oeee acess eee 130 Set the pre roll post rall times oes gk i ete ee bea vee eee 130 Rehearsing and recording with auto punch in out 131 Rehearsing with auto punch in out 00 00 eee eee 131 Recording with auto punch in out 0 0 0 0 0000 e eee 132 Chapter 8 Patching cece eeeee cee ceed DD Patching to the input channels 0 02 ee eeeee 133 Patching to the recorder inputs 2 00 e ee eeeee 135 Patching to the outputs sasscoses Seek Ce eke cease seu Petes 136 Patch library soar nes e 45 es Saw near eae EE yee eee 138 Storing t
372. hat appear in the display Use it like a dictionary when you wish to learn more about the functions in the screen or to find the page from which to execute a desired operation How to read the reference guide Here s how to read the reference guide Screen name 2 Page name title 3 Function A brief summary of the functions of this page Key operation The procedure for using the top panel keys to access this page 6 Mouse operation The procedure for using the mouse to access this page Screen functions Explanations of the func tion of each item or operation in this page T E Additional func tions in the page EQ Att EQ and attenuation settings Function Make four band EQ and attenuation set EQ ATT GRP screen page G Key operation e EQ key gt F1 key EQ Att key e Repeatedly press the EQ key until the screen shown at the right appears G Mouse operation M button gt EQ button gt EQ Att tab tings for the selected channel E QAF T GRP TENS h iar Ty ATS 00 00 00 000 initiat Data ewe lO a all a all CO a a0 1 sa6ll ssal 2 2 sa6 1 O 008 Ea EDIT EQ CURVE Ea ON ATT ma dB m ro Nm Nma C Miom llC Harane lI CS gt ariel CO dnns 6 Screen functions EQ ON button This switches EQ on off When this page is dis played you can use the ENTER ke
373. he MO disk this may require several minutes or several ten minutes After selecting one or the other button press the ENTER key and a popup win dow will appear asking you to confirm the Format operation CONFIRMATION Will Format SCSI 4 AN ARE YOU SURE 5 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Formatting will begin AVVUUIG Operation Guide 253 Chapter1 6 Backing up and restoring songs Erasing CD RW media Here s how to erase CD RW media inserted in the CD RW drive 1 Press the FILE key gt F3 key The FILE screen Disk Util page will appear in the display FILE pesoen Pe ec Disk UTIL 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 DISK UTILITY CO RW MEDIA ERASE ECT MPLY AUDIO READ SPEED c4 x6 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the SCSI ID number of the CD RW drive and press the ENTER key 3 Use the two buttons PERFECTLY SIMPLY buttons in the CD RW MEDIA ERASE area to select the method by which the CD RW media will be erased The CD RW media can be erased in one of the following two ways SIMPLE 576 fava erti Only the table of contents TOC of the data written on the CD RW will be erased This method has the advantage of being fast PERFECT nioni All data written on the CD RW media will be erased This will take significantly longer than SIMPLE but can be selected when you want to be sure that the data is completely erased Move the cursor to one of thes
374. he REC or AUTO REC button turned ON e Is the SEL key lit for the channel you are operat ing e Is OVERWRITE turned ON for the control e g fader or EQ you are operating E Can t use the internal effects e Effect BYPASS may be turned ON e Are the EFF RTN 1 2 faders raised e In the SETUP screen Patch IN page EFFECT PATCH may be set to INSERT e It is not possible to insert one effect into multiple channels e 019 HQ Pitch can be used only with EFFECT 2 Can t use SOLO e The channel may be set to Solo Safe e Is the SETUP screen Solo Setup page set appro priately For details on the settings refer to page 14 SETUP screen Can t edit a recorded track e Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded Fader groups and mute groups don t work e In the EQ screen Fader Group page and Mute Group page check that grouping is set to ENABLE Editing results are not heard in the sound e Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded e Are you using the appropriate editing command For details on editing commands refer to page 99 EDIT screen AXVWVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 37 Appendix Playback pitch is wrong e VARI may be selected e Is the AW4416 operating on the same sampling frequency as the synchronized external device e Is the master device operating in a stable way e You may have executed the EDIT screen PITCH command e Is an effe
375. he Undo data In order to recover this space we rec ommend that you execute the Song Optimize command when you are finished recording and editing 1 Press the SONG key gt F3 key The SONG screen Song Edit page will appear in the display The upper part of the display will show a list of the songs currently saved on the hard disk SONG JCE oF srece REST EEIN SONG EDIT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 SONG EDIT 00707729 14 37 336MB 16 44 66 67 26 19 11 163MB 16 44 BB B 25 26 33 16 44 16 44 2 Move the cursor to the list in the upper part of the display use the DATA JOG dial to select the song that you wish to optimize and press the ENTER key An E symbol will appear in the left edge of the list and the corresponding song will be selected optimization A It is not possible to execute O ptimize with more than one song selected If O pti mize is executed when the E symbol is displayed for more than one song an error message will be displayed 3 Move the cursor to the OPTIMIZE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the Optimize command 4 To execute the Optimize command move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The current song will be saved automatically and then the Optimize command will be executed 182 Aaw uuns operation Guide Chapter1 1 Song management If you decide to cancel the O ptimize command without executing move
376. he backup destination drive 28 AwuLnG Reference Guide FILE screen T EXECUTE button Execute the song backup Yip e When backing up to removable media such as an MO drive you can select from two types of backup TYPE 1 in which the backup can extend across multiple volumes of media and TYPE 2 in which data can be backed up in units of individual songs on one volume of media The selection of either TYPE 1 or TYPE 2 is made in the UTILITY screen Prefer 3 page gt P37 e For details on the song backup procedure refer to Operation Guide Chapter 16 Back ing up and restoring songs E Additional functions in the Backup page In the Backup page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following functions to the F1 F2 keys SC co LOAD FC co UNLOAD e F1 CD LOAD key Close the open tray of the CD RW drive e F2 CD UNLOAD key Eject the tray of the CD RW drive AVVULNG Reference Guide 29 FILE screen Restore page Restore backed up songs Function Restore songs from the backup destination SCSI device to the yo AW4416 s internal hard disk Key operation e FILE key gt F2 Restore key e Repeatedly press the FILE key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt FILE button gt Restore tab Screen functions Song list This list shows the songs saved on the backup destination
377. he effect type library contains factory set effect programs that use these effect types Here s how to recall an effect program of the effect type you wish to use 1 Press the AUX 7 key gt F2 key The AUX7 EFF1 screen Library page will appear A list of effect programs will be displayed AUB PEF FA 28828 NEM SONG _ferene F INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data EFFECT LIBRARY CURRENT EFFECT MAME Reverb Hall til EFFECT TYPE REVERB HALL Hoe 865 Early Ref 664 Reverb Plate G83 Reverb Stage 5 ch A A e In general the effect library is common to both effects 1 and 2 However effect program no 19 HQ Pitch can be used only by effect 2 Effect library 001 041 contain read only effect programs using the corre sponding effect type Itisnot possible to change the effect type of the currently used effect program For this reason you must load a program that uses the desired effect type from the library even if you wish to create an effect program from scratch 2 Move the cursor to the list and rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the program that you wish to recall When you select a program the effect type used by that program will be dis played at the right of the list For this example let s select the room reverb pro gram Reverb Room gage HEH SONG SCENE Aave eee EFFECT LIBRARY CURRENT EFFECT MAME Reverb Hall ir EFFECT TYPE REVERE HALL Hoe BBG Gate R
378. he operating mode of the Solo function RECORDING SOLO If this button is on the solo signal will be output via the dedicated SOLO bus to the MONITOR OUT jacks PHONES jack The output of the stereo bus and buses 1 8 will not be affected You can also monitor channels that are not assigned to the stereo bus or to buses 1 8 or channels whose ON key is off MIXDOWN SOLO If this button is on the solo signal will be output via the stereo bus to the MONITOR OUT jacks PHONES jack When the Solo function is turned on only the channel s being soloed will be sent to the stereo bus and the remaining chan nels will be muted It is not possible to monitor channels that are not assigned to the stereo bus nor channels whose ON key is turned off 26 Aw une Reference Guide SET UP aoga NEW Son fae PE INPUT 1 Initial Data il nitia Data PRE FADER AFTER PAN LISTEN When RECORDING SOLO is selected for 1 you can select one of the following two loca tions from which the signal will be sent from each channel to the SOLO bus PRE FADER The pre fader signal will be sent to the SOLO bus Since the pan setting of the channel will have no effect the signal being monitored from the MONITOR OUT jacks PHONES jack will be monaural AFTER FADER The signal after passing through fader and pan will be sent to the SOLO bus The pan and fader settings of each channel will affect the signal that is mo
379. he pairing status for adjacent odd numbered gt even numbered tracks Pairing can also be set or defeated in this screen Track name This is the name assigned to each virtual track Bar graph Bar graphs indicate the presence or absence of audio data for each track 156 Awun operation Guide Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations TRACK PART REGION menus These respectively access editing commands for editing entire tracks parts or regions Move the cursor to the desired menu and press the ENTER key to view the list of editing commands 6 Parameter setting area In this area you can make the necessary parameter settings when executing the editing command 2 According to the smallest unit track part region that you wish to edit move the cursor to the TRACK PART or REGION menu and press the ENTER key The selected menu of editing commands will appear The following screen shows the commands that appear when the TRACK menu is selected EDIT GGG NEW SONG TR EDIT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 NAME ioPiano L 2CPiano R ep 2CGuitar 1 4 CSyvnth 1 e 2CBass 6CSynth 3 ep ZLE Gt 1 8CE Gt 2 p 11E NO REC 12 N0 REC 9 13C NO REC 14C NO REC Y 5CD0rumSs L 16COrums R J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 ai Ji J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 Ji J1 3 Move the cursor to the desired editing command and press the ENTER key Buttons to set the parameters for the selected editing command will appear The
380. he second as shown here so that the second digital MTR will follow the first AVVUUIG Operation Guide 69 Chapter4 Connections and setup O Using a digital MTR as the word clock master 1 This method uses a digital MTR as the word clock master and causes the AW4416 to synchronize to the word clock included in the input signal from the digital I O card For this method turn on one of the 1 2 7 8 buttons for the slot to which that digital MTR is connected Sync Out YAMAHA Ne ee Es See ill Bn ia alabahe eeng 00 0000 PTION mn SLOT 1 Word clock Digital MTR word clock master AW4416 al Hall word clock slave lt sisipin OPTION SLOT 2 00 0000 Digital MTR word clock slave WORD CLOCK SOURCE SLOT 1 1 2 7 8 e Set the digital MTR so that it will operate according to its own internal clock e If you are using two digital MTR units connect the Sync Out jack of the first to the Sync In jack of the second as shown here so that the second digital MTR will follow the first O Using a digital MTR as the word clock master 2 This method uses a digital MTR as the word clock master and causes the AW4416 to synchronize to the word clock supplied from the word clock output jack of the
381. he stereo output channel that processes the signals sent from each chan nel to the stereo bus It provides the same four band EQ and dynamics processor as do the input channels The output signal of the stereo output channel is sent via the output patch section to the various output jacks and is simultaneously output from the MONITOR OUT jacks and the PHONES jack When an internal or external CD RW drive is used to play back an audio CD the CD audio signal is patched to a point before the fader of the stereo output chan nel AVVUUIG Operation Guide 27 Chapter1 Welcome to the world of the AW4416 a Hi STEREO afsano se NAMICS I EQ OUTPUT PATCH meren weTeR EQ Gain Reduction CD PLAY mode Buses 1 8 The signals sent from each channel to buses 1 8 pass through the master level and are sent to the output patch section The master level is adjusted in the HOME screen Bus page HOME key gt F3 key For the signal flow diagram refer to AUX buses 1 8 below AUX buses 1 8 The signals sent to AUX buses 1 8 from each channel pass through the master level and are sent to the output patch section The master level is adjusted in the HOME screen Bus page HOME key gt F3 key Yip When the AW4416 is in its default state the output of AU X buses 7 8 is sent to the output patch section and simultaneously assigned to the inputs of internal effects 1 2 as well G2
382. her writing errors will occur Default off WRITE button This turns data writing on off If the TEST button on and the WRITE button off only the writ ing test will be executed Default on CD BACKUP MODE Use the following three buttons to select the writing mode when backing up songs to CD R RW media TEST WRITE buttons These are the same functions as the MASTER ING MODE TEST WRITE buttons COMPARE button When this button is on the backup source song data on the internal hard disk will be compared with the backup destination data on the CD R RW media after the data has been written If for some reason the backup was not written cor rectly an error message will be displayed when Compare is executed 38 AwuunG Reference Guide MIDI Setup page Make basic MIDI settings Function Set the MIDI transmit receive channels turn transmission reception of various messages on off and specify the port used for transmission and reception Key operation e MIDI key gt F1 MIDI Setup key e Repeatedly press the MIDI key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button MIDI button gt MIDI Setup tab Screen functions Q PROGRAM CHANGE TX program change transmission Specify whether program changes will be trans mitted to external MIDI devices If this button is on the program change assigned to a scene number will be transmitted when that scene i
383. hese tracks will only play back When you play back the stereo track the output of the stereo track is automati cally assigned to monitor channels 1 2 At this time all of the normal audio tracks will be muted 148 Aw uuns operation Guide Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations Switching virtual tracks Here s how to switch the virtual track that a specific track will use 1 Press the TRACK key gt F2 key The TRACK screen V Track page will appear in the display _ TRACK GGGGG NEW SONG V TRACK 00 00 10 453 J 120 0 4 amp 4 YV TRACK_SETTING Oa E UR On ee Tr Y otultr SCV Tr 9 acultr ami d d d d d LA La LA L LA LA L L A L L A A A A m m lt 4 3 QOYDUN E UN ppnnnnnnnnnnnnnn FEFE re HNHNHNDNNHNHNHNHNHNHNNHN DD OOOOH OHOHOHHHHOHO OIA PRR RRR RRR RRR REE Ue HAMAMAMAAAHAAHAAHAAHAHAAHAAHAH HIP NNNNVNN VN VN I w W w w Ww w w w w w HHH OD Ow Y 15CV Tr15 1 160V Tr16 1 This page shows the following information Track number These are the track numbers 1 16 Track name These are the names assigned to the virtual track currently selected for each track By default virtual tracks that have already been recorded will be named V Tr x y x will be a track number 1 16 and y will be a virtual track number 1 8 This name can be changed later as desired gt P 153 Virtual tracks that have not y
384. his step when no region exists i e when nothing has been recorded on any track an message of ERROR SELECTED SONG HASNO REGION will appear and it will not be possible to make settings Use the CURSOR keys to move the cursor to select the region The currently selected region will be highlighted and its size will be displayed at the bottom of the screen The sample size that can be assigned to the sampling pads are limited to a total of approximately 8 MB approximately 90 seconds at 16 bit 44 1 kHz If you wish to assign only a portion of a long region to a pad you should first use the EDIT screen TR Edit page to divide the region gt P 156 Press the ENTER key The selected region will be highlighted and the cursor will return to the RGN SEL button 188 Aw uuns operation Guide Chapterl 2 Sampling pads 8 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the assignment to the pad CONFIRMATION Will PAD Assn From Ran ARE YOU SURE 9 To execute the assignment move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key When the assignment is completed the display will indicate COMPLETE Xe When you assign a region to a pad a name of Smpltr will automatically be assigned to that pad If you wish to change this name refer to page 193 Yip For the procedure of importing CD DA data or a WAV file to a
385. hoose the one that sounds the best to your own ears Don t worry about switchable directivity unless you really think you ll need an omni directional pattern for some application the plain vanilla cardioid pattern is probably all you ll ever need for most recording And since the AW4416 provides switchable phantom power on inputs 1 and 2 you can choose studio quality phantom powered microphones with confidence The same microphone you choose for recording vocals will most probably also be ideal for recording acoustic guitar piano and a range of wind instruments as well Not a good choice for close miking drums and percussion though One or two large diaphragm condenser mics are however perfect for use as drum over heads O Close miking guitar amps drums and other loud stuff Here s where you need one or perhaps a few good quality dynamic micro phones There are a number of standard dynamic microphones that are ideal for this type of application and which can be acquired for surprisingly little out lay If you don t already have a couple of established makers and models in mind ask around 6 AWE Tutorial Tutorial Laying Down the Basic Tracks O Overdubs The actual procedure for recording overdubs is really no different from recording the basic tracks except that you ll be monitoring previously recorded material while doing it Remember to use a good pair of closed headphones to monitor the backing tra
386. ial recording process The basic steps introduced here may not apply if you re recording something very avant garde but if you re laying down a song or instrumental piece with a fairly standard arrangement here are a few issues to keep in mind O Rhythm First Since the rhythm parts define the tempo and groove of the music it makes sense that they should be recorded first so that the musicians who will be over dubbing the subsequent parts lead guitar lead vocal chorus etc will have something to lock onto Of course this isn t necessary if the piece to be recorded consists of just one person strumming a guitar and singing or for that matter if you ll be recording an entire ensemble in one take But if you ll be recording your masterpiece track by track or at least section by section whether it s because like most of us you re recording with limited studio space and resources or sim ply because you re a perfectionist who demands total creative control at all times start with the rhythm The first rhythm part to be recorded could simply be drums and or percussion alone drums and bass or drums plus bass and a rhythm keyboard or guitar part O Separation Remember that the more instruments you record via microphones at the same time the more you need to think about separation or isolation depending on whom you talk to Once again there are no hard and fast rules if you ll be recording an entir
387. ices Dynamics Processors and Preset Dynamics Program Parameters AVVULNG Reference Guide 61 DYN DLY screen Library page Storing and recalling dynamics processor settings Function Store dynamics processor settings in the library or recall stored programs Key operation e DYN key gt F2 Library key e Repeatedly press the DYN key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt DYN button gt Library tab Screen functions SEL CH This displays the currently selected recall desti nation channel 2 Curve type This indicates the approximate dynamics curve of the currently selected channel and shows the name of the dynamics processor type 3 GR gain reduction This displays the amount of gain reduction pro duced by the dynamics processor in dB units 4 Level meter This shows the output level of the dynamics processor in dB units 6 TITLE EDIT button Use this when you wish to edit the name library title of the dynamics program saved in the library Move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button and press the ENTER key to access the TITLE EDIT popup window where you can input the name You can input a library name of up to 16 characters GGG5 NEW 5 DYN DLY NG SCENE OB E INPUT 1 0o00 psg Delta Limi ter2 Limi teri T BGM Duckins DU Easy Gate LaS er Click Erase Comrand
388. ide 1 75 Chapter1 1 Song management Saving loading a song Here s how to save the current song on the internal hard disk and how to load a song from the internal hard disk into the current song O Saving the current song 1 Press the SONG key gt F1 key The SONG screen Song List page will appear in the display A list of information on the songs currently saved on the internal hard disk will appear in the upper part of the display The current song will be highlighted in the list NEW SONG 60 07 22 12 53 BOOke 16 44 10 SELECTED SONG NAME j oa000 NEW SONG Song List Song name 2 Date and time when the song was saved 3 Song size 4 Song quantization sampling frequency Song protect 2 To save the current song move the cursor to the SAVE button in the lower right of the screen and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm that you wish to save the current song CONFIRMATION Will Save Current Sons ARE YOU SURE 176 Awun operation Guide Chapter1 1 Song management 3 To execute the Save operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Xe e Ifyou decide to cancel without saving move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the EN TER key e Ifthe free space on the internal hard disk is running low execute the Song O ptimize operation P 182 You can also back up desired songs on an exter nal d
389. igh F 187Hz 397Hz 6 72kHz 5 65kHz G 5 5dB 1 5dB 5 0dB 3 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 4 5 1 8 Fine EQ Cass F 74Hz 1 00kHz 4 00kHz 12 6kHz G 1 5dB 0 0dB 1 0dB 3 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 4 7 0 63 Narrator F 105Hz 707Hz 2 52kHz 10 0kHz G 4 0dB 1 0dB 2 0dB 0 0dB Appendix Description This is a variation on program 001 The low and mid range is removed This is a variation on program 003 It creates rather thick sound This is a variation on program 005 Emphasizes the mid and high range This is a variation on program 013 Use for the low range of the piano sound when it is recorded in stereo Use with program 038 Use for the high range of the piano sound when it is recorded in stereo Use with program 037 Use for recording to or from cassette tape to make the sound clearer Use for recording a voice reading a text AUS Reference Guide Appendix 5 Appendix Preset Effects Programs The following table lists the preset effects programs See Effects Parameters on page Appendix 8 for detailed parameter information Effects programs that use the HQ PITCH effect can be used only with Effect 2 Reverb type Effects Title 01 Reverb Hall Type REVERB HALL Description Reverb simulating a large space such as a concert hall 02 Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Reverb simulating the acoustics of a smaller space
390. igned key to assign the following additional functions to the F1 F2 keys Tie If you select a stereo WAV file in step 4 a pair of adjacent odd numbered gt even num bered pads in the same bank will be selected e g A 1 A 2 B 1 B 2 and automatically F1 F2 assigned as a pair to the L R channels of the WAV file 6 To execute the sample import move the e F1 CD LOAD key cursor to the EXECUTE button and press Close the tray of the CD RW drive the ENTER key e F2 CD UNLOAD key A popup window will ask you for confirmation Eject the tray of the CD RW drive i i CONFIRMATION Assigning a WAV file to a sam Will Import to pling pad Pad A 1 ARE YOU SURE Procedure 1 Insert the media containing the WAV file into an external SCSI device e g MO STV a a a 7 Move the cursor to the OK button and 2 Access the SAMP PAD screen Wavlmport press the ENTER key page The sample import will be executed 3 Move the cursor to the DRIVE area use A the DATA JOG dial to select the SCSI ID If tth l igned to the t of the drive and press the ENTER key ee A pads to play back in stereo assign the pad The AW4416 will recognize the WAV files on outputs to paired channels SETUP screen the inserted media CD ROM MO disk etc Patch IN page and will display a list like the following l FILE TOTAL TYPE Execution of this operation requires a longer LOOP1 HAN 66 06 62 668 C
391. ime by which the data will be shifted range maximum of 5 hours e EXECUTE Execute the command T COMP time compression expansion Compress or expand the length of the track in a range of 50 200 without affecting the pitch After this command is executed all regions included in the track will be combined into a single region e TRACK Select the track that you wish to compress or expand e RATIO Specify the compression expansion ratio in units of 0 01 range 50 200 e EXECUTE Execute the command AVVULNG Reference Guide 101 EDIT screen PITCH pitch change Modify the pitch of the entire track without changing the length of the audio After this command is executed all regions included in the track will be combined into a single region e TRACK Select the track whose pitch you wish to modify e PITCH Adjust the amount of pitch change in semitone units range 12 semitones e FINE Adjust the amount of pitch change in one cent units range 50 cents Executing the T COMP or PITCH commands will require more processing time than the actual length of the audio Also it is not pos sible to cancel the command after it has been executed e EXECUTE Execute the command Immediately after executing an editing com mand of the TRACK menu except for the NAME command you can press the UNDO key to return the data to its previous condition E PART menu commands and parameters
392. in the GBL area 74 AwrunG Reference Guide 1 24 Rtn page Monitor the input level of the input channels Function Monitor the input levels of input channels 1 24 and return channels 1 2 Key operation e HOME key gt F1 1 24 Rtn key e Repeatedly press the HOME key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt HOME button gt 1 24 Rtn tab Screen functions Level meters These meters show the input levels of input channels 1 24 and return channels 1 2 The fader position is shown in dB units below each level meter 2 STEREO OUT LEVEL This shows the position of the STEREO fader in dB units 3 PRE EQ button 4 POST EQ button POST FADER button Select one of these three buttons to select the location in the signal path pre EQ post EQ post fader whose level will be shown by the level meters caoga NEW 50i 5 on 00 00 00 00 H SCENE OD E p INPUT 1 Initial Data 7 amp 9 16 1112 15 14 15 16 INPUT CHANNEL 17 18 19 2 21 22 23 24 INPUT CHANNEL q STEREO OUT 0 PRE Ea POST EQ f Bulls Onn ST RTN1 RTNZ Orif on E Additional functions in the 1 24 Rtn page In the 1 24 Rtn page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following function to the F1 key CD _ _ _ e F1 PEAK HOLD key This key sets defeats the Peak Hold function This is the s
393. indow will appear This popup window allows you to import mixer data from an existing song For this example it is not necessary to make any settings MIXER DATA IMPORT Select items of current MIXER data to imreort SCENE HEH AUTOR TEMPO HAP LIBRARY 76 Amu Operation Guide Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 5 Make sure that the cursor is located at the OK button and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the song HAHE EDIT press oe mapai NEW SONG SHIFT Lock 2 Ee ee ee HAE YEE EEE 2 DE 0 2 2 2 2 AEA eA EC 2 YE EE Lec J 6 Use the character palette to assign a song name of up to 64 characters For details on inputting characters refer to page 60 When you have finished inputting the song name move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The COMMENT EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a com ment to the song COHHEHT EDIT PRESS OK apj Prea ee io Description SHIFT Lock Be Ee ee EEN WEEIWEEOEE BWEROHWOOE AIDA fE Ge AE Ga Ga e BE ME Gedo 7 As desired input a comment in the same way as the song name Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The new song will be created If you selected YES in step 3 the song you had been operating will be saved before the new song is created AVWVUUIG Operation Guide 77 Chapter5 Recording
394. ing will appear CONFIRMATION Hill Imeort to Fad A 7 A 8 ARE OU SURE 7 If a message of Prohibit CD Import appears instead of this message access the UTILITY screen Prefer 2 page UTILITY key gt F3 key and change the CD DAT DIGITAL REC button display to ENABLE Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The sample import will be executed Kp So that the samples assigned to the two pads will play back in stereo assign the pad out puts to paired channels SETUP screen Patch IN page AVVULNG Reference Guide 83 SAMP PAD screen WAV Import page Assign a WAV file to a sampling pad Function Import a WAV format audio file from a CD ROM or MO disk inserted in the internal CD RW drive or an external SCSI device and assign it to a sampling pad Key operation e Sampling pad section EDIT pad gt F3 WavImport key e Repeatedly press the EDIT pad until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt SAMP PAD EDIT button gt WavImport tab Screen functions 1 DRIVE Move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATAJOG dial to select the internal CD RW drive or external SCSI device ASSIGN TO Select the pad to which you wish to assign the WAV file Pads to which no sample is assigned are displayed as NO ASN File list This shows a list of the WAV files on the internal CD RW drive or externa
395. ingle operation included in each track are displayed as bar graphs in this area The vertical line in this area indicates the current location The symbols displayed at the bottom of the frame indicate locate points or markers that have been set in those locations The following types of symbols are displayed OS T EET Start point E E End point eles inte canted In point E EE ETE E Out point A este tees A point O Bia E B point 199 PESEE Markers 1 99 8 ALL MUTE OFF button This button defeats muting for all tracks Tracks that have been forcibly muted due to limitations on the number of simultaneously playable tracks cannot be un muted 9 INPUT MONITOR Select one of the following three buttons to select the input mode monitor source selection for each track The following table shows how the track monitor signal will change according to the state of the REC TRACK SELECT key and the transport mode when each mode is selected When the AUTO button is on Auto Input Monitor REC TRACK i SELECT Monitored signal Silence Stopped Input source Playback Playing Playback Playback Recording Input source The input mode of all tracks will change auto matically depending on the on off status of the REC TRACK SELECT key It is not possible to change input monitor manually When the INDI button is on Individual Input Monitor REC TRACK k 4 a SEL
396. inserted or overwritten O DIVIDE Divide the selected region into two at the location you specify O TRIM IN Trim the starting location of the selected region toward the end in sample units O TRIM OUT Trim the ending location of the selected region toward the beginning in sample units O T COMP Time Compression Expansion Compress or expand the length of the audio data in the selected region As the length changes the pitch will change correspondingly The RATIO parameter specifies the amount of compression or expansion 50 200 O PITCH Pitch Change Change only the pitch without affecting the length of the audio data of the selected region The PITCH parameter specifies the change in semitones maxi mum 12 semitones and the FINE parameter specifies the change in one cent steps maximum 50 cents AVVUUIG Operation Guide 163 Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations 164 aw uuns operation Guide 0 Internal effects This chapter explains the two built in effects of the AW4416 About the internal effects The AW4416 contains two multi effect units respectively called effect 1 and effect 2 In general the internal effects can be used in the following two ways O Using AUX send return In this method the two AUX sends are used to send signals from each channel to the inputs of effects 1 2 and the outputs of effects 1 2 are mixed with the signals of the stereo
397. intosh series O IBM PC series D SUB9P gt mini DIN8P cross cable mini DIN 8 pin 7 10 8 CTS D SUB 9 pin 6 8 20 7 RTS i 5 Adar 30 2 RxD Lee ot jo 5 GND Teses e sol o a 2 50 3 TxD 6 If your PC has a D SUB 25 pin connector use a Yamaha CCJ PC1 cable together with a male female conversion adapter AVVUUIG Operation Guide 233 Chapter1 5 MIDI O Apple Macintosh series 8 pin system peripheral cable mini DIN 8 pin 7 a ae 3Le e ots aye ss 1 2 ONanRON 0O000000 0 oOo0o0o00000 DONDWAN N ADDIDIT og F A In the case of some Macintosh computers that have no modem printer cable it is not possible to make direct connections to the AW4416 s TO HOST connector Setting the PORT SELECT parameter In order to use the TO HOST connector the AW4416 s PORT SELECT parameter must be set appropriately for the type of computer that is selected 1 Press MIDI and then press the F1 key The MIDI Setup page will appear allowing you to make MIDI related settings for the AW4416 MIDI 99991 NEW SONG m SOE TaPuT1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data i TX RX OMNI ECHO Gee Mil CHANNEL J f G TCH E MIDI OUT SEL f PORT SELECT l 2 Move the cursor to the PORT SELECT knob and use the DATA JOG dial to select the setting appropriate for you
398. is area you can set the parameters for the selected menu When you select a button for menu the corresponding parameter val ues will appear here Xe For examples of editing the sampling pads refer to Operation Guide Chapter 12 Sam pling pads AVVULNG Reference Guide 87 SAMP PAD screen Trig List page Recording and playing sampling pad operations Function Use a dedicated convenience sequencer to record and play back pad operations and edit the recorded performance Key operation e Sampling pad section EDIT pad gt F5 Oo Trig List key 4 FR START Boe ee FR END J A 7C NO ASN e Repeatedly press the EDIT pad until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt SAMP PAD EDIT button gt Trig List tab Screen functions 1 COPY menu Using this menu events recorded in the conve nience sequencer can be copied to another location in the same pad track or to another pad track When you move the cursor here and press the ENTER key the following buttons will appear 7 ea im i a a xm xm D jo Ba STAR EHD T START TIMES HTERWA INSERT EMECUT These buttons have the following functions FR PAD Select the copy source pad track FR START FR END Specify the beginning FR START and end FR END of the pad track selected in FR PAD that will be the copy source The specified portio
399. is not possible for multiple insert sends to share the same output jack 8 Press the SETUP key gt F2 Patch OUT key The display will show the SETUP screen Patch OUT page Notice that OMNI OUT ASSIGN field 4 shows I M 1 This means that OMNI OUT jack 4 is being used as an insert send jack for monitor channel 1 SET UP 99995_ _NEH song SE CENE BG MONIT O 00 05 000 initial Data e In this case changing the patching of OMNI OUT jack 4 in the Patch OUT page will defeat the insert I O patching as well e If you wish to save the patching and insert I O point settings that you made here you must store the current settings in a scene memory not in the patch library or channel library e The patch library cannot store insert I O point settings When a patch program is recalled from the patch library the insert I O points of all channels will be reset to O FF e Patching information cannot be stored in the channel library 142 Awun operation Guide Chapter8 Patching Using the Quick Rec function Quick Rec is a function that rapidly makes the appropriate settings so that you can simultaneously record sixteen input sources to audio tracks 1 16 When you execute Quick Rec groups of eight input sources will be assigned directly to tracks 1 16 and input patch and mix parameter settings will also be reset All that remains for you to do is to press the REC key PLAY key and you will be re
400. ish to finalize move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key In this case additional data can be recorded later on the ejected CD R media 262 awun operation Guide Chapter1 7 Mastering Finalizing As long as you have not executed the Finalize operation other stereo track data can be added to CD R media that was recorded using Track At Once However media that has not yet been finalized cannot be played back by a CD RW drive or a conventional CD player In order to use a CD player to play CD R media on which you have written data use the following procedure to execute the Finalize operation Press the MASTERING key MASTERING ELYES ___ WRITE co 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 ST_ TRACK WRITE TO CO TRACK _AT ONCE DISC AT ONCE Place the CD R media that you wish to finalize on the CD RW drive tray Move the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE button and press the ENTER key The FINALIZE button will appear at the left of the TRACK AT ONCE button The list in the right side of the display will show the tracks that have been written on the CD R media EXISTING See DISC AT ONCE AVVUUIG Operation Guide 263 Chapter1 7 Mastering 4 Move the cursor to the FINALIZE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the Finalize command CONFIRMATION Will Finalize This Media ARE YOU SURE 5 To execute the Finali
401. it will no longer be possible to change the track in the SOURCE TRACK field If you wish to change the import source track move the cursor to the song list in the upper part of the display and rotate the DATAJOG dial In the confir mation popup window that appears select the OK button and you will return to the state of step 2 Move the cursor to the DEST TRACK field and specify the track number 1 16 and virtual track number 1 8 of the import destination track A If you select an already recorded virtual track as the import destination all the contents of the corresponding track will be erased and replaced by the contents of the imported track Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the ENTER key A confirmation popup window will appear 10 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The track will be imported into the current song Kp By pressing the UNDO key immediately after you execute the import you can return the data to the state before importing AUTOMIX screen Main page Make basic automix settings Function Make basic settings for recording and playing automix Key operation e AUTO MIX key gt F1 Main key e Repeatedly press the AUTO MIX key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation tab Screen functions AUTOMIX Turn automix on ENABLE or off DISABLE If this button is set to ENABLE auto
402. itar A Guitar Strings1 Strings2 Strings3 BrassSection CMP CMP CMP CMP CMP CMP CMP Compressor Compressor Compressor Compressor Compressor Compressor Compressor Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 7 Outgain dB 6 0 Knee 2 Release ms 174 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 7 Outgain dB 2 5 Knee 4 Release ms 261 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 5 Outgain dB 1 5 Knee 2 Release ms 238 Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Outgain dB Knee Release ms Threshold dB 11 2 33 1 5 2 749 Ratio 1 Attack ms Outgain dB Knee Release ms Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Outgain dB Knee Release ms Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Outgain dB Knee Release ms AIA ULNE Reference Guide Appendix Description A variation on program 014 adjusting the attack and entire level using a deeper threshold Compressor for backing performances such as electric rhythm guitar playing chords or arpeggios A variation on program 016 intended for acoustic guitar playing rhythm chords or arpeggios Compressor for string instruments This program was intended for violins A variation on program 018 intended for violas or cellos
403. ite in the move destination track e EXECUTE Execute the command FR START FR END Move Peseeseccei i track FR TRACK 9 te e p ee MOVE Move ke track TO TRACK TO START Jb MOVE Move destination TB Sm Be Ci track after execution INSERT Insert Move destination TB JE co track after A execution INSERT OverWrite 103 ALY ULUNE Reference Guide EDIT screen INSERT Insert a length of silence into the selected part Subsequent audio data will be moved backward by the length of the inserted silence e TRACK Select the track into which you wish to insert silence For the Insert command you can spec ify all tracks as the subject of the operation To do so rotate the DATAJOG dial all the way clockwise when setting the TRACK parameter to make the selection read AL C ALL CUR RENT With this setting the START END por tion of the virtual tracks currently selected for tracks 1 16 will be selected for the operation e START Specify the starting location of the part into which silence will be inserted e END Specify the ending location of the part into which silence will be inserted e ALL V TR all virtual tracks Select whether silence will be inserted into all virtual tracks included in the selected track s YES or only into the currently selected virtual track NO e EXECUTE Execute the command START END gp w E 1 04 ALIAN ULUNE Reference Guide
404. itor channels 1 2 to far left L16 for channel 1 and far right R16 for chan nel 2 Make sure that ON keys 1 2 and the STEREO ON key are on and raise faders 1 2 and the STEREO fader to the 0 dB position A When tracks are paired you must operate only one of the faders Attempting to move both faders simultaneously will place a strain on the motor and may cause malfunctions While producing sound on your instrument watch the L R level meters of the level meter counter The signal from the rhythm machine or drum mics will be sent via tracks 1 2 gt monitor channels 1 2 to the stereo bus If the red 0 dB segment lights lower fad ers 1 2 input level of monitor channels 1 2 mS WORD CLOCK MTE f 731k 48k LOCK rer INT EXT VARI SLAVE A o EINE 2 L R level meter Raise the MONITOR OUT control PHONES control You can monitor the input signal via your monitor system or headphones A Note that the signals being controlled here are not the signals recorded on the recorder rather they are the signals passing through the recorder O perating the pan fader or ON key of a monitor channel will not affect the signal that is recorded 84 AwuLns operation Guide Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Let s record 1 Press the Locate section RTZ key MARK
405. iving more MIDI data than it can handle The AW4416 is attempting to transmit more MIDI data than it can handle There is no valid automix data Please create a new mix Since data has not been stored it cannot be recalled The allowable number of marks has been exceeded Playback tracks were muted because the allowable number of simultaneously recorded played tracks was exceeded The operation cannot be executed because the recorder is operat ing The operation cannot be executed because the recorder is record ing or playing Redo re execution of the previous operation has been com pleted The repeat interval is too short It cannot be set to less than one second The selected area contains no trigger data The selected area contains no region The selected channel cannot be selected since it does not exist The channel cannot be changed since the display mode is set to SELECTED CH ONLY No sample is assigned to the selected sampling pad The selected song does not contain a region The selected track does not contain a region The selected track does not contain recorded data The signal being input to the input jack of a card installed in OPTION I O slot 1 is not synchronized to the word clock master The signal being input to the input jack of a card installed in an OPTION I O slot is not synchronized to the word clock master The signal being input to the input jack of a card installed in OPTION I O slot 2 is
406. ized If you are creating a new song you will proceed to the next step of the procedure 4 Text palette Here you can select the character to input in the text input box The following characters symbols and numerals can be used ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz spc Space 1234567890 amp 4 lt 5 Use the CURSOR lt p gt A keys to move the cursor in the text palette to the button for the desired character and press the ENTER key The corresponding character symbol numeral will be input into the text input box and the highlighted area will move to the right Xe If you wish to correct a character that was input by mistake you can use the DATA JOG dial to move the highlighted area to left or right Input the remaining characters in the same way While inputting text you can use the following buttons in the text palette Lins J button Insert a space blank at the highlighted area Subsequent characters will be moved backward button Delete the character at the highlighted area Subsequent characters will be moved forward ENE buttons Move the highlighted area to left or right EE buttons NAME EDIT COMMENT EDIT windows only Move the highlighted area upward or downward ae eis button Switch between uppercase alphabet numerals and lower case alphabet symbols When this button is on you can input uppercase alphabetical cha
407. k Hold function This is the same function as the PEAK HOLD key in the level meter counter section 76 AMUS reference Guide HOME screen Bus page Monitor the output levels of buses 1 8 AUX buses 1 8 Function Monitor the output level of buses 1 8 and AUX buses 1 8 In this page you can also adjust the master level of each bus Key operation e HOME key gt F3 Bus key e Repeatedly press the HOME key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt HOME button gt Bus tab Screen functions 4 Level meters These meters show the output levels of buses 1 8 AUX buses 1 8 Faders These faders adjust the master level of buses 1 8 AUX buses 1 8 The fader location of each bus is shown in dB units below each fader Kp To adjust the value of a fader move the cur sor to the desired fader and rotate the DATA JOG dial 3 STEREO OUT LEVEL The location of the STEREO fader is shown in dB units PRE FADER pre EQ button 6 POST FADER post EQ button Select one of these two buttons to select the location in the signal path pre fader post fader whose level will be shown by the level meters ME jeeeee NEW solz Scene OO HO INPUTI 00 00 00 100 Initial Data 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 t00 00 00 00 00 00 ton 00 00 12345676 123456 78 PRE FADER elt lat E Additional functions in the Bus page In the Bus page you
408. k into which you wish to import the WAV file The NAME field shows the track name of the selected track If a stereo WAV file is selected two adjacent odd numbered gt even numbered tracks will be displayed 3 Destination point Specify the point in the track at which the WAV file will be placed Xe The units used to specify this point will change depending on the counter display method time units measures selected in the SONG screen Setting page If measure dis play is selected measures will be the smallest settable unit 4 TYPE Select whether the imported WAV file will be inserted into the track Insert or overwritten OverWrite If Insert is selected any subse quent audio data in the import destination track will be moved toward the end of the song by the length of the inserted WAV file File list This shows a list of the WAV files on the internal CD RW drive or external SCSI device This list contains the following information FILE The file name directory name is displayed EJ icons indicate WAV files and 4 files indicate directories TOTAL The playback time of the WAV file is displayed in hours minutes seconds milliseconds TYPE The stereo F monaural W status of the WAV file and its quantization word length is dis played A The AW44 16 can recognize only WAV files that have the same sampling frequency as the current song and have a filename extension of
409. k on your MIDI sequencer When you start the MIDI sequencer MMC commands will be transmitted to the AW4416 and the AW4416 will begin running At this time MTC will be trans mitted from the AW4416 s MTC OUT connector to the MIDI sequencer and the sequencer will synchronize to the AW4416 244 awun operation Guide 6 Backing up and restoring songs This chapter explains how part or all of the song data on the internal hard disk can be backed up to a SCSI device such as a CD RW drive or MO drive and how backed up data can be restored to the internal hard disk This chapter also explains how to re format the internal hard disk and how to erase CD RW media Selecting the backup format When using removable media such as MO as the backup destination you must first select the backup format 1 Press the UTILITY key gt F4 key The UTILITY screen Prefer 3 page will appear in the display UTILITY 29 92 NEW SONG __ scene 3B Ep MONIT 00 00 00 000 Initial Data BATTERY q MOUSE_SPEED REMOVABLE BACKUP J so O 2 BG rast TYPE 1 d INT 5C5 TERMINATOR MASTERING MODE test G CO BACKUP MODE gt gt rae 2 Move the cursor to the button in the REMOVABLE BACKUP area and select either TYPE1 or TYPE2 as the backup format Each time you press the ENTER key the button display will alternate between TYPE1 and TYPE2 The difference between these formats is desc
410. l SCSI device This list contains the following information FILE The file name directory name is displayed EJ icons indicate WAV files and 4 files indicate directories TOTAL SAMP PAD S amp L __ __ way inport 00 00 00 010 J 120 0 4 4 Hav MPOT To PAD ASSIGN TO B P NAI ME Amid NO ASN W finger snar way sidestick way The AW4416 can recognize only WAV files that have the same sampling frequency as the current song which have a filename exten sion of WAV following their name Other files will not be displayed in the list 4 DIR directory The symbol and the directory name indicate the directory in which the list shown in is located For example this will indicate if you are in the highest level root directory or WAV if you are in a directory named WAV located one level lower EXECUTE button This button executes the WAV file import The playback time of the WAV file is displayed in hours minutes seconds milliseconds TYPE The stereo F monaural R status of the WAV file and its quantization word length is dis played 84 Awute reference Guide SAMP PAD screen E Additional functions in the Wav 5 Move the cursor to the ASSIGN TO area Import page and use the DATA JOG dial to select the bank and pad number to which the WAV In the Wav Import page you can press the SHIFT file will be ass
411. l appear Page 161 provides brief explanations of the editing commands of each menu For details of each command refer to the Reference Guide 4 Move the cursor to the desired editing command and press the ENTER key Buttons to set the parameters for the selected editing command will appear 5 To change the parameter settings move the cursor to the correspond ing button The lower part of the display will show the settings of the parameter at which the cursor is currently located 6 Press the ENTER key The cursor will move to the setting area in the lower part of the display vip If you decide to cancel without executing the editing command move the cursor from here to a button at a higher level and press the ENTER key 7 Use the DATA JOG dial to modify the parameter value and press the ENTER key The cursor will return to the button selected in step 4 8 Repeat steps 5 7 to make settings for the remaining parameters 160 Awun operation Guide Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations 9 To execute the editing command move the cursor to the EXECUTE but ton and press the ENTER key The editing command you selected in step 4 will be executed e Ifyou wish to halt the editing operation move the cursor to a button in the top level and press the EN TER key e As exceptions the TRACK menu NAME command and the REGION menu NAME command do not require you to use the EXECUTE button
412. l change to EFF 2L This indicates that the input of effect 2 has been patched to the insert send of monitor channel 1 and the L output of effect 2 has been patched to the insert return EFF INSERT SETTING MONI 1 INSERTION EFF TYPE e Regardless of the channel the effect will be inserted at a position immediately after the attenuator e If you move the cursor to the RTN field and rotate the DATA JO G dial you can switch between EFF 2L and EFF 2R e Ifan effect is inserted into a stereo channel return channels 1 2 stereo output channel the L R outputs of the effect will be returned to the L R of that chan nel 5 When you have finished making settings in the EFF INSERT SETTING popup window move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The EFFECT INSERT field of the CH View page will be displayed as ON INT EFF2 This indicates that effect 2 has been inserted into the corresponding channel in this case monitor channel 1 A An effect that has been inserted into a channel will be usable only for that chan nel until you insert the same effect into a different channel or turn on the O FF button in the EFF INSERT SETTING popup window AVVUUIG Operation Guide 173 Chapter1 0 Internal effects O Recalling an effect program Here s how you can recall the desired program for effect 2 from the effect library 1 Press the AUX 8 key gt F2 key The AUX8 EFF2 screen Librar
413. l is it being input from the corresponding slot jack and that it is synchronized with the AW4416 s internal clock A If the AW 4416 is set to be an MTC slave it is not possible for the AW 4416 to simultaneously be set as the word clock slave Select the desired clock source in the WORD CLOCK SOURCE area by using the CURSOR lt p gt A keys to move the cursor to the corresponding button The clock source you should select will depend on the system in which you are using the AW4416 Here we will explain some typical situations O Using the AW4416 as the word clock master If no external digital device is connected to the AW4416 or if you wish to use the AW4416 as the word clock master so that external devices such as a digital MTR will follow it turn on the INT button of the WORD CLOCK SOURCE area Sync Out YAMAHA gt tee ec Weed sor Digital MTR word clock slave AW4416 word clock master eee fee Lil OPTION e WORD CLOCK SOURCE INT Digital MTR word clock slave e Set the digital MTR so that it will synchronize to the word clock included in the input signal from the AW4416 e If you are using two digital MTR units connect the Sync Out jack of the first to the Sync In jack of t
414. l mix parameters of the currently selected channel Major parameters can also be operated here It is convenient to use this page when you wish to control all the mix parameters of a specific channel In the preceding section Recording the first track we used the PAN ROUTE screen to set bus assignments and pan for multiple channels at once Here how ever we are going to use the VIEW screen CH View page to perform the same operations VIEW Geaa NEW SONG scene AA E pror 00 00 00 000 JET d i FADER EJ Bus assign GE sour EOE 1 8 buttons ata kir 0008 FAIR SS HOHOx 2 ST button TE PAN knob 2 In the MIXING LAYER section press the 1 16 key gt SEL key 8 On the AW4416 you select the channel to be controlled by selecting a mixing layer in the MIXING LAYER section and then pressing a SEL key to select a channel When you are using the CH View page the currently selected channel will be shown in the upper left of the display The corresponding SEL key will also light Selected VIEH gogoa NEH SONG THRUTs O0 00 00 000 channel l CATT EHASE EAR ROUT EEE 3 Move the cursor to the PAN ROUTE area Turn the ST button off and the bus assign 3 button on 4 Make sure that the PAN ROUTE area PAN knob is positioned in the cen ter CENTER With these settings the signal of input channel 8 will no longer be sent to the ste reo bus but will be sent to bus 3 instead A N ote tha
415. laying on a simple sequencer that is linked with the recorder A sample can be assigned to a pad on one of three ways You can directly assign a region a piece of continuous audio data that was recorded in a single opera tion that was recorded earlier on a track import CD DA data from an audio CD or import a WAV file from a CD ROM or MO disk Region recorded Input channel on a track D RAM CD DA Banka CJCIOIOOOOO Banke DoEADOOCA omi Sampling pads WAV file A eeeeeeeeseoceoeaeeoeeeoeeoeoeeeseoeeeeoeneeaeneeoeoee eee 8 e The eight sampling pads can be used as sixteen pads by switching between two banks A and B Sampling pad settings and the samples in RAM are saved as part of the song A eeeeeeeaeseeceoeeeoeeaeoeeeoeeeeeeoeeeoeoeaeneeeoeeeee 8 The samples that can be assigned to the pads must be the same audio format as that song For example in the case of a song that was created as 24 bit 48 kHz CD DA 16 bit 44 1 kHz data cannot be imported In the case of a 16 bit 44 1 kHz song 16 bit 48 kHz WAV files cannot be imported AIM ULUNE Operation Guide 1 85 Chapter1 2 Sampling pads Assigning the pad outputs to chan nels In order to use the sampling pads you must first assign each pad output to an input channel 1 24 The output of a pad that is assigned to a channel can be con trolled by attenuation phase EQ and dynamics in the same way as a conven tional input and can be recorded on a
416. le volume of media as mes sage will ask you to insert the next volume Eject the media and insert a new vol ume of media When backing up on a hard disk or MO disk the disk will be formatted before the backup is performed When backing up on a CD RW disc a popup window will ask you to confirm that it is OK to erase the media Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key and the media will first be erased and then the backup will be per formed Xe If you decide to cancel the backup move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the EN TER key A Inthe case of removable media such as MO make sure that write protect is defeated e Ifthe backup extends across multiple volumes of media be sure to note the order of volumes on the label of the media e Once backup has begun the operation cannot be cancelled Restoring a song Here s how data for the selected song s or all songs previously backed up to a SCSI device e g internal CD RW drive or external hard disk or MO drive can be restored to the AW4416 s internal hard disk A Before you begin insert the disk e g CD RW or MO containing the backed up data into the appropriate device If the backup extended across multiple volumes of media make sure that the first volume of media is inserted Once the restore operation has begun it cannot be cancelled 1 Press the FILE key gt F2 key The FILE screen Restore page
417. lected track 1 16 Part Within the currently selected track edit the specified area of audio data Region Edit a piece of continuous audio data that was recorded in a single operation When you move the cursor to the desired menu and press the ENTER key a list of buttons will appear allowing you to select an editing com mand center column in the illustration at right When you then move the cursor to the desired command and press the ENTER key a list of buttons for setting the parameters of that com mand will appear right column in the illustra tion at right __ EDIT _ TR EDIT co TD NANE SCU T Y acy tr Hi O Reston 9 Siu Tr IT inio e a 00 10 i 137 d 17 0 44 f OVAUBUWN 9 15CV Tr15 17 16CV Tr16 171 gt e FR TRACK TO TRACK ALL WTR Menus Commands Parameters For details on the commands and parameters that can be selected from the TRACK PART REGION menus refer to page 101 Xe If you move the cursor to the command whose button is highlighted and press the ENTER key you will return to the command list If you move the cursor to the menu high lighted at the top of the list and press the ENTER key you will return to the first menu EDIT AVVULNG Reference Guide 99 EDIT screen Pairing By moving the cursor to this column and press ing the ENTER key you can set defeat pairing for adjacent odd numbered gt even numbe
418. ling frequency can be mastered A eeeeeoeeeaeoeseoeeeoeeneaoeeeoeeeoeoeneoeeeeeeeeeoee ee ee e Mastering cannot be performed from the stereo track of a song whose sam pling frequency is 48 kHz When mastering is performed from a 24 bit 44 1 kHz stereo track the lower 8 bits will be discarded when the data is written converting it into 16 bit 44 1 kHz format AVY ULUNE Operation Guide 255 Chapter1 7 Mastering CD R and CD RW CD RW drives support two types of media CD R and CD RW These two types of media differ in the following ways O CD R CD R media can only be recorded or added to Previously recorded data cannot be erased and rewritten CD R media to which audio data has been written by the AW4416 s mastering function can be played back on a CD RW drive or on most CD players if the media has been finalized Additional audio data can be recorded on CD R media only if the disc has not yet been finalized O CD RW CD RW media allows previously recorded data to be entirely erased and rewrit ten CD RW does not allow data to be added as on a CD R CD RW media to which audio data has been written by the AW4416 s mastering function can be played back on a CD RW drive or on some CD players However caution is nec essary since many CD players do not support CD RW at the present time The following table shows compatibility between CD R CD RW media on which audio data has been recorded and CD
419. ll locate to the beginning of the first mea sure MARK SEARCH 0 RTZ If the counter display type is set to Time SECOND or Time Code TIME CODE the point to which the RTZ key will locate will depend on whether absolute time or relative time is being displayed O If the counter shows absolute time ABS Pressing the RTZ key will locate to the 00 00 00 00 position if the counter shows the time code or to the start point zero absolute time if the counter shows the time O If the counter shows relative time REL Pressing the RTZ key will locate to the point that the user specified as zero rela tive time For details on setting the zero relative time refer to the section below A If Measure display MEASURE is selected for the counter you cannot switch between absolute time and relative time pressing the RTZ key will always locate to the start point of the song O Setting the zero relative time location You can use the following procedure to set the relative REL zero point that is dis played by the counter 1 Locate the song to the point that you wish to set as relative zero 2 Hold down the Locate section SET key and press the RTZ key If the counter had been displaying the relative time REL the counter display will be reset to zero 00 00 00 000 If the counter had been displaying the absolute time ABS it will automatically switch to relative time and will be reset to
420. llowing you to input a name Xp It is also possible to store the settings directly into the library without accessing the TITLE EDIT popup window To do so access the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTILITY key gt F2 key and turn STORE CONFIRMA TION off Input the library title For details on input ting characters refer to Operation Guide P 60 The Store operation will be executed Recalling dynamics settings from the library Procedure 1 Select the recall destination channel and access the DYN DLY screen Library page Use the DATA JOG dial to select the library number that you wish to recall Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A confirmation message will appear e It is possible to recall the library data with out seeing the CONFIRMATION popup win dow To do so access the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTILITY key gt F2 key and turn RECALL CONFIRMATION off e When you recall a dynamics program into a paired channel or into the stereo out chan nel the same settings will be recalled into both channels Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The recall will be executed hy When you recall a dynamics program into a stereo channel or a paired channel the same settings will be recalled into both channels 64 AMUS Reference Guide DYN DLY screen Diy o1 16 Dly o17 24 Diy oMONI pages Set delay
421. lt http www aw4416 com gt A Some types of MY card sold by other manufacturers may be usable only in SLOT lor2 AULAS Operation Guide 13 Before you begin Installation procedure 3 4 Please carefully read the cautions for installing optional devices given at the beginning of this manual Make sure that the power of the AW4416 is turned off For safety s sake disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet From the OPTION I O slot located on the rear panel of the AW4416 remove the two screws that hold the cover in place Please keep the cover and screws you removed in a safe place Slide the I O card along the rails inside the slot until it clicks into place Tighten the two screws included with the I O card to fasten the card securely Please note that if the screws are loose the card may not be grounded correctly 14 Awutne operation Guide Important points you must observe Turning the power on or off You must use the following procedure to turn the power of the AW4416 on or off O Turning the power on To turn on the power of a system that includes the AW4416 you must turn on the power switches in the following order Storage devices connected to the AW4416 s SCSI connector and external sound sources connected to the input output jacks The AW4416 itself The monitor system connected to the output jacks of the AW4416 If the SCSI device is turned on afte
422. lter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Banen A een normal phase feedback minus values WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV FLG 0 100 A flanged reverb balance 0 flanged reverb 100 MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds Appendix 18 Avwvutne Reference Guide Appendix REV SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV SYM 0 100 Reverb and symphonic balance 0 symphonic 100 reverb MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds REV gt SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic effects in series Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial dela
423. m display The selected drive contains no WAV files The file is not a WAV file The specified partition was not found The specified channel library cannot be loaded into this channel An error has occurred in the SCSI connection The drive of the selected SCSI ID is not a CD drive The drive of the selected SCSI ID is not connected The selected preset can be used only by effect 2 The track cannot be imported since it is from a song with a differ ent sampling frequency or quantization bit length The selected track is not recorded There are too many regions Time compression expansion cannot be executed since the region is too small Appendix 42 AVY ULUNE Reference Guide Appendix Specifications General Specifications AD converter DA converter Internal processing Sampling frequency Audio input section MIC LINE DIGITAL STEREO IN mini YGDAI card option Audio output section STEREO OUT OMNI OUT MONITOR OUT PHONES DIGITAL STEREO OUT mini YGDAI card option Mixing layer section Input channel Internal effect return Playback Internal effects section Multi effects x 2 Bus section Bus Aux Stereo Solo Sampler section Assign to mixer section Playback Trigger pads Sampling time Recorder section Recording medium Sound file format Recording resolution 24 bit linear 64 times oversampling 24 bit linear 128 times oversampling 32 bit Internal 44 1 kHz 48kHz External 44 1 kHz
424. m insertion because a patch library was recalled Effect 2 has been released from insertion because a patch library was recalled The selected effect program can be used only with effect 2 The auto punch in out interval is too short It cannot be set less than approximately 100 msec AXVWVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 39 Appendix INT EFF NOW SELECTED AUX LOW BATTERY MAKE NEW MIX MARK ERASED MARK SET MIDI IN DATA FRAMING ERROR MIDI IN DATA OVERRUN MIDI RX BUFFER FULL MIDI TX BUFFER FULL NO CURRENT AUTOMIX NO DATA TO RECALL NO MARK LEFT PLAY TRACK MUTE IS ON RECORDER BUSY RECORDER RUNNING REDO COMPLETE REPEAT POINTS TOO CLOSE SELECTED AREA HAS NO DATA SELECTED AREA HAS NO REGION SELECTED CH IS NONE SELECTED CH ONLY MODE SELECTED PAD NOT ASSIGNED SELECTED SONG HAS NO REGION SELECTED TRACK HAS NO REGION SELECTED TRACK NOT RECORDED SLOT1 INPUT SYNC ERROR SLOT1 2 INPUT SYNC ERROR SLOT2 INPUT SYNC ERROR SOLO READY SOLO SLAVE SONG NUMBER FULL SONG TOP END OUT OF RANGE STEREO PAIRED The internal effect is connected to the AUX send and cannot be inserted The internal battery is running down There are no events to be edited Please create a new mix The mark has been erased The mark has been set Invalid data may have been received at the MIDI IN connector Invalid data may have been received at the MIDI IN connector The AW4416 is rece
425. mat 0 ce eee eee eee 245 Backing up a song ode Sioa va eee Oke A eo eee ewiee bei 246 Restoring asong o sasan ee eh Ss Role e E a Brera are ees 248 Disk utilities onrera neces Hele ouwiG are somone Somes 250 Formatting the internal hard disk external SCSI device 250 Formatting the internal hard disk 0 00000 251 Formatting an external hard disk n n ols angie 4 atew s oa San Het 251 Formatting removable media such as an MO drive 253 Erasing CD RW I Mediaiaa aon skew Gawain pues ae 254 Chapter 17 Mastering 2 0 2 c cece eee cc ees LID xiv About mastering sesssussssssessosossesossesesses 255 Stereo tracks that can be mastered 00000005 255 CD Rand CORW oea pute Bh ca ee eek ae E a ONT 2g 256 Track At Once and Disc At Once 0 0 0 2 eee eee 257 Preparations for mastering o n otha Ga dca erer 258 Mastering mode settings 64 Statue aue 258 Writing themasteri Aiton es a eae a a E gine e 259 Finalizing eea a ee EE AEE EE ise E EEEa 263 Playing CD R RW media the CD Play function 264 AVY ULUN Operation Guide Before you begin This chapter explains preparations you need to make before using the AW4416 such as checking the included items and installing options Checking the included items Please make sure that the package contains the following items If any items are missing please contact your deal
426. me the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected Out Gain sets the compressor s output signal level Compression tends to reduce the average signal level Out Gain can be used to counter this level reduction and set an appropriate level for the next stage in the audio path Knee sets the transition of the signal at the threshold With a hard knee the transition between uncompressed and compressed signal is immediate With the softest knee knee5 the transition starts before the signal reaches the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold Release determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold If the release time is too short the gain will recover too quickly causing level pumping notice able gain fluctuations If it is set too long the compressor may not have time to recover before the next high level signal appears and it will be com pressed incorrectly AXVVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 25 Appendix Expander Expansion ratio 2 1 Knee hard Output Level f N Threshold 10dB An expander is another form of automatic level control By attenuating the signal below the threshold the expander reduces low level noise and effec tively increases the dynamic range of the recorded material Expander EXP parameters ee aa Parameter Value Threshold dB 54 to 0 55 points pub ou
427. me Code or MIDI Clock can be transmitted from the AW4416 to an external device such as a MIDI sequencer so that it will operate in synchronization with the AW4416 song MTC can also be received by the AW4416 O Remote control via MMC MMC MIDI Machine Control messages from a computer or other external device can be received to remotely control the operation of the AW4416 s trans port or to select defeat recording tracks AI UUN Operation Guide 231 Chapter1 5 MIDI MIDI connectors and the TO HOST connector The AW4416 provides the following connectors used to convey MIDI messages r MIDI m MTC OUT OUT THRU IN O MIDI IN connector MIDI messages such as program change MMC and MTC are received at this connector O MIDI OUT THRU connector By changing the setting of an internal parameter this connector can function either as a MIDI OUT connector or a MIDI THRU connector When used as a MIDI OUT connector it will transmit MIDI messages such as program change MMC and MIDI Clock When used as a MIDI THRU connector it will re transmit the messages received at the MIDI IN connector without change O MTC OUT connector This is a dedicated output connector for MTC TO HOST o O o0o P50 OOo O TO HOST connector A separately sold cable can be used to connect this to the serial port of your com puter allowing MIDI messages to be exchanged directly between the AW4416 and your computer In orde
428. mix 0 ccc eee cee ee eee ee eee 214 AULAS Operation Guide Xi Table of contents Recording the first section 0 cee eee eee eee eee 216 Playing back automix 205 css es weet cae gaees eeeaeue 218 Overwriting events 05 5 See Sie eee Sees EA E wae 219 Automix punch in out 6 6 6 0005 658 8 8 ee Ws We we Sa see wore Os 221 Editing the fader movements eee ee cece seers 223 Editing automix off line s 05 00 0 dees Soe cas eS S ee dee eele 225 Storing an automix 6 69056 Fis Cee Newer Sate ae See 228 Recalling an automixi 204 sutures a tee Geshe ewer wa ee 230 Chapter 15 MUIDU s 6 6 6 sos05 565 5 09 8 wig eee pe wle gw ware oD What you can do using MIDI 2 eee eee ee eee ee 231 MIDI connectors and the TO HOST connector 232 Using the TO HOST connector for direct connection to your COMp ter Sp Seis seal sais 5a 0 Tk aw aah a erie tes wre Ga A De a wy ae 233 CONNECTIONS noe iiia chip pt Gantt tue tote ie eee eee aad ct Be 233 Setting the PORT SELECT parameter a 5 Yeesn ene aviews ees 234 Switching AW4416 scenes from an external device 235 Using MTC to synchronize the AW4416 and a MIDI sequencer 238 Using MIDI Clock to synchronize the AW4416 and a MIDI SCQUENCER gus ct Wow Ge he E Raw a ee wee EERE EV E eee 8 240 Using MMC to control the AW4416 0 cece eee eee 243 Chapter 16 Backing up and restoring songs 245 Selecting the backup for
429. mix record ing or playback will begin automatically when the song is started FREE This shows the free area of automix memory in kilobytes and as a percentage SIZE This shows the sizes in kilobytes of the current automix and of the undo buffer _AUTOMIK 3_ NEW SONG AUTOM IX pE a l CURRENT i DISABLE ISABLE 3 ETTA 2kaogg UNDO FADER EDIT OUTI OVERHRITE J r m a eee Ge EDIT MODE M button gt AMIX button gt Main i _ AUTOMIX TRANSPORT The undo buffer is dedicated memory for automix undo and contains the automix data prior to the last operation 4 FADER EDIT OUT This setting specifies how the fader and other parameter values will change when automix recording ends END If this button is on all subsequent recorded events of the same parameter will be erased when you finish editing fader or other parame ter data 0 00 o0 oo0 Ee CAUTOMDS MAIN MAIN i ENE BG h E tia Deta Data ma a Ca Ce We cama OE nem e L STOP REC AUTO REC RET If this button is on the fader will return to the previously recorded value when you finish edit ing fader data The time over which it returns to the original value can be set in the Fader Edit page gt P 121 If this button is off the value at which fader editing ended will be maintained until the next time the fader changes Xe e The AW4416 remembers the previously reco
430. mp 45 Og a ahaee o4 9 a he ARS Ok es 34 MIXING LAYER section 28 tc0 oth seek eres EE e Men bahar 35 ISEL keys ON keys faders oni vieo fart wh ine pane oe we a 37 Display section esera nani ee eee kendo kane he kee 38 Level meter counter section 0 0 eee ee 39 RECORDER SCHON e405 3 eevee ae obese ag aes eek ae 40 AUTOMATION section ya 4 44 6 od duces ae og Boao ne Gd Eee 41 SCENE MEMORY SCCTION S 5 Baccus utah oA Ye Pe 6 Mh Guth geal aol 41 CURSOR JJOG amp SHUTTLE section 0 42 PCAC SECTIONS 4st oS ys oe bs aera a ides Gone wa oon Oe eee 43 Transport section sis zroe Mo Wie paul has ee ete Mt ee lle 44 SAMPLING PAD section sitet ee ne wees og Rew Ba hk Bae 45 Rear panel iscrisse seat asews nares Ohe eae aae eyes 46 Fro tpaneli oaaae aacaeee soa aa od eae a eae Ae re ule 50 AULAS Operation Guide 1X Table of contents Chapter 3 The user interface of the AW4416 51 X Displays aies rarena a CR VA a a a eee ra ka 51 Level meters counter enesuesusnunsusursusursesesenss 54 Basic operation of the AW4416 cece eee eee eee 56 Accessing a screen page oa seas o ba ee diye Racine state bates 56 Using the controls of the top panel 02 0 eee eee 56 Usine ING IMOUSEs s 2 aly ete s bg LEP ee lale et 4G 3 sey tHe alah oleae ea al 56 Turning a button on off et Se ee echoes Eee oe eats ea Cane 57 Using the controls of the top panel 0 2 ee ee
431. n album contain ing several individual songs or compositions mastering also covers the process of matching levels and sound between songs and deciding on the amount of space to leave between tracks For our discussion here we ll concentrate on mastering and burning the song to a CD R disk which can then be played in just about any standard CD player THE IMPORTANCE OF ACCURATE MONITORING One of the most critical factors in successful mastering and mixing for that matter is to have a good monitoring setup This is also one of the most difficult to achieve simply because it involves not only your amp and speakers but the room you monitor in and everything in it as well Quite simply your mix will sound different on different systems and in different rooms If the environment you work in tends to be bass deficient you will probably crank the bass up too high and end up with excessively boomy sound on other systems If your studio is reverberant we don t recommend mixing or mastering in the bathroom you won t be able to accurately judge the effect of ambience processing on your mix What you really need is a mixing and mastering environment that is relatively dry in the sonic sense that is and has a broad flat frequency response without unnatural dips or peaks If your studio isn t perfect and this is the norm for home studios then expe rience is the answer The more you mix master and listen to the results on different
432. n and EQ of the channel that you selected by pressing its SEL key A The controls and keys at the right of the display apply only to the channel that was last selected by its SEL key 1p If the VIEW PAN EQ or DYN screens are shown in the display you can control the parameters of the channel selected by its SEL key 4 To operate the faders use the HOME key or AUX 1 AUX 8 keys of the FADER MODE section to select the fader mode the parameters that will be controlled by the faders FADER MODE __ m D H AUX AUX AUX AUX 1 2 3 4 AUX AUX AUX AUX 5 6 7 8 EFF 1 EFF 2 HOME The table on the following page shows the parameters controlled by each fader will change 64 AWAS operation Guide O If the mixing layer is 1 16 Fader mode Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 Input level of input channels 1 16 Send level from input channels 1 16 to AUX 1 Send level from input channels 1 16 to AUX 2 Send level from input channels 1 16 to AUX 3 Send level from input channels 1 16 to AUX 4 Send level from input channels 1 16 to AUX 5 Send level from input chann
433. n as the REC record button F5 AUTO REC key Automatically record automix This is the same function as the AUTO REC auto record button 118 awune Reference Guide AUTOMIX screen Memory page Store or recall automix Function Store or recall automix data to from memory Key operation e AUTO MIX key gt F2 Mem ory key e Repeatedly press the AUTO MIX key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt AMIX button gt Mem m ory tab Or Screen functions TITLE EDIT button Use this to edit the name memory title of an automix stored in memory When you move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button and press the ENTER key the TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to input a name A maximum of 16 characters can be input For details on inputting characters refer to Opera tion Guide P 60 2 RECALL button Recall the currently selected automix from the list A If you select an automix number in which nothing has been stored and attempt to recall it an error message of CANNOT AUTOMIX RECALL will appear and recall will not be possible 3 STORE button This button stores the current automix data into memory You can select an automix number 1 16 as the store destination A When you execute the Store operation the automix data that had previously been stored in that number will be erased SCENE O Initi
434. n functions Input select 1 8 2 Input select 9 16 Select from the following input sources to send to audio tracks 1 8 9 16 e ANALOG 1 8 INPUT jacks 1 8 e SLOT1 1 8 INPUT 1 8 of an I O card slot 1 e SLOT2 1 8 INPUT 1 8 of an I O card slot 2 vp It is possible to select the same source for Q and In this case the same signal will be sent to tracks 1 8 and tracks 9 16 3 EXECUTE button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the settings of the AW4416 will change as follows e Mix parameters such as fader pan and EQ for each channel will be reset e REC TRACK SELECT keys 1 16 will blink and tracks 1 16 will be in record ready mode e The output of all tracks 1 16 will be muted e Input patch and recorder input patch settings will be switched as follows 8 AWU Reference Guide QUICK REC screen Input select 1 8 l Recorder e Input jacks 1 8 input e I O card SLOT1 1 8 Mixer section patch Recorder section e I O card SLOT2 1 8 Input channels 1 8 Tracks 1 8 e Input jacks 1 8 Input channels 9 16 Tracks 9 16 e I O card SLOT1 1 8 e I O card SLOT2 1 8 ft 2 Input select 9 16 After you have used the EXECUTE button you can simply press the REC key PLAY key to simultaneously record 16 inputs on tracks 1 16 Kpl e To defeat record ready and mute settings for tracks 1 16 press the ALL SAFE key
435. n of the performance will be the copy source pat tern SAMP PADET __ _ TRIG if 00 00 E oO d copy A Ttsmeltr O A 2CSmPitre J A SCSmPitr J FR PAO A 4CSme ite 3 l o O O O O Jm Pan 2 B 1C N0 ASN 10 O O O O D O ara a ASN I ASN J A SC NO ASN IJ ASN 1 A Trig List TO PAD Specify the pad track to which you wish to copy TO START Specify the location in the pad track selected for TO PAD at which the data will be copied TIMES Specify the number of times the data will be copied If you specify a multiple number of cop ies the pattern selected as the copy source will be copied repeatedly INTERVAL When copying multiple times this parameter specifies the interval between copy destination patterns INSERT Select whether the pattern will be inserted Insert or overwritten OverWrite at the copy destination If you select Insert the events fol lowing the insert location will be moved toward the end of the song for the length of the copied pattern If you select OverWrite the existing events will be erased for the length of the cop ied pattern EXECUTE Execute the copy 88 Awut8s Reference Guide SAMP PAD screen 2 ERASE menu Using this menu a specified range of events recorded in the convenience sequencer can be erased When you move the cursor here and press the ENTER key the following b
436. n of a marker it is not possible to move the marker beyond the preceding or following marker AVVULNG Operation Guide 123 Chapter6 Transport locate operations Start point 00 00 00 00 00 Absolute time ABS zero 00 00 00 000 00 00 05 000 00 00 10 000 Song Start point 00 00 05 00 00 Absolute time ABS zero 0 00 05 000 100 00 00 000 100 00 05 000 However please be aware that changing the Start point will not affect the time code display of the counter If you want the time code display to match the abso lute time display set the time code top to the Start point Refer to Reference Guide SONG screen Setting page Start point 00 00 05 00 00 Absolute time ABS zero Time _0 00 05 000 00 00 00 000 00 00 10 000 Song 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 Time code display 124 awvuuns operation Guide Chapter6 Transport locate operations Deleting a locate point A locate point except for the Start End points can be deleted as follows A Be aware that a locate point you delete cannot be recovered 1 Press the TRACK key gt F4 key TRACK GGGG_ NEW SONG MARK ADJ 00 0 1 3 1 529 J 120 0 4 4 MARK ADJUST G 66 62 62 284 0G 01 20 597 01 03 632 2 Move the cursor to the display area of the locate point you wish to delete and press the
437. n on the channels that are off A A channel cannot belong to more than one mute group If a channel that is already assigned to a mute group is assigned to another group only the newly assigned group will be valid EQ ATI GRP 2728s _ __ seo MOWI1 00 00 00 000 al Data MUTE GROUP 2 ENABLE button Turn mute groups E H on off 1p If you wish to change the on off status after assigning a channel to a group you can use the ENABLE button of that group to tempo rarily disable the group E Additional functions in the Mute Grp page In the Mute Grp page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional function to the F1 key e F1 ALL CLEAR key Clear all mute group settings AVVULNG Reference Guide 59 DYN DLY screen Dyn Edit page Dynamics processor parameter settings Function Set the dynamics processor param eters for the selected channel Key operation e DYN key gt F1 Dyn Edit key e Repeatedly press the DYN key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt DYN button gt Dyn Edit tab Screen functions KEYIN SOURCE Select one of the following key in signals to control the dynamics processor SELF POST EQ The post EQ signal of the same channel SELF PRE EQ The pre EQ signal of the same channel AUX 1 OUT The signal being output to AUX bus 1 AUX 2 OUT The signal being
438. n the off if HPF LPF is selected ATT knob a message of Can t Copy This Parameter will appear and the copy will not F2 BAND FLAT key Reset only the selected band to a boost cut amount of 0 0 dB off if HPF LPF is selected 3 To execute the copy move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key F5 COPY ATT TO ALL key Copy the attenuation setting of the selected A channel to all channels However the stereo output channel is excepted occur Only the attenuation setting will be copied If you wish to copy EQ settings you must store the settings in the library and recall them into the copy destination channel For the proce dure refer to page 47 AVVULG Reference Guide 55 EQ ATT GRP EQ ATT GRP screen Library page Store or recall EQ settings Function Store EQ settings in the EQ library or recall a stored EQ program Key operation e EQ key gt F2 Library key e Repeatedly press the EQ key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt EQ button gt Library tab Screen functions O SEL CH This indicates the currently selected channel 2 EQ graph This graphically displays the EQ settings 3 Output meter This meter shows the post EQ output level TITLE EDIT button Use this to edit the name library title of the EQ program stored in the EQ library A library name of up to 16 characters can be input Mo
439. n the left edge of the list indicating that the corre sponding song is selected for the Copy operation vip You may select multiple songs including the current song for copying 3 Move the cursor to the COPY button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the Copy operation e If you decide to cancel the Copy operation move the cursor to the CAN CEL button and press the EN TER key After the Copy operation is executed the hard disk will contain two songs with identical song name date and size To avoid confusion we recommend that you change the song name immediately 4 To execute the Copy operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The current song will be saved automatically and then the Copy operation will be executed AVVUUIG Operation Guide 181 Chapter1 1 Song management Optimizing a song By using the top panel UNDO key and REDO key you can cancel or re exe cute the last performed recording or track editing operation By repeatedly press ing the UNDO key you can retrace as many as 15 previous operations Undo redo can be a very convenient function but when you record or perform a track editing operation data for the corresponding number of Undo operations must be maintained and this data will occupy space on the hard disk The Optimize command deletes any audio data that is not currently being used by the song i e it deletes t
440. nal for the various digital outputs SET UP INPUT 1 00 00 0 00 000 lai ligt Data a e ea DIT IER_SETUPi OUTPUT ON OFF WORD LENGTH BIT vicitaL st out pnanarnaaa Key operation e SETUP key gt F1 Dither Out key e Repeatedly press the SETUP key until the screen shown at the right appears 1 In the SET UP screen the tabs displayed at the bottom of the screen are divided into two groups If the Dither Out tab is not assigned to the F1 key when you press the SETUP key press the SHIFT key F1 CHANGE TAB key to switch the tabs OPTION OUT 3 SLOT 1 Mouse operation i M button gt SETU button gt Dither Out tab oe Screen functions E Additional functions in the Dither ON OFF dithering on off Out page Turn dithering on off for the DIGITAL STEREO In the Dither Out page you can press the SHIFT OUT jack DIGITAL OUT or the output chan key to assign the following function to the F1 key nels of the OPTION I O slots OPTION OUT SLOT CETE e Dithering is a process by which a small amount of noise is added to the signal in order to make the sound smoother prevent ing the obtrusive sound that can occur if bits are discarded when digital audio data is STEVE CPANGE TAB Key transmitted from a high resolution system to a lower resolution system for example when copying from a 24 bit system to a 16 bit sys tem e For digital I O card
441. name For details on inputting text refer to page 60 of the Operation Guide A Library numbers 0 and 1 are recall only pre set programs and their names cannot be edited Also numbers in which channel set tings have not been stored will be displayed as No Data and their title cannot be edited RECALL button Recall the currently selected settings from the list inputs 00 00 00 000 Ea DVN pany VIEL 00063 nen siya SCENE OO Initial Data SEL GH 6 18 CURRENT Aa ms n CH SETTING B ce sample No LIBRARY TITLE of No Data aL No Data 2 No Data 1 Reset CH dB gt is Ron i Library esesseso wee A errre If you select a number in which nothing has been stored and attempt to recall it an error message of ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL will be displayed and recall will not be pos sible 6 STORE button Store the current channel settings A Library numbers 0 and 1 are recall only pre set programs data cannot be stored in them Data can be stored only in library numbers 2 64 LIBRARY No library number This shows the library number 1 64 LIBRARY TITLE This shows the name assigned to the library ROM This write prohibit symbol is displayed for recall only numbers 0 1 SOURCE CHANNEL This shows the original channel from which the settings were stored For preset numbers 0 1 this is displayed as GENERAL
442. nce Guide VIEW screen PAN Adjust the panning between the L R channels of the stereo bus or between odd numbered gt even numbered buses If you move the cursor to the PAN knob and press the ENTER key the knob will move to the center position Fader group This area shows the fader group to which the channel belongs You can also defeat or register groups in this page Q Mute group This area shows the mute group to which the channel belongs You can also defeat or register groups in this page Input output meter This shows the input level of the input channel monitor channel or return channel and the output level of the stereo output channel D Pair This shows the pairing status Pair ing can also be set defeated in this page 2 ASSIGN button Use this button to insert an exter nal effect or internal effect into the channel Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to access a screen like the following EFF INSERT 1 INSERTION EFF TYPE SETTING INPUT OFF OFF button When this button is on an effect will not be inserted INT EFF 1 button When this button is on internal effect 1 will be inserted into the corresponding channel Return channel VIEN E NEW SONI scene 00 lE RIN 1 O0 00 00 0 30 fase Data esecesssessncevecsere uo I PHASE PAN ROUT 1 00 00 00 0D 00 00 nnan am E Sei i
443. ncluded in the corresponding track s will be copied YES or whether only the currently selected virtual track will be copied NO e EXECUTE Execute the command vip If you selected one track of a pair of tracks as the copy destination the same content will be copied to both of the paired tracks EXCHG exchange Exchange the audio data of two tracks e FR TRACK from track e TO TRACK Select the two tracks that will be exchanged For TO TRACK it is also possible to select an unre corded track e ALLV TR all virtual tracks Select whether all virtual tracks included in the two tracks will be exchanged YES or whether only the currently selected virtual tracks will be exchanged NO e EXECUTE Execute the command SLIP Shift the audio data of the entire track forward or backward e TRACK Select the track that you wish to shift forward or backward For the Slip command you can spec ify all tracks as the subject of the operation To do so rotate the DATA JOG dial all the way clockwise when setting the TRACK parameter to make the selection read AL C ALL CUR RENT With this setting all virtual tracks cur rently selected for tracks 1 16 will be selected for the operation e ALLV TR all virtual tracks Select whether all virtual tracks included in the corresponding track s will be moved YES or whether only the currently selected virtual track will be moved NO e SLIP Specify the t
444. nd Digital Village for their support Additional mixing and production by Kent Ibbott YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA CORPORATION V678610 RO 1 IP 36 Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division P O Box 3 Hamamatsu 430 8651 Japan 00 08 7000 AP Printed in Japan
445. ng a hard disk the recorder section and mixer sec tion will fail to operate correctly and the AW4416 will be damaged as well About the internal hard disk On the AW4416 all data necessary for reproducing a composition mixer set tings recorder settings audio data etc is stored on the hard disk as a song An internal hard disk is attached to the ADP25H 2 5 inch hard disk adapter and installed in the 2 5 HARD DISK DRIVE slot located on the rear panel Hard disks with the following specifications can be used Type IDE 2 5 inch attachment location conforms to SFF 8201 Thickness no particular limitation Capacity no particular limitation however the AW4416 can use a maximum capacity of 64 GB Models known to work consult your local Yamaha distributor or refer to the website at the following URL lt http www aw44 16 com gt A e By models known to work we mean commercially available models that Yamaha has obtained installed in the AW 4416 and successfully tested by means of various operational tests However we cannot take into account slight differences in performance that may occur due to the manufacturing tol erances of each manufacturer Hard disks are precision devices Strong physical shock magnetism static electricity or excessive current etc can damage the data on a hard disk You must use media such as an external SCSI device or CD RW to backup your important musical data Please be aw
446. ng on the AW4416 5 A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear asking you confirm the recall operation CONFIRMATION Will Recall DYN Lib 011 ARE YOU SURE 7 6 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The E B Finger dynamics program will be loaded into input channel 8 7 Press the F1 key The DYN DLY screen Dyn Edit page will appear In this page you can set the parameters of the dynamics processor 8 Press the ENTER key and turn on the ON OFF button located in the lower left of the screen As the name suggests the ON OFF button turns the dynamics processor on off DYH DLY jocoso NEW sons peee E IHPUT amp 00 00 00 000 Initial Data QQ THRESHOLD G RATIO OUT GAIN dB i 121 i G 8dB ATTACK i RELEASE KNEE Gms i 6ms i hard 9 While playing the bass move the cursor to the PARAMETER area in the lower right of the screen and adjust the parameters of the dynamics processor e Five types of dynamics processor are provided CMP compressor EXP expander GAT gate CPS compander S and CPH compander H Each type has different parameters For details on the parameters of each type see the Reference Guide e It is not possible to change the type of the dynamics processor in the Dyn Edit page For this reason if you wish to use a specific type you must first load a program that uses that type from the dynamics library and then modify its parameters as necessar
447. ng two ways in which fader movements recorded in automix will be edited ABSOLUTE This is the usual mode in which previously recorded fader events are erased and the new events recorded RELATIVE In this mode the previously recorded fader operation events are combined with the new events and recorded This is convenient when you wish to add relative changes to the previ ously recorded fader movements AUTOMIX screen Fader Edit Mode RELATIVE RET on Fader movement before editing I l l l l l l l l Fader movement after editing 7 Fader movement edited in RELATIVE mode Fader Edit Mode RELATIVE RET off END off Fader movement before editing Fader movement edited in RELATIVE mode Fader Edit Mode RELATIVE RET off END on Fader movement before editing Fader movement after editing gt Da Fader movement after editing 7 Fader movement edited in RELATIVE mode NEW MIX button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the current automix will be erased and a new automix will be created A When a song is in its initial state there is no current automix You must first create a new automix before you can operate the automix 8 UNDO When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the content that was last recorded in the automix will be erased return ing the automix to
448. nitored by the MONITOR OUT jacks PHONES jack 3 SEL MODE select mode Select one of the following two ways by which the monitored signal will be selected when the Solo function is on SET UP screen LAST SOLO Additional functions in the Solo When the Solo function is on only the channel last selected by pressing its ON key will be Setup page monitored In the Solo Setup page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following function to the F1 key MIX SOLO When the Solo function is on all channels selected by pressing their ON keys will be monitored 4 LEVEL This adjusts the level of the signal that is sent to the SOLO bus when RECORDING SOLO mode is selected for F1 CHANGE TAB key SOLO SAFE CHANNEL Switch between the two types of tab display This area selects the channels that will be excluded from the Solo function when MIX DOWN SOLO is selected for Channels that are turned on in this area will not be affected when you press the SOLO key E AVVULNG Reference Guide 27 Backup page Backup a song Function Backup song data from the internal hard disk to a SCSI device e g internal CD RW drive or external MO drive Key operation e Repeatedly press the FILE key until the screen shown at the right appears e FILE key gt F1 Backup key Mouse operation M button gt FILE button gt Backup tab Screen function
449. nly to an AC outlet of the type stated in this Owner s Manual or as marked on the unit Failure to do so is a fire and electri cal shock hazard Do not scratch bend twist pull or heat the power cord A damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard Do not place heavy objects including this unit on top of the power cord A damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard In particular be careful not to place heavy objects on a power cord covered by a carpet If you notice any abnormality such as smoke odor or noise or if a foreign object or liquid gets inside the unit turn it off immediately Remove the power cord from the AC outlet Consult your dealer for repair Using the unit in this condition is a fire and electrical shock hazard Should this unit be dropped or the cabinet be damaged turn the power switch off remove the power plug from the AC outlet and contact your dealer If you continue using the unit without heeding this instruction fire or electrical shock may result If the power cord is damaged i e cut or a bare wire is exposed ask your dealer for a replacement Using the unit with a damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard Do not modify the unit Doing so is a fire and electrical shock hazard g Cautions When rack mounting the unit allow enough free space around the unit for normal ventilation This should be 10 cm at the sides 20 cm behind and 30 cm above Fo
450. nsert the protective pad that was included with it into the drive A Ifyou transport the AW4416 without packing it as described at the above any damage or malfunctions that occur during transport may not be covered under warranty Even if the AW4416 is packed as described at the above any damage or mal functions that occur due to dropping the unit etc may not be covered under warranty Please handle the AW 4416 with care Vibration during use The internal hard disk or CD RW drive of the AW4416 are very sensitive to vibra tion Do not allow them to be subject to vibration or shock during operation and do not move the AW4416 while its power is turned on In particular you must never apply physical shock or vibration while the access indicator of the level meter counter is lit since this may damage the hard disk itself 18 Awutne operation Guide Welcome to the world of the AW4416 This chapter explains the features and basic concepts of the AW4416 and outlines the signal flow Features of the AW4416 The AW4416 is an audio workstation that combines a digital mixer hard disk recorder multi effects and sampling pads It is the only equipment you need to perform the entire music production process from multi track recording mixing audio editing effect processing and creating a final CD In the following pages of this manual the functionality of each section is described separately
451. nsport buttons 1 8 channel 1 8 channel 17 24 9 14 channel 9 14 15 channel 15 return1 16 channel 16 return 2 17 stereo master SHIFT x 2 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 HIGH HI MID LO MID LOW PAN Q F G 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BANK EDIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ST ALL SAFE TRACK EDIT NUM LOCATE I BI MARK AUTO PUNCH IN OUT SET REPEAT A B ROLL BACK kK RTZ PI CANCEL REW FF STOP PLAY REC AUNE Reference Guide Appendix 47 Appendix Others Display Control I O WORD CLOCK IN WORD CLOCK OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT THRU MTC OUT TO HOST SCSI MOUSE Foot switch ABS REL button PEAK HOLD button AUTO MATION button AUTOMIX SCENE SCENE MEMORY button STORE RECALL JOG ON button UNDO button REDO button CUR SOR button a gt A V DATA ENTRY but ton JOG SHUTTLE ENTER button 320 x 240 dots graphical LCD with contrast control 3 color FL display BNC BNC 5 pin DIN 5 pin DIN 5 pin DIN 8 pin mini DIN 50 pin half pitch D Sub 9 pin D Sub Phone jack Appendix 48 AULAS Reference Guide Appendix Dimensions 147 7 132 1 7 6 Unit mm Specifications and external appearance subject to change without notice For European Model Purchaser User Information specified in EN55103 1 and EN55103 2 Inrush Current 30A Conformed Environment E1 E2 E3 and E4 A
452. nt lights lower faders 1 16 and or the STEREO fader SWORD TIOCK MTC SCF He e m INT EXT SLAVE d 0 FINE EINE 9 L R level meter After you have set the level rewind the song to the beginning Then hold down the Transport section REC key and press the PLAY key gt Recording on the stereo track will begin A In order to create an audio CD 44 1 kHz there must be at least four seconds of data in the stereo track When you are finished recording press the STOP W key To listen to the newly recorded stereo track press the Recorder section TRACK key gt F3 key The TRACK screen Stereo page will appear allowing you to play back or erase the stereo track When the AW4416 is in the initial state the M mute button in the upper left of the screen will be turned on muting the stereo track TRACK TEMPLATE SONG PEST ETT STEREO 00 04 05 054 J 120 0 44 STEREO TRACK STATUS m ne R ERASE Move the cursor to the M mute button and press the ENTER key Muting of the stereo track will be defeated allowing the stereo track to play back At this time the stereo track will automatically be assigned to monitor channels 1 2 and the remaining monitor channels will be muted If you play back the song in this state the stereo track can be monitored via monitor c
453. numbers and scene names stored in scene memory will be shown in the center of the display The last recalled scene will be highlighted in the list For scene numbers in which no data has been stored the scene number field will indicate No Data SCEHE 88881 NEW SONG ___ crewe Gea INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data i LIGRARY TITLE aL Ho Data wl Ho Data a Ho Data Ho Data HA Initial Data 204 Awun operation Guide Chapterl 3 Scene memory 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the store destination scene number 01 96 Ho LIBRARY TITLE FRT TITLE EDIT Ho Data Ho Data PROTECTION A mnitial Data A Scene number 00 is for recall only and cannot be stored Be aware that if you select a previously stored scene number and execute the Store operation the previous scene will be lost 3 Use the CURSOR lt p gt A keys to move the cursor to the STORE button in the screen and press the ENTER key The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to specify the name of the scene scene name TITLE EDIT Dritial Data oe PRESS7OK TO STORE SHIFT Lock El Lins WEEE EE HE ROMO AHEAD WWE CLI AAO MEI Edo 4 Use the CURSOR lt p gt A V keys and the DATA JOG dial to specify the name of the scene For details on inputting characters refer to page 60 5 To store the scene move the cursor to the OK button in the screen and
454. o engage repeat playback see page 118 of the operation guide for details Start with the Drums Use the channel ON keys to turn off all tracks except the stereo drums on 1 and 2 leave the STEREO track on too Since the drums are recorded in stereo on tracks 1 and 2 and you ll want to adjust the levels of those tracks simultaneously it s a good idea to pair the tracks to make adjusting level and other parameters easier To do this 1 Press the track 2 SEL key while holding the track 1 SEL key 2 When the CHANNEL PAIRING window appears select the MONITOR 1 2 mode and press ENTER The tracks are now paired so that when you move the fader for one track the other will automatically follow Also note that in the MIXER VIEW display the pan and routing controls for both channels appear in the same display Now to pan the stereo drum tracks left and right to create a stereo image There is a tendency to pan stereo drum tracks or any type of stereo track for that matter hard left and right but depending on how the drums have been recorded or the type of drum module you re using this isn t always a good idea If the hi hat is way over in one channel and the low floor tom hard over in the opposite chan nel you have an inordinately large drum set For a more realistic drum image in 12 aways Tutorial Tutorial Mixdown cases where the drums or other instrument seems to occupy the entire stereo
455. o noise performance Compressor CMP parameters Parameter Value Threshold dB 54 to 0 55 points Ratio 1 0 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 10 20 16 points Attack ms 0 to 120 121 points Outgain dB 0to 18 36 points Knee hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 points Release ms 5 ms to 42 3 sec 6 ms to 46 0 sec 2 8 ms to 63 4 sec 3 160 points 1 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48 kHz 2 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz 3 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor Signals at a level below the threshold pass through unaffected Signals at and above the threshold level are compressed by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter Ratio controls the amount of compression the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 2 1 ratio for example a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 5 dB change in output level For a 5 1 ratio a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 2 dB change in output level Attack controls how soon the signal is compressed once the compressor has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is compressed almost immediately With a slow attack ti
456. o the patch library vsys 2 er bed oe Bysshe doe ene ots 138 Recalling a patch program 22 o2 e i ebeedayeed core vate eee 139 Patching input output jacks to an insert I O point 140 Using the Quick Rec function 0 cee eee eee eee 143 Chapter 9 Track and virtual track operations 147 The track structure of the AW4416 0 cece ee eee eee 147 Switching virtual tracks 0 cee ee cee eee eee 149 Pairing track ssc ge d gce ote St Gro gra sya aah es Gay ae ava ea Sree wees es 151 Editing tracks and virtual tracks 0 0 cece eens 152 Tracks parts and regions 22 ocotd bigs be dic hurwedede had 152 Naming a virtual track of region oo 24 00 ses00s beeelee cas 153 Naming a virtual track 4423 cose ares way Buceey 8 Meee Se ea eee 2 153 N ming a Tegime apna ae oe Or aR ean eee a 155 Track editing procedure ex siey tie yok eo emotes fee 156 Virtual track editing procedure 2024 ciesvae deen es eee ss 159 Editing command list iis4 05 lt 0 364 esematd a vauieke teed pea 161 TRACK MENU seene ote be Fi eG era alcstonenit au 161 PART TCI plea erent By Gide as tanna Maoia ia Etats ts 162 REGION MENU cits ereenn anaa Sig ie hi aha aaah as 45 163 Chapter 10 Internal effects 2 2 2 165 About the internal effects 0 cece ee eee eee ee 165 Using AUX send return seve wd etwan sb eeae ee ae wee 165 Inserting an effect into a channel 4 24 ciat cd had eos 165
457. ocate functions and auto punch in out A total of eight locate keys are provided start end RTZ A B in out and roll back In addition you can set 99 markers for each song making it fast and easy to locate to any desired point Auto punch in out at the specified punch in and punch out points is also provided The AW4416 also has a built in click metro nome linked with the tempo map 20 Awvutns operation Guide Chapterl1 Welcome to the world of the AW4416 O Sampling pad section O Assign 16 sounds to the sampling pads Sixteen sounds can be assigned to the eight pads with switchable A B banks Sounds can be sampled into these pads at the same 16 bit 24 bit and 44 1 kHz 48 kHz audio quality as for recording Sampling sources can be taken from a sound file on hard disk an external input from the mixer or from a WAV file on a SCSI device The playback timing can be recorded on a special sequencer track and edited later Pad polyphony is eight notes and a total of approximately 90 seconds can be sampled in the pads 16 bit 44 1 kHz O CD RW drive option O CD RW drive can be installed internally You can produce an audio CD off line using stereo tracks from the hard disk This allows entire process from recording to CD production to be completed within a single unit The CD RW drive can also be used to store recorded data making backups easy Playback of audio CD s and loading from CD ROM is also sup ported
458. of the current song e However the mastering function cannot be used if the current song has a sam pling frequency of 48 kHz In this case you must load a 44 1 kHz song before you begin the mastering procedure AVVUUIG Operation Guide 259 Chapter1 7 Mastering 5 Move the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE button if you wish to master using Track At Once or to the DISC AT ONCE button if you wish to mas ter using Disc At Once Then press the ENTER key If you are using CD RW media only DISC AT ONCE can be used The following screen is an example of when you have inserted CD R media in the tray moved the cursor to TRACK AT ONCE and pressed the ENTER key MASTERING ELYES ___ WRITE co 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 ST TRACK WRITE TO CO FINALIZE piira iG TRACK ONCE WRITE SPEED INS PEN xo Chew Loe jt Ee cine ODE ie Write CD 6 Move the cursor to the NEW button at the bottom of the display and press the ENTER key The list in the right of the display will show information the name of the song containing the stereo track the size of the stereo track and the copy protect set ting for the stereo track that will be written to CD audio track 1 Ca CE Ca COPYRIGHT 260 Awun operation Guide Chapter1 7 Mastering 7 Move the cursor to the stereo track data area of the list and use the DATA JOG dial to select the stereo track that you wish to write to track 1 of the C
459. off for each track Hees J 120 0 4 4 Key operation e TRACK key gt F1 TR View key e Repeatedly press the TRACK key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt TRAC button gt TR View tab be gL Om Faol Screen functions 4 T track A This column shows the track number 1 16 Up to 16 characters can be specified as the 2 B bus name of a virtual track but only the first eight This column indicates the type of signal that is characters will be displayed in this column sent to the input recorder input of each track The name can be edited in the EDIT screen 1 16 The abbreviations have the following sig TR Edit page nificance V virtual track e BI BB Buses 1 8 This column shows the virtual track number 1 e D1 D16 Direct output of input chan 8 that is selected for each track nels 1 16 NAME Ke Virtual tracks are selected in the TRACK screen V Track page This column shows the name of the virtual track currently selected for each track 1 16 When you record something on a track a default M mute name of V Tr x y x track number 1 16 In this column you can turn muting on off for y virtual track number 1 8 will be assigned each track Move the cursor to the column automatically Tracks on which nothing has and press the ENTER key to switch muting on been
460. oint B point In point Out point Start Point End point TRACK Seger NEH SONG MARK ADJ O0 00 00 000 J 128 0 4f 4 MARE AOUST 0A 61 19 714 66 68 37 928 Marker number A e Except for the Start End points the displayed location of the locate points will differ depending on the currently selected counter display type Time Time Code Measure The Start point and End point are always displayed as time code regardless of the currently selected display method e The automix of the AW4416 operates according to the absolute time of the song Be aware that if you change the start point after recording events in the automix the song will no longer be synchronized with the automix 2 Use the CURSOR lt p gt AJ keys to move the cursor and use the DATA JOG dial to adjust the location of each locate point When you change the Start point the absolute time zero of the song will change For example if you change the Start point to 00 00 05 00 00 the location five seconds after the beginning of the song will be specified as absolute time zero If you press the RTZ key when absolute time is displayed you will move to this point A The smallest unit of adjustment will be a millisecond if time SECOND is selected as the counter display method sub frame if time code display TIME CO DE is selected or beats if measure display MEASURE is selected e When adjusting the locatio
461. on Adjust the position of markers or locate points such as the IN OUT points or erase locate points or markers Key operation e TRACK key gt F4 Mark Adj key e Repeatedly press the TRACK key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt TRAC button gt Mark Adj tab Screen functions a LOCATOR POSITION Display the positions of the various locate points listed below The position of an existing locate point can be adjusted by moving the cur sor to the desired numerical box and rotating the DATAJOG dial Locate points that have not been set are displayed as START END start point end point These locate points normally correspond with the beginning and end of the song When you create a new song the Start point will be ini tially set to absolute time 00 00 00 000 When you record the song the end of the song will automatically be set as the End point A e The start end points are always displayed as time code regardless of the counter display method selected in the SONG screen Setting page e If measure display is selected in the SONG screen Setting page only beats will be dis played for a location earlier than the start point IN OUT in point out point These locate points can be used as the punch in out points The in out points are automati cally set at the beginning and end of the area that was last recorded and can
462. onal functions in the Patch OUT page In the Patch OUT page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following function to the F1 key e F1 CHANGE TAB key Switch between the two tab displays AVVULNG Reference Guide 17 SET UP screen Patch Lib page Store or recall patching settings Function Store the settings of the Patch IN Patch OUT pages in the patch library or recall previously stored settings Key operation e SETUP key gt F3 Patch Lib key played at the bottom of the screen are divided into two groups If the Patch e Repeatedly press the SETUP key until URREN 4 the display shown at right appears TRACK Bonomo oson on pao 1 In the SET UP screen the tabs dis 3 16 2999 aoge og ongona Eel Lib tab is not assigned to the F3 key i ba iia when you press the SETUP key press a SHIFT key F1 CHANGE TAB key to switch the tabs Mouse operation M button gt SETU button gt Patch Lib tab Screen functions O SEL CH This indicates the channel currently selected by the SEL key 2 INPUT This indicates the input signal patched to the channel shown in Refer to the explanation of the Patch IN page for the meaning of each abbreviation 3 BUS This area shows the buses to which the signal of the channel is being sent For buses 1 8 i amp and the stereo bus ED buses to which that channel is assigned will be displayed as white chara
463. ong 178 Awvuuns operation Guide Chapter1 1 Song management Deleting copying a song Here s how to delete a song saved on the internal hard disk or copy duplicate a song within the hard disk O Deleting a song 1 Press the SONG key gt F3 key The SONG screen Song Edit page will appear in the display The upper part of the display will show a list of the songs currently saved on the hard disk The current song will be highlighted in the list The song currently selected for editing will be indicated by an E symbol at the left of the list A Songs you delete will be lost forever Use this procedure with caution A When you delete copy or optimize a song the current song will be saved auto matically 00 07 29 14 37 336MB 16 44 00 07 26 19 11 163NB 16 44 151MB 16 44 10E 166MB 16 44 The song currently selected for editing 2 Song name 3 Date and time when the song was saved 4 Song size Song quantization sampling frequency Song protect A It is not possible to delete a protected song You must load the song and turn off the PROTECT button in the SONG screen Setting page before performing the Delete operation AVVUUIG Operation Guide 179 Chapter1 1 Song management 2 Move the cursor to the list in the upper part of the display use the DATA JOG dial to select the song that you wish to delete and press the ENTER key An E
464. oop HA 00 00 02 00A time than the actual time length of the data LOOP2 HAY aa Ls Also processing cannot be cancelled once B the operation has been executed finger snar wayv 60 00 00 132 sidestick wayv 00 00 00 335 WAY 4 Move the cursor to the file list and use the DATA JOG dial to select the WAV file that you wish to import The file enclosed by the dotted lines in the cen ter of the list is selected for the operation vip indicates the current directory and indicates the directory above To return to the next highest directory move the cursor to O and press the ENTER key AULAE Reference Guide 85 SAMP PAD screen PAD Edit page Editing a sample pad Function Assign a name to a sampling pad erase a pad or trim a sample Key operation e Sampling pad section EDIT pad gt F4 PAD Edit key e Repeatedly press the EDIT pad until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt SAMP PAD EDIT button gt PAD Edit tab Screen functions NAME This menu allows you to assign the desired name to a pad When you move the cursor to this menu and press the ENTER key the fol lowing buttons will appear CE These buttons have the following functions PAD Select the bank pad number of the pad that you wish to name NAME Access the NAME EDIT screen where you can input a name You can input a maximum of 8 characters
465. operating as the MMC SLAVE and the device number of the message matches or is 7F it will begin recording if stopped or punch in if playing STATUS 11110000 FO ID No OPT TE System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclu sive Destination 00 7E 7F all call Machine Control Command mcc sub id Record strobe End Of Exclusive 4 13 7 MMC RECORD EXIT lt Reception gt If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE and the device number of the message matches or is 7F the AW4416 will punch out if it had been recording STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01111111 7F Device ID Oddddddd dd Command 00000110 06 00000110 06 EOX 11110111 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclu sive Destination 00 7E 7F all call Machine Control Command mecc sub id Record Exit End Of Exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Command 00000110 06 00000111 07 EOX 11110111 EZ 4 13 8 MMC RESET lt Transmission gt Transmitted with a device number of 7F when song loading is completed lt Reception gt If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE and the device number of the message matches or is 7F internal MMC related settings will be reset to the power on state STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01111111 7F System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclu sive Destination 00 7E 7F all call Machine Control Command mcc sub id 00001101 OD Reset EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 4 13 9 MMC WRITE lt Recep
466. operation Guide Chapterl 4 Automix 11 When you are finished with punch in out press the top panel STOP key A message will ask you whether you wish to update the automix with the newly recorded content If you wish to update the automix move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Editing automix off line While the AW4416 is off line you can adjust the timing or value of previously recorded events or delete unwanted events The following types of event can be edited off line e Fader operations for each channel e ON key operations for each channel e Pan operations for each channel e Scene memory or library recall operations Event times are always displayed as absolute song time For this reason we rec ommend that you display the absolute song time in the counter when editing events off line P 39 As an example we will explain how to edit a scene recall or library recall event 1 Press the AUTOMIX key gt F4 key The EventList page will appear displaying a list of the events recorded in auto mix AUTOMIX cooo O00 ee MONI 16 ke 00 00 00 000 Initial Data B Lean rawr SELECTED CH EVENTI MEMORY CHANNEL 4 l DUPLICATE 7 DELETE Jf Use the SCENE LIB CH ON PAN and FADER buttons in the upper part of the screen to select the type of events that will be displayed The following events correspond to each button SCENE LIB button
467. or only the corresponding channel Here we will explain how you can use the Solo function to monitor only the desired track during mix down Press the SETUP key gt F3 key The SET UP screen Solo Setup page will appear In this page you can make vari ous settings for the Solo function SET UP GeueG NEW SONG EE ae TE a scene Be IHPUT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data a o JE SOLO SETUP If the Solo Setup tab is not assigned to the F3 key press the SHIFT key F1 key to switch the tab and then press the F3 key 96 AwvuLNs operation Guide Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 As an alternative to using the Solo function you can also monitor just a specific track by pressing the TRACK CU E switch in the level meters counter section and then using REC TRACK SELECT keys 1 16 to select a track By using this method the direct output of the recorder the signal that has not passed through the monitor channel can be sent directly to the MONITOR OUT jacks and the PHONES jack 2 Move the cursor to the SOLO STATUS area and select one of the follow ing two modes for the Solo function O RECORDING SOLO In this mode the solo signal is routed through the dedicated SOLO bus and out put from the MONITOR OUT jacks and PHONES jack The stereo bus and buses 1 8 will not be affected You can monitor even channels that are not assigned to the stereo bus or to buses 1 8 or channels whose ON key is turned off Xe
468. ore quickly and easily Happy mixing 30 Awuuns Tutorial Tutorial Glossary Glossary g Galileo An early astronomer who lived in the 16 1 7th century and who most certainly never saw anything like an interplanetary probe We re pretty sure he never saw an AW4416 either O Close miking As the term implies close miking involves placing a microphone very close to the source in order to maximize the amount of sound picked up from the desired source in relation to other ambient sound O Condenser Microphone Condenser microphones employ a very thin light diaphragm with a low moving mass to pick up sound This makes it possible to achieve high sensitivity and broad frequency response but has the disadvantage that this type of microphone tends to be delicate They can be damaged by physical shock as well as high humidity Condenser microphones particularly the more delicate large dia phragm types yep they have a large diaphragm are generally never taken out of the studio O Dynamic Microphone Dynamic microphones use a rigid diaphragm connected to a coil which moves in a magnetic field to transform acoustic sound into electric energy Dynamic microphones are generally rugged and provide consistent performance under a wide range of conditions but they rarely provide the high sensitivity and flat broad frequency response of their condenser counterparts Still dynamics are the microphones of choice fo
469. ored a scene whose protect setting is on or scene number 00 3 Use the CURSOR lt p gt A keys to move the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button in the upper left of the display and press the ENTER key The TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to edit the scene name j TITLE EDIT DEST MIY FRESS 70K TO STORE SHIFT Lock l Lins WEEE Ee HHEROWMOE WADE HWE CL AAO MEH Edo 4 Use the CURSOR lt p gt AJ 9 keys and the ENTER key to input the new scene name 5 To finalize the edited scene name move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The scene name will be updated If you wish to cancel without changing the scene name move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key AVVUUIG Operation Guide 207 Chapter1 3 Scene memory Protecting a scene You can memory protect each individual scene that has been stored A scene number for which protect is turned on can only be recalled Press the SCENE key gt F1 key The Scene Mem page of the SCENE screen will appear e oso 00 000 Ges INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 rerate SCENE MEMORY LIBRARY 3 TR Enan TITLE PRT Ho Data ad FINAL Hls aZ TEST MI 2 2 TEST His 1 Hid TEMLATE Be Initial Data 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the scene number that you wish to protect A It is not possible to select a scene number that has not been stored or scene num
470. ormal phase feedback minus values OFFSET 0 100 Delay time offset DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY 1 Decay speed LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 8 00 k Hz Parametric equalizer center frequency EQ G 12 to 12 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQQ 10 0 10 Parametric equalizer band width HSH F 50 0 16 0 k Hz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz DYNA PHASER Dynamically controlled phaser Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT MIDI Control source input signal or MIDI note on velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity FB GAIN 99 to 99 PA eee normal phase feedback minus values OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset STAGE 2 4 8 10 12 14 16 Number of phase shift stages DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY 1 Decay speed LSH F 21 2 8 00 k Hz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 to 12 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50 0 16 0 k Hz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 to 12 dB High shelving filter gain MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48kHz Appendix 16
471. output to AUX bus 2 LEFT POST EQ The post EQ signal of the next channel to the left LEFT PRE EQ The pre EQ signal of the next channel to the left A LEFT POST EQ or LEFT PRE EQ cannot be selected for input channel 1 monitor chan nel 1 or the stereo output channel A Return channels 1 2 do not have dynamics processors ie 00 00 00 000 SELF POST EQ AUXI OUT SELF PREEQ AUX2 OUT LEFT POST Ea CURVE ot Hea o mm PRE EQ q En SOURCE ae rele E sue Initial Decta _ mt OYNAMICS DIT goga NEW SON __ ON OFF PARAMETER OUT GAIN 6 0dB Ore OT We KNEE ATTACK i RELEASE 7ms H 174ms If either one of two paired channels exceeds the threshold level both channels will oper ate simultaneously Channel If LEFT is selected as the KEYIN SOURCE the key in signal source channel will be shown here 3 ST LINK ON OFF stereo link on off button If this button is on dynamics processor parame ter settings and operation will be linked for adjacent odd numbered gt even numbered channels A For the stereo out channel and for paired channels this Stereo Link setting will always be on and cannot be defeated A When Stereo Link is turned on the dynamics processor settings of the odd numbered channel will be copied to the even num bered channel 60 AWURE Reference Guide DYN DLY screen
472. ove the cursor to this area and rotate the DATAJOG dial to select the point where the scene will be inserted The location currently selected for insertion is displayed as INSER TION POINT 3 EXECUTE button Move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key to change the order of the scenes A Even if you select a scene in which nothing has been stored it is not possible to change its order WETHER id oO 00 000 1 00 00 0 GE TUA MEMORY SORT DESTINATION Chorus Al Intro 2 Intro 1 a il TEMPLATE emp fe 128 awune Reference Guide Appendix Appendix Preset EQ Program Parameters 00 2 Preset Effects Programs snack ts eo 4s oo euee ae Bae 6 Effects Parameters youu ead ere kate aaa es Aa pea 8 Dynamics Processors ofeach a ees Pada wiakceees 24 Preset Dynamics Programs 0 00 c ee ee eens 24 Preset Dynamics Program Parameters 29 Troubleshooting urs Av costo ate sedis yy Sle oe ees 35 Display message list 3a dake Sens eet haw 39 MEOSSABES sag oo ee DN ae dis Mant ail eam en 39 POPUP messages irs ke cs a ee nh ey ate Oe why ome Maken TN 41 Specifications sasesana 43 General Specifications 0 0 eee ee eee eee 43 MIXEP SCCUON icc ccs Rit RERE TREERE eats AEE EATE RA 44 Recorder section vh24 fale iG be a bea bees 46 COntrOlS ahi ia igh oes aie uke nays ea ie ohne A Mia Renee 47 Control On so eee be
473. ow will appear asking you to confirm execution of Quick Rec CONFIRMATION Quick Rec with This Setting ARE YOU SURE 7 4 To execute the Quick Rec settings move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key All REC TRACK SELECT keys will blink and the input patch settings and mix parameters of each channel will be reset At this time the signal flow will be as follows Recorder Input Input OPTION I O patch Mixer section patch slot 1 Recorder section vo Input channels 1 8 Tracks 1 8 car OPTION 1 0 if vo slot 2 Input channels 9 16 Tracks 9 16 e If you decide to cancel without executing Quick Rec move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the EN TER key e Atthis time you can also turn off the blinking REC TRACK SELECT buttons to limit the number of recording tracks or re adjust the mix parameters and input patch settings of each channel 5 Press the TRACK key gt F1 key The display will show the TRACK screen TR View page As you can see from the display shown below executing Quick Rec will turn input monitor on I field for all tracks and will mute M field all tracks TRACK J296 HEH SONG EAEN BES TA VIEH 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 CEL nae UMN REC ae DF ALL HUTE OFF NEUT HONHITOR T f TR View f 144 awun operation Guide Chapter8 Patching 6 Play back the audio source connected to the input jacks of the I O cards slots 1
474. oweh eles ag 83 Let s recordl axon saviad tir hee eye t eda A ee eee 85 Overdubhing issscion s sworn kid ont eae Gm oak a E 87 Set the input level onc whee eG a tA CR RE eRe Ree eA RS 87 Assign the signal to a DUSt cube tetera keiEe ee kane 88 Put the track in record ready mode 0 0000 89 Make monitor sQningsics einen At ee ee ete G ee ee 4 90 Using EQ and the dynamics processor 0 0 005 91 Using the four band EQ spain td hon See ee al nde tone eens 91 Using the dynamics processor 244 nase ee canes es deen ee eS 92 Lets OVEIdUD 2st eouetevnwnd Ghee ketene talde Sues 94 AVY ULNG Operation Guide Table of contents Mixdown ciao ps a8S wre inme are 4 BOOS ES le es 95 Creating the mix balance of the tracks 0 95 Using the Solo TUnChOn oie Ave ee e E o tes 96 Using the internal effects 472 020 v ia ueek tee eee es takes 99 Other convenient functions 00 0 cece cece eee ees 101 Fader SrOUDS sci sant ee E R a one ta eee ace ae aad 101 M t OU i iiaa e a e A Gi ake a a Sanna Wo ear whe 101 POLI eoar ia oia ie amp ORS Poke Beem ates ck ne Raa ee SRS aed 102 Recording the stereo tracks 3 n o 44 ckewutsadaey bees eed 102 Saving a scene song 324 seo e i Sowde Geet See t ot eae eas 105 Saving A SCENE SA ice wry eh gh EN es tone RS ek he eae wl RENN 105 Saving Asong Rates tie Sg hgrack a R oy w Goin del guy ana tes ES 106 Chapter 6 Transport locate operations 1
475. ower of the AW4416 is turned off For safety s sake disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet 3 On the rear panel of the AW4416 remove the two screws that hold the ADP25H 2 5 inch hard disk adapter to the 2 5 HARD DISK DRIVE slot ADP25H 2 5 inch hard disk adapter AVVULNG Operation Guide 3 Before you begin 4 Place the hard disk on the ADP25H as shown in the diagram below align the screw holes of the hard disk and the ADP25H and use your screwdriver to fasten the screws at the four locations shown 5 Plug the connector of the flat cable extending from the ADP25H into the connector of the hard disk Flat cable connector e Even if it is difficult to plug in the connector do not use excessive pressure to force it in This may damage the hard disk or you may injure yourself 6 Aligning the ADP25H with the hard disk attached with the rails inside the 2 5 HARD DISK DRIVE slot push it in until it clicks into place 7 Use the screws that you removed in step 3 to fasten the ADP25H into the 2 5 HARD DISK DRIVE slot A If you fail to tighten the screws all the way the hard disk may vibrate and fail to operate correctly A Do not turn on the power of the AW4416 until all options have been installed When you turn on the power of the AW4416 after installing a new hard disk formatting of the hard disk will begin automatically P 15 4 Aw uu Operation Guide Befor
476. owing information is also displayed in the song list e SONG NAME First 16 characters of the song name e SAVED AT Date and time at which the song was last saved SIZE nsn Size of the song e BIT FS Quantization bit number sampling frequency of the song PRT eee Song protect on off status e When you use the cursor to select a song in the list and press the ENTER key the E symbol that indicates the editing selection will alternately appear and disappear e Depending on the operation you may be able to select more than one song for edit ing 2 DELETE button This button deletes the song marked by the E symbol from the internal hard disk A e The current song cannot be deleted e A deleted song is gone forever Use this operation with caution WETHER _ SONG EDIT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 SAVED AT SIZE Bil FS PRT 66 03 63 RUMINATION 00r 0S7 DEMO SONG BT 88 67 38 86 87 24 1 HI G ACE OF SPACE 66 07 23 14 op SS T 9 3 COPY button This button copies the song marked by the E symbol onto the internal hard disk 4 OPTIMIZE button This button optimizes the song marked by the E symbol When optimize is executed audio files not currently used by that song e g undo files will be deleted A Optimize can be executed on only one song at a time Optimize can be executed on the current song 6 MIXER IMP mix
477. pad refer to the Ref erence Guide A If you attempt to assign a sample that would exceed the memory capacity an error message of Memory Full will be displayed and the assignment will not be executed Yip You can check the approximate amount of sample pad memory in the SM PL PAD screen PAD Edit page EDIT pad gt F4 key AVVUUIG Operation Guide 189 Chapter12 Sampling pads Trimming a sample You can make fine adjustments to the playback start location and playback end location of a sample assigned to a pad in order to eliminate unwanted portions at the beginning and end Use the TRIM IN command to adjust the playback start location and use the TRIM OUT command to adjust the playback end location Trimming a sample will not increase the sample size that can be assigned to the sampling pads Unwanted portions 7o o y Pa Adjust the playback Adjust the playback start location end location TRIM IN TRIM OUT 1 In the SAMPLING PAD section press the EDIT pad gt F4 The PAD Edit page will appear SAMP PAD J EtHER__ pap EDIT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 3 Chame gt y P 1CSamp 1th J j A 2C5 ltr 4 ERASE gt y At stSameltr A 4CSameitr Jf 3 rein 1H gt YA A zEiSameitr 3 ASN 4 TRIM OUT AT SE INO ASN A 8C N0 ASN ASN ia 7C NO ASN bd i 2 Move the cursor to the TRIM IN menu if you wish to edit the playback start location or the TRIM O
478. pecified for insertion cannot again be used via AU X send return until you reassign it to the AU X bus in the EFFECT PATCH area A If RTN 2 is set to EFF 2 L R in the Patch IN page performing this step will auto matically cancel the assignment O Inserting an effect into monitor channel 1 1 Press MONI key gt SEL key 1 Monitor channel 1 will be selected 2 Press the VIEW key gt F1 key The VIEW screen CH View page will appear in the display VIEL 22988 tEn Sons SCENE BO on 00 00 00 000 initiartara i for BBE te 2008 FAIR S HOHO lt 2 3 Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button in the EFFECT INSERT area and press the ENTER key The EFF INSERT SETTING popup window will appear In this popup window you can use the following four buttons to select the type of effect that will be inserted EFF INSERT SETTING HOM 1 INSERTION EFF TYPE SORE oss Effect insertion will be cancelled e INT EFF1 Insert internal effect 1 e INT EFF2 Insert internal effect 2 e EXTERNAL Insert an external effect The IN T EFF1 and INT EFF2 buttons cannot be turned on if the respective internal effect 1 2 has not been disconnected from AU X send 172 Awun operation Guide Chapter10 Internal effects 4 To insert effect 2 move the cursor to the INT EFF2 button and press the ENTER key In the popup window SEND will change to EFF2 and RTN wil
479. phone A microphone which will pick up sound equally from all directions Not often used in studio recording or live sound but this type of microphone can be useful when you want to capture the main source as well as it s environment room ambience for example in one go J Overheads Microphones that are placed overhead sometimes as a stereo pair to pick up the overall sound of an instrument or group of instruments Overheads are often used in addition to close miking when recording drums Microphones set up this way are also sometimes called showers for well obvious reasons O Closed Headphones This is the type of headphone that completely covers your ears rather than fitting in you ears or simply pressing against your ears This is definitely the type of headphones you want to use for monitoring while recording because they pre vent the headphone sound from leaking out to any microphones in the room and well as preventing extraneous sound from leaking in 32 Awuns Tutorial So Fine Written and arranged by Karl Christmas Engineered and produced by Darren Allison Vocals Rusharn Simpson Vocals backing vocals guitars and keyboards Karl Christmas Backing vocals Billie Godfrey Bass Finn Day Lewis Drums Andrew Small Recorded at Protocol Studios and Darren s Studios London Mixed at Transmedia Services Ltd Bedford UK Special thanks to Dreamhire John Henry s Hire HHB Communications a
480. place a strain on the motor and may cause malfunctions Make monitor settings Now we will send the signal of monitor channels 1 2 to the stereo bus so that it can be monitored via the MONITOR OUT jacks or the PHONES jack 1 Press the PAN key gt F3 key The PAN ROUTE screen Pan MONI page will appear In this page you can make bus assignments and pan settings for monitor channels 1 16 PAH ROUTE 22822 NEW SONG facem aa FE IHPUT 2 00 00 00 000 Initial Data J FAN i J ROUTING REC MONI 1 16 EHHE G BEE JE inol 4 CL HHHH m ea oq m 2 Press the MONI key Monitor channels 1 16 will be selected as the mixing layer 3 Hold down SEL key 1 and press SEL key 2 Just as we did for input channels 1 2 we will also pair monitor channels 1 2 When you simultaneously hold down the monitor channel 1 2 SEL keys the CHANNEL PAIRING popup window will appear CHAHHMEL PAIRING Choose a Fairing Mode i _IMPUT2 gt 1 i RESET BOTH 4 Move the cursor to one of the three buttons and press the ENTER key Monitor channels 1 2 will be paired 5 In the monitor channel 1 2 area make sure that the ST buttons are on and the 1 8 buttons are off With these settings the signal of the monitor channels will be sent to the stereo bus AVVUUIG Operation Guide 83 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 6 In the same way as for the input channels set the PAN knobs of mon
481. playing back and come to a location that you wish to listen to once again The rollback time is set to 5 seconds by default but can be adjusted as desired MARK SEARCH 3 ROLL BACK 1 With the song stopped press the UTILITY key gt F3 key UTILITY 62682 HEH SONG serene pa EE Initi M HI T 00 00 00 907 al Data 1 PLAY MODE Rollback time A fe i setting DISABLE d DISABLE 4 FL HETER FINE 2 Move the cursor to the ROLLBACK TIME field and use the DATA JOG dial to set the rollback time The rollback time can be adjusted in millisecond steps over a range of 0 5 sec onds default setting is 5 seconds 3 When the song is stopped or playing press the ROLL BACK key If the ROLL BACK key is pressed while stopped the current location will simply move back by the length of the rollback time If pressed while playing playback will resume immediately after the rollback occurs AVVULNG Operation Guide 113 Chapter6 Transport locate operations Locating to a specific point 3 4 You can directly specify a locate point as a numerical value and locate to it Here s how With the transport stopped press the NUM LOCATE key of the Locate section MARK SEARCH NUM LOCATE A If you have selected a screen where normal transport operations cannot be per formed such as the SONG screen or the MASTERING screen the NUM LO CAT
482. port Track At Once WRITE SPEED buttons Use the x1 x2 x4 and x6 buttons to select the writing speed normal speed double speed this reason the FINALIZE button will be dis played only if the TRACK AT ONCE button is turned on 10 aAwutns Reference Guide quad speed x6 speed Normally you should select the fastest speed supported by your CD RW drive MASTERING screen Track list Here you can select the stereo tracks that will be written as audio tracks on the CD The track list shows the following information TRACK This is the track number on the CD Move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATA JOG dial to change the track number SONG NAME SIZE COPY This shows the song name stereo track data size and copy protect setting of songs that con tain a stereo track Move the cursor to this area and use the DATAJOG dial to select the stereo track that will be written to the corresponding audio track A e The track list will show only the stereo tracks of songs whose sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz Stereo tracks of 48 kHz sampling frequency songs will not be displayed If CD R media containing data written using Track At Once is in the CD RW drive the SONG NAME SIZE COPY area will indicate EXISTING Total This shows the total of the SIZE column of the track list A maximum of approximately 650 MB can be written to 74 minute CD R RW media NEW button Add a n
483. ppendix Preset Effects Programs LIBRARY No library number This shows the library number 1 128 LIBRARY TITLE This shows the name assigned to each library number 9 S M stereo monaural This indicates whether the effect type used by each program is stereo or monaural Stereo effect types are indicated by S and monaural effect types are indicated by M ROM Recall only programs library numbers 1 41 are indicated by a write prohibit symbol in this column AVVULNG Reference Guide 71 AUX7 EFF1 and AUX8 EFF2 screens Selected program Store recall operations will apply to the pro gram enclosed by a dotted line in the library list In this page you can always use the DATA JOG dial to select the program regardless of where the cursor is located 2 EFFECT TYPE This displays the effect type used by the pro gram currently selected for store or recall A In general the effect library is common to both effects 1 and 2 However effect pro gram no 19 HQ Pitch can be used only by effect 2 Additional functions in the Library page In the Library page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following functions to the F1 F3 keys Le J Le Le J F1 TITLE EDIT key Use this to edit the name library title of the effect program saved in the library This is the same function as the TITLE EDIT button F2 RECALL key Recall the
484. pper right of the screen The display access menu will appear From this menu you can use the mouse to select screens Pryor DISPLAY ACCESS MENU boll UNIT CONTROL SETU FILE UTIL MIXER DISPLAY od ee Ee RECORDER AUTOMATION TRAC EDIT rr 56 AVW ULHG Operation Guide Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 2 In the display access menu click the button that corresponds to the desired screen 3 To changes pages within the same screen move the pointer to one of the tabs in the bottom of the screen and click the left or right mouse button The corresponding page will appear lt Click a tab gt Turning a button on off Here s how a button displayed in the screen can be turned on off O Using the controls of the top panel 1 Use the CURSOR lt p gt AJ keys to move the cursor to the desired button OFF lt Move the cursor gt 2 Press the ENTER key The button will be turned on or off lt Switch on off gt O Using the mouse 1 Move the pointer to the desired button OFF lt Move the pointer gt 2 Click the left or right button of the mouse lt Switch on off gt AVVUUIG Operation Guide 57 Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 Editing the value of a fader knob numerical box Here s how to edit the value of an on screen fader knob numerical box O Using the controls of the top panel 1 Use the CURSOR lt p
485. previously recorded position and the edited These are the same functions as in the Main position are displayed as shown in the follow page Refer to the explanation on page 115 ing diagram At this time the arrow displayed a i beside the bar graph indicates the direction in E Additional functions in the Fader which you can move the fader to return it to the Edit page ition diii i In the Fader Edit page you can press the SHIFT Previously recorded Fader position now key to assign the following functions to the F1 fader ay being ct F5 keys q l l 1G H 3 N zl o E a e F1 ABORT key Fader position now Previously recorded being recorded fader position F2 STOP key 1 If the fader is lower than 2 If the fader is higher than previously recorded previously recorded F3 PLAY key e F4 REC key e F5 AUTO REC key These are identical to the additional functions of the Main page 2 FADER EDIT OUT These are the same functions as the END RET buttons of the Main page Refer to the explana tion on page 115 If the RET button is on the knob located at the right sets the time over AVVULNG Reference Guide 121 AUTOMIX screen Event List page Edit events off line Function Perform off line editing of the scene library recall channel on off pan and fade operations recorded in the automix Key operation e AUTO MIX key gt F4 Event List key
486. pter5 Recording on the AW4416 When you switch mixing layers the faders will move instantly to new positions Be careful not to place objects near the faders MIXING LAYER ca MONI INPUT RECORDER The mixing layer is the group of channels controlled by the top panel ON keys 1 16 SEL keys 1 16 and faders 1 16 The AW4416 has the following three mixing layers Input channels 1 16 2 Input channels 17 24 return channels 3 Monitor channels Even when you switch to a different mixing layer the fader locations and ON key settings of the previous mixing layer are remembered and will return when that mixing layer is selected once again Make sure that ON keys 1 2 are turned on and raise faders 1 2 to the O dB position While playing your instrument watch the level meters displayed in the screen and adjust the input level of inputs 1 2 When the AW4416 is in the initial state the input jacks are patched to input channels as follows As you can see from this diagram the rhythm machine or drum mics connected to INPUT jacks 1 2 are patched to input channels 1 2 Mixer section INPUT jacks 1 8 Input channels 1 8 OPTION I O 1 O card Slot 2 Input channels 9 16 OPTION I O slot 2 1 O card O Input channels 17 24 Now raise the faders of input channels 1 2 and check that the signals ar
487. r computer The following types of computer require the following PORT SELECT parameter settings e IBM PC series TO HOST PC 2 38 4 kbps e Apple Macintosh series models with modem printer port TO HOST MAC A e Depending on your system you may need separate driver software in order to make serial port connections e When connecting to a Macintosh you must set the MIDI interface clock set ting of your application to 1 MHz 234 Aaw operation Guide Chapter1 5 MIDI Switching AW4416 scenes from an external device By transmitting program changes from an external device to the AW4416 you can recall AW4416 scene memories by remote control 1 Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external device to the MIDI IN connector of the AW4416 MIDI IN connector MIDI OUT connector External device MIDI sequencer etc 2 Press the MIDI key and then press the F1 key The MIDI Setup page will appear in the display In this page you can select the MIDI channel on which the AW4416 will transmit and receive and specify whether program changes and control changes will be transmitted and received MIDI gogai NEW SONG scene 00 E INPUTI 00 00 00 000 Initial Data l OMNI ECHO TX RX m Tx CH On MIOLCHANNEL J f MIDI OUT SEL f PORT SELECT l 3 Move the cursor to the RX receive button in the PROGRAM CHANGE area and press
488. r high SPL Sound Pressure Level percussive sources such as drums particularly when close miked and live sound Jg Phantom Power A number of studio type microphones have built in preamplifiers that naturally require some sort of power to operate Power can be provided by an external power supply not too common these days batteries or phantom power from the console It s called phantom power because it sort of sneaks into the micro phone from the console via the microphone cable without affecting the audio signal Neat trick huh Since dynamic microphones rarely require external power most phantom powered microphones are condenser types g Baffle Usually a movable sound absorbing partition which can be placed strategically in the studio to prevent leakage between sources and microphones Awuuis Tutorial 31 Tutorial Glossary O Directional Microphone A microphone which primarily picks up sound from only one general direction is a directional microphone This can be handy in maximizing separation in the studio and in reducing feedback on stage because you can simply aim the microphone away from sources of sound you don t want to pick up Cardioid Pattern This refers to a widely used type of response pattern for directional microphones It s called a cardioid pattern because the graph representing this type of response sort of resembles a heart shape Sort of O Omni directional Micro
489. r normal ventilation during use remove the rear of the rack or open a ven tilation hole If the airflow is not adequate the unit will heat up inside and may cause a fire This unit has ventilation holes at the bottom to prevent the internal tempera ture rising too high Do not block them Blocked ventilation holes are a fire hazard Hold the power cord plug when disconnecting it from an AC outlet Never pull the cord A damaged power cord is a potential fire and electrical shock hazard V AW uUNs Operation Guide Important e Do not touch the power plug with wet hands Doing so is a potential electri cal shock hazard e Use only the included power supply cable for this unit Using other types may be a fire hazard e Always touch a well grounded metal surface or the like to fully discharge any static electric charge on your body and clothing before handling an I O card or hard disk Neglecting this precaution can cause damage to the unit from static electric ity e Be careful not to touch the leads metal feet on the rear side when handling an I O card or hard disk Touching the leads can cause contact defects O Operating Notes e Using a mobile telephone near this unit may induce noise If noise occurs use the telephone away from the unit e XLR type connectors are wired as follows pin 1 ground pin 2 hot and pin 3 cold e Insert TRS phone jacks are wired as follows sleeve ground tip send and ring
490. r the AW 4416 is turned on it will not function correctly After the opening screen appears in the display of the AW4416 a TRACK screen like the following will appear TRACK gagaan NEW SONG EERE Ma TR view 00 00 00 000 d 120 0 4 amp 4 When the AW4416 is first turned on after a new internal hard disk has been installed the display will ask Format OK Y Enter N Any If you now press the ENTER key formatting of the hard disk will begin automatically When for matting is completed the screen shown above will appear Never turn off the power of the AW 4416 while formatting is in progress Doing so may damage the hard disk itself AI ULUNE Operation Guide 1 5 Important points you must observe Setting the internal clock When the AW4416 is shipped from the factory its internal clock is set to Japan time When you create a song on the AW4416 the song will store the date and time using this internal time If it becomes necessary to reset the internal clock after replacing a run down bat tery or for any other reason use the following procedure 1 Press the UTILITY key gt F4 key The UTILITY screen Prefer 3 page will appear UTILITY 20666 NEW SONG ____ ecene BG E INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data i h BATTERY l MOUSE SPEED REMOVABLE BACKUP stow O 2 A A rast INT SCSI TERMINATOR MASTERING MODE E E CO BACKUP MODE Coes gt NEEM gt ae Use the C
491. r the Delete command you can specify all tracks as the subject of the operation To do so rotate the DATA JIOG dial all the way clockwise when setting the TRACK parameter to make the selection read AL C ALL CUR RENT With this setting the START END range of the virtual tracks currently selected for tracks 1 16 will be selected for the operation e ALLV TR all virtual tracks Select whether data will be deleted from all vir tual tracks included in the selected track s YES or only from the currently selected virtual track NO e START Specify the starting location of the part to be deleted e END Specify the ending location of the part to be deleted e EXECUTE Execute the command START END Ee 1 02 ALIA ULUNE Reference Guide EDIT screen COPY Copy the audio data of the selected part to the specified location of the specified track e FR TRACK from track Select the copy source track e FR START from start Specify the starting location of the copy source part e FR END from end Specify the ending location of the copy source part e ALLV TR all virtual tracks Select whether all virtual tracks included in the corresponding track s will be copied YES or whether only the currently selected virtual track will be copied NO e TO TRACK Select the copy destination track e TO START Specify the starting location of the copy destina tion e TIMES Specify the number of
492. r to use this connector you will need to set the MIDI port setting to TO HOST PC1 TO HOST PC 2 or TO HOST MAC depend ing on the computer you are using gt P 233 e The TO HOST connector cannot be used simultaneously with the MIDI IN connector and MIDI OUT THRU connector e MTC cannot be transmitted via the TO HOST connector If you need to trans mit MTC to your computer use the MTC OUT connector e Regardless of the port setting the OUT THRU connector will function as THRU if MIDI THRU is selected 232 Awun operation Guide Chapter1 5 MIDI Using the TO HOST connector for direct connection to your computer Connections To exchange MIDI messages directly between the AW4416 and your computer use a separately sold cable to connect the TO HOST connector of the AW4416 to the serial port of your computer Connection to an IBM PC series computer Connection cable YAMAHA CCJ PC2 o T PORT SELECT Setting TO Riera RS 232C oooh Pac as COmmector DB 9 AW4416 IBM PC series Connection to an Apple Macintosh series computer Connection cable YAMAHA CCJ MAC q PORT SELECT Setting TO HOST MODEM TO HOSTMAC Connector port i AW4416 Apple Mac
493. racters and numerals When you have finished inputting the desired text move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key AVVUUNG Operation Guide 61 Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 O Using the mouse 1 Perform the scene or library Save operation or create a new song If you perform the scene or library Save operation a TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the scene or library If you create a new song a NAME EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the song Then a COMMENT EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to add a comment to the song In the text palette click the mouse on the button for the character that you wish to input The corresponding character symbol numeral will be input into the text input box and the highlighted area will move to the right yE 5 Gi c Fili F lt Click a character button gt Xe If you wish to correct a character that you input by mistake click the incorrect char acter to move the highlighted area to that location Input the remaining characters in the same way Yip When using the mouse you can use the C18 button button amp buttons E E NAME EDIT COMMENT EDIT windows only or EGE button by clicking the corresponding button in the text palette When you have finished inputting the desired text move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key 62 AUS
494. rded are dis played as E 20a NEW SONG 00 1 0 035 958 ot Sn Y TRACK SETT ESSE EATEN J 120 0 4 4 TRACK je Y TRACK 1Y Te 1 1 2V Tr 2 1 Y 3CV Tr 3 1 4C Tr 4 2 9 SC NO REC SCV Tr 6 1 Y 7CY Tr 7 1 SCV Tr 6 1 Y 9V Tr 9 4 l 1 l 1 l 1 16CV TriG 1 ep 11C NO REC 120 NO REC Y 13C0 NO REC 14 NO REC FEV Tr15 1 16CV Tr16 1 SSSSSSSSSS580855 DS OAT ofooeoveoooes off Fae REE eRe RR EE ofA For details on operating virtual tracks refer to Operation Guide Chapter 9 Track and vir tual track operations E Additional functions in the V Track page In the V Track page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional function to F1 e F1 REMAIN key The remaining recordable time will appear in the level meter counter and in the counter area of the display When you press the SHIFT key F1 REMAIN key once again the normal display will reappear vip The remaining recordable time will depend on the number of tracks that is currently in record ready mode Q4 Awuuns Reference Guide TRACK screen Stereo page Playing or erasing the stereo track Function Play back the stereo track or erase the recorded contents Key operation e TRACK key gt F3 Stereo key e Repeatedly press the TRACK key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M but
495. rded fader movements even when you are editing fader operations If you leave the RET button turned on the fader will auto matically return to the previous location when editing ends which is convenient when you are editing only a portion of the fader operations e If you want the fader locations at which edit ing ended to be maintained to the end of the automix it is convenient to turn on the END button AW ULNE Reference Guide 115 AUTOMIX screen When END on 1 1 l l 1 1 J i L L 1 l j l l 1 i 1 l l 1 l l l i 1 l l 1 x l Edited fader movement When RET on END off L L 1 1 l l l l l l Edited fader movement When RET off END off j 1 l l Edited fader movement OVERWRITE Switch recording on off for each parameter Each button corresponds to the following parameters FADER Fader operations of each channel CH ON ON key operations of each channel PAN Pan operations of each channel EQ EQ operations of each channel 116 Aw Reference Guide Previously recorded fader movement Previously recorded fader movement Previously recorded fader movement Fader movement after editing lt RET on RET off he Fader movement after editing Md Fader movement after editing Mak 6 FADER EDIT MODE Select one of the followi
496. rea at the bottom of the display i LE ee EOFT STOF FLA H FEC UE AUTOREC E lt Additional function buttons gt 2 Continue to hold down the SHIFT key and press the function key F1 F5 that corresponds to the desired button The function assigned to the corresponding button will be executed O Using the mouse 1 In a screen where the E symbol is displayed click the E symbol Buttons for the additional functions will appear in the tab area at the bottom of the display lt Additional function buttons gt When using the mouse the additional function buttons will continue to be dis played even after you take your finger off of the mouse button 2 Directly click one of the additional function buttons The function assigned to the corresponding button will be executed AVVUUIG Operation Guide 59 Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 Inputting text When you create a new song or when you save the settings of a scene memory or library a popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the song or the settings Here s how to input text into the popup window O Using the controls of the tab page 1 Perform the scene or library Save operation or create a new song If you perform the scene or library Save operation a TITLE EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the scene or library If you create a new song a NAME EDIT popup window will appear allowing yo
497. recorded will be displayed as NO REC or off O for that track 90 AWURE Reference Guide TRACK screen A e On the AW4416 the number of tracks that can be played back simultaneously may be limited according to the quantization word bit length of the song and by the number of tracks being recorded simultaneously In this case a message of PLAY TRACK MUTE ON will be displayed and tracks that can not be played back will be forcibly muted If you wish to monitor a track that has been forcibly muted you must first turn muting on for other tracks and then defeat muting for the desired track If you simply attempt to defeat muting without increasing the num ber of muted tracks a message of CANNOT CHANGE MUTE will appear and muting cannot be defeated By pressing the ALL SAFE key you can can cel the record ready and muted status of all tracks The mute on off setting of the tracks does not affect the ON keys of the monitor chan nels 6 I input monitor This column indicates the signal that can be monitored for each track The track input signal is being monitored when is displayed and the track playback signal is being monitored when O is displayed The INPUT MONITOR setting the state of the REC TRACK SELECT key and the current transport mode will deter mine which signal is being monitored for each track Track view The regions continuous audio data recorded in a s
498. recorder pressing the REC TRACK SELECT key will cause the meter in the FL display to react e When a file input output page such as the SONG screen Song List page is displayed recording and playback are not possible e CD DAT DIGITAL REC in the UTILITY screen Pre fer 2 page may be set to DISABLE e Please read and understand the copyright warn ing gt P 36 before using digital input signals ECan t record on the STEREO track e It is not possible to record on the STEREO track while recording on other tracks Can t play back the STEREO track e Muting may be selected in the TRACK screen Ste reo page e Are monitor channels 1 and 2 raised For STEREO track playback mode the signal is output from monitor channels 1 and 2 Not all tracks will play back e There are limitations on the number of tracks that can be simultaneously recorded or played Refer to page 90 The volume of a particular channel increases or decreases e Are the dynamics processor settings appropriate e EQ may have been recorded in the automix MiFaders move to the lowest position on their own e Automix may have been recorded e Faders 9 14 cannot be operated when the mixing layer is 17 24 RTN E Meters move even though the faders are lowered e The direct out setting may be PRE EQ or PRE FADER e The meter display may be set to PRE FADER Can t store a scene e Is the scene memory protected e A scene cannot be stored in scen
499. recording or editing operation that was last executed in the recorder section restoring the data to its previous state By repeatedly pressing the UNDO key you can return through as many as sixteen previous operations REDO key This key re executes the recording or editing operation that was cancelled by the UNDO key 40 Awutns operation Guide Chapter2 Parts and their functions AUTOMATION section The keys of this section access screen pages where you can operate the automix and scene memory functions AUTOMATION AUTO MIX SCENE X A The following screens correspond to these keys AUTOMIX key This key accesses the AUTOMIX screen where you can operate and edit auto mix SCENE key This key accesses the SCENE screen where you can perform scene memory oper ations SCENE MEMORY section In this section you can directly store or recall scene memories a a N SCENE MEMORY ities STORE key This key stores the state of the mixer section and input output patching into the scene number shown in the display or the level meter counter FILA keys These keys select the scene number for storing or recalling RECALL key This key recalls the scene whose number is shown in the display or in the level meter counter
500. red tracks Paired tracks are indicated by a i symbol and unpaired tracks by a symbol When editing tracks or parts both tracks of a pair will be selected for editing T track This column shows the track numbers 1 16 6 NAME This column shows the name of the virtual track currently selected for each track 1 16 Tracks that have already been recorded are assigned a default name of V Tr x y x track number 1 16 y virtual track number 1 8 Tracks in which nothing has been recorded will be dis played as NO REC A A name of up to 16 characters can be assigned to a virtual track but this column will show only the first eight characters V virtual track This shows the virtual track number 1 8 that is currently selected for each track 1 16 Virtual track numbers can be changed in the TRACK screen V Track page Track view In this area the regions included in each track are displayed as a bar graph The vertical line in the track view area indicates the location at which the area for editing has been set The symbols displayed at the bottom of the track view area indicate locate points and markers While editing the track and area selected for editing will be displayed as follows Track to edited Edited area NAME ee Me BER Tr 2 111 a SE NO REC 1 a When selecting the edit source and edit destina tion tracks as when copying or moving audio data the display will b
501. ribed below A eeeeeeeeaoeseeeaoeseeoeeeoeeeoeeeeeeaoeseeoeeeeeeoee ee ee When you backup on CD RW media TYPE 1 will be selected as the backup format regardless of this setting If the song being backed up will not fit on a single piece of CD RW media the backup can extend across multiple volumes of media AWURE Operation Guide 245 Chapter1 6 Backing up and restoring songs O TYPE1 This is the usual backup format in which part or all of the songs are backed up using the full capacity of the removable media This format has the advantage that even if the size of the song s being backed up exceeds the capacity of one vol ume of media the backup can be performed using multiple volumes of media If this format is selected the media will be formatted erased automatically before backup is performed O TYPE2 This backup format stores the specified song s or all songs as individual files on removable media This format has the advantage that new files can be stored on a volume of media that already contains data backed up in the same format How ever it is not possible to backup data that extends across multiple volumes Before you can use this format to backup on newly purchased media you must first manually format the media Backing up a song e If TYPE1 is selected as the backup format the media will automatically be formatted before the backup is performed e If TYPE2 is selected as the backup
502. ringS cscsssissessetesnssscesecedesesedsdeiedesodevavorscevevennvevaveoes 22 Tracks 11 12 amp 13 Chorus cceseesssseecccccceceeeeeseccceseceeeeeeaueaeeeeceeees 22 Track 14 Lead Vocal eeeeeesssneecccesessseccceceeeesessaceceeeeesseaeeceeeeeees 22 Saverthe Song cccninAnAneaae eal is ahaa hae 23 Phase 5 Finalize the Mix amp Set Up Automation eee eeeseceeeessreeeeeeseeees 24 WMS AULOMIIX serait cceesettet 23 foes Mec etes levi bassestacceseseeazestandeerenceeseacsceesstua 25 Phase 6 Use the Virtual Tracks to Create an Alternate Mix seee 27 Mastering css cree ad iacka ea naaa rea EEEE eaS AEEA AESA Arao aaie 28 Step 1 Set Up the Master EQ and Dynamics esesseeseseeeerrrrserrerserrereereees 28 Step 2 Record the Song to the Stereo Track seeseseeeseseeeerrrresrrerserrereereees 29 Step 3 Write the Song to a CD R Disk 0 eee ee eeesseeeeesseeeesseceeeesseeereeeee 30 PRACTICE Practice sso sccaseics sohud Genk suers soawesasaasvius innepinussdoussoaneereseosaebatius 30 Glossary sosa ieee ea Geese ieee ace ee See 31 AW UUIG Tutorial 3 Tutorial AW4416 Professional Audio Workstation 4 awue Tutorial Tutorial Laying Down the Basic Tracks Laying Down the Basic Tracks Although the basic tracks you ll use to assemble the So Fine mix have already been recorded for you of course you can add your own tracks if you like let s take a moment to discuss the init
503. rom when a pad was pressed until it was released Parameter area The parameters required in order to execute the editing operation can be set in this area vip For the procedure of recording or playing your pad performances and copying or eras ing a recorded performance refer to Opera tion Guide Chapter 12 Sampling pads Additional functions in the Trig List page In the Trig List page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional functions to the F1 F3 keys Le e CJ e F1 REMAIN key The counter will show the remaining time avail able for recording in the trigger list When you press the SHIFT key F1 REMAIN key once again the usual counter display will reappear Remaining time for recording in the trigger list Maaz HER SONG SAMP PA FROM RGH a franpal Remaining time for recording in the trigger list e F2 X ZOOM IN key Each time you press the SHIFT key F2 X ZOOM IN key the pad track view will zoom in horizontally three levels e F3 X ZOOM OUT key Each time you press the SHIFT key F3 X ZOOM OUT key the pad track view will zoom out horizontally three levels AVVULNG Reference Guide 89 TRACK screen TR View page Viewing the recorded content for each track Function View a bar graph that shows the regions recorded on each track and switch the input monitor mode or mute on
504. s Song list This list shows the songs saved on the internal hard disk The current song is highlighted in the list and songs selected for backup are indicated by a symbol in the BACKUP column The following information is also shown in the list e SONG NAME Song name e SAVED AT Date and time at which the song was last saved SIZE cuits Data size of the song o BIT FS Quantization word length sampling frequency of the song PRO viii Song protect on off setting 2 BACKUP SONG button This button selects whether the song currently selected in the song list will be included in the backup ENABLE or excluded from the backup DISABLE Move the cursor to this but ton and press the ENTER key to switch between ENABLE and DISABLE BACK UE SOURCE CURRENT i me a DEMO SONG 00 00 00 000 J i20 0 4 4 FILE BACKUP SAVED AT SIZE Bil FS PRT E 96 08 62 238MB 161MB 163MB ALL ENABLE ALL DISABLE a e i 3 ALL ENABLE button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key all songs will be selected for backup ALL DISABLE button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key all songs will be excluded from the backup SOURCE This shows the backup source drive internal hard disk This item is for display only and can not be modified DESTINATION This selects the SCSI ID number of t
505. s dithering is switched on off by pairs of adjacent odd numbered gt even numbered channels channels 1 2 3 4 Ue 2 WORD LENGTH BIT Select the word length number of bits for the signals that are output to the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack DIGITAL OUT or to digital I O cards installed in the OPTION I O slots OPTION OUT SLOT Set this to the word length of the destination device Switch between the two types of tab display 24 Awuus Reference Guide SET UP screen Dither TRK page Specify dithering and word length for tracks Function Turn dithering on off and specify the word length for recording on tracks 1 16 of the recorder Key operation e SETUP key gt F2 Dither TRK key e Repeatedly press the SETUP key until the screen shown at the right appears 1 In the SET UP screen the tabs dis played at the bottom of the screen are divided into two groups If the Dither TRK tab is not assigned to the F1 key when you press the SETUP key press the SHIFT key F1 CHANGE TAB key to switch the tabs Mouse operation M button gt SETUP button gt Dither TRK tab Screen functions REC TRACK In pairs of adjacent odd numbered gt even numbered tracks tracks 1 2 3 4 this indi cates the tracks for which you can specify dith ering and word length The settings for the stereo track are common to tracks 1 2 2 ON OFF dithering on off Turn dithering on off
506. s recalled 2 PROGRAM CHANGE RX program change reception Specify whether program changes will be received from external MIDI devices If this but ton is on receiving a program change will recall the scene assigned to that program num ber 3 PROGRAM CHANGE OMNI If this button is on program changes of all MIDI channels will be received regardless of the Rx receive channel setting PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO If this button is on received program changes will be re transmitted without change thru ed from the MIDI OUT connector or TO HOST connector nial goga NEW fa zlmeila SET 00 10 00 OO ERE Data m Ea gt Bx OMN CEER MIDI CHANNEL Uo Tx CH p nf 6 i Orai O MIDI OUT SEL call O MIDI m O 6 CONTROL CHANGE ECHO If this button is on received control changes will be re transmitted without change from the MIDI OUT connector or TO HOST connector 6 Tx CH transmit channel Select the channel 1 16 on which MIDI mes sages will be transmitted to external MIDI devices Rx CH receive channel Select the channel 1 16 on which MIDI mes sages will be received from external MIDI devices MIDI OUT SEL MIDI OUT select This selects whether the MIDI OUT connector will be used as MIDI OUT or as MIDI THRU If MIDI THRU is selected operations performed on the AW4416 itself will not be output A If you wish to transmit MIDI Clock
507. s doubles with the lead vocalist while the female chorus provides Ooh type support O 00 01 53 Male chorus brought back down to normal chorus level O 00 2 13 Once again the lead vocal 14 and lead guitar 6 are boosted a bit for the bridge The organ drops out a bit to leave room for the denser arrangement of the bridge section O 00 02 36 The level of the lead vocal track is briefly lowered just a bit to soften the impact of the very high notes O 00 02 47 Another brief dip in the lead vocal level to even out the dynamics O 00 02 57 Track 13 is boosted in preparation for the male rap part on the outro Track 3 contains the electronic drum part used on the outro so this track is also boosted The strings tracks 9 and 10 play an important role on the outro so they are boosted as well The level of the lead vocal track is reduced to move it more into the background O 00 02 58 The pan automation on the rap track 13 begins here Note that the rap part pans alternately to the left and right for each phrase and to the center for the final phrase O 00 03 33 Fade out 26 Awuus Tutorial Tutorial Mixdown Phase 6 Use the Virtual Tracks to Create an Alternate Mix If you feel that you need a little more practice with the mixing process try select ing the alternative string and vocal tracks we ve provided and see how they change the overall sound Otherwise you can skip ahead to the Mast
508. s invariably alter the levels of the tracks and you ll almost certainly need to make minor adjustments to compensate O Save the Song Once again now s a good time to save your work Press the WORK NAVIGATE SONG key to go to the SONG display if necessary also press the F1 function key to select the Song List page Move the cursor to SAVE on the display and press ENTER When the confirmation window appears move the cursor to OK and press ENTER again to actually save the song AW ULUNE Tutorial 19 Tutorial Mixdown Phase 4 Add Ambience Ambience effects such as reverb delay and echo are generally used to provide a sense of space and warmth So far we ve worked with the dry i e no effects tracks but many engineers and artists would already have ambience effects in place In fact many artists insist on monitoring wet while laying down the tracks There are no rules regarding when in the mix process you should add ambience but for this tutorial we ve chosen to make ambience a separate subject because unlike EQ and compression it doesn t directly affect the actual sound of the tracks Ambience adds to the sound rather than changing it For the sake of consistency we ll use only one reverb effect for the entire piece The AW4416 has two separate effect processors built in so it would be no prob lem to set up two different reverbs or other effects and use th
509. s stop play rec locate can be controlled If you select MMC MASTER from the MIDI SETUP menu MMC commands will be transmitted according to opera tions of the transport If you select MMC SLAVE the internal recorder will operate according to the MMC commands that are received 1 4 EFFECT CONTROL Depending on the effect type note on off messages can be received for control These settings are made by the parameters of the corre sponding effect 1 5 MIDI CLOCK transmission If you select MIDI CLOCK transmission from the MIDI SETUP menu MIDI clock messages will be transmitted dur ing playback and recording When the AW4416 is in MIDI clock transmission mode Start Stop Continue commands will be transmitted by the corresponding operations and MIDI Clock and Song Posi tion Pointer messages will be transmitted according to the MIDI Tempo Map 1 6 MTC master If you select MTC transmission from the MIDI SETUP menu MTC will be transmitted during playback and recording 1 7 MTC slave synchronization If you select SLAVE operation from the MIDI SETUP menu the AW4416 s internal recorder will operate in synchroniza tion with the MTC messages received from the MIDI IN or TO HOST connector 2 Internal settings and operations 2 1 MIDI SETUP 2 1 1 MIDI Channel 2 1 1 1 Transmit channel Select the MIDI channel used for transmission However transmissions in response to requests are trans mitted on the Receive Channel in order
510. s to 63 4 sec 2 160 points 1 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48kHz 2 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz 3 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the com pander Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected Signals at and below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parame ter Ratio controls the amount of companding the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 2 1 ratio for example a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 5 dB change in output level The hard compander CPH has a fixed ratio of 5 1 for expansion and the soft compander CPS has a fixed ratio of 1 5 1 for expansion Attack controls how soon the signal is companded once the compander has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is companded almost immediately With a slow attack time the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected Out Gain sets the compander s output signal level Width is used to determine the distance in decibels between the expander and the compressor With a width of 90 dB the expander is effectively switched off and the compander is simply a compressor limiter With a smaller width 30dB and a hi
511. se buttons select either pre fader or post fader signals to be sent from each channel to the effect send 4 Send levels These indicate the send level values of each channel GBL global If you move the cursor to the PRE button or the POST button and press the ENTER key the pre post setting of all channels in that page will be switched together Pre Pst IN AUX7 EFF 1 29999 NEW sone ___ FE SCENE INPUTI 00 00 00 000 initial Data AUX EFF1 PRE POST 1 22 73 En Ge en Ee oe on oo i o i Pre Pst MONI AUR7 EFF 1 22 22 NEW SONG ___ sceme EE input 00 00 00 000 Initial Data AUX EFF1 PRE POST AVVULNG Reference Guide 73 AUX7 EFF1 and AUX8 EFF2 screens A Additional functions in the Pre It is not possible to send signals from return Pst IN Pre Pst MONI pages channel 1 to AUX7 Likewise it is not possi In the Pre Pst IN Pre Pst MONI pages you can ble to send signals from return channel 2 to press the SHIFT key to assign the following func AUX8 This is to prevent the return signal of tions to the F1 F2 keys an effect from being accidentally returned to the same effect creating a loop Se aT e F1 GLOBAL PRE key Switch all channels in that page to pre fader This is the same function as the PRE button in the GBL area 6 e F2 GLOBAL POST key Switch all channels in that page to post fader This is the same function as the POST button
512. sed This method can be used to erase specific events from the corresponding section of the song Press the top panel STOP key A message will ask whether you wish to update the automix with the newly recorded content If you wish to update the automix move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key When you stop the song the on screen REC will return to the Off state However since the AUTO REC button will remain on you can punch in on the automix again by pressing the PLAY key If you wish to turn off the AUTO REC button move the cursor to the AUTO REC button and press the ENTER key 222 Awun operation Guide Chapterl 4 Automix Editing the fader movements Fader operation events recorded in the automix can be precisely edited in real time while watching the fader movements in a special screen As an example here we will explain how to edit the previously recorded fader movements of monitor channel 1 1 Press the HOME key of the FADER MODE section and the MONI key of the MIXING LAYER section 2 Locate the song to a point slightly earlier that where you wish to punch in 3 Press the AUTOMIX key gt F1 key Make sure that the button in the AUTOMIX field is displayed as ENABLE AUTOMIX o E e MONII6 00 0 1 21 5661 TEMPLATE AUTOMIX MAIN CJ CURRENT on 491k 95 UNDO 8k f FADER EDIT MODE AUTOMIX TRANSPORT d ABORT STOP PLAY REC
513. sed to switch pages within a screen lt Tabs gt In some screens you can access additional items or buttons in this area Such screens are indicated by a kysymbol in the lower left of the display Hemor lt E symbol indicating that there are additional tabs or buttons gt AW ULUS Operation Guide 53 Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 Level meters counter The level meters counter in the upper right of the top panel show the following information i A a S F ms M h a i i Peman D Turd Fart Tot ao 44 1k 48k LOCK waster J_ oe tht TH oa aren FF lI l pe Litt IIl tht lil INT EXT VARI slave ILI fg L FTF eh eo P T REMAIN indicator This will light when the counter 8 shows the remaining recording time In the TRACK screen TR View page this will appear when you press SHIFT F1 2 ABS REL indicator One of these indicators will light when the time timecode shown in the counter is either absolute time ABS or relative time REL To switch between absolute time and relative time use the ABS REL switch located at the right of the level meter counter 3 Counter This is the current time in the song You can select from the following units for display Refer to Reference Guide SONG screen Setting page e Time display SECOND
514. select the scene number 03 PHASE 3 MIX move the cursor to RECALL press ENTER select OK in the con firmation window and press ENTER again After doing this you ll need to press the MIXER VIEW key to go back to the VIEW display An alternate method of doing this without leaving the VIEW display is to use the panel SCENE MEMORY keys Use the and keys to select the scene to be recalled scene numbers and names appear in the upper right corner of the display then press RECALL select OK in the confirmation window press ENTER again and you re done As you re working on the various parts of the mix you ll constantly be turning channels on and off so you can hear things alone or in combination with certain other tracks In order to use the SOLO function for this select MIXDOWN SOLO and AFTER PAN in the Solo Setup page see page 96 of the operation guide for details The reason for this is that during this phase of the mix you ll almost always want to hear the tracks with EQ dynam ics and other effects applied Normal solo monitoring lets you hear the tracks dry and that won t help you here O Tracks 1 amp 2 Drums Listening to the drums in the context of the rough mix we notice that they sound a little dull The lower end is fine but the cymbals don t have quite the degree of presence we d like to hear Otherwise the drums are fine If we attempted to use any
515. serine 00 00 00 000 J 178 0 4 4 CURRENT SONG SETTING SONG MANE HAME 9060 MEH SONG EDIT COMMENT COMMENT J__ EDIT DISPLAY I PROTECT I TIME CODE The SONG NAME field in the upper part of the screen will show the song name of the current song and the COMMENT field will show the comment If no com ment has been assigned this will be displayed as No Description 2 To edit the song name move the cursor to the NAME EDIT button in the upper left of the screen and press the ENTER key The NAME EDIT window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the song 3 Use the character palette to modify the name Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key For details on inputting char acters refer to page 60 You will return to the SONG screen Setting page 4 To edit the comment move the cursor to the COMMENT EDIT button in the upper left of the screen and press the ENTER key The COMMENT EDIT window will appear allowing you to assign a comment to the song 5 Use the character palette to modify the comment Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key For details on inputting characters refer to page 60 You will return to the SONG screen Setting page A Simply modifying the song name in this page will not change the song name shown in the list of the SONG screen Song List page The new name will be reflected in the list when you save the current s
516. sh to use a previously recorded scene as the starting point for the automix recall that scene 2 Press the AUTOMIX key gt F2 key The following display will appear Autoni no oo 00 oo0 secre MONI 1 00 00 00 000 TEMPLATE No Data No Data NEW MIX button AUTOMIX TRANSPORT ABORT STOP 3 Move the cursor to the NEW MIX button in the upper right of the screen and press the ENTER key A message of Will Make New Automix ARE YOU SURE will appear CONFIRMATION Will Make New Automix ARE YOU SURE 7 4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The current automix will be erased and the automix will be initialized If you decide to cancel without creating a new automix move the cursor to the CANCEL button after step 3 and press the EN TER key 214 awun operation Guide Chapterl 4 Automix 5 Press the F4 key The Event List page will appear where you can edit the events recorded in the current automix AUTOMIX 22222 NEH sons Scene OT E Initi INPUT3 00 00 00 000 SCENEZLIE ch on SELECTED CH F On CENE LIB LEN ONLY 1 jf DUPLICATE f DELETE al Data EVENT MEMORY CHANNEL Notice that data for the scene number you saved in step 1 is entered at the 00 00 00 000 location in the TIME column This event recalls a scene at abso lute time location 00 00 00 000 of the song When you create a new automix data rec
517. sign CD DA to a sampling pad 2 5 sec a0ee ceases ews 82 WAV Import page eessssssssooseseesesesoosoeeeess 84 Assign a WAV file to a sampling pad 004 84 PAD Edit page sis Gaia oe enano iaa a eet E a E S 86 Editing a sample pad 3222 25 20 20viay es ais Rese es oe ORs 86 TRIB List PAG Coscia cranes cence ak Fea rate as rear ws D e a2 Par G 88 Recording and playing sampling pad operations 88 TRACK screen 2 ecw ce we eee ee eee eee se WO UREVIGW Date ada cot ts 84 a Git eee sat nee ee See oS 90 Viewing the recorded content for each track 90 V Track page fare tid ios Saree oie ata ed anes e eg 94 Switching virtual tracks 2 2 sat aiwaee ee tees eee eet eee 94 Stereo Pale noia oes ee Uwe RE ee SRR ows te OUR ee 95 Playing or erasing the stereo track 0 0 00 eee 95 Mark Adj ages sincas wv scams de dae when sateen oa ete Re 97 Adjust or erase locate points or markers 005 97 EDIT screen 6 466 ek bias eee ei eee see ee scenes JQ TREC AGE ace ucus ioni nrerin hi teil a ee ees oa 99 EGU TRACKS sec hut cawdepeepe he ceases aww eee eee ek 99 VR Edit pate seri rte tae totes cares tateas eu ewes 107 Edit virtual tracks 5543 ok Syd aed Aree ce Bee Ak ta Be Bl 107 CD Import page ois Soa et ineine Saeko sere eee 109 Import CD DA to an audio track 0 0 00 0 0b eee 109 Wavlmport page 5 scans cae yin h ala We ew we a OE RO oie 8 111 Import a WAV file to an
518. signed for high impedance instru ments It cannot be used simultaneously with the conventional INPUT 8 phone jack 2 Press the HOME key gt F1 key The HOME screen 1 24 Rtn page will appear HOE nooo 00 oF INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 iti 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 123 4 5 6 7 amp 3 16 1112 13 14 15 16 a T CHAN EL ll Too 02 00 00 O0 00 00 00 17 18 19 20 21 Z2 23 24 INPUT CHANNEL STEREO OUT j LEVEL 7 3 Press the MIXING LAYER section 1 16 key to select input channels 1 16 as the mixing layer 4 Make sure that ON key 8 is turned on and raise fader 8 to the 0 dB position A To avoid confusion turn off the ON keys for all input channels that you are not using 5 While producing sound on your instrument watch the input level of input channel 8 that is displayed in the on screen level meter If the AW4416 is in the initial state the electric bass connected to the INPUT 8 HI Z jack will be sent to input channel 8 If the level meter reaches the CLIP position lower GAIN control 8 AVVUUIG Operation Guide 87 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Assign the signal to a bus Here we will make settings so that the electric bass signal being input from input channel 8 will be sent to recorder track 3 via bus 3 1 Press the VIEW key gt F1 key The VIEW screen CH View page will appear The CH View page shows al
519. simulation type DST TYPE BUD NE Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume CAB DEP 0 100 Speaker cabinet simulation depth BASS 0 100 Bass tone control MIDDLE 0 100 Middle tone control TREBLE 0 100 High tone control EQF 99 8 0 kHz Parametric equalizer frequency EQG 12 to 12 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 Parametric equalizer bandwidth MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds 1 STK M1 STK M2 THRASH MIDBST CMB PG CMB VR CMB DX CMB TW MINI FLAT DYNA FILTER Dynamically controlled filter Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT MIDI Control source input signal or MIDI note on velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity TYPE LPF HPF BPF Filter type OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset RESO 0 20 Filter resonance DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY I Filter frequency change decay speed LEVEL 0 100 Output Level MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz AXVVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 15 Appendix DYNA FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT MIDI Control source input signal or MIDI note on velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity FB GAIN 99 to 99 a pal wer n
520. some signals sound backwards For ducking this controls how soon the signal is ducked once the duck has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is ducked almost immedi ately With a slow attack time ducking fades the signal Too fast an attack time may sound abrupt Hold sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold level Decay controls how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired A longer decay time produces a more natural gating effect allowing the natu ral decay of an instrument to pass through For ducking this determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain after the hold time has expired Appendix 28 AvwvuLne Reference Guide Appendix Preset Dynamics Program Parameters The Release Hold and Decay values shown in the following table are valid when the AW4416 is set at a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz No 001 002 003 005 006 007 Name A Dr BD A Dr BD A Dr BD A Dr BD A Dr SN A Dr SN A Dr SN CMP EXP GAT CPH CMP EXP GAT Compressor CompanderH Threshold dB Description Compressor that gives the best Ratio 1 results with an acoustic bass drum Attack ms Outgain dB Knee Release ms Threshold dB Expander for the same purpose as Ratio 1 program 001 Attack
521. sor to the EXECUTE button in the lower right of the display and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the restore operation CONFIRMATION Will Recover Selected Songs ARE YOU SURE AULAS Operation Guide 249 Chapter16 Backing up and restoring songs 6 To execute the restore operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key To cancel the restore operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key A Even when you restore from a SCSI device to the internal hard disk the songs that were previously recorded on the internal hard disk will remain unaffected Be aware that if songs of identical song names exist both in the backup and on the internal hard disk at this time the internal hard disk will end up containing two identically named songs e Ifthe internal hard disk does not have sufficient free space to load the backup data the restore operation will not be executed Disk utilities This section explains the disk utility functions such as formatting the internal hard disk or external SCSI device and erasing CD RW media Formatting the internal hard disk external SCSI device Here s how to format the internal hard disk external SCSI device hard disk MO disk drive A When you execute the format operation all songs saved on the device will be lost forever In particular be very careful about formatting the
522. ssible on CD R media that has been finalized O Disc At Once This method writes the data for all tracks in one operation and can be used for either CD R or CD RW media Unlike the Track At Once method the operation will not stop until all data has been written meaning that there will be no silent sections between tracks e CD R CD RW media written using Disc At Once will automatically be final ized and can therefore be played immediately on aCD player No further data can be recorded on media written using Disc At Once H ow ever in the case of CD RW media you can erase all of the audio data and then rewrite AVVUUIG Operation Guide 257 Chapter1 7 Mastering Preparations for mastering Here we will explain the preparations that you will need to make before writing audio data to CD R CD RW media O Mastering mode settings The AW4416 has a writing test function that checks before mastering to see whether errors will occur during data transmission By default the AW4416 will not perform this test before mastering but you may perform the test if desired or execute only the test by itself Here s how to make these settings 1 Press the UTILITY key gt F4 key The UTILITY screen Prefer 3 page will appear UTILITY 20266 NEW SONG _____ ecene BG E INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data aN W i2 Tue 8m soso i BATTERY MOUSE SPEED REMOVABLE BACKUP son O 2 A A rast INT SCSI TERM
523. ssigned to AUX8 EFF2 AVVUUNG Operation Guide 25 Chapter1 Welcome to the world of the AW4416 Recorder input patching This section assigns the signals that are input to tracks 1 16 of the recorder sec tion The following types of signal can be selected O STEREO The stereo bus output signal that has passed through the stereo output channel O BUS 1 8 The output signal of buses 1 8 O DIRECT OUT 1 16 The direct output signal of input channels 1 16 RECORDER INPUT 1 16 lt I BUS 1 8 RECORDER CH DIRECT OUT1 16 INPUT 1 16 INPUT PATCH STEREO Monitor channels 1 16 These are monaural channels that are assigned to the track 1 16 outputs of the recorder section According to the input monitor settings or the state of the trans port they will input either the signals being input to tracks 1 16 or the playback signals of tracks 1 16 As an exception the stereo track will be patched to monitor channels 1 2 when the stereo track of that song is being played back and the remainder of the moni tor channels 3 16 will be muted The structure of these channels is the same as that of the input channels with the exception that the direct output is fixed at a point immediately before the attenu ator RECORDER MONI 1 16 Q9 wu ramatoono To OO TT Ono NNNHMHHOOH Ww asta X XXX 22222222 EF 0 3 2
524. symbol will appear at the left within the list indicating that the corre sponding song is selected for deletion SONG JCE OF SPACE _ REST EEIN SONG EDIT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 SONG EDIT e If you select a song that is already marked with an E and press the EN TER key the E symbol will disappear and the song will be excluded from the Delete operation e You can select multiple songs for deletion It is not possible to delete the current song If you execute Song Delete with an E symbol displayed for the current song an error message will appear Load a different song to change the current song Then execute the operation 3 Move the cursor to the DELETE button and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear asking you to confirm the Delete operation 4 To execute the Delete operation move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The current song will automatically be saved and the specified song s will be deleted vip If you wish to cancel without deleting move the cursor to the CAN CEL button and press the EN TER key 180 Awuuns operation Guide Chapter11 Song management O Copying a song 1 Press the SONG key gt F3 key to access the SONG screen Song Edit page 2 Move the cursor to the list in the upper part of the display Use the DATA JOG dial to select the song that you wish to copy and press the ENTER key An E symbol will appear i
525. t tons on With these settings the signal of input channel 1 will not be sent to the stereo bus but will be sent instead to buses 1 2 The ST button and bus assign 1 2 but tons of input channel 2 which is paired with input channel 1 will follow these settings To switch an on screen button on off move the cursor to the button and press the EN TER key 3 Move the cursor to the PAN knob of input channel 1 and set the pan to far left L16 The PAN knob sets the stereo position between the L R channels of the stereo bus and pans between odd numbered buses and even numbered buses of bus 1 8 In this example the signal will be sent only to bus 1 if you rotate the PAN knob to the far left AVVUUNG Operation Guide 81 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Note that the level when the PAN knob is positioned at full left or full right will differ between paired and unpaired channels The level of a channel that is not paired will rise 3 dB when the PAN knob is positioned at full left L16 or full right R16 4 In the same way move the cursor to the input channel 2 area and set the PAN knob to far right R16 A Even for paired channels the PAN knobs will not operate in tandem if the MODE area Pan parameter is set to INDIVIDUAL default setting The PAN knobs will move in tandem if this parameter is set to GANG or INVERTED GANG Set the tracks to record ready mode Next we will set tracks 1 2 of the recorder to r
526. t type that is selected the MIX BAL a parameter that adjusts the balance between the dry and effect sounds knob will be located in the lower right of the Eff Edit page When using an effect via AUX send return you will need to set this parameter to 100 so that the effect will output only the wet processed sound To adjust this setting move the cursor to the MIX BAL knob and rotate the DATAJOG dial Kp Other effect parameters can be edited in the same way by moving the cursor to them and rotating the DATA JO G dial For the type and function of the effect parameters of each effect type refer to the Reference Guide 168 Awvuuns operation Guide Chapter10 Internal effects O Switching between pre fader and post fader For each monitor channel you can select the location pre fader or post fader from which the signal will be sent to AUX 7 1 Press the AUX 7 gt F4 key The Pre PstMON page will appear where you can make pre post fader settings for monitor channels 1 16 GGGG NEW SONG SCENE AUR EFF ea ee E AUX EFFI PRE POST When the AW4416 is in the initial state this will be set to post fader 2 To switch a specific channel between pre fader PRE and post fader POST move the cursor to the button for that channel and press the ENTER key Kp To switch all monitor channels between pre fader post fader move the cursor to the PRE PO ST button in the GBL global sec
527. t guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is found to be the source of interference which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and ON please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to coaxial type cable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product If you can not locate the appropriate retailer please contact Yamaha Corporation of America Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park CA 90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries ADVARSEL WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED LithiumbatteriEksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig IMPO RTANT handtering Udskiftning ma kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN batteri tilbage til leverandoren ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH AA TEPEE A E E BLUE NEUTRAL xpiosionstara vid telal tigt atteri yte nvan B
528. t in each other s way Distorted electric guitar and organ are perfect examples of instru ments that do this You ll need to think about panning such instruments to dif ferent areas of the soundstage and or using equalization to give them separate identities e Will you need to make any mood or scene changes during the mix that might involve major changes in levels EQ or effects Here s where automation might make the job a lot easier e Remember that the points given here are only a guide and that every piece of music is different In fact planning the mix is probably the most creative part of the entire production process g Do It OK the tracks are loaded now let s go ahead and listen to the raw tracks A Make sure that AUTOMIX is disabled before proceeding You can do this by pressing the AUTOMATION AUTOMIX key moving the cursor to the AUTOMIX ENABLE parame ter and pressing ENTER to switch this to DISABLE 10 awuts Tutorial Tutorial Mixdown 1 Make sure that the RECORDER MONI MIXING LAYER is selected 2 Recall the scene number 01 FADERS NOMINAL provided to set faders 1 through 14 to nominal Press the SCENE key use the data dial to select the scene number 01 FADERS NOMINAL move the cursor to RECALL press ENTER select OK in the confirmation and press ENTER again 3 Press the MIXER VIEW key so you can see the selected monitor channel
529. t of trimming in units of a sample e EXECUTE Execute the command TRIM OUT Trim the ending location of the selected region toward the beginning of the song in units of a sample e REGION Select the region that you wish to trim e TRIM OUT Specify the amount of trimming in units of a sample e EXECUTE Execute the command T COMP time compression expansion Compress or expand the length of the selected region in a range of 50 200 without affect ing the pitch e REGION Select the region that you wish to compress or expand e RATIO Specify the compression expansion ratio in units of 0 01 range 50 200 e EXECUTE Execute the command 106 Awutns Reference Guide PITCH pitch change Modify the pitch of the selected region without changing the length of the audio data e REGION Select the region whose pitch you wish to mod ify e PITCH Adjust the amount of pitch change in semitone units range 12 semitones e FINE Adjust the amount of pitch change in one cent units range 50 cents e EXECUTE Execute the command Immediately after executing an editing com mand of the REGION menu except for the NAME command you can press the UNDO key to return the data to its previous condition A Executing the T COMP or PITCH commands will require more processing time than the actual length of the audio Also it is not pos sible to cancel the command after it has been e
530. t pan and routing for the input channels return channels and monitor channels and set the bal ance of the stereo output channel Key operation e EQ key gt F1 key Pan 1 16 F2 key Pan 17 24 F3 key Pan MONI e Repeatedly press the PAN key until one of the screens shown at the right appear Mouse operation M button gt EQ button gt Pan 1 16 tab Pan 17 24 tab Pan MONI tab INPUT Pan 1 16 PAN ROUTE S9ess _EW SONG nl HOUT S a e I 00 00 000 SCENE A E Initial Data a a m Oo oe sa a0 aa aa Oo aa aa a aa aOHOE Taa Eelere ae O poppe piene HEHN 7 B O g E Pan 17 24 ean onan oon eee INPUTS 00 00 00 000 initial Data jf 17 18 19 26 Ettinclloa ona oa oa ejopelapelcy 000000 He ae oo a m m 0000 Li6 Ri6 Li RTN1 RT 0na fn aa a aa a OO Li6 RI6 CENTER AULAS Reference Guide 49 PAN ROUTE screen Pan MONI PAN ROUTE 22923 NEW Sonae Inputs 00 00 00 000 q_ROUTING H d PREC Jejafale S888 208 1 En E BOBR Qa Screen functions 1 Channel This indicates the channel for which pan rout ing is being set 2 Bus assign buttons 1 8 These buttons assign the signal of each channel to buses 1 8 3 ST stereo bus assign buttons These buttons assign the signal of each channel to the stereo bus 4
531. t the level of a channel that is not paired will rise 3 dB when the PAN knob is positioned at full left L16 or full right R16 88 Aw uLHG operation Guide Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Put the track in record ready mode Next we will put track 3 of the recorder in record ready mode and adjust the input level 1 In the level meters counter section press REC TRACK SELECT key 3 REC TRACK SELECT REC TRACK SELECT key 3 and REC READY indicator 3 in the level meter counter will blink indicating that track 3 is in record ready mode g9 98 88 88 5 6 7 8 8 2 Make sure that ON key 8 is lit and while producing sound on your instrument watch level meter 3 in the level meters counter section Level meter 3 will show the level of the input signal of track 3 If the red 0 dB seg ment lights lower fader 8 input level of input channel 8 AVVUUIG Operation Guide 89 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Make monitor settings We will make settings so that the signal of the rhythm machine drums that were earlier recorded on tracks 1 2 and the bass signal being recorded on track 3 will be sent to the stereo bus and can be monitored via the MONITOR OUT jacks or PHONES jack 1 Press the PAN key gt F3 key The PAN ROUTE screen PAN Moni page will appear allowing you to make
532. ta from an audio CD mixed mode EDIT aaa 00 eo ee CD ROM inserted in the internal i A A dO N or external CD RW drive and assign it to the desired audio track Key operation e EDIT key gt F3 CD Import key a e Repeatedly press the EDIT key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt RECORDER EDIT but ton gt CD Import tab Screen functions 1 DRIVE Move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the internal or exter nal CD RW drive PASTE TO Select the track number and virtual track num ber of the destination track in which the CD DA data will be placed A Since the CD DA audio data is imported in stereo the track number will always be selected as an odd numbered even num bered pair 3 Destination point Specify the point in the track at which the imported CD DA data will be placed 1p The units used to specify this point will change depending on the counter display method time units measures selected in the SONG screen Setting page If measure dis play is selected measures will be the smallest settable unit REGION IMPORT FROM CO DA 05 62 31 65 4 02 55 13 03 62 31 45 02 03 07 07 ig H 4 TYPE Select whether the imported CD DA data will be inserted into the track Insert or overwritten OverWrite If Insert is selected any subse quent audio data in the import destina
533. ted to the sampling pads which operates in conjunction with the recorder This simple sequencer records the tim ing of the trigger events that occur when you strike a pad and can be used to layer kick or snare sounds on the audio tracks or to add sound effects Events in a specified area can also be copied repeatedly as a pattern or erased Here s how to record your pad performance on the simple sequencer 1 In the SAMPLING PAD section press the EDIT pad gt F5 key The Trig List page will appear allowing you to record your pad performance SAMP PAD F THE TRIG LIST p PAD un 00000000 oo000000 S eeeeeee oooo0000 This screen shows the following information PAD The bank and number of the pads that will be recorded played 2 NAME pad name This is the name assigned to each pad Pads to which no sample has been assigned will be displayed as NO ASN R button This is the recording switch for each pad When you move the cursor and press the ENTER key to change the button display from O to that pad can now be recorded M button This is the mute switch for each pad When you move the cursor and press the ENTER key to change the button display from O to that pad will be muted A It is not possible to play bank A and B pads simultaneously The M buttons will automatically switch to for the bank that is not currently selected by the BANK switch and will be muted
534. ter Range Description TYPE Type A Type B Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds MONO DELAY Basic repeat delay Parameter Range Description DELAY 0 0 2730 0 ms Delay time FB GAIN 99 to 99 Pa SE normal phase feedback minus values HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds STEREO DELAY Basic stereo delay Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time FB G L L99 to 99 ca eee eR ea for normal phase feedback minus DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time GR Sadun Tins e a HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MIX BA
535. the ENTER key The button will change from OFF to ON With this setting program changes can be received 4 Move the cursor to the Rx CH knob in the MIDI CHANNEL area and rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the MIDI receive channel of the AW4416 If you turn on the OMNI button in the PRO GRAM CHANGE area program changes of all channels will be received AVVUUIG Operation Guide 235 Chapter15 MIDI 5 Press the F3 key The PGM Asgn page will appear allowing you to assign AW4416 scene numbers to each program number 1 128 The PGM CHG column is the program change number and the SCENE MEM No TITLE column is the scene number and title MIDI Goggi NEW SONG Scene OO SE Initi tapuT1 00 00 00 000 al Data PGM CHG SCENE MEM NO TITLE ol No Data ol No Data ol Data if Data THe iata 13 If you move the cursor to the IN ITIALIZE button located in the right of the screen and press the EN TER key the scene number assignments will be initialized scene numbers 01 96 will be assigned to program numbers 1 96 and scene number 00 will be assigned to program change 100 All other program change numbers will be NO ASSIGN 6 Move the cursor to the PGM CHG column and use the DATA JOG dial to select a program change number 1 128 PGM CHG SCENE MEM No TITLE i4 14 1 No Data 13 13 I No 12 12 1 No ii No C13 9 S 7 6 7 Move
536. the STOP key of the transport section AVVUUIG Operation Guide 111 Chapter6 Transport locate operations O Nudge function settings Here s how to adjust the nudge time and play mode of the Nudge function 1 With the song stopped press the UTILITY key gt F3 key UTILITY 98982 NEW sons cee EE HONI 00 00 00 907 Initial Data _ j PREFERENCES EPA Spe Nudge function settings COYDAT DIGITAL REC DSI TAL OUT COPYRIGHT E DISABLE E FL METER FINE 2 To set the nudge time move the cursor to the TIME field of the NUDGE area and rotate the DATA JOG dial to set the nudge time 25 800 msec 3 To change the play mode of the nudge function move the cursor to the PLAY MODE field of the NUDGE area and press the ENTER key to switch between the following two play modes AFTER Repeatedly play back a range starting at the current location and extending the length of the nudge time setting BEFORE Repeatedly play back a range corresponding to the length of the nudge time setting and ending at the current location PLAY MODE BEFORE PLAY MODE AFTER Current Current location location ase PAR 112 Awun operation Guide Chapter6 Transport locate operations Rollback function While the song is stopped or playing you can press the ROLL BACK key of the Locate section to move the current location back by a fixed length This is conve nient when you are
537. the AW4416 song will follow OFF o the MTC messages received at the MIDI IN con Synchronization signals will not be output Hector MIDI Time Code will be transmitted from the MTC OUT connector The MTC frame rate is selected in the SONG screen Setting page gt P 2 MIDI CLOCK i MIDI Clock will be transmitted from the MIDI 3 MMC MIDI Machine Control OUT connector or TO HOST connector When using MMC for remote control between the AW4416 and an external MIDI device this MIC MIDI CLK setting specifies whether the AW4416 will be Both MIDI Time Code MTC OUT connector the MMC master MASTER or slave SLAVE and MIDI Clock MIDI OUT connector or TO POST conkacan will be vansmined If master is selected operating the transport of the AW4416 will cause the corresponding A MMC command to be transmitted from the MIDI T TO HOST When using the AW4416 as the MIDI Clock ay SOU COE Or TRS aanne master you must set MIDI OUT SEL to If slave is selected MMC commands sent from a MIDI OUT in the MIDI screen MIDI Setup MIDI sequencer or other external device can be page gt P39 used to remotely select or de select recording tracks and control transport operations on the MTC SYNC AW4416 Specify whether the AW4416 will be the MTC master MASTER or slave SLAVE when MTC is used to synchronize an AW4416 song with the operation of an external MIDI device AVVULNG Reference Guide 41 MIDI screen
538. the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the EN TER key Importing mixer data of an existing song You can extract the scene memory automix tempo map and library data referred to as mixer data of a previously saved song and import it into the current song For example this function is convenient when an existing song has a special effect library that you wish to use in a newly created song A e Be aware that when you execute the mixer data import command the corre sponding mixer data of the import destination song the current song will be erased and replaced by the imported mixer data e Library mixer data includes all libraries channel EQ dynamics and effect 1 If necessary load the import destination song as the current song 2 Press the SONG key gt F3 key The SONG screen Song Edit page will appear in the display The upper part of the display will show a list of the songs currently saved in the hard disk The current song will be highlighted in the list SONG LETER EAM EEIN SONG EDIT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 SONG EDIT 00707729 14 37 007 07 26 19 11 E 00 07 25 20 38 66 87 23 14 36 166MB 3 Move the cursor to the list in the upper part of the display and use the DATA JOG dial to select the import source song from which you wish to import mixer data 4 Press the ENTER key An E symbol will appear at the left edge of the list and the correspon
539. the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key A When you execute the recall the data of the current scene will be discarded If you will need to reproduce the current scene you must save it before recalling another scene Yip e You can use the keys of the SCENE MEMORY section to recall a scene even when you are in a screen other than the SCENE screen Scene Mem page For details refer to page 212 e You can use program changes to recall AW4416 scenes from an external device gt P 235 or use the automix function to recall scenes gt P 225 e Ifdesired you can specify the time fade time over which the faders will move to their new locations when a scene is recalled or exclude specific faders from the recall For details on these settings refer to the Reference Guide SCENE screen Fade Time page SCENE screen RCL Safe page 206 Awun operation Guide Chapter1 3 Scene memory Editing the name of a scene Here s how you can edit just the name of a stored scene 1 Press the SCENE key gt F1 key The Scene Mem page of the SCENE screen will appear eE no o0 00 000 Geass INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 TEMLATE H LIBRARY TITLE PRT 5 1 Ho Data a4 FINAL Mle B2 TEST MIX 2 A TEST Mls Hai TEMLATE BA Initial Data 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the scene whose scene name you wish to edit A It is not possible to select a scene that has not been st
540. the included power supply cable here to supply power to the unit A Use only the included power supply cable MTC OUT connector These connectors are used to send and receive MIDI messages to and from exter nal MIDI devices The MIDI IN connector receives messages The MIDI OUT THRU jack can function either as a MIDI OUT or MIDI THRU connector depending on the setting of the MIDI screen gt MIDI Setup page MIDI OUT SELECT parameter The MTC OUT connector is an output connector dedicated to MTC MIDI Time Code messages MIDI OUT THRU connector MIDI IN connector MOUSE connector This is a D sub 9 pin male connector for connecting a serial mouse By using this connector you can use a mouse to select parameters within the display or to change pages FOOT SW jack An optional foot switch Yamaha FC5 can be connected to this jack and used to play stop the transport or to manually punch in out If a foot switch of the wrong format is connected the unit may not operate cor rectly Grounding connector To reduce the risk of electrical shock connect this to a grounding connection earth before you connect the power cable This unit comes with a three conduc tor power cable In this case the same result will be obtained if the ground pin of the electrical outlet is connected to ground This will also reduce hum and noise AVVULNG Operation Guide 49 Chapter2 Parts and their functions Front panel
541. the return signals from inter nal effects 1 2 However they can also be used as supplementary input channels by changing the input signal assignments of the input patch section The structure of these channels is identical to that of the input channels with the exception of the following differences Stereo 2 No dynamics processor 3 No direct output No AUX 7 send level from return channel 1 No AUX 8 send level from return channel 2 Since return channels 1 2 are stereo selecting MIC LINE INPUT or OPTION IN as input signals will cause two adjacent odd numbered even numbered signals to be assigned Also if DIGITAL STEREO IN is selected the signals of both L R will be assigned A e The reason that return channel 1 2 has no send level to AUX 7 8 is to pre vent the feedback loop that would occur if the signal returned from internal effect 1 2 were sent back to the same internal effect e Be aware that the AUX 7 8 send level is not available even if a different input signal is assigned to return channel 1 2 tc TE 2222 __ ut rNMtHONM rE OO TF Oho NOWHOHOHOHM ww 2 I x Xxx DDDDDDD D FF OO 5 335 ammmmnmnn nn An lt 11T PREFADER LISTEN RETURN 1 2 AFTER PAN Sale METER Q 0 0 rO INSERT o0 fo N T 0 gt MAN a AL TTT meen a 3 1 EQ i i i i i H Oron T O INPUT PATCH EQ Stereo in X 2 RETURN1 can not be assigned to AUX7 EFF1 RETURN2 can not be a
542. this the song will revert to the last saved state if the power of the AW4416 is turned off accidentally 3 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The song will be saved AVVUUIG Operation Guide 107 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 108 Aw uuns operation Guide 6 Transport locate oper ations This chapter explains transport and locate operations on the AW4416 Table of transport key operations The function of the keys in the transport section of the AW4416 will change depending on the status current operating mode of the transport The following table shows how the transport keys change function according to the status of the transport Status Transport keys stopped Playing Rewinding Stop Fast forwarding Stop Recording Stop A B repeating Play Play Play Play punch out Rewind 8X Rewind 8X Switch rewind speeds 8X16X Rewind 8X Defeat repeat and rewind 8X Fast for ward 8X Fast for ward 8X Fast forward 8X Switch fast forward speeds 8X16X Defeat repeat and fast forward 8X Record Record punch in Play Play Recording will occur only if any of the REC TRACK SELECT keys are blinking Key has no function AIN UUNG Operation Guide 109 Chapter6 Transport locate operations Shuttle function cue revi
543. tination drive internal hard disk This item is for display only and can not be modified Q EXECUTE button Execute the song restore 1p For details on song restore refer to Operation Guide Chapter 16 Backing up and restoring songs Additional functions in the Restore page In the Restore page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following functions to the F1 F3 keys 790 co LOAD co UNLOAD RELOAD ttt Go Ea os e F1 CD LOAD key Close the open tray of the CD RW drive e F2 CD UNLOAD key Eject the tray of the CD RW drive e F3 RELOAD key Reload the removable media and update the displayed list 30 Aw Reference Guide FILE screen Disk Util page Format or erase a disk Function Format the internal hard disk or an exter FIE ETHER nal SCSI device or erase CD RW media DSK uric 00 02 42 806 J 120 0 4 4 Key operation e FILE key gt F3 Disk Util key e Repeatedly press the FILE key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt FILE button gt Disk Util tab A Disk Uta Screen functions A Drive select e If a removable media drive e g MO is Select the SCSI ID number of the drive that you selected FORMAT column will appear wish to format external SCSI device such as before the Format operation is executed MO or of the CD RW drive in which you wish allowing you to select the file syst
544. tion gt If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE and the device number of the message matches or is 7F data will be written to the specified information field STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01111111 7F Device ID Oddddddd dd Command 00000110 06 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclu sive Destination 00 7E 7F all call Machine Control Command mcc sub id 01000000 40 Write Occcccce cc Byte Count Onnnnnnn nn Writeable Information Field name Format defined by the Information Filed name Device ID Oddddddd dd Command 00000110 06 Oddddddd dd Onnnnnnn nn More nn dd pairs as required EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 4 13 9 1 MMC INFORMATION FIELD TRACK RECORD READY lt Reception gt If the AW4416 is operating as the MMC SLAVE and the device number of the message matches REC SELECT for the recorder tracks will be switched on off according to the data of the standard track bitmap 01001111 4F Track Record Ready Information Field name Data Length 0O all track off 3 record track on 1 2tr rec track On Stan dard Track Bitmap 3 9tr rec track On 10 16tr rec track On 4 13 10 MMC LOCATE TARGET lt Transmission gt This message will be transmitted with a device number of 7F when a locate related key such as MARK SEARCH IN OUT is pressed when a FF REW shuttle operation is per formed when returning to the auto punch pre roll point or when repeating Onnnnnnn nn Qaaaaa
545. tion or in some instances Public Performance of all or a Portion of a sound recording or_ musical composition Protected by Beoee ight h obtained oper license relevant copyr i FORE holders may constitute copyright infringement and may otherwise violate DOPYT lar laws and or her laws In addition la such as_ the Audio Home Recording Act and the Digital A Tenn um Copyright Act in USA contain certain restrictions and reauirements that may WARNING 272 apply to your use of works Protected by copyright and related information and data that may accompany such works violation of such laws may result in Givil remedies and in some cases criminal I j I Because Violations of copyright laws may be serious offenses you should consult a lawyer familiar with the Jaw of COPyr i Sht gt including all laws that may applicable to_ your use of the norkstat ion if you have any auestions regarding all or parts of sound recordings or musical compositions Protected by copyright 36 AwuLnG Reference Guide UTILITY screen Prefer 3 page Make overall settings for the AW4416 3 Function Set the internal clock mouse cur sor speed and removable media backup method etc Key operation e UTILITY key gt F4 Prefer 3 key e Repeatedly press the UTILITY key until the screen shown at the men right appears Mouse operation M button gt UTIL button gt Pre fer 3 tab Screen functions A CL
546. tion at the right of the display and press the EN TER key AVVUUIG Operation Guide 169 Chapter1 0 Internal effects O Adjusting the send level return level Here s how to adjust the send level for each monitor channel and the return level of the return channel Press the HOME key gt 17 24 RTN key SEL keys 15 16 ON keys 15 16 and faders 15 16 will be assigned to return channels 1 2 At this time faders 15 16 will adjust the input level of the return signals from effects 1 2 Kp When the AW4416 is in the initial state the faders of return channels 1 2 will be set to nominal level 0 dB Press the VIEW key gt SEL key 15 The VIEW screen of return channel 1 will appear in the display VIEW Goga NEW SONG ees _ DE SNS __scene 68 RTH 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data Make sure that the ST button of the PAN ROUT area is on In this state the return signal from effect 1 will be sent to the stereo bus and mixed with the signals of the monitor channels If the ST button is off move the cursor to the button and press the EN TER key O Adjusting the send level 1 Press the AUX 7 key gt MONI key SEL keys 1 16 ON keys 1 16 and faders 1 16 will be assigned to monitor channels 1 16 At this time faders 1 16 will adjust the send level of the signals sent from monitor channels 1 16 to AUX 7 effect 1 While the song plays back use faders 1 16 to adjust the send level of
547. tion track will be moved toward the end of the song by the length of the inserted audio data TRACK TOTAL This is the track list of the audio CD mixed mode CD ROM inserted in the CD RW drive Move the cursor to this list and rotate the DATAJOG dial to select the import source track 6 EXTRACT POINT From the track selected in specify the area that will be imported in units of minutes sec onds frames 1 75 second Move the cursor to this area and use the DATA JOG dial to set START start point and END end point EXECUTE button This button executes the CD DA import opera tion 109 AVY UNG Reference Guide EDIT screen A e CD DA data can be imported only into songs whose sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz If the current song has a sampling frequency of 48 kHz a message of Current Song is 48 kHz Fs Type will appear and this page cannot be used e The keys of the transport section will have no effect while the CD Import page is dis played A If a Prohibit CD Import message is dis played and the import cannot be executed access the UTILITY screen Prefer 2 page and after reading the warning regarding copy right switch the CD DAT DIGITAL REC DIS ABLE button to ENABLE E Additional functions in the CD Import page In the CD Import page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional functions to the F1 F2 keys a f
548. tions Key operation e SETUP key gt F4 D in Setup key e Repeatedly press the SETUP key until the screen shown at the right appears 1 In the SET UP screen the tabs dis played at the bottom of the screen are divided into two groups If the D in Setup tab is not assigned to the F4 key when you press the SETUP key press the SHIFT key F1 CHANGE TAB key to switch the tabs Mouse operation M button gt SETU button gt D in Setup tab Screen functions Slots 1 2 If an optional I O card is installed in OPTION 1 O slots 1 2 a graphic will be displayed to show the type of I O card Cards in which no card is installed will be displayed as No Card 2 WORD CLOCK SOURCE From the following choices select one of the following clock source to which the AW4416 will synchronize SLOT 1 1 2 7 8 SLOT 2 1 2 7 8 The input signal from a digital I O card installed in OPTION I O slots 1 2 will be the clock source One pair of digital I O card input chan nels 1 2 7 8 can be selected INT The internal clock of the AW4416 will be used as the clock source D ST IN The word clock data included in the input sig nal of the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack will be the clock source SET UP MONI 13 G6GG NEW SONG Endina Mix cajka Lae A 00 00 C44 10k WCLK IN The word clock data included in the input sig nal of the WORD CLOCK IN jack will be the
549. tly higher organ level during the intro duction to achieve a better overall balance before the lead vocal comes in Now that the lead vocal has begun however we ve lowered the organ track back to its normal level O 00 00 47 Chorus channels 11 and 12 are turned back ON and the level of left female vocal track 11 has been boosted a bit to maintain optimum balance between the two female chorus parts during this section of the song The piano track 8 is turned ON just before the piano part comes in O 00 01 08 Chorus track 11 is brought down again for optimum chorus balance and the level of the lead vocal track is boosted just a bit to allow the lead vocal to come through the denser instrumentation of the bridge section The strings tracks 9 and 10 are turned ON just before the string part begins Also note that the level of the lead guitar track 6 was boosted a bit just before this point We did this to emphasize the distinctive guitar part during the bridge The organ level has been lowered to make room for the strings piano and cho rus parts during the bridge AWwuuis Tutorial 25 Tutorial Mixdown O 00 01 31 The lead guitar on track 6 and the lead vocal on track 14 have been brought back down to their normal levels The organ level is also returned to normal O 00 01 39 The level of the male chorus track 13 is boosted a bit here because for the next couple of phrases the male choru
550. to 63 4 sec 3 160 points 1 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48kHz 2 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz 3 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz Threshold sets the level at which the gate closes cutting off the signal Sig nals above the threshold level pass through unaffected Signals at or below the threshold cause the gate to close For ducking trigger signal levels at and above the threshold level activate ducking and the signal level is reduced to a level set by the Range parame ter The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter Range controls the level to which the gate closes It can be used to reduce the signal level rather than cut it completely At a setting of 70 dB the gate closes completely when the input signal falls below the threshold At a set ting of 30 dB the gate only closes so far allowing an attenuated signal through At a setting of O dB the gate has no effect When signals are gated abruptly the sudden cutoff can sound odd For ducking a setting of 70 dB causes the signal to be virtually cutoff At a setting of 30 dB the signal is ducked by 30 dB At a setting of O dB the duck has no effect Attack determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level Slow attack times can be used to remove the initial transient edge of percussive sounds Too slow an attack time makes
551. to an external MIDI device you must set this to MIDI OUT For details on synchronization refer to P41 AVVULNG Reference Guide 39 MIDI screen 9 PORT SELECT Select the port and transmission speed with which MIDI messages will be transmitted and received Setting e Computer platform MIDI MIDI compatible MIDI IN OUT THRU connectors Transmission speed 31 25 kbps TO HOST PC2 IBM PC compatible TO HOST connector 38 4 kbps TO HOST connector TO HOST MAC Apple Macintosh series 1 Only usable with Macintosh computers that have a modem printer port On the software that you use set the clock to 1 MHz 40 Awute reference Guide 31 25 kbps MIDI screen MIDI Sync page Make settings related to MIDI synchronization Function Make various settings for synchro nization operation an NE ooo ENE B 1 00 00 0 000 MIDI I SYNC_ SETTING ritial Date Key operation e MIDI key gt F2 MIDI Sync key 2 e Repeatedly press the MIDI key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt MIDI button gt MIDI Sync tab Screen functions SYNC OUT If master is selected MTC messages will be Select one of the following synchronization sig transmitted from the MTC OUT connector in nals for output synchronization with the progress of the song If slave is selected
552. to the left and the track 6 guitar to the right about L14 and R15 respectively O Add the Organ amp Piano Tracks Turn ON channel 7 and 8 The organ and piano tracks will also need to be reduced in level a bit so use faders 7 and 8 to reduce the track 7 organ to about 9 8 dB and track 8 piano to about 10 5 dB Also pan the track 7 organ a little to the left and the track 8 piano a little to the right about L11 and R9 respec tively O Add the String Tracks Like the drum tracks the So Fine string tracks are basically a stereo pair After turning channels 9 and 10 ON and making sure that the faders are both at exactly the same level use the same pairing technique described for the drum tracks above to pair the string tracks Then reduce the level to about 5 7 dB and pan the string tracks left and right about L13 and R13 AW UUs Tutorial 13 Tutorial Mixdown g Add the Lead Vocal Ah ha Fooled you You thought we were going to add the chorus parts on tracks 11 12 and 13 and THEN add the lead vocal track didn t you Well we won t and the reason is simply that the chorus parts really must be heard in relation to the lead vocal in order to set appropriate levels Turn ON channel 14 leave the pan control set at center the normal position for lead vocals and reduce the fader level to about 7 3 dB Add the Chorus Although the chorus appears before the lead vocal part during the introduction an
553. to the marker immediately before the current location press the Locate section I lt key To locate to the marker immediately follow ing the current location press the PI key MARK SEARCH 7 kK The I key will light if a marker exists before the current location and the key will light if a marker exists after the current location AVVUUIG Operation Guide 121 Chapter6 Transport locate operations A number in the range of 1 99 will be assigned to each marker you set and these will be displayed as follows in the TRACK screen TR View page that appears when you press the TRACK key gt F1 key Markers Please note that the numbers 1 99 do not indicate the order in which you speci fied the markers they indicate the order from the beginning of the song For example if you insert a new marker between two existing markers the subse quent markers will be renumbered Marker settings are saved on the hard disk as part of the currently selected song The markers you set can be deleted gt P 125 or moved gt P 123 as desired 122 Awun operation Guide Chapter6 Transport locate operations Adjusting the location of a locate point The location of the Start End points A B points In Out points and Markers can be adjusted as desired 1 Press the TRACK key gt F4 key A screen will appear in which you can adjust the various locate points A p
554. tomix with the newly recorded content move the cur sor to the OK button and press the ENTER key 220 Awun operation Guide Chapterl 4 Automix Automix punch in out If you make a mistake while recording the automix you can re record just the location of your error punch in out As an example here we will explain how to punch in out to re record the pan operations of monitor channel 1 that you already recorded When punching in out on only a specific channel it is conve nient to use the on screen AUTO REC button instead of the on screen REC but ton 1 Press the HOME key in the FADER MODE section and the MONI key in the MIXING LAYER section 2 Locate the song to a point slightly earlier than the location where you wish to punch in A If you will be punching in out repeatedly on the automix it is convenient to set a locate point at a location earlier than the intended punch in For details on locate points refer to page 109 3 Press the AUTOMIX key gt F1 key Make sure that the AUTOMIX button is displayed as ENABLE a e E Ea A Gees Moniie l amp 00 0 1 21 66 TEMPLATE AUTOMIX MAIN 4 A C_J CURRENT 13k e NAB 3 On 491k 95a UNDO sk f FADER EDIT MODE AUTOMIX TRANSPORT q ABORT STOP REC AUTO REC 4 Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE field Turn the PAN button on and the remaining buttons FADER CH ON EQ off 5 Move the cursor to the AUTO REC button
555. ton gt TRAC button gt Stereo tab Screen functions 1 M mute button Use this button to switch muting on or off O for the stereo track When muting is off the output of the stereo track will be assigned to monitor channels 1 2 Normally muting is on When you play back the song in this state the stereo track can be monitored via monitor chan nels 1 2 gt stereo bus At this time tracks 1 16 will be forcibly muted When you turn muting on for the stereo track tracks 1 16 will return to their previous status Yip For details on recording playing the stereo track refer to Operation Guide Chapter 5 Recording on the AW4416 Track view Continuous audio data in the stereo track is dis played as a bar graph The symbols displayed below the track view indicate locate points and markers at those locations The following types of symbols are displayed a Pee Tree Start point SE End point a E T In point O itd Out point A E A point OB T B point 1 99 snas Markers 1 99 ACK G6GG NEW SING TR Sterec 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 3 Current position The vertical line in the frame indicates the approximate current position The small sym bols beneath the frame indicates the approxi mate location of the locate points 4 STEREO OUT This meter indicates the output level of the ste reo output channel The pre post fader position can be selected in the HOME screen Omni ST
556. tor MIDI IN connector MIDI IN connector MIDI OUT connector MIDI sequencer AW4416 MMC slave MMC master 2 As described in Using MTC to synchronize the AW4416 and a MIDI sequencer gt P 238 make settings on both devices so that the AW4416 and MIDI sequencer will run in synchronization 3 Press the MIDI key and then press the F2 key MIDI 99999 NEW SONG scene SE THPUT1 23 59 09 987 Initial Data MIDI SYNC SETTING MTC MIDI CLOCK MTC MIDI CLK AULAS Operation Guide 243 Chapter1 5 MIDI 4 Move the cursor to the SLAVE button in the MMC area and press the ENTER key With this setting the AW4416 will function as an MMC slave device 5 Move the cursor to the MMC DEV knob and use the DATA JOG dial to set the MMC device ID The device ID is a number in the range of 1 127 that is used to distinguish the device to be controlled when a single system contains multiple MMC compatible devices By default the AW4416 is set to device ID 1 MMe DEW 6 On your MIDI sequencer set the device ID of the MMC device to be controlled to the same setting as in step 5 Note If necessary you can specify the AW4416 recording track after step 6 and control recording operations in step 7 For details on selecting the recording track and on controlling record operations refer to the manual for your MIDI sequencer 7 Start playbac
557. tput level of the stereo output channel AVW UUIG Operation Guide 65 Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 O If the mixing layer is MONI Fader mode STEREO Input level of monitor channels 1 16 Send level from monitor channels 1 16 to AUX 1 Send level from monitor channels 1 16 to AUX 2 Send level from monitor channels 1 16 to AUX 3 Output level of the Send level from monitor channels 1 16 to AUX 4 stereo output channel Send level from monitor channels 1 16 to AUX 5 Send level from monitor channels 1 16 to AUX 6 Send level from monitor channels 1 16 to effect 1 Send level from monitor channels 1 16 to effect 2 66 AWAS Operation Guide 73 Connections and setup This chapter explains how to connect external devices and set up your sys tem before you begin using the AW4416 Connections The following diagram shows typical audio connections for the AW4416 Monitor system Headphones MONITOR OUT PHONES Digital MTR OMNI OUT 1 2 1 O card lt _ hatha Effect processor PTI N 7 oo _ oo00 Ht HL hihi Dis 00 TE O OPTION SLOT 2 INPUT 1 8 DAT recorder AW4416 STEREO DIGITAL IN vasu DAT Z l l Peer rrr O00 OOOoOM STEREO DIGI
558. ts which can be used either via AUX send return or by being inserted into a specific channel Here we will explain how to use the AUX bus to apply reverb to the signals of the tracks 1 Press the AUX 7 key gt F2 key The AUX7 EFF1 screen Library page will appear In this page you can load or save effect programs from or to the effect library The list in the display shows the effect programs that have been saved AUR EFF A 22828 NEW SONG _ facem aa FE INPUT 1 00 00 00 000 Initial Data EFFECT LIBRARY cul EPEC TAME Reverb Hall til EFFECT TYPE REVERE HALL G05 Earls Ref 84 Reverb Plate aa3 FR b St When the AW 4416 is in the initial state the outputs of AU X buses 7 8 are patched to the inputs of internal effects 1 2 and the outputs of internal effects 1 2 are patched to return channels 1 2 2 Move the cursor to the library list and rotate the DATA JOG dial to dis play 002 Reverb Room at the cursor location In this example we will select a reverb room program Xe If desired you can recall the effect program directly without having to reply to the recall confirmation popup window To make this setting access the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTILITY key gt F2 key and turn RECALL CONFIRMATION off 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear asking you to confirm the recall operation CONFIRMATION Hill Recall
559. tted from the MIDI OUT connector e Is SYNC OUT set correctly e Is MTC SYNC set to MASTER Mi The AW4416 does not synchronize to incoming MTC messages e Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN con nector e In the MIDI screen MIDI Sync page is MTC Sync set to SLAVE E MTC messages are received but synchronization drifts e Is a large amount of MIDI data notes etc being received together with the MTC messages Appendix 36 AvwvuLne Reference Guide Appendix MMIC synchronization drifts e Does the frame rate match between the AW4416 and the external device e SYNC OFFSET may have been set e If jumps occur in the synchronized time change the SYNC AVE setting in the MIDI screen MIDI Sync page and try again Something happens to the sound when the DATA JOG dial SHUTTLE dial FF key or REW key are operated e Differences in the number of simultaneously played tracks will affect the way in which the sound is heard when these controls are operated EMMC is not transmitted e Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI OUT connector e MMC messages are not transmitted from the MTC OUT connector E MIDI data is not exchanged via the TO HOST connector e Is the cable correctly connected to the TO HOST connector e PORT SELECT may be set to MIDI e Is the PORT SELECT setting appropriate for your computer For details on this setting refer to page 39 MIDI screen e A comp
560. tton and press the ENTER key The cursor will move to the area at the bottom of the screen EDIT GGGG_ NEW SONG TR EDIT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 15C Tr15 1 ecu Tri6 1 5 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the track that you wish to name and press the ENTER key 154 Aaw operation Guide Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations 6 Move the cursor to the NAME button and press the ENTER key A NAME EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name to the track region NAME EDIT TR 3 M Tr 3 1 C PRESS OK TO STORE SHIFT LOCK KA bec WAEWAEOAea agaon naoonoamanond oaonouanundk 7 When you have finished inputting the name move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key For details on inputting characters refer to page 60 You will return to the screen of step 1 You can assign a track name of up to 16 characters In the TRACK screen etc the 7 first eight characters of the name will be displayed g Naming a region 1 In the RECORDER section press the EDIT key gt F1 key The EDIT screen TR Edit page will appear 2 Move the cursor to the REGION menu and press the ENTER key The REGION menu will show the available editing commands EDIT 99 9 NEH SONG ___ MAMA EEIN TR EDIT 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 T NAME U Editing commands J J a J J DELETE j E a g JETE ENO pece 3 110 N me EEA t c o Rec J UEMIN ar NO
561. tup page 6055 Sion h das eeedieteteSs do ewhdoueCae as 20 Make word clock cascade settings 0 0 00 eee eee ee 20 Monitor page iiss deo cheese eueneenres bende truni ea 22 Monitor the digital input signals 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0000 22 Dither Out page 2 2 4cuseeesetwdsans esc ia seus vsamuces 24 Specify dithering and word length of the digital outputs 24 Dither TRK page scsesueceversacen ed tose sewewane ns 25 Specify dithering and word length for tracks 25 AVVULNG Reference Guide Ii SONG QUICK REC MASTER ING cD PLAY SET UP FILE UTILI TY VIEW MIDI PAN ROUTE EQ ATT GRP DYN DLY AUX1 AUX6 AUX7 EFF1 AUX8 EFF2 HOME SAMP PAD TRACK EDIT AUTO MIX SCENE Appendix Table of contents Solo Setup pase wid as wrens seein ens Cae doweeud utes 26 Make solo settings 2 yet Metcvertamrceh dha Fated Owe sees 26 FILE screen s 5 oe 8 6 BOSSE ESSA OSS Ores 6 28 BackUp Pate cs guises sce ot teen Cade eeenede oa se a ee 28 Backup a SONG 2 5636 S28 oe cp deed adage ds hays gutuces 28 Restore page eeen week eo BI eae Ww ew Ow WE eee 30 Restore backed up songs 0 eee c cece cence eee 30 Disk Util page ons ence kee ete ee Makaha watch ad eee eS 31 Format or erase a disk s44 05 4 0 54 s3654 330 5G0S ba Be ee eG 31 UTILITY screen 5 6 55556 So 65 ER bw Re She S
562. ty Max songs per hard disk E Edit Song edit Track edit Part edit Appendix 46 AVY uULHG Reference Guide 130 tracks 16 tracks x 8 virtual tracks plus ste reo track AW4416 original format 2 5 IDE 64 GB 8 GB partition Approx 30 000 songs Name comment delete copy optimize pro tect fade in out Name erase copy exchange slip time com pression expansion pitch change import Erase delete copy move insert time compres sion expansion pitch change Appendix Controls Region edit E Others Locate Punch I O Analog section Input channel 1 8 Input channel 1 2 Output Mixer section WORK NAVIGATE buttons UNIT buttons MIXER buttons FADER MODE buttons MIXING LAYER buttons Erase delete copy move time compression expansion pitch change insert Direct locate data entry search time measure Quick locate start end RTZ A B last rec in out roll back Manual punch I O auto punch I O Gain variable 48 V phantom switch Phones level monitor out level SONG QUICK REC MASTERING CD PLAY SETUP FILE UTILITY MIDI VIEW PAN EQ DYN AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 HOME 1 16 17 24 RTN MONI ON buttons SEL buttons Faders SOLO buttons Function buttons EQ buttons Encoders Sampler section SAMPLING PAD buttons Recorder section CUE button REC TRACK SELECT buttons RECORDER buttons Locate buttons Tra
563. u to assign a name to the song Then a COMMENT EDIT popup window will appear allowing you to add a comment to the song o lam fate Il Mnitial Data ull oO PRESS OK TO STORE SHIFT LOCK paoaaaanaaa auauua naonnana 2H Ge edb lt TITLE EDIT popup window gt PRESS OK magaz NEW SONG Gaz o So L___ sHIFT Lock BEE n e Oss ec naaawa augaouoanoa naoonmmanod BW WE Wt rc lt NAME EDIT popup window gt PRESS OK TO STORE Sa ep sHIFT Lock E E e e Ces ec pnaaaaanaaa QHWEAROWOUOOE ABDADHWHHL 2A YG Mh rc flo Description lt COMMENT EDIT popup window gt 60 3 Awutns operation Guide 4 Chapter3 The user interface of the AW4416 The items in each popup window and their function are as follows Text input box Characters numerals and symbols can be input in this box When you create a new song or save for the first time a default name will be input The highlighted text indicates that it is being changed Yip Scene and library names can be up to 16 characters long Song names and song comments can be up to 64 characters long CANCEL button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the procedure will be cancelled and you will return to the previous screen 3 OK button If you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the text you entered will be final
564. ucing potential problems with system noise Bass guitar electric guitar vocals and drums are often compressed during recording Avoid compression on instruments like acoustic piano in which the initial attack is critical in conveying the instrument s character O Equalization During initial recording equalization is normally only used as a compensation tool You might need to compensate for irregularities in the response of a micro phone or other piece of equipment in the recording chain or perhaps beef up the response of a guitar pickup All mix related equalization should be left until the mixdown stage when you can hear how response changes affect the overall sound O Effects As a rule don t apply any ambience type effects reverb delay etc during initial recording Ambience added at this stage in the game can t be removed later and will almost certainly get in the way of the overall sound You ll have much more flexibility and control if you save ambience processing until mixdown Of course there are exceptions but those are creative decisions you ll have to make on your own Other effects such as modulation and distortion are often applied during record ing but only when they function as an inherent part of the instrument s sound distortion on electric guitar or rotary speaker on an organ for example AWURE Tutorial 7 Tutorial Load the Demo Song Load the Demo Song Before you can work on the d
565. und Compressor for sampled sounds to boost them to be as powerful and clear as the acoustic sounds This program is for percussion sounds A variation on program 023 intended for sampled bass drum sounds A variation on program 023 intended for sampled snare drum sounds A variation on program 023 intended for sampled sounds for loops Compressor suited for a solo vocal source A variation on program 027 No 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 Name Chorus Compander H Compander S Click Erase Announcer Easy Gate BGM Ducking Limiter1 CMP CPH CPS EXP CPH GAT DUK CMP Compressor CompanderH CompanderS CompanderH CompanderS Threshold dB Appendix Description A variation on program 027 Ratio 1 intended for chorus vocals Attack ms Outgain dB Knee Release ms Threshold dB Ratio 1 Attack ms Outgain dB Width dB 10 A template for the hard knee 35 compander program 1 0 0 6 Release ms Threshold dB A template for the soft knee Ratio 1 compander program Attack ms Outgain dB Width dB Release ms Threshold dB Expander to remove click track Ratio 1 sounds that may bleed out of the monitor headphones the musicians Attack ms are using Outgain dB Knee
566. ure data tempo data items can be input in the METER area TEMPO area INS button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key new time signature tempo data will be inserted after the currently selected time signature tempo data DEL button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the currently selected time signature tempo data will be deleted A It is not possible to delete the time signature tempo data of step number 1 E Additional functions in the Tempo Map page In the Tempo Map page pressing the SHIFT key will assign the following functions to the F1 F3 keys K i x Cet Lee Les J F1 NEW key This key inputs additional time signature data or tempo data This is the same function as the NEW button F2 INS key This key inserts time signature data or tempo data This is the same function as the INS button F3 DEL key This key deletes time signature data or tempo data This is the same function as the DEL button 6 Awuus Reference Guide SONG screen Shut Down page Shut down the AW4416 Function Shut down the AW4416 so that the power can be turned off SONG poese Key operation SHUT DOWNI 00 00 00 100 J i20 0 47 4 SHUT DOWN CURRENT SONG STATUS e SONG key gt F5 Shut Down key e Repeatedly press the SONG key until the screen shown at the right app
567. used a combination of fader channel ON OFF and pan automation Please refer to the AW4416 operation guide for details on how to record and edit automation In this section we ll simply describe the changes we made and why we thought they were necessary We suggest you enable our automix and watch the faders and channel ON keys as the song plays To enable the automix 1 Press the AUTOMATION AUTOMIX key and if necessary the F1 function key to select the Main page 2 Move the cursor to the AUTOMIX parameter and press ENTER to select ENABLE 3 And to select the pre master automix press the F4 key to select the Event List page move the cursor to the SCENE LIB button on the display and press ENTER to highlight it then move the cursor down to the scene num ber in the event list it should be 06 initially and use the data dial to change the scene number to 05 4 Now go back to the VIEW display or any other display you want to watch while studying the automix 24 Awuus Tutorial Tutorial Mixdown O The Automix The general flow of the automix is described below in reference to absolute counter times Please note that the times given are not precise Use them as a guide O 00 00 00 The first thing you ll notice is that the channel ON keys for tracks 8 through 14 are all off We ll turn those tracks on just before the corresponding parts come in O 00 00 13 Channels 11
568. ut 00 00 00 000 SCENE E Initial Data The PRE FADER button POST FADER button setting will not affect the OMNI OUT level meter display E Additional functions in the Omni ST page In the Omni ST page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following function to the F1 key e F1 PEAK HOLD key This key sets defeats the Peak Hold function This is the same function as the PEAK HOLD key in the level meter counter section 78 AMULE Reference Guide HOME screen Option page Monitor the output level of option I O cards Function Monitor the output level of option I O cards inserted in slots 1 2 of the AW4416 Key operation e HOME key gt F5 Option key e Repeatedly press the HOME key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt HOME button gt Option tab Screen functions 1 Level meters These meters shows the output levels of the option I O cards inserted in slots 1 2 The type of signal assigned to each OUTPUT is indicated below each level meter This page is for display only the assignments cannot be changed here The signals assigned to each OUTPUT of an option I O card can be selected in the SETUP screen Patch OUT page 2 STEREO OUT LEVEL The position of the STEREO fader is shown in dB units STEREO ouT LeveL HOME jeeeee nen sorz Scene OO SE Puti 00 00 00 100 initial Data 1 Z 3 4 5 6 7 amp 48
569. uter application other than your sequencer may be using the port E Metronome cannot be heard e The metronome sound is normally sent only to the MONITOR OUT and headphones Settings can also be made in the SETUP screen Patch IN page to assign the metronome to an out put channel E Moving a fader does not change the level e Is the appropriate fader mode and mixing layer selected e The fader may be set to PRE FADE in AUX Mi The ON key and SEL key select the wrong chan nel e Is the appropriate mixing layer selected E Noise is present in the recorded signal e Does the word clock setting match for the AW4416 and the external device s e Is an unsynchronized signal being input e Is the dither setting appropriate e The oscillator may be functioning e If the speed of your internal hard disk is slow problems may occur during recording and play back Please use only the recommended internal hard disks Sound recorded via the digital input sounds grainy e Is the dither setting appropriate MPairing was specified but the signal is monaural e Is the odd numbered channel panned far left and the even numbered channel panned far right Pairing was specified but the signal phase does not match e Even when channels are paired the phase setting is not linked Signal is delayed e Is the channel delay set correctly E Automix cannot be recorded e Is automix set to ENABLE e In the AUTOMIX screen is t
570. utomix Here s how to recall an automix that was saved in memory 1 Press the AUTOMIX key gt F2 key WETHER WON e0 00 55 54 Wo MEMORY TITLE 64 No Data 63 Stase Mix 2 AUTOMIX TRANSPORT 3 ABORT STOP 2 Move the cursor to the list in the center of the screen and rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the automix number that you wish to recall 2 Test Mix 61 First Session 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button located at the left of the list and press the ENTER key A message will ask you to confirm that you wish to recall the automix number selected in step 2 CONFIRMATION Will Recall Automix 03 ARE YOU SURE 4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key The recall will be executed and the current automix will be replaced by the automix data that you recalled 230 Aw uns operation Guide 5 MIDI This chapter explains how you can use MIDI when operating the AW4416 What you can do using MIDI On the AW4416 MIDI can be used to perform the following operations O Change scenes by remote control By transmitting program changes from an external device to the AW4416 you can switch AW4416 scenes by remote control You can also cause program changes to be transmitted to an external device when you select scenes on the AW4416 O Synchronize with an external device via MTC MIDI Clock Synchronization messages such as MTC MIDI Ti
571. utomix is being recorded The operation cannot be executed since automix is being recorded or played Since sampling pad bank A is selected muting cannot be defeated for this pad Since sampling pad bank B is selected muting cannot be defeated for this pad DIGITAL STEREO IN cannot be assigned to the stereo bus cas cade Muting cannot be defeated since this would exceed the number of simultaneously playable tracks Playback is not possible in this page Recall is not possible since automix data has not been stored Redo re execution of an operation is not possible Since the AW4416 is set to be the MTC slave the external word clock cannot be selected as the word clock source Since the external word clock is selected as the word clock source the AW4416 cannot be set as the MTC slave It is not possible to specify a mark at an already specified position Undo cancellation of an operation is not possible OPTION I O slot 1 and slot 2 cannot be used simultaneously Since the AW4416 is in CD Play mode this operation is not possi ble MTC of a different frame type than the internal setting is being received Recording is prohibited for the signal being input from DIGITAL STEREO IN The signal being input from DIGITAL STEREO IN is not synchro nized to the word clock master Since the signal was interrupted cascading from DIGITAL STE REO IN to the stereo bus has been defeated Effect 1 has been released fro
572. utput from the DIGITAL STE REO OUT jack When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the set AFTER Playback will be repeated for the specified nudge time starting at the current location BEFORE ting will alternate between ENABLE DISABLE Playback will be repeated for the specified nudge time ending at the current location A Even if copy protect data is enabled it will ame i still be possible to make a digital recording Specify the playback length nudge time of the from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack on a Nudge function over a range of 25 800 milli DAT recorder or MD recorder However it seconds Default 100 milliseconds will not be possible to create a second gener A ation digital copy For details on using the Nudge function refer to Operation Guide Chapter 6 Transport locate operations CD DAT DIGITAL REC This setting specifies whether digital recording from an audio CD or DAT tape via a CD RW drive or the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack will be allowed ENABLE or not DISABLE When you move the cursor to the DISABLE button and press the ENTER key the following two page warning will be displayed If you select the YES button in the second page the button display will change to ENABLE WARNING 172 The Yamaha Professional Audio Workstation is designed to be used Professionally and responsibly by recording industry Professionals The reproduct ion distribu
573. uttons will appear Cra Lest These buttons have the following functions PAD Select the pad track from which you wish to erase events START END Specify the beginning START and end END of the range that you wish to erase from the pad track specified by PAD EXECUTE Execute the erase command 3 PAD This column shows the pad and pad number A1 A8 B 1 B8 4 NAME pad name This column shows the name of each pad Pads to which nothing has been assigned will be dis played as NO ASN vip When you assign a sample to a pad it will automatically be given a default name of Smpltr To edit the name use the SAMP PAD screen PAD Edit page gt P 86 R recording buttons These buttons enable recording for each pad When you move the cursor to a button and press the ENTER key the O display will change to and your performance on the pad can be recorded as events 6 M mute buttons These are mute switches for each pad When you move the cursor to a button and press the ENTER key the O display will change to and that pad track will no longer be played back A If bank A B is selected by the BANK pad pads 1 8 of bank B A will be forcibly muted To cancel muting press the BANK switch to change banks Pad track view The timing at which trigger events are played can be recorded separately for each pad on these tracks The bar graphs indicate the time f
574. ve the cursor to the TITLE EDIT button and press the ENTER key to access the TITLE EDIT popup window where you can input a name For details on inputting characters refer to Opera tion Guide P 60 A Library numbers 1 40 are recall only preset memories and their names cannot be changed Numbers in which no EQ program has been stored are displayed as No Data and their title cannot be changed RECALL button Recall the currently selected EQ program from the list STRINS ui 000 1 01 0000 _ SEL CH CURRENT Ea CURVE 668 Percussion 687 Hish Hat 666 Cymbal m 662 Bass Drum 2 661 Bass Drum 1 If you attempt to recall a number in which no data has been stored a message of ERROR NO DATA TO RECALL will appear and the recall will not occur 6 STORE button Store the current EQ settings A e Library numbers 1 40 are recall only preset memories and cannot be stored You can store only in library numbers 41 128 e When you store the EQ program that was previously stored in that number will be erased Xe LIBRARY No library number This shows the library number 1 128 LIBRARY TITLE This shows the names assigned to each library number ROM A write protect symbol is displayed for recall only programs library numbers 1 40 56 Awvuns Reference Guide EQ ATT GRP screen Selected program The EQ program selected for store recall is
575. vents i e the mix will be updated before playback begins To stop automix playback move the cursor to the on screen STOP but ton and press the ENTER key or press the top panel STOP key Even if automix is not stopped manually in this way it will stop automatically after all of the recorded automix events have been played Overwriting events New data can be overwritten added or rewritten onto a previously recorded automix either on a different channel or different mix element on the same chan nel For example after recording fader operations for monitor channel 1 you can then record fader operations for monitor channel 2 or record pan operations on the same channel The following explanation shows pan or EQ operations can be overwritten onto an automix that already contains previously recorded opera tions of the monitor channel faders A You can use the same procedure to overwrite rewrite the previously recorded events of a previously recorded channel In this case the previously recorded content will be erased when you begin overwrite recording Press the HOME key of the FADER MODE section and the MONI key of the MIXING LAYER section Locate the song to a point slightly before the location where you wish to begin overwriting 3 Press the AUTOMIX key gt F1 key AUTOMIX mms ee Moniie l 00 00 31 533 TEMPLATE AUTOMIX MAIN ae C3 CURRENT s 13k al l 491k 95 UNDO 8k jf 4
576. will appear in the display 2 Move the cursor to the SOURCE area in the lower left of the display and use the DATA JOG dial to select the ID number of the SCSI device on which the backup data is saved 3 Press the ENTER key The FILE RESTORE in the upper part of the display will show the song data that was backed up to the selected SCSI device 248 awun operation Guide Chapterl 6 Backing up and restoring songs 4 Move the cursor to the FILE RESTORE area in the upper part of the dis play and use the DATA JOG dial to select the song s that you wish to restore then press the ENTER key FILE 9 JMM S0NG 1 Pe ec RESTORE 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 47 4 FILE RESTORE VED AT SIZE ALL ENABLE ALL DISABLE DESTINATION CURRENT DRIVE INT IDE The button in the RESTORE SONG area will change from DISABLE to ENABLE indicating that the corresponding song has been selected for restore The O symbol at the left edge of the list will change to for songs that are selected for restore A You can select multiple songs for restoring MY SONG 2 66 67 83 19 63 85 9MNB 16 44 1 ALL ENABLE ALL DISABLE If you wish to restore all songs move the cursor to the ALL ENABLE button in the center of the display and press the ENTER key Conversely if you wish to exclude all songs from the restore operation move the cursor to the ALL DISABLE button and press the ENTER key 5 Move the cur
577. will light indicating that the In point has been set 2 At the location where you wish to punch out hold down the SET key and press the OUT key The OUT key will light indicating that the Out point has been set A Be aware that auto punch in out will not occur if the O ut point is earlier than the In point vip The auto punch in out points in out points can be precisely adjusted in millisec onds or in sub frame units For details refer to page 123 O Set the pre roll post roll times When executing auto punch in out you can specify intervals of playback before the punch in and after the punch out The playback before punch in is called the pre roll time and the playback after punch out is called the post roll time With the factory settings these are set to five seconds but you can change this as desired The beginning of the pre roll is called the pre roll point and the end of the post roll is called the post roll point Pre roll Auto punch in Auto punch out Post roll point point point point Pre roll time Post roll time ig gt i Ig st 130 Awuuns operation Guide Chapter7 Punch in out 1 Press the UTILITY key gt F3 key UTILITY 99 2 HEH SONG __ erene pa EE HONI 00 00 00 907 Initial Data PREFERENCES CO DAT DIGITAL REC POISITAL OUT COPYRIGHT Pre roll post roll time DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT settings E 2 Move the cursor to the pr
578. will zoom in horizontally three stages F3 X ZOOM OUT key Each time you press the SHIFT key F3 X ZOOM OUT key the track view O will zoom out horizontally three stages Kp For the procedure of assigning a region to a pad refer to Operation Guide Chapter 12 Sampling pads AVVULNG Reference Guide 81 SAMP PAD SAMP PAD screen CD Import page Assign CD DA to a sampling pad Function Import CD DA CD audio audio data from an audio CD mixed mode CD ROM inserted in an internal or external CD RW drive and assign it to a sampling pad Key operation e Sampling pad section EDIT pad gt F2 CD Import key e Repeatedly press the EDIT key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt SAMP PAD EDIT button gt CD Import tab Screen functions 1 DRIVE Move the cursor to this area and rotate the DATA JOG dial to select the internal or exter nal CD RW drive ASSIGN TO Select the pad to which you wish to assign CD DA data Pads to which no sample has been assigned will be displayed as NO ASN 3 TRACK TOTAL This is the track list of the audio CD mixed mode CD ROM inserted in the CD RW drive Move the cursor to this list and rotate the DATA JOG dial to select a track The value at the right shows the total time of that track 4 EXTRACT POINT Select the area of the track specified in that will be assigned to
579. without storing move the cursor to the CAN CEL button and press the EN TER key g Recalling a patch program Here s how to recall a patch program that you saved in the patch library 1 Press the SETUP key gt F3 Patch Lib key to access the SETUP screen Patch Lib page 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the patch program that you wish to recall 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key A popup window will ask you to confirm the Recall operation CONFIRMATION Will Recall PATCH Lib 00 ARE YOU SURE Yip You can also recall the patch program directly bypassing the confirmation popup window To do so turn off the RECALL CONFIRMATION setting in the UTILITY screen Prefer 1 page UTILITY key gt F2 key 4 To execute the Recall move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key Xe If you decide to cancel without recalling move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key AVVUUIG Operation Guide 139 Chapter8 Patching Patching input output jacks to an insert I O point You can patch various input output jacks to the insert I O point of a channel This patching method allows you to apply an external effect to a monitor channel dur ing mixdown 1 Use the MIXING LAYER section keys and the SEL keys to select the channel whose insert I O point you wish to patch to input output jacks 2 Press the VIEW key gt F1 key
580. xecuted EDIT screen V TR Edit page Edit virtual tracks Function Edit the virtual tracks 1 8 included in the specified track Key operation e EDIT key gt F2 V TR Edit key e Repeatedly press the RECORDER EDIT key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation M button gt RECORDER EDIT button gt V TR Edit tab Screen functions TRACK menu 2 PART menu 3 REGION menu These are the same as the TR Edit page TRACK menu PART menu and REGION menu with the difference that the editing will apply to vir tual tracks 1 8 of the same track For details refer to the explanation that begins on page 99 For the commands that can be selected in each menu and their parameters refer to page 99 and following A In the V TR Edit page it is not possible to select all tracks for editing 4 Track number Move the cursor to this area and use the DATA JOG dial to select the track number that con tains the virtual track you wish to edit V virtual track number This column shows the virtual track numbers 1 8 The virtual track currently used by the track is indicated by a C Current symbol at the left of this column 6 NAME This column shows the names of virtual tracks 1 8 Virtual tracks that have already been recorded are assigned a default name of V Tr x y x track number 1 16 y virtual track num ber 1 8 Virtual tracks on which nothing has
581. ximum of 16 tracks to be recorded simultaneously However the number of tracks that can be played back simultaneously is limited by the number of tracks that are being recorded simultaneously Be aware that tracks will automatically be muted depending on the number of simultaneously recorded tracks The tables below show the numbers of tracks that can be recorded simultaneously and played back simultaneously and the number of tracks that will be muted in each case e 16 bit song Simultaneously Simultaneously Automatically muted recordable tracks playable tracks tracks ee a a a 24 bit song recordable tracks playable tracks tracks 0 16 0 1 2 14 3 4 12 5 8 8 16 0 For example if you simultaneously record nine or more tracks in a 16 bit song no tracks can be played back simultaneously meaning that the moment you put the ninth track in record ready mode the instant you turn on the ninth REC TRACK SELECT key tracks 1 16 will all be muted automatically A ULB Operation Guide 1 47 Chapter9 Track and virtual track operations To defeat muting of tracks 1 16 you must first reduce the number of record ready tracks to eight tracks or fewer and then use the TRACK screen TR View page TRACK key gt F1 key to manually un mute each track For details refer to Reference Guide TRACK screen By pressing the ALL SAFE button in the level meter counter section you can cancel record r
582. y AULAS Operation Guide 93 Chapter5 Recording on the AW4416 Let s overdub 1 2 Press the Locate section RTZ key To begin recording hold down the Transport section REC key and press the PLAY gt key The REC key and PLAY key will light and the red REC READY indicator of track 3 will change from blinking to lit Play the bass while listening to the rhythm machine drum performance recorded on tracks 1 2 If you wish to adjust the volume at which you are monitoring the rhythm machine drums and bass press the MIXING LAYER section MONI key and adjust faders 1 3 When you are finished playing press the STOP W key To listen to the recorded performance press the Locate section RTZ key and then press the Transport section PLAY gt key If you are satisfied with the recorded performance press REC TRACK SELECT key 3 to defeat record ready mode for track 3 If you wish to continue overdubbing more instrumental tracks simply use the same procedure Go ahead and record the remaining instruments Kpl If you wish to try the recording again press the UNDO key and repeat steps 1 4 It is also possible to re record from the middle of the song If you will be re record ing repeatedly from the same location it is convenient to assign a marker gt P 121 to that location so that you can move rapidly to it or to use the auto punch in out function P 130 94 Awvuns
583. y and selected as the current song O Formatting an external hard disk 3 Select the SCSI ID of the external hard disk and press the ENTER key A popup window will appear allowing you to select the type of file system and the formatting method FORMAT aera Leora al TYPE AVVUUIG Operation Guide 251 Chapter16 Backing up and restoring songs 4 Move the cursor to either the QUICK or the NORMAL button and press the ENTER key The formatting method will depend on the button you select O QUICK quick format Use this when you wish to quickly erase data from a previously formatted hard disk O NORMAL normal format Use this when formatting a newly purchased hard disk Depending on the capac ity of the hard disk this may require several minutes or several ten minutes After selecting one or the other button press the ENTER key and a popup win dow will appear asking you to confirm the Format operation 5 Move the cursor to the TYPE area and rotate the DATA JOG dial to select one of the following two types of file system that will be created during the formatting operation e ORIGINAL This is the native file system of the AW4416 Select this file system if you have selected TYPE2 as the backup format FAT TO nhie This is the file system used on PC type computers e g Windows 95 or Windows 98 machines Select this file system if you wish to exchange files with a PC
584. y button If you press a SEL key when this button is on only the events of that channel will be dis played DUPLICATE button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key a duplicate of the selected event will be created at the same loca tion Q DELETE button When you move the cursor to this button and press the ENTER key the selected event will be deleted vip For the procedure of duplicating or deleting an event refer to Operation Guide Chapter 14 Automix AWULHS Reference Guide 123 Scene Mem page Store or recall a scene Function Store the current settings of the AW4416 into scene memory or recall a scene that was stored in scene memory EHNE GS_ NEIL SONG E 00 00 0 000 preen Key operation e SCENE key gt F1 Scene Mem key A No Data o Uata e Repeatedly press the SCENE Onm a i key until the screen shown at the right appears Mouse operation a a gt SCEN button gt Scene 51 96 em ta fepscene MemE Fa Screen functions TITLE EDIT button Use this to edit the name library title of a scene stored in the library When you move the cursor Ao a a e in el eb has to the TITLE EDIT button and press the ENTER een store an attempt to recall It an error key the TITLE EDIT popup window will appear a ae Na ma ae ae allowing you to input the name You can input a wili De aispiayed and recall wili
585. y Meaning GEN General use LASER OPTICAL Optical laser device such as a CD player D D Conv D D converter or signal pro cessor D Broadcast Digital broadcast Instrument Instrument or sound mod ule AD Conv A D converter without copyright data A D Conv with c A D converter with copy right data Solid Memory Solid state memory device Experimental Experimental device Unknown COPY Unknown device This shows the copy permit prohibit status of the digital input signal Display OK Copying permitted Prohibit Xe Copying prohibited Digital input signals from the OPTION I O slots are displayed in units of two adjacent odd numbered gt even numbered channels channels 1 2 3 4 The buttons in the MONITOR SLOT area select whether slot 1 or 2 will be displayed 2 MONITOR SLOT These buttons select the OPTION IO slot that will be monitored in the OPTION INPUTS area SET UP screen E Additional functions in the Moni tor page In the Monitor page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following function to the F1 key f e F1 CHANGE TAB key Switch between the two types of tab display AVVULNG Reference Guide 23 SET UP screen Dither Out page Specify dithering and word length of the digital outputs Function Turn dithering on off and specify the word length of the output sig
586. y before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV SYM 0 100 a as reverb balance 0 symphonic reverb MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds AXVVULNG Reference Guide Appendix 19 Appendix REV gt PAN Reverb and auto pan effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spreed DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DIR I Panning direction WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform REV BAL 0 100 e panned reverb balance 0 panned reverb 100 MIX BAL 0 100 Mix balance of the effects and dry sounds 1 L lt gt R L gt R L lt R Turn L Turn R
587. y page will appear in the display AURB JEFF 2 99999 NEW SONG ___ scene BB MOHI T 00 00 00 000 Initial Data EFFECT LIBRARY CURRENT EFFECT NAME Reverb Hall i EFFECT TYPE REVERB HALL 05 Early Ref 664 Reverb Plate os a Stage 2 Move the cursor to the list at the bottom of the display and use the DATA JOG dial to select the effect program that you wish to recall 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the ENTER key The selected program will be recalled to effect 2 4 Press the F1 key The Eff Edit page will appear AURBFEFF2 99882 ve Sone one oo ronit 00 00 00 000 Initial Data _ i USED AS AUKE EFFECT EDIT pee __ THAME Reverb Hall i Hall all 44 E gt le EFFECT TYPE REVERE HALL a R he REW TIME IHI pey HI natio Lo PATI 3 25 36 Gms E 8 3 D j DIFF DENSITY E R Pa E R ers ECH ias sD HFF LFF GATE LUL ATTACH Thru E 6 T KHZ GI OFF GI dms DECAY MIX BAL om HOLDO 325ms 5 As necessary move the cursor to the MIX BAL knob and rotate the DATA JOG dial to adjust the balance between the wet processed and dry unprocessed sound Immediately after an effect program is recalled MIX BAL will be reset to 100 only wet sound 174 awun operation Guide 1 Song management This chapter explains song management operations such as saving load ing deleting or copying songs About songs On
588. y to switch this button on off regardless of the cursor loca tion Explanations of the addi tional functions assigned to the function keys F1 F5 in this page a E Additional functions in the EQ Procedure Att page The procedure for per forming a specific opera tion in this page In the EQ Att page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following additional functions to the F1 F2 and F5 keys a FLAT Bano FLAT ye Corr ATT TOAL t tf C9 CJ e F1 FLAT key Reset all bands to a boost cut amount of 0 0 dB off if HPF LPF is selected F2 BAND FLAT key Reset only the selected band to a boost cut amount of 0 0 dB off if HPF LPF is selected F5 COPY ATT TO ALL key Copy the attenuation setting of the selected channel to all channels However the stereo output channel is excepted the EQ type to H SHELF shelving and turning it all the way in the counter clockwise direction will switch the EQ type to LPF low pass filter Range 10 0 10 HPF L SHELF LOW band only LPF H SHELF HIGH band only EQ ATT GRP screen Copying the attenuation setting to all channels Procedure 1 Access the EQ Att page for the copy source channel and move the cursor to the ATT knob 2 Press the SHIFT key F5 key A CONFIRMATION popup window will appear asking you to confirm the copy A If the cursor is at a location other than the ATT knob a message o
589. y you should set the read and write speeds to the fastest speeds supported by your CD RW drive CD RW MEDIA ERASE Use the following two buttons to specify how the CD RW media will be erased e SIMPLE Only the TOC Table Of Con tents of the CD RW media will be erased e PERFECT All data on the CD RW media will be erased For details on erasing CD RW media refer to Operation Guide Chapter 16 Backing up and restoring songs A When you execute the Erase operation all data on the CD RW media will be lost for ever Please use caution E Additional functions in the Disk Util page In the Disk Util page you can press the SHIFT key to assign the following functions to the F1 F2 keys SC co LOAD co UNLOAD e F1 CD LOAD key Close the open tray of the CD RW drive e F2 CD UNLOAD key Eject the tray of the CD RW drive 32 AMUSE Reference Guide UTILITY screen Oscillator page Using the test tone oscillator Function Select the waveform of the test tone oscillator built into the AW4416 and send it to the UTILITY 199999 _NEH soils ST pee desired bus INPUT 1 00 00 00 00 Initial Data Key operation e UTILITY key gt F1 Oscillator key e Repeatedly press the UTILITY key until the screen shown at the pim SNT BEEF ORE O right appears sine toon Mouse operation es M button gt UTIL button gt Oscil pus as OE
590. ze command move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER key To cancel without executing move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the ENTER key Playing CD R RW media the CD Play function By using the AW4416 s CD Play function CD R RW media that contains audio data can be played back from the internal CD RW drive or from an external CD RW drive connected to the SCSI connector 1 Press the CD PLAY key The CD PLAY screen will appear in the display CD PLAY JELES co PLAY 00 00 00 000 J 120 0 4 4 i 2 Use the DATA JOG dial to select the SCSI ID of the CD RW drive and press the ENTER key 3 Hold down the SHIFT key and press the F2 key CD UNLOAD The tray of the CD RW drive will open 4 Place the CD R RW media on which data was written into the drive Then hold down the SHIFT key and press the F1 key CD LOAD 264 awun operation Guide Chapter1 7 Mastering Move the cursor to the CD PLAY MODE button and press the ENTER key The CD PLAY MODE button will change from OFF to ON and track information for the CD R RW media in the drive will be displayed CD PLAY jBLYES ___ co PLAY 00 00 00 000 J i20 0 4 4 TRACK TIME O01 00 00 00 CO PLAY MODE J san CO PLAY MODE 90 00 55 on 00 02 07 E 66 01 53 B 86 66 27 Currently selected track number TRACK column and elapsed time TIME column Track numbers

Yamaha AW4416 Stereo System User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents